



A 



Class __ 

Book_ 

Copyright N?.._ 

COF^UGHT DEPOSm 
















I * 


4 




t 






; •«. 


'■ -V'V- 

- 

A^"i 



Bible Lessons 


Book Four 



Bible Lessons 


Book One 
Book Two 

Book Three 

Book Four 





Bible Lessons 


Book Four 


The Acts of the Apostles 

and 

Bible Doctrines 


" From a child thou hast known the Holy Scriptures, which are able to make thee 
wise unto salvation through faith which is in Christ Jesus.” 





MRS. ALMA E.'^ McKIBBIN 

It 


' ft t 



1912 

Pacific Press Publishing Association 

Mountain View, California 

Calgary, Alberta, Canada Kansas City, Mo. 


Portland, Oregon 


35 (.OS' 

:s^'^ 


PACIFIC 

Copyright, 1912, by 

PRESS PUBLISHING ASSOCIATION 


All Rights Reserved 





Preface 

The themes for study in this fourth book of Bible lessons 
are essentially missionary subjects, and should inspire in teachers 
and pupils a desire to fulfill the great commission, "‘Go ye into all 
the world, and preach the gospel to every creature/' 

The Acts of the Apostles is, as some one has said, the story of 
the acts of the Spirit in the apostolic church. The gospel was 
preached to “every creature under heaven" in the days of the 
apostles. They accomplished this apparently impossible task 
because upon them had fallen the “early rain." 

We live in the time when the gospel is again to be preached 
“in all the world for a witness." This can be done only through 
the power given by the “latter rain." May all who study these 
lessons obtain an understanding of the office work of the Spirit, 
and have an earnest desire to be baptized with the Holy Ghost, 
that in these last days they may witness for God as did the 
apostles of old. 

The lessons in Part I furnish inspiration; those in Part II, 
subject matter for witnessing. 

The purpose in the lessons on the epistles is to give historical 
links in the life of Paul, to show his purpose in writing the 
different letters, and incidentally to notice the themes presented. 
They are not designed to be exhaustive in any sense, or even 
comprehensive. The teachers should not attempt anything more 
than to impress the salient facts. If time is limited, some of 
these lessons may be omitted. 

With the study and teaching of the lessons in Acts there 
should be an intelligent and systematic use of maps. J. H. 
Hurlbut's “Bible Atlas," published by Rand, McNally Co., Chi¬ 
cago, is a very helpful reference work in the geography and 
history of the Bible. It will be a valuable aid to teachers and 
pupils, not only in these lessons, but in all the map work required 
in the books of this series. 

vii 


viii 


The teachers will also find valuable information in ‘The Life 
of Paul,” by Conybeare and Howson; but for assistance in the 
spiritual significance and principles of the book of Acts, no 
other work that could be suggested equals “The Acts of the 
Apostles,” by Mrs. E. G. White, from which most of the notes 
are taken. 

Every principle of truth is a part of the plan of salvation, 
either indirectly as expressing God’s way of dealing with all 
His creatures, or directly as a part of His work in the redemp¬ 
tion of sinners. The “Plan of Salvation,” though not in story 
form, is a story. To be most effective, a story must be related 
as it occurred in point of time. It must be told chronologically. 
For this reason the subjects in Part II have been arranged in 
the order in which events have occurred or will occur in the 
plan God has made to save sinners. 

It is, in other words, the history of the great controversy 
between Christ and Satan. It will be helpful for the teacher to 
bear this in mind, and in each recitation to impress the fact that 
the lesson studied is an advance step in time and in the ful¬ 
fillment of the great scheme devised in eternity for bringing 
man back to his lost estate. This arrangement of subjects not 
only aids the memory by the law of association, but it also 
deepens the interest in the outcome, and enlists the sympathies 
for God. 

In Part II no memory verses are given, because all the texts, 
or at least the most important ones, should be committed to 
memory. This may seem a great task. It is hoped that it may 
be a pleasure. The teacher can do much to make it such by 
leading in concert recitation of texts, and by ever manifesting 
a more than ordinary interest in memory work,— a matter 
much neglected in the modern school. 

In closing this series of Bible lessons, I wish to express my 
appreciation of the kind words of encouragement from my fellow 
teachers. And especially would I acknowledge the helpful sug¬ 
gestions and assistance of my friend Miss Sarah E. Peck. 


ix 


But most deeply do I feel the debt of gratitude I owe my 
heavenly Father, who has preserved my life, and through ten 
long years has enabled me, though ofttimes “in much weakness,” 
still to persevere till my task is finished. To Him be all the 
glory both now and evermore. 

Alma E. McKibbin. 

September 12, 1912. 





r .. _, _Efx 5 ,'. 


- ^ t-.T *«'• 

r- -?* 


‘‘■.' 


V JF 



y Jv 

'^. 










' 1 • I i ^ 


«..-. .jiisns 

5? •\' ■," ' p 



■r 

' ^ - 
T crlV^A'* -' ’ ’* * i^-- A-». ' 

fc > ;• >1 jw 


r ■ ‘ 


■ .0 ':,kS 

','; 'i^.'.'^^'- ■ ■ -i^' ■:- ! ■ ^ ■ 

' — •' fc' y A r > 







41 •■ . •■ •' <•*,', *'J *1 • *• ''' 

i 55 : ^>-.*-i^ 



O',' 'W- ' •w' ''i'‘* *'i 44^' i 

)■'/ '* ’/•:.. f;'V.*-v’iS: 


‘.Vn 







!»f rj£^ * '-.liL*'! . I . 


.♦fc » 




T I 



Contents 


PART I —THE ACTS OP THE APOSTLES 


CHAPTER ONE —The Church at Jerusalem 


LESSON 

I. 

The Ascension of Christ (A. D. 31) . .. . 

... Acts 

1:1-12 _ 

PAGE 

.... 17 

II. 

The Choosing of Matthias . 


1:13-26 ... 

.... 21 

III. 

IV. 

V. 

The Day of Pentecost. 

.. Acts 

2:1-13 _ 

.... 23 

Peter’s Sermon... 

.. Acts 

2:14-36 ... 

. .. . 27 

Christian Fellowship . 

. . Acts 

2:37-47 ... 

.... 29 

VI. 

The Healing of the Lame Man . 


3:1-11 _ 

.... 31 

VII. 

The Power of Jesus’ Name. 

.. Acts 

3:12-26 ... 

.... 34 

VIII. 

The Trial of Peter and John . 


4:1-22 _ 

.... 36 

IX. 

Brotherly Love. 


4:23-37 ... 

. ... 38 

X. 

The Sin op Ananias and Sapphira.. 


5:1-16 .... 

.... 40 

XI. 

The Second Trial of Peter and John . , 

.. .Acts 

5:17-42 ... 

.... 41 

XII. 

The Seven Deacons . 


6 . 

.... 44 


CHAPTER TWO — The Great Persecution 

XIII. Stephen’s Defense . Acts 7:1-29 . 47 

XIV. Stephen’s Defense (Continued) . Acts 7:30-50 . 48 

XV. Stephen ’s Death (A. D. 34) .Acts 7:51-60; 8:1-4 . 50 

XVI. Simon the Sorcerer. Acts 8:5-25 . 53 

XVII. Philip and the Ethiopian . Acts 8:26-40 . 55 

CHAPTER THREE — Saul 

XVIII. The Conversion of Saul (A. D. 34) .Acts 9:1-9 . 58 

XIX. The Baptism of Saul. Acts 9:10-22 . 61 

XX. Saul’s Escapes. Acts 9:23-31 . 64 

CHAPTER FOUR— Peter 

XXI. Peter at Lydda and .Ioppa. Acts 9:32-43 . 68 

XXII. Cornelius of Caesarea, and Peter’s Vision Acts 10:1-18 . 71 

XXIII. Cornelius Baptized . Acts 10:19-48 . 74 


XI 












































Xll 


LESSON 

XXIV. 

Peter ^s Reply to His 

Brethren .... 


11:1-18 .... 

PAGE 

, . . . 76 

XXV. 

Spread of the Gospel . 



11:19-30 ... 

. ... 77 

XXVI. 

Peter Delivered from 

Prison. 


12:1-23 .... 

,... 80 


Summary of the First Period . 

Review . 



,... 84 

... 87 


CHAPTER FIVE — The First Missionary Journey 


XXVII. 

XXVIIL 

XXIX. 

XXX. 

XXXI. 


Paul and Barnabas Sent on a Mission . .. Acts 12:24,25; 13:1-13 93 

Paul’s Sermon at Antioch .Acts 13:14-37 95 

Paul’s Sermon at Antioch (Continued) . .Acts 13:38-52 . 97 

Paul and Barnabas at Iconium and Lystra Acts 14:1-18 . 98 

Paul and Barnabas Return to Antioch . . .Acts 14:19-28 . 100 


CHAPTER SIX — The First Council of the Christian Church 

XXXII. The Council AT Jerusalem (A. D. 51) ....Acts 15:1-11 . 104 

XXXIII. The Decision of the Council. Acts 15:12-29 . 107 


CHAPTER SEVEN — The Second Missionary Journey 


XXXIV. 

XXXV. 

XXXVI. 

XXXVII. 

XXXVIII. 

XXXIX. 

XL. 

XLI. 

XLII. 


From Antioch to Philippi . Acts 15:30-41 ; 16:1-12 111 

Paul and Silas at Philippi. Acts 16:13-40 . 115 

At Thessalonica and Berea. Acts 17:1-15 . 118 

Paul AT Athens. Acts 17:16-34 . 121 

Paul at Corinth. Acts 18:1-17 . 125 

Paul’s First Letter to the Thessalonians 1 Thessalonians 1-3 . . 128 
Paul’s First Letter to the Corinthians 

(Continued) . 1 Thessalonians 4; 5. 129 

Paul’s Second Letter to the Thessalo¬ 
nians . 2 Thessalonians 1-3 .. 132 

Paul Returns to Antioch. Acts 18:18-22 . 133 


CHAPTER EIGHT — The Third Missionary Journey 
XLIII. Paul in Galatia and Phrygia; Apollos at 



Ephesus . 


18:23-28 ... 

... 136 

XLIV. 

Paul at Ephesus. 


19:1-20 . ... 

... 138 

XLV. 

Diana of the Ephesians. 


19:21-41 ... 

... 142 


XLVI. Paul’s First Letter to the Corinthians 1 Corinthians 1-6 .... 145 
XLVII. Paul’s First Letter to the Corinthians 

(Continued) . 1 Corinthians 8-11 ... 149 






































xiii 


PAGE 


Lesson 

XLVIII. Paul’s First Letter to the Corinthians 

(Continued) .1 Corinthians 12; 14. 

XLIX. Paul’s First Letter to the Corinthians 

(Continued) .1 Corinthians 13; 15. 

L. Paul IN Greece AND Macedonia .Acts 20:1-3 . 

LI. Paul’s Second Letter to the Corinthians 2 Corinthians . 

LII. Paul’s Letter to the Galatians .Galatians . 

LIII. Paul’s Letter to the Romans. Romans 1-6 . 

LTV. Paul’s Letter to the Romans (Continued) Romans 7-11 . 

LV. Paul’s Letter to the Romans (Continued) Romans 12-16. 

LVI. I’aul Starts for Jerusalem . Acts 20:4-16 . 

LVII. The Meeting at Miletus .Acts 20:17-38 . 

LVIIT. Paul Arrives AT Jerusalem .Acts 21:1-17 . 

LIX. Paul Performs the Ceremony of Purifica¬ 
tion ..Acts 21:18-26 . 

Summary of the Second Period . 

Review . 


CHAPTER NINE —Paul a Prisoner 


LX. Paul Arrested .Acts 21:27-40 

LXI. Paul’s Speech on the Stairs .Acts 22 .. 

LXII. Paul Before the Sanhedrin .Acts 23:1-15 . 

LXIII. Paul Taken to Caesarea .Acts 23:16-35 

LXIV. Paul Before Felix .Acts 24 . 

LXV. Paul Before Festus .Acts 25:1-12 ., 

LXVI. Paul Before Agrippa .Acts 25:13-27 . 

LXVII. Paul’s Defense Before Agrippa .Acts 26 . 

LXVIII. Paul’s Journey from Caesarea to Crete Acts 27:1-13 . 

LXIX. The Great Storm ..Acts 27:14-29 

LXX. The Shipwreck .Acts 27:30-44 

LXXI. From Melita to Rome .Acts 28:1-16 . 

LXXII. Paul at Rome .Acts 28:17-31 

LXXIII. Paul’s Letter to the Ephesians .Ephesians . ... 

LXXIV. Paul’s Letter to the Colossians .Colossians .... 

LXXV. Paul’s Letter to Philemon .Philemon . 

LXXVI. Paul’s Letter to the Philippians .Philippians ... 

LXXVII. Paul’s First Letter to Timothy. 1 Timothy . ... 

LXXVIII. Paul’s Letter to Titus .Titus . 

LXXIX. Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy .2 Timothy 1; 2 


151 

154 

157 

159 

161 

164 

166 

169 

172 

175 

178 

181 

183 

185 

188 

190 

192 

193 

195 

198 

199 

201 

204 

206 

207 

210 

213 

217 

219 

222 

224 

226 

229 

231 






























































XlV 

LE$SO>f PAGl! 

LXXX. Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy (Con¬ 
tinued) .2 Timothy 3; 4. 234 

Summary of the Third Period . ... 239 

Keview . 240 

The Epistles of Paul. 242 

PART II — THE PLAN OP SALVATION 

LESSON PAGE 

LXXXI. The Word of God . 243 

LXXXII. The Father . 247 

LXXXIII. The Son . 2^3 

LXXXIV. The Holy Spirit . 257 

LXXXV. The Law of God . 261 

LXXXVI. The Law of God (Continued) . 264 

LXXXVII. Principles . 267 

LXXXVIIT. The Angels . 272 

LXXXIX. Lucifer (Satan) . 277 

XC. Creation. 282 

XCI. The Sabbath. 287 

XCII. The Fall of Man . 291 

XCIII. Kedemption . 296 

XCIV. Conversion . 300 

XCV. Faith and Works . 305 

XCVI. Prayer. 307 

XCVII. The Gift of Prophecy. 311 

XCVIII. The Nature of Man. 314 

XCIX. The Work of Evil Angels . 316 

C. Tithes and Offerings . 322 

Review . 326 

Cl. The Word Made Flesh . 328 

CII. The Death of Christ. 335 

CIII. The Church . 341 

CIV. The Ordinance of Baptism . 347 

CV. The Ordinances of the Lord’s House . 35I 

CVI. The Great Apostasy . 356 

evil. The Reformation . 363 

CVIII. The First Angel’s Message . 369 

CIX. The Second Angel’s Message.•. 374 

ex. The Third Angel’s Message . 382 





































5CV 

LESSON t>Aafi 

CXr. The Heavenly Sanctuary . 387 

CXII. The Judgment . 390 

CXIII. Light from the Sanctuary . 395 

CXIV. The Second Coming op Christ . 401 

CXV. The Signs of Christ’s Coming . 406 

CXVI. The Seven Last Plagues . 412 

CXVII. The First Resurrection . 417 

CXVIII. The Millennium . 423 

CXIX. The Second Resurrection . 426 

CXX. The New Earth . 430 

Review . 436 














Authorities Quoted in These Lessons 


^ ^ Acts of the Apostles ’ ’— A. A..White 

*■ Christian Temperance ’ ’— C. T.White 

‘ ‘ Christ’s Object Lessons ^ ’— C. O. L.White 

‘ ‘ Daniel and the Eevelation ’ ’— D. E.Smith 

‘ ‘ Desire of Ages ’ ’— D. A.White 

Education’’—Ed.White 

‘ ‘ Great Controversy ’ ’— G. C.White 

‘ ‘ Heralds of the Morning ’ ’— H. M.Tait 

‘ ‘ Ministry of Healing ”— M. H.White 

Mount of Blessing”—M, B.White 

‘ ‘ Patriarchs and Prophets ’ ’— P. P.Wliite 

‘ ‘ Sketches from the Life of Paul ’ ’— S, L. P.White 

* ‘ Spirit of Prophecy ’ ’— S. P.White 

^ ‘ Steps to Christ ”—^ S. C.White 

‘ ‘ Testimonies for the Church ’ ’— Test.White 

‘ ‘ Bible Dictionary ” .Smith 

‘‘Clarke’s Commentary” .Clarke 

‘‘Early Writings” .White 

‘‘His Glorious Appearing”... 

‘‘Life of Christ” .Geikie 

‘‘New Testament History” .Smith 

‘‘Questions and Answers” .Wilcox 

‘‘The Temple” .Edersheim 

‘‘Antiquities of the Jews” .Josephus 






































PART I 

The Acts of the Apostles 


CHAPTER ONE 
The Church at Jerusalem 


L THE ASCENSION OF CHRIST (A. D. 31) 

Study Acts 1: 1-12. 

1. Who wrote the Acts of the Apostles? 

2. What other book had he written ? Luke 1: 1-4. 

3. To whom are both books addressed? Luke 1: 3. 

4. How much of the life of Jesus was written in his first book? 

5. What did Jesus do through the Holy Ghost after His resur¬ 

rection ? 

6. What was His passion? 

7. How did the apostles know that Jesus was alive? 

8. What is an infallible proof? 

9. How long was Jesus on earth after His resurrection? 

10. Of what did He speak to His disciples? 

11. What did He command them? 

12. With what did John baptize? 

13. With what should they be baptized? When? 

14. What question did they ask Jesus? 

15. How did He answer them? 

16. What should they receive? When? 

17. Where should they be witnesses? 


2 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 


(17) 




18 


18. When He had spoken these words, what occurred? 

19. As the disciples gazed toward heaven, who appeared? 

20. What did the angels tell them? 

21. To what place did the disciples return? 

22. From what mount did Jesus ascend? 

23. How far is Mount Olivet from Jerusalem? 

Readings 

Luke 24: 36-53 
Mark 16: 14-19 
1 Tim. 3: 16 
Acts 10: 40-42 
John 6: 62; 20: 24-29 

Memory Verse 

Ye men of Galilee, why stand ye gazing up into heaven? this 
same Jesus, which is taken up from you into heaven, shall so 
come in like manner as ye have seen Him go into heaven. Acts 
1 : 11 . 

Notes 

1. The third Gospel and the Acts of the Apostles were writ¬ 
ten by Luke, whom Paul calls “the beloved physician.” “Lucas” 
is another form of the word “Luke,” and both are abbreviations 
of the word “Lucanus.” Luke is mentioned by name but three 
• times. Col. 4: 14; 2 Tim. 4: 11; Philemon 24. Tradition says that 
he was born at Antioch in Syria, and was taught the science of 
medicine. 

In relating the doings of Paul and his companions in their 
missionary journeys, the pronoun “they” is used until Paul left 
Troas for Macedonia on his second journey, when “they” is 
suddenly changed to “we.” Acts 16: 10. The reason for this 
is supposed to be that Luke joined Paul at this time and went 
with him to Philippi. 


Matt. 24: 30 
John 14: 1-3 
Zech. 14:4 
D. A., pp. 829-835 
A. A., Chaps. I-III 




19 



JERUSALEM 













20 


When Paul left Philippi, “they"’ again occurs until he re¬ 
turned to that place on his third journey, seven years later. 
Here '‘we'' and “us" are again used, showing that Luke joined 
Paul's party and accompanied him to Jerusalem. Acts 20: 
5; 21: 18. 

It is supposed that Luke spent the seven years at Philippi 
in the work of the gospel as a medical evangelist. We next 
find him with Paul on his journey to Rome, Acts 27: 1. He 
was one of those who was with Paul during his first im¬ 
prisonment. Col. 4: 14. 

When Paul was imprisoned the second time, he wrote to 
Timothy, “Only Luke is with me." Tradition says that after 
Paul's death, Luke preached the gospel in Dalmatia and Gallia, 
and was martyred between A. D. 75 and A. D. 100. 

2. “Theophilus" means “loved of God." From the manner 
in which Luke speaks of him, Luke 1:3, it is supposed that 
he held a position of honor and responsibility in the early 
Christian church. 

3. Though so long in the school of Christ under His per¬ 
sonal instruction, the disciples were not ready even to begin 
their work until they received the Holy Spirit. 

4. “Men in responsible positions, who are proclaiming the 
truth of God in the name of Jesus without the spiritual energy 
given by the quickening power of God, are doing an unreal 
work, and can not be certain whether success or defeat will 
attend their labors."— S, P., Vol. S, pp. 2U2, 2US. 

5. The disciples were first to preach the gospel at home, in 
the very places where Jesus had labored, and to the people for 
whom He had labored. All missionary labor should begin at 
home, but should not end there. The disciples were to widen 
the circle of their work until the gospel should be preached in 
the “uttermost part of the earth." 

6. “As the place of His ascension, Jesus chose the spot so 
often hallowed by His presence while He dwelt among men. . . . 


21 


From this mountain He was to ascend to heaven. Upon its 
summit His feet will rest when He shall come again. 

7. “Not as a man of sorrows, but as a glorious and tri¬ 
umphant king He will stand upon Olivet, while Hebrew halle¬ 
lujahs mingle with gentile hosannas, and the voices of the re¬ 
deemed as a mighty host shall swell the acclamation, ‘Crown 
Him Lord of all.’ . . . 

8. “Christ had ascended to heaven in the form of humanity. 
The disciples had beheld the cloud receive Him. The same 
Jesus who had walked and talked and prayed with them; who 
had broken bread with them; who had been with them in their 
boats on the lake; and who had that very day toiled with them 
up the ascent of Olivet,— the same Jesus had now gone to 
share His Father’s throne. 

9. “And the angels had assured them that the very One 
whom they had seen go up into heaven, would come again even 
as He had ascended. . . . Well might the disciples rejoice in 
the hope of their Lord’s return.”— D. A., pp. 829, 830, 832. 


IL THE CHOOSING OF MATTHIAS 
Study Acts 1: 13-26. 

1. Name the apostles who lived together in an upper room. 

2. How did they spend the time? 

3. Who joined with them in prayer? 

4. How many disciples were there? 

5. Who addressed them? On what subject? 

6. What did Peter say must be fulfilled? 

7. With whom had Judas been numbered? 

8. How did Judas die? Matt. 27: 5. 

9. How many knew the manner of his death? 



22 


10. What was the field called? 

11. What is written in the Psalms concerning his office? 

12. From what persons must one be chosen to take his place? 

Why? 

13. What two persons were selected? 

14. How did the disciples choose between these two? 

15. Upon whom did the lot fall? 


Readings 


Zech. 11: 12, 13 
D. A., p. 722 


Ps. 41: 9; 69:25; 109: 8 
Matt. 27: 3-10. 


Outline of Acts 1 

1. Introduction to book. 

2. Promise of Holy Spirit. 

3. Appointment of disciples as witnesses. 

4. Ascension of Christ; 

5. Promise made by angels. 

6. Peter’s speech concerning Judas. 

7. The choosing of Matthias. 

Memory Verse 

It is written in the book of Psalms, Let his habitation be deso¬ 
late, and let no man dwell therein: and his bishopric let another 
take. Acts 1:20. 


Notes 


1. The disciples, while waiting for the promise of the Holy 
Spirit, spent the time in prayer. The brothers of Jesus were 
now with them. During His lifetime they had been unbelieving; 
but the events of His death and resurrection had convinced them 
that Jesus was the Messiah. 

2. Peter called the attention of the disciples to the prophecy 
which showed that the office left vacant by the death of Judas 
should be filled. He also specified the qualifications of the one 
who should take the place of Judas. 


23 


3. ^‘Both men who had been selected were considered to be 

persons of stern integrity, and in every way worthy of the vacant 
position; but notwithstanding the disciples were intimately ac¬ 
quainted with them, they felt that their own judgment was im¬ 
perfect, and trusted the selection only to the Lord, whose eyes 
could read the hidden secrets of the heart. There is a lesson 
for our time in this occurrence. . . . The work has often 

suffered much by putting persons forward to do that which they 
were not capable of doing.”— S. P., Vol. 3, pp. 26^, 265. 

4. “According to Grotius, the lot was taken by means of two 
urns. In one they placed two rolls of paper, with the names 
of Joseph and Matthias written within them; and in the other 
two rolls, one with the word 'Apostle/ and the other blank; 
and one roll was drawn from each urn simultaneously .”—Smithes 
New Testament History, p. 380. 


III. THE DAY OF PENTECOST 

Study Acts 2: 1-13. 

1. Where were the disciples on the day of Pentecost? 

2. What sound was suddenly heard? What did it fill? 

3. What appeared? Upon whom did the tongues of fire rest? 

4. With what were the disciples filled? 

5. How did they begin to speak? 

6. Who were living at Jerusalem at this time? 

7. Who came to hear the disciples? 

8. How were the people affected by what they heard? 

9. What did they say to one another? 

10. Name the countries from which the people had come. 

11. Could they understand the meaning of this wonderful occur= 

rence ? 

12. What did some mockingly say of the disciples? 



24 


Readings 


Ex. 34: 22 
Lev. 23: 15-21 
Deut. 16: 9-12 
Mark 16: 17 


Acts 4: 31j 10: 45, 46 
1 Cor. 12:7-10, 28, 30 ; 13: 1 
D. A., pp. 664-672 
A. A., Chap. IV 


Memory Verse 

And they were all filled with the Holy Ghost, and began to 
speak with other tongues, as the Spirit gave them utterance. 
Acts 2: 4. 


Notes 


1. The Pentecost was sometimes called the Feast of Weeks, 
because held seven weeks after the Passover. On this day the 
people presented the first fruits of their harvest. Thus they 
acknowledged their dependence upon God for all the blessings 
they enjoyed. 

2. “They were all with one accord” means that they were 
in perfect harmony in their desires and purposes. 

3. “It sat upon each” shows that “it” was not the sound 
that filled the house. John the Baptist had said, “He shall 
baptize you.” The Spirit filled the room, completely immersing 
them. 

4. “They were all filled,” both men and women. This miracle 
was performed on the tongues of the disciples, not on the ears 
of the people. 

5. “The Holy Spirit, assuming the form of tongues of fire, 
rested upon those assembled. This was an emblem of the gift 
then bestowed on the disciples, which enabled them to speak 
with fluency languages with which they had heretofore been 
unacquainted. The appearance of fire signified the fervent zeal 
with which the apostles would labor, and the power that would 
attend their work. . . . 

6. “During the dispersion, the Jews had been scattered to 
almost every part of the inhabited world, and in their exile. 


25 



“Thoro appoai-od unto thorn cloven tonguos liko as of firo, and it sat ui)oii 
each of them.” 






26 


they had learned, to speak various languages. Many of these 
Jews were on this occasion in Jerusalem, attending the re¬ 
ligious festivals then in progress. 

7. ‘‘Every known tongue was represented by those assem¬ 
bled. This diversity of languages would have been a great 
hindrance to the proclamation of the gospel; God therefore 
in a miraculous manner supplied the deficiency of the apostles. 
The Holy Spirit did for them that which they could not have 
accomplished for themselves in a lifetime. They could now 
proclaim the truths of the gospel abroad, speaking with accuracy 
the languages of those for whom they were laboring. 

8. “This miraculous gift was a strong evidence to the world 
that their commission bore the signet of Heaven. From this 
time forth the language of the disciples was pure, simple, and 
accurate, whether they spoke in their native tongue or in a 
foreign language.’'— A. A., pp. 39, W. 

9. Though a mighty manifestation of the Spirit was given to 
convince the people, there was still room to doubt. All occa¬ 
sion or opportunity for doubt will never be removed from man. 

10. DIAGRAM SHOWING THAT PENTKCOST- OF A. D. 31 
CAME UPON SABBATH 


14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 



1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 


Fri. 

Sat. 

Sun. 

Mon. 

Tues. 

Wed. 

Thurs. 

Fri. 


8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 


15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 


22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 


29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 


36 

37 

33 

39 

40 

41 

42 


43 

44 

45 

46 

47 

48 

.:^4 9 


50 



1 





























27 


Ex. 12: 2-6, 8, Passover instituted. 

Luke 22: 7, the fourteenth had come. 

Luke 22: 14, the hour to eat the Passover had come. 

Lev. 23: 5-8, the fifteenth day was the first day of feast and 
a sabbath, that is, a day of rest. 

Lev. 23: 11, the original shows that this refers to the fifteenth 
day sabbath. 

Lev. 23: 12, 15, the sixteenth day was to be the day of the 
wave sheaf and the first of the fifty days. 

On the fourteenth day the lamb was killed. It was eaten 
that night. In A. D. 31, on that night Jesus was arrested, and 
the next day, the fifteenth, was crucified. This is said by all 
to have been Friday. The sixteenth would then be the first 
of the fifty days. It would be Sabbath. Fifty days from this 
would also be Sabbath. Lev. 23: 16. 


IV. PETER’S SERMON 
Study Acts 2: 14-36. 

1. Who spoke to the people? How did he address them? 

2. How did Peter show that the disciples had not drunk wine? 

3. Whose words did he say were fulfilled? 

4. Upon whom had Joel said God would pour out His Spirit? 

5. What wonders and signs should be seen? Where? 

6. Who shall be saved? 

7. How had God shown that He approved of His Son, Jesus of 

Nazareth? 

8. By whose counsel and foreknowledge was Jesus delivered?' 

For what purpose? 

9. Who raised Him from the dead? Why? 



28 


10. Where did David say he saw the Lord always? 

11. Why did he rejoice? What did Peter say of David? 

12. What was David? What had God sworn to him? 

13. Because of this promise, what did David say concerning the 

resurrection of Christ? 

14. Of what were all the disciples witnesses? 

15. From what place had Jesus shed forth the Spirit? 

16. Is David in heaven? What had God said to His Son? 

17. What did Peter wish all Israel to know? 

Readings 

Joel 2: 28-32 
Isa. 44: 3 
Matt. 24: 29 
Mark 13:24 

Memory Verse 

And it shall come to pass, that whosoever shall call on the 
name of the Lord shall be saved. Acts 2:21. 

Notes 

1. The meal at which it was the custom to drink wine had 
not yet been eaten. We would call this meal early dinner. 
The third hour of the day was 9 A. M. It would indeed be very 
unreasonable to suppose that a hundred and twenty persons 
would be intoxicated at this hour of the day, and on the occa¬ 
sion of a solemn religious festival. 

2. When the disciples received the Holy Spirit, they began 
to quote the Scriptures. Their minds were illuminated to under¬ 
stand the prophecies. Thus the words of Jesus were fulfilled, 
“When He, the Spirit of truth, is come. He will guide you into 
all truth.’' 

3. The last days extend from the first to the second advent. 
Joel said “afterwards;” Peter, “last days.” The last days in- 


Luke 21: 25; 1: 32, 69 
Acts 10: 38; 13: 34-37 
John 3: 2; 14: 26 
2 Cor. 4: 14 


Ps. 16: 8-11; 110: 1 

1 Kings 2: 10 

2 Sam. 7: 12, 13 
A. A., Chap. IV 


29 


dude the very last day. The text refers to a time in the last 
days when the day of the Lord is near at hand. 

4. The “day of the Lord’' begins at the dose of probation, 
and continues till the work of redemption is complete. 

5. “Counsel and foreknowledge.” It was in the council of 
peace between the Father and the Son before the foundation 
of the world that God gave His Son to die for man, and Jesus 
offered His life a willing sacrifice. Though God foreknew that 
the Jews would put Christ to death, He did not influence them 
to do thus. Foreknoivledge is not influence. 

6. It was not possible for Christ to be “holden” of death, 
because the sin for which He died was not His own. He was 
without sin. 

7. David had prophesied that the soul of Christ was not to 
be left in hell (the grave), but that He w^s to be raised from 
the dead before His body should see corruption. Peter shows 
conclusively that David could not have been speaking of himself, 
because he died a natural death, and was buried in an honored 
grave among the kings of Judah. Moreover, Peter positively 
asserts that David has not yet ascended into heaven. 

8. David called Christ, Lord, though Jesus was his literal 
descendant. This showed that David knew of Christ’s existence 
before He came into the world as a Son of David. The gift 
of the Holy Spirit, Peter said, proved that Christ had returned 
to the position He held before He came into the world, and now 
gave gifts to His church. 


V. CHRISTIAN FELLOWSHIP 
Study Acts 2: 37-47. 

1. What was the effect of Peter’s words? 

2. What did the people ask? 



30 


3. What did Peter say they must do? 

4. For whom is the promise? 

5. Did he say anything more to them? 

6. Who were baptized? How many? 

7. In what did they continue steadfast? 

8. What came upon every soul? Why? 

9. How did the believers live? 

10. What did they do with their possessions? 

11. To what place did they go each day? 

12. How did they eat their food? 

13. With whom had they favor? 

14. What did the Lord do for them? 

Readings 

Luke 3: 10; 24: 47 James 5: 7, 8 

Acts 9:6; 16: 30 Heb. 10: 25 

Eph. 2: 13-20 Matt. 28: 19, 20 

Outline Acts 2. 

Memory Verse 

Repent, and be baptized every one of you in the name of Jesus 
Christ for the remission of sins, and ye shall receive the gift of 
the Holy Ghost. Acts 2: 38. 

Rotes 

1. “The arguments of the apostles alone, though clear and 
convincing, would not have removed the prejudice that had 
withstood so much evidence. But the Holy Spirit sent the 
arguments home to hearts with divine power. The words of the 
apostles were as sharp arrows of the Almighty, convicting men 
of their terrible guilt in rejecting and crucifying the Lord of 
glory.”— A. A., p. Jf5, 

2. “The promise is unto you.” This is the promise of Joel 
2:32, the promise of deliverance from sin. It began to be 


Mark 16: 17, 18 
A. A., Chap. V 


31 


fulfilled on the day of Pentecost, but the final consummation 
is “in the remnant.” Hosea 6: 3 speaks of the early and the 
latter rain. The early outpouring of the Spirit was upon the 
early Christian church, the latter rain will fall upon the rem¬ 
nant, to fit them for translation. 

3. In India, in 1878, the Rev. J. E. Clough and one native 
assistant baptized 2,222 in one day before sundown. This shows 
that it was not impossible that 3,000 should be added to the 
church in a day, when there were so many to administer the 
ordinance of baptism. 

4. “Fear came upon every soul.” They feared to act de¬ 
ceitfully. None joined who were hypocritical. They were sincere. 

5. “What was the result of the outpouring of the Spirit on 
the day of Pentecost? The glad tidings of a risen Saviour were 
carried to the uttermost parts of the inhabited world. . . . 

6. “Every Christian saw in his brother a revelation of divine 
love and benevolence. One interest prevailed; one subject of 
emulation swallowed up all others. The ambition of the be¬ 
lievers was to reveal the likeness of Christ’s character, and to 
labor for the enlargement of His kingdom. . . . 

7. “The promise of the Holy Spirit is not limited to any 
age or to any race. Christ declared that the divine influence of 
His Spirit was to be with His followers unto the end.”— 
A. A., pp. 49. 


VI. THE HEALING OF THE LAME MAN 
Study Acts 3: 1-11. 

1. To what place did Peter and John go? When? 

2. Who was lying at the gate of the temple? 

3. How long had he been lame? 



32 


4. How often was he taken to the temple? Why? 

5. What was this gate called? 

6. For what did he ask Peter and John? 

7. What did Peter do and say? 

8. Why did the man obey? 

9. Did Peter and John have money to give him? 

10. What did Peter tell him to do? In whose name? 

11. When Peter lifted the man up, what occurred? 

12. What did the man do when he was healed? 

13. What did the people see? 

14. What did they know about this man? 

15. What effect did this miracle have upon the people? 

16. Where did they all assemble? 

Readings 

Isa. 35: 6 Acts 5: 12 

John 10: 23 A. A., Chap. VI 

Memory Verse 

Silver and gold have I none; but such as I have give I thee: 
In the name of Jesus Christ of Nazareth rise up and walk. 
Acts 3: 6. 

Notes 

1. There were three hours for prayer: 9 A. M., 12 M., and 
3 P. M. The last named was the ninth hour of the day, and the 
time when this miracle was performed. 

2. “This unfortunate man had long desired to see Jesus, 
that he might be healed; but he was almost helpless, and was 
far removed from the scene of the great Physician’s labors. 
His pleadings at last induced some friends to bear him to the 
gate of the temple, but upon arriving there, he found that 
the One upon whom his hopes were centered, had been put 
to a cruel death.”—A. A., pp. 57, 58. 


33 


3. The Jews were astonished to see the disciples working 
miracles. They thought, when they put Jesus to death, that 
all these manifestations of divine power would cease. 

4. Though the disciples wrought miracles through the Spirit 
of God, their manner of speaking was different from that of 
their Master. Jesus spoke with authority when He rebuked 
disease, and received the grateful homage of the people; but 



, • Raphael 

“A certain man lame . . . they laid daily at the gate of the temple which 
is called Beautiful.” 


the disciples in their very words showed that the power to 
restore was not in themselves, but in Him in whose name they 
taught men to trust for healing and all other blessings. 

5. “Through faith in His name.” Many know the name of 
Jesus, but only those have a saving faith, who believe that 
He is able and willing to save them. 

6. The “Beautiful Gate” was the main entrance into the 

3 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 



34 


temple courts. It was the eastern gate, and opened from the 
Court of the Gentiles into the Court of the Women. 

“The gate itself was made of dazzling Corinthian brass, most 
richly ornamented; and so massive were its double doors that 
it needed the united strength of twenty men to open and close 
them.”— Edersheim. 

7. Solomon’s porch ran along the eastern side of the Court 
of the Gentiles, and was therefore opposite the “Beautiful Gate.” 


VIL THE POWER OF JESUS’ NAME 

Study Acts 3: 12-26. 


1. What questions did Peter ask the people? 

2. Whom had God glorified? 

3. Whom had they denied and killed? 

4. Who were witnesses of these things? 

5. How had the man been healed? 

6. How did Peter excuse the people? 

7. What things foretold by the prophets had been fulfilled? 

8. On what conditions could their sins be blotted out? When? 

9. Whom will God send? How long must the heavens receive 

Him? 

10. How many of the prophets have spoken of the restitution of 

all things? 

11. What did Moses prophesy of Christ? 

12. What other prophet had foretold those days? 

13. Whose children were they? 

14. What promise was made to Abraham? 

15. Why did God send His Son into the world? 


Readings 
1 John 5:11 
Acts 4: 10; 13: 27 
Luke 23: 34 

Outline Acts 3 


John 16: 2, 3 
1 Cor. 2: 8 
1 Tim. 1: 13 


Deut. 18: 15, 18, 19 
A. A., Chap. VI 



35 


Memory Verse 

Repent ye therefore, and be converted, that your sins may 
be blotted out, when the times of refreshing shall come from the 
presence of the Lord. Acts 3: 19. 

Notes 

1. The miracles that the disciples performed, proved that 
Jesus had risen from the dead. Peter called Christ the Author 
of life (verse 15, margin), and declared that it was through 
faith in His name that the man had been restored. 

2. “Through ignorance ye did it.’’ While the disciples told 
the people the plain truth, they excused them as far as pos¬ 
sible. This is the spirit of Jesus,— intense hatred of sin, but 
the deepest love and pity for the sinner. 

3. The word of God is the highest proof that can ever 
be given of any fact. “The miracles of Christ are a proof of 
His divinity; but a stronger proof that He is the world’s Re¬ 
deemer is found in comparing the prophecies of the Old Testa¬ 
ment with the history of the New.”— D. A., p. 799. This proof, 
the prophecies, Peter now brought before the people, to con¬ 
vince them that Jesus was the Messiah. 

4. He showed that all the prophets had prophesied of the 
first advent of Christ, and also of the second. In proof of 
this he quoted two prophecies. 

5. “A prophet like unto” Moses. Christ leads people out 
of the bondage of sin as Moses led the children of Israel out 
of Egypt. He was the mouthpiece of God, was meek, lowly in 
heart, “of your brethren,” the immediate giver of the law, and 
intercessor of the people. In all these respects He resembled 
Moses. 

6. “In thy seed.” This is the second prophecy quoted by 
Peter. The seed is Christ. Gal. 3:16. 

7. “To you first.” Nearly all the work of Christ and the 


36 


apostles was for the Jews. “Sent Him to bless you.’’ The 
greatest blessing of Christ is turning men from their sins. 

8. We must repent of all sins, even sins of ignorance when 
they are brought to our knowledge. Sins are forgiven when 
we repent, but not blotted out till the “times of refreshing,” 
which is at the time of the Judgment. Matt. 18:23-35; 
Ezekiel 33. 


VIII. THE TRIAL OF PETER AND JOHN 

Study Acts 4: 1-22. 

1. As the apostles spoke to the people, who came upon them? 

Why? 

2. Where did they put the apostles? When? For how long? 

3. How many believed? 

4. Who assembled to try the apostles? 

5. What question was asked them? Who answered? How? 

6. What stone was rejected by the builders? What had it 

become ? 

7. Is there any other name like the name of Jesus? Why? 

8. How did the apostles speak? What was perceived? 

9. Why could they say nothing against them? 

10. After the apostles had been taken out of the room, what did 

the council admit? 

11. When the disciples were recalled, what were they commanded? 

12. Why were they not punished? 

Readings 

Matt. 21: 42-44; 22: 23 Isa. 28: 16; 8: 14 John 11: 47 

Acts 23: 8 1 Cor. 15: 25-27 A. A., Chap. VI 

Ps. 118: 22 Matt. 21: 42; 11: 25, 26 

Memory Verse 

Neither is there salvation in any other: for there is none 



37 


other name under heaven given among men, whereby we must 
be saved. Acts 4: 12. 

Notes 

1. The Sanhedrin was the highest council of the Jewish 
nation. Its seventy-one members sat in a semicircle, the high 
priest occupying the most prominent position. The ex-high 
priest Annas and the high priest Caiaphas appear here as at 
the trial of Jesus, but John and Alexander are new names to us. 
As this is the only mention made of them, they can not be 
identified. 

2. Peter spoke in the same room in which Jesus was tried, 
and before the people who had heard him deny his Lord. They 
expected him to deny his Master again. They did not know that 

he had become a 
different man from 
what he was on 
that sad night. He 
fears only God 
now; man can not 
terrify him. 

3. They had 
been especially of- 
fended by the 
name of Jesus of 
Nazareth, there¬ 
fore Peter ex¬ 
plained to them 
why he used this 
name in healing 
the lame man. It was because it is the only name by which such 
a deed could be wrought. 

4. The “stone set at naught” is Christ. The “builders” were 
the authorities of the church, who should have perceived the 
value of Him whom they rejected. 














38 


5. Culture and education increase one's ability to do good 
if one has also '“been with Jesus." Even the unlearned, the 
ignorant, by contact with Jesus, may become master workmen. 
The development of a soul has but one limit — faith and 
obedience. 

6. Works are a more unanswerable argument than words. 
“The man standing with them" left no place for words. 

When men forbid what God has commanded, duty is plain. 
We must obey God rather than man. 


IX. BROTHERLY LOVE 


Study Acts 4: 23-37. 


1. Where did the disciples go when they were released? 

2. What did they report? 

3. What did all the disciples then do? 

4. What had God said through the mouth of David? 

5. Who gathered themselves together against Jesus? 

6. For what special things did the disciples pray? 

7. What occurred when they had prayed? 

8. What degree of harmony existed among the disciples? 

9. What did they say of their possessions? 

10. How did they have all things? 

11. How did the apostles give witness of the resurrection of Jesus? 

12. Did any among them lack anything? Why? 

13. Who was Barnabas? Where was he born? 

14. What did he do with his land? 


Readings 


Ps. 2: 1, 2 
Luke 4: 18 


2 Cor. 13: 11 
Phil. 1: 27; 2: 2 
Eph. 6: 18, 19 


1 Peter 3: 8 
Psalm 133 
A. A., Chap. VII 


Rom. 15: 5, 6 


Outline Acts 4. 



39 


Memory Verse 

And when they had prayed, the place was shaken where they 
were assembled together; and they were all filled with the Holy 
Ghost, and they spake the word of God with boldness. Acts 4:81. 

Notes 

1. “While Peter and John were prisoners, the other dis¬ 
ciples, knowing the malignity of the Jews, had prayed unceas¬ 
ingly for their brethren, fearing that the cruelty shown to 
Christ might be repeated. As soon as the apostles were released, 
they sought the rest of the disciples, and reported to them the 
result of the examination.”— A. A., p. 67. 

2. This company understood the second psalm. They were 
able to understand that the day will come when Christ shall 
overcome all His enemies. 

3. They desired only that God would take all fear of man 
out of their hearts, that they might be able to speak with bold¬ 
ness. The only power that can do this for man is the Holy 
Ghost. 

4. Most of the people who became Christians were imme¬ 
diately cut off from friends and relatives. In many cases their 
possessions were taken from them. Those who were so fortu¬ 
nate as to keep their money and property, cheerfully put it into 
a common fund for the benefit of all. All shared alike. 

5. “This liberality on the part of the believers was the re¬ 
sult of the outpouring of the Spirit. The converts to the gospel 
were ^of one heart and of one soul.’ One common interest con¬ 
trolled them,— the success of the mission intrusted to them; 
and covetousness had no place in their lives. Their love for 
their brethren, and the cause they had espoused, was greater 
than their love of money and possessions. Their works testi¬ 
fied that they accounted the souls of men of higher value than 
earthly wealth.”— A. A., pp. 70, 71. 


40 


X. THE SIN OF ANANIAS AND SAPPHIRA 
Study Acts 5: 1-16. 

1. How did Ananias and Sapphira attempt to deceive the church? 

2. What did Peter say to Ananias? 

3. What terrible thing occurred? 

4. What was the effect of this judgment? 

5. Who buried Ananias? When did his wife come in? 

6. How did she answer Peter’s question? 

7. What was her fate also? 

8. How were all affected who learned of these things? 

9. What was done by the apostles? 

10. How many true believers were added to the church? 

11. Where were the sick healed? From what places were they 

brought ? 

12. How many were healed? 

Readings 

Num. 30: 2 Deut. 23: 21, 22 

Eccl. 5: 4-6 A. A., Chap. VII 

Memory Verse 

Thou hast not lied unto men, but unto God. Acts 5: 4. 

Notes 

1. ‘Tn sharp contrast to the example of benevolence shown 
by the believers, was the conduct of Ananias and Sapphira, 
whose experience, traced by the pen of inspiration, has left a 
dark stain upon the history of the early church. With others, 
these professed disciples had shared the privilege of hearing the 
gospel preached by the apostles. . . . 

2. “Deep conviction had rested upon all present, and under 
the direct influence of the Spirit of God, Ananias and Sapphira 
had made a pledge to give to the Lord the proceeds from the 
sale of certain property. 


41 


3. ‘'Afterward, Ananias and Sapphira grieved the Holy Spirit 
by yielding to feelings of covetousness. They began to regret 
their promise, and soon lost the sweet influence of the blessing 
that had warmed their hearts with a desire to do large things 
in behalf of the cause of Christ. . . . 

4. “They saw, however, that those who parted with their 

possessions to supply the needs of their poorer brethren, were 
held in high esteem among the believers; and, ashamed to have 
their brethren know that their selfish souls grudged that which 
they had solemnly dedicated to God, they deliberately decided 
to sell their property, and pretend to give all the proceeds into 
the general fund, but really to keep a large share for them¬ 
selves. . . . Infinite Wisdom saw that this signal manifesta¬ 
tion of the wrath of God was necessary to guard the young 

church from becoming demoralized. 

5. “The same sin was often repeated in the after history of 
the church, and is committed by many in our time. But though 
it may not be attended by the visible manifestation of God’s 
displeasure, it is no less heinous in His sight now than in the 
apostles’ time.”— D. A., pp. 71-73, 76. , 


Xlt THE SECOND TRIAL OF PETER AND JOHN 

Study Acts 5: 17-42. 

1. Who were filled with indignation? What did they do? 

2. How were the apostles liberated? 

3. How did they fulfill the angel’s command? 

4. What did the officers report to the Sanhedrin? 

5. What did the priests and the captain of the temple think 

of this? 

6. How were the apostles brought to the council room? Why? 



42 


7. What accusation was brought against the apostles? 

8. With what charge did the apostles answer? 

9. Of what were they witnesses? 

10. How did their reply affect the council? 

11. Who was Gamaliel? What did he order? 

12. What did he say of Theudas? Of Judas of Galilee? 

13. What greal 

14. How were 

15. How did tic. 

16. What did t 

Readings 

1 Peter 2: 24 
Eph. 1: 7 
John 15: 26, 27 
Dan. 3: 16-18 
Acts 22: 3 

Outline Acts d. 

Memory Verse 

Then Peter and the other apostles answered and said, “We 
ought to obey God rather than men.” Acts 5: 29. 

Notes 

1. The Sadducees saw that if the apostles continued to preach 
a risen Saviour and to perform miracles in His name, soon the 
people would believe in the resurrection of the dead, and their 
favorite doctrine would be overthrown. 

2. The Pharisees also could clearly see that if men be¬ 
lieved what the apostles taught, they would cease to perform the 
sacrificial ceremonies or to heed the traditions of the rabbis. 
They knew also that many of the people were very weary of 
the unjust rule of the Jewish priests and rabbis, and would 
gladly resist their authority if they dared. Both sects, there- 




principle did he express? 
the disciples treated? 
ley leave the council? 
hey do every day? 


Prov. 21: 30 
Isa. 8: 10 

Matt. 15: 13; 5: 10-12; 

10:17; 23:24 
Mark 13: 9 


xtom. 5: 3 
Phil. 1: 29 
A. A., Chap. VIII 


43 


fore, felt that they must do something to stop the work of 
the apostles, or they themselves would lose all their power 
and influence. 

3. The Jews had no authority to put any one to death. Yet 
they did sometimes in their rage and hatred slay those whom 
they hated and feared. By the payment of a large sum of money 
to the Roman governor, he was induced to overlook their dis¬ 
regard of the law. 

4. The apostles were witnesses of the life and death and 
ascension of Christ, but their testimony would have been value¬ 
less had not the Holy Ghost also witnessed the same. The Spirit 
witnesses with our spirit if we obey Him. 

5. “Then the spirit of inspiration came upon the disciples; 
the accused became the accusers, charging the murder of Christ 
upon those who composed the council. ... So enraged were 
the Jews at these words that they decided to take the law into 
their own hands, and without further trial, or without authority 
from the Roman officers, to put the prisoners to death. . . . 

6. “But in the council there was one man who recognized 
the voice of God in the words spoken by the disciples. This 
was Gamaliel, a Pharisee of good reputation and a man of learn¬ 
ing and high position.”— A. A., p. 82. 

7. “The celebrated Jewish doctor Gamaliel, who is known 
by the title of ‘the glory of the law,’ was the first to whom the 
title ‘Rabban,’ ‘our master,’ was given. This Gamaliel was son 
of Rabbi Simeon, and grandson of the celebrated Hillel. He 
was president of the Sanhedrin under Tiberius, Caligula, and 
Claudius, and is reported to have died eighteen years before 
the destruction of Jerusalem. He was succeeded in the presi¬ 
dency of the Sanhedrin by his son Simeon, who perished in the 
siege .”—New Testament History, pp. 387, 388. 

8. The restless, discontented spirit of the Jewish people, and 
their expectation of a Messiah who would free them from the 
power of Rome, caused persons to come forward at different 


44 


times who claimed to have been appointed by God to free the 
Jews from gentile power. These pretenders usually gained some 
followers, but in every case their revolt ended in defeat and 
death. 

9. This had been the history of the two men mentioned by 
Gamaliel. He reasoned rightly that their work was of men. 
They were not called of God to do any such thing as they had 
made the people believe, and consequently they had perished. 
If the apostles’ work was like theirs, of men, they too would 
perish, and their work amount to nothing. How few have 
ever thought of the other side,— that the work they are op¬ 
posing might be of God! How awful to be fighting against God! 


XIL THE SEVEN DEACONS 

Study Acts 6. 

1. What difficulty arose in the church? 

2. Was it best that the apostles should spend their time dis¬ 

tributing food? 

3. Who was chosen for this work? 

4. How were they set apart for this work? 

5. What progress did the gospel make in Jerusalem? 

6. What prominent persons were obedient to the faith? 

7. Which one of the deacons did a great work among the people? 

8. Who disputed with Stephen? 

9. Could they overcome him in argument? 

10. What did they hire men to testify against him? 

11. Who were stirred up against Stephen? 

12. What did false witnesses testify against him at his trial? 

13. When he was thus accused, how did he look? What did 

he say? 



45 


Eeadings 


1 Tim. 3: 8-13; 4: 14 

2 Tim. 1:6 


Ex. 18: 17-26 
Deut. 1: 9-18 


Jonn 12: 42 
Luke 21: 12-15 
Ex. 4: 12 
Isa. 54: 17 


Matt. 26: 59-61 
A. A., Chap. IX 


Outline Acts 6. 

Memory Verse 

And Stephen, full of faith and power, did great wonders and 
miracles among the people. Acts 6: 8. 


Notes 


1. Those who are called Grecians in this lesson were Jews 
whose homes were in lands where the Greek language was 
spoken, and who themselves spoke that language. The Hebrews 
are Jews who were natives of Palestine and who spoke what was 
then called the Hebrew language. This was not the original 
Hebrew, but was a dialect which they acquired while in cap¬ 
tivity. It was closely related to the original Hebrew. The 
controversy then was between foreign Jews and native Jews. 

2. Stephen, 'Though a Jew by birth,’" “spoke the Greek lan¬ 
guage, and was familiar with the customs and manners of the 
Greeks. He therefore found opportunity to preach the gospel in 
the synagogues of the Greek Jews.”— A. A., p. 97. 

3. “Nicolas a proselyte of Antioch” was one who had 
been a heathen Greek of the city of Antioch. He had become 
a worshiper of the true God, a member of Israel, and now was 
a follower of Christ. 

4. When Christ was with His disciples. He had told them 
that they should reap that whereon they had bestowed no labor. 
The thousands converted in a day, and the great company of 
the priests, were a fulfillment of Christ’s words. 

5. Rabbinical writers say that there were over four hun¬ 
dred synagogues in Jerusalem. The Jews at this time were 


46 


scattered over the world. When they assembled at Jerusalem, 
the Jews from each country desired to meet by themselves; 
therefore the people of each country, and sometimes of sec¬ 
tions of the same country, built a synagogue. The synagogues 
often had two rooms, one for public worship, the other for the 
discussion of serious questions. These synagogues were also 
used as schools. 

6. Some think that the Libertines were Jews who had been 
slaves, but had been freed by the favor of their masters. Others 
think they were Jews from Libertina, a place in the northern 
part of Africa. The Cyrenians and Alexandrians were also from 
Africa. Cilicia was a province in Asia Minor. Its chief city 
was Tarsus, the birthplace of Paul. 

7. “As the priests and rulers saw the power that attended 
the preaching of Stephen, they were filled with bitter hatred. 
Instead of yielding to the evidence that he presented, they de¬ 
termined to silence his voice by putting him to death. . . . 

8. “Learned Jews from the surrounding countries were sum¬ 
moned for the purpose of refuting the arguments of the pris¬ 
oner. Saul of Tarsus was present, and took a leading part 
against Stephen. He brought the weight of eloquence and the 
logic of the rabbis to bear upon the case, to convince the people 
that Stephen was preaching delusive and dangerous doctrines; 
but in Stephen he met one who had a full understanding of the 
purpose of God in the spreading of the gospel to other nations.” 
— A, A., p. 98. 


CHAPTER TWO 
The Great Persecution 


XIII. STEPHEN’S DEFENSE 


Study Acts 7: 1-29. 


1. What did the high priest ask Stephen? 

2. How did Stephen address the council? 

3. Where did Abraham live when he was called by God? 

4. To what country did he go? Why? 

5. How much of the promised land did Abraham receive? 

6. What had God promised him? 

7. How long were his children in bondage? 

8. What covenant was given to Abraham? 

9. How did Israel come into Egypt? 

10. Where did Jacob die? Where was he buried? 

11. How were the children of Israel treated in Egypt? 

12. How was the life of Moses saved when a child? 

13. How was he educated? Whom did he avenge? 

14. What did he suppose? Was he mistaken? 

15. How was he reproached by one of his own people? 

16. Why did he flee to Midian? 

Headings 


Ps. 105: 8-25 
A. A., Chap. X 


Ex. 12: 40, 41 
Gen. 15: 13-16 


Memory Verse 

And Moses was learned in all the wisdom of the Egyptians, 
and was mighty in words' and in deeds. Acts 7: 22. 


( 47 ) 



48 


Notes 

1. Stephen began with the history of Abraham because his 

accusers claimed to be the children of Abraham; He showed 
that Abraham did not receive the promise while living, and 
must, therefore, be raised from the dead to receive his promised 
inheritance. • 

2. If he had been permitted to finish his line of argument, 
he would have shown that Christ is the promised “seed,” the one 
through whom the promise to Abraham will be fulfilled. 

3. “Threescore and fifteen souls,” or seventy-five, this text 
says, while Gen. 46: 26, 27 gives the number as sixty-six and 
seventy. 

The sixty-six are Jacob’s descendants. To these are added 
Jacob himself, and Joseph and his two sons, who were already 
in Egypt. This makes the number seventy. The wives of 
Judah, Simeon, and Jacob were dead, and Joseph’s wife was in 
Egypt. There were then nine wives to add to the sixty-six 
literal descendants of Jacob. This makes a total of seventy- 
five, the number given in the Septuagint, from which Stephen 
quoted. See Clarke’s Commentary on Gen. 46: 26, 27. 

4. Acts 7: 16 gives Abraham as the one who purchased the 
land at Shechem. The word “Abraham” in this text is cer¬ 
tainly a mistake. It should be “Jacob.” It is not known how 
the names came to be changed in the original manuscript. 

5. Many proper names in this lesson have an unfamiliar look. 
They are the Greek forms of Hebrew words, as, “Charran” for 
“Haran,” “Sychem” for “Shechem,” “Emmor” for “Hamor,” etc. 


XIV. STEPHEN’S DEFENSE (CONTINUED) 
Study Acts 7: 30-50. 

1. Who appeared to Moses at the end of forty years? 

2. Who spoke to him from the bush? 



49 


3. What was Moses told to do? 

4. How was Israel delivered from Egypt? 

5. Of whom did Moses tell Israel? 

6. Who spoke to them at Mount Sinai? 

7. Did their fathers obey Him? 

8. What did they say to Aaron? 

9. What did they worship? 

10. After what pattern was the tabernacle made? 

11. Who built the temple? 

12. Does God dwell in temples made with hands? 

13. Where is God’s throne? 

14. Who has made all things? 

15. Can man make Him a dwelling place? 

Readings 

Psalms 78; 81: 12-15; 

105: 26-45; 

106: 19-46 

Memory Verse 

A Prophet shall the Lord your God raise up unto you of your 
brethren, like unto me; Him shall ye hear. Acts 7:37. 

Notes 

1. Moses was rejected by his people, but he was their de¬ 
liverer. They had to accept him finally in order to be delivered. 
Christ was the antitype of Moses. Stephen tried to show this, 
and that Christ, whom they had crucified, was the Prophet like 
unto Moses. 

2. “Lively,” living; “oracles” signifies a divine revelation, a 
communication from God Himself. Here it refers especially 
to the law of God. 

3. “The tabernacle of Moloch.” “It was customary for the 
idolaters of all nations to carry images of their gods about them 
in their journeys, military expeditions, etc. These, being very 

4 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 


Neh. 9: 6-37 
Isa. 66: 1, 2 
1 Kings 8: 27 


Gal. 3: 18, 19 
4. A., Chap. X 


50 


small, were inclosed in little boxes, perhaps some of them in the 
shape of temples, called tabernacles; or as we have it Acts 19: 
24, shrines. ... 

“Such images as these I suppose the idolatrous Israelites, in 
imitation of their neighbors, the Moabites, Ammonites, etc., to 
have carried about with them.”— Clarke's Commentary. 

4. “Brought in with Jesus;” that is, with Joshua. The Greek 
version always gives this form for the name “Joshua.” 

5. Stephen showed that God is not confined to any par¬ 
ticular place or people. “The place of God’s highest worship 
is in heaven.” Since this is true, one soul is as near Him as 
another. This the Jews did not want to hear. 


XV. STEPHEN’S DEATH (A. D. 34) 

Study Acts 7: 51-60; 8: 1-4. 

1. What did Stephen say was the condition of his persecutors? 

2. What did they always resist? 

3. Whose example did they follow? 

4. How had their fathers treated the prophets? 

5. Of whose murdej were they guilty? 

6. How had they received the law? Had they kept it? 

7. How did his words affect them? 

8. What did he see as he looked into heaven? What did he say? 

9. What did they do that they might not hear what he said? 

10. How was he killed? Where? 

11. Where did the witnesses lay down their clothes? 

12. What did Stephen pray for himself? For them? 

13. Who consented to the death of Stephen? 

14. How was the church affected by the death of Stephen? 

15. What church was greatly persecuted? 



51 


16. Who only remained at Jerusalem? 

17. Who was the leader in this persecution? 


Readings 

Ex. 32: 9 
Isa. 48: 4 


Jer. 10: 25 
Acts 11: 19 
1 Cor. 15: 9 
Phil. 3: 6 


1 Tim. 1: 13 
Matt. 10:23 
A. A., Chap. X 


Deut. 10: 16 
Lev. 26: 41, 42 


Outline Acts 7. 

Memory Verse 

And he kneeled down, and cried with a loud voice, ‘‘Lord, lay 
not this sin to their charge.’' And when he had said this, he 
fell asleep. Acts 7 : 60. 


Notes 


1. “When he connected Christ with the prophecies, and spoke 
as he did of the temple, the priest, pretending to be horror- 
stricken, rent his robe. To Stephen this act was a signal that 
his voice would soon be silenced forever. . . . Although in 
the midst of his sermon, he abruptly concluded it. Suddenly 
breaking away from the train of history that he was follow¬ 
ing, and turning upon his infuriated judges, he cried, ‘Ye 
stiff-necked and uncircumcised in heart and ears.’”—A. A., 

p. 100. 

2. This was a Jewish mode of speech, to express the con¬ 
dition of those whose hearts are full of iniquity, and whose 
ears refuse to listen to counsel or reproof. 

3. A great company of angels was in Mount Sinai when the 
law was given. “Disposition” means order, arrangement, as a 
general would place his army. It here has reference to the 
marshaling of the hosts of heaven. Gal. 3: 19. The very man¬ 
ner in which the law was given should have so impressed them 
that they would have kept it. 


52 


4. When Christ ascended to heaven, He was seated at the 
right hand of God; but so great was His interest in faithful 
Stephen, who was about to die for His sake, that He arose 
from His seat, as if drawn earthward by Stephen’s loyalty to 
Heaven. 

5. The Sanhedrin, the highest court of Israel, became a 
rabble, a mob. Their action was no more legal than are the 
lynchings of modern times. Rome never allowed such procedure, 
but in this case the priests hired the officers not to report their 
transgression of Roman law. 

6. Note the points of similarity between the death of Christ 
and that of Stephen:— 

(a) Prayer for enemies. Luke 23:34; Acts 7:60. 

(b) '‘Lord Jesus, receive my spirit.” Luke 23: 46; Acts 7: 59. 

(c) Witnesses, false. Matt. 26: 59; Acts 6: 13. 

(d) Charges. Acts 6:11, 12; Matt. 26:61. 

Note also this great contrast:— 

(a) Christ was forsaken, Stephen was sustained. Mark 15: 
34; Acts 7: 56. 

(b) Christ died for others, Stephen for himself. 

7. “And Saul was consenting” means that he was pleased 
with the zeal of the Jews in putting Stephen to death. This 
was also indicated in a previous lesson by the words, “The wit¬ 
nesses laid down their clothes at a young man’s feet, whose 
name was Saul.” 

8. The leader of the “great persecution” was Saul. “The 
martyrdom of Stephen made a deep impression upon all who wit¬ 
nessed it. . . . His death was a sore trial to the church, but 
it resulted in the conviction of Saul, who could not efface from 
his memory the faith and constancy of the martyr, and the 
glory that had rested on his countenance. At the scene of 
Stephen’s trial and death, Saul had seemed to be imbued with a 
frenzied zeal. Afterward he was angered by his own secret 
conviction that Stephen had been honored by God at the very 


53 


time when he was dishonored by men. . . . After the death 
of Stephen, Saul was elected a member of the Sanhedrin coun¬ 
cil, in consideration of the part he had acted on that occasion.’’ 
— A. A., pp. 101, 102. 

9. ^‘They went everywhere” means lay members, for the 
apostles still remained at Jerusalem. Acts 8: 1. They were 
scattered throughout Judea and Samaria, and as they went, they 
preached. Thus they fulfilled the last words of Christ: “Ye 
shall be witnesses unto Me both in Jerusalem, and in all Judea, 
and in Samaria, and unto the uttermost part of the earth.” 
Acts 1: 8. Read also Acts 11: 19. 


XVI. SIMON THE SORCERER 

Study Acts 8: 5-25. 

1. To what city did Philip go? What was the result of his work? 

2. Who practiced sorcery in the city of Samaria? 

3. How was he regarded by the people? 

4. What did they say of him? 

5. When they heard the preaching of Philip, what did the 

people do? 

6. What did Simon himself do? 

7. What filled him with wonder? 

8. Who was sent to Samaria from Jerusalem? Why? 

9. When Peter and John came, for what did they pray? 

10. Had any of the believers in Samaria yet received the Holy 

Ghost? 

11. What power did Simon wish to have? 

12. What did he offer the disciples? How did Peter answer him? 

13. Was Simon a converted man? 



54 


14. For what did Simon ask Peter to pray? 

15. When did the apostles return to Jerusalem? 


Readings 


Acts 13: 6 
Lev. 19: 31 
Deut. 18: 9-12 


Mai. 3:5 

Rev. 21: 8; 22: 15 

Matt. 10: 8 


2 Kings 5: 15, 16 
Heb. 12: 15 


Memory Verse 

But Peter said unto him, ^‘Thy money perish with thee, be¬ 
cause thou hast thought that the gift of God may be purchased 
with money.” Acts 8: 20. 


Notes 


1. Sorcerers were persons who pretended to hold commu¬ 
nication with the dead, and by the aid of spirits to work won¬ 
ders, and foretell future events. The people believed Simon to 
have great supernatural power, and that this power was 
from God. 

2. Doubtless he did some wonders, but they were performed 
by the power given him by Satan and his angels. By this 
means he bewitched the people of Samaria, just as any wonder¬ 
worker might deceive a superstitious people. 

3. Simon believed what was told him concerning the king¬ 
dom of God, but had no spiritual experience. He did not un¬ 
derstand spiritual things. 

4. Peter and John were chosen to be companions in gospel 
work. In almost everything they were opposite in character 
and temperament. Yet they labored together successfully, for 
each was led by the Spirit. 

5. Every one desires power of one kind or another. The 
power of God is given only to those who will use it not for 
their own aggrandizement, but to advance the kingdom of God 
in the earth. 


55 


6. Simon was not converted. He had no part nor lot in 
the kingdom of God, that is, no place among the faithful, and 
no part in the work of the gospel. He thought the apostles had 
power to bestow the Spirit of God. 

7. The bestowal of the Spirit of God as indicated here was 
a special manifestation by which the disciples received the gifts 
of the Spirit, such as healing, speaking with tongues, etc., the 
gifts which qualified them for preaching the gospel. 

8. “Repent.'' His case was not hopeless, though his sin, 
considered in its motives and result, was of the most dreadful 
sort. “Gall of bitterness" means excessive bitterness. Among 
the Hebrews, “gall," “wormwood," and similar terms, were used 
to express the effects of sin upon the soul. 

9. “Bond of iniquity." “An allusion to the mode in which 
the Romans secured their prisoners, chaining the right hand of 
the prisoner to the left hand of the soldier who guarded him; 
as if the apostle had said. Thou art tied and bound by the chain 
of thy sin; justice hath laid hold upon thee, and thou hast only 
a short respite before thy execution, to see if thou wilt repent." 
— Clarke's Commentary. 

10. The words of Simon indicate that he deeply repented, 
but tradition says that he did not, but became a bitter opposer 
of the gospel and of those who were teaching it, especially Peter. 


XVII. PHILIP AND THE ETHIOPIAN 

Study Acts 8: 26-40. 

1. Where did an angel tell Philip to go? 

2. Whom did he meet on the road to Gaza? 

3. What position did this officer hold? 

4. Where had he been? For what purpose? 

5. What was he doing as he rode in his chariot? 



56 


6. What did the Spirit say to Philip? 

7. What did Philip ask the officer? 

8. How did he answer? What did he desire Philip to do? 

9. What scripture had the officer been reading? 

10. What question did he ask Philip about this scripture? 

11. What did Philip then preach to him? From what scripture? 

12. When they came to water, what did the officer ask? 

13. On what condition could he be baptized? 

14. Did he believe in Jesus? How was he baptized? 

15. Where was Philip taken by the Spirit? 

16. How did the officer go on his way? 

17. Where was Philip next found? 

18. To what city did he finally come? 

Readings ^ 

Zeph. 3: 10 Luke 24: 27 

Acts 18: 28 1 Kings 18: 12 

Isa. 53: 7, 8 A. A., Chap. XI 

Matt. 28: 19, 20 
Outline Acts 8. 

Draw a sketch map of Palestine and the northeastern 
coast of Africa. Place on this map all places necessary to il¬ 
lustrate this lesson. Trace in colored pencil the journey of 
Philip from Samaria to the road near Gaza, then to Azotus 
and Caesarea. Notice the cities in which he probably preached. 

With a pencil of another color trace the journey of the 
eunuch from Jerusalem to his home in Ethiopia. 

Memory Verse 

Then Philip opened his mouth, and began at the same scrip¬ 
ture, and preached unto him Jesus. Acts 8: 35. 

Notes 

1. Philip was doing a successful work in Samaria, yet he 
was called away from it, though the apostles in Jerusalem were 
much nearer Gaza than was he. He was the one best fitted 
to preach Jesus to the eunuch. 


57 


2. Gaza is the last town in southwest Palestine, on the 
borders of Egypt. “Which is desert” is supposed to refer to 
the road. Thus definitely was the particular road that Philip 
was to take, described to him. 

3. “Candace” is not a proper name, but was the title of all 
the queens of Ethiopia, a country south of Egypt. Ancient 
Ethiopia corresponded to what is now called the Sudan. 

4. The eunuch was probably a proselyte to the Jewish faith. 
It is supposed that the queen of Sheba came from Ethiopia, and 
that she became a worshiper of the true God. Through her the 
people of Ethiopia learned of the God of Israel. 

5. God will send the light to every soul that seeks for it. 
The eunuch was earnestly searching the Scriptures. Tradition 
says that he carried the light to Ethiopia, that the queen was 
converted, and many in that land became followers of Christ. 

6. We do not know how much of tradition is true, but it is 
well known that Christianity became firmly established among 
the Abyssinian people, and that for centuries they held to the 
fundamental principles of the gospel and kept the law of God 
entire. They observed the Sabbath of the commandment when 
most of the world had accepted a substitute, the first day of 
the week. 

7. The quotation the eunuch was reading is somewhat dif¬ 
ferent from our version, because he was reading from the Sep- 
tuagint. 

8. Philip was probably taken away in a miraculous manner. 
The eunuch had seen no manifestation of special power until 
Philip was taken from him. All of the work of the apostles 
and evangelists was confirmed by some sign or wonder. 

9. Azotus is a town on the seacoast. He preached in all the 
cities between Azotus and Csesarea. If Caesarea was not his 
home before, it probably now became his place of residence; for 
years later. Acts 21:8, he is mentioned as living there with 
his family, four of whom were prophetesses. 


CHAPTER THREE 


Saul 


XVIII. THE CONVERSION OF SAUL (A. D. 34) 

Study Acts 9: 1-9. 

1. With what spirit was Saul filled? 

2. What did he desire of the high priest? 

3. Near what city did he come in his journey? 

4. What suddenly shone round him? 

5. What time of day was this? 

6. What did he do? What did he hear? 

7. What question was asked him? 

8. Did Saul know who was speaking to him? 

9. What did the Lord tell him? 

10. What did Saul want to know? Where was he told to go? 

11. How were Saul’s companions affected by this occurrence? 

12. Did they see Jesus? What was the effect of the light? 

Acts 22: 11. 

13. How did Saul find his way to Damascus? 

14. How long was he blind? How did he spend these three days? 

Readings 

Gal. 1: 13-16 1 Cor. 9: 1; 15: 8, 9 Matt. 25: 40 

Acts 22: 4-11; 26: 9-18 Dan. 10:7 A. A., Chap. XII 

Memory Verse 

And he fell to the earth, and heard a voice saying unto him, 
“Saul, Saul, why persecutest thou Me?” And he said, “Who 

(58) 



59 


art Thou, Lord?” And the Lord said, ‘T am Jesus whom thou 
persecutest: it is hard for thee to kick against the pricks.” 
Acts 9.: 4, 5. 


Notes 

1. ‘‘Prominent among the Jewish leaders -who became thor¬ 
oughly aroused by the success attending the proclamation of 
the gospel, was Saul of Tarsus. A Roman citizen by birth, 
Saul was nevertheless a Jew by descent, and had been educated 
in Jerusalem by the most eminent of the rabbis. . 

2. “Saul had taken a prominent part in the trial and con¬ 
viction of Stephen, and the striking^ evidences of God’s presence 
with the martyr had led Saul to doubt the righteousness of 
the cause he had espoused against the followers of Jesus. ... 

3. “The arguments of the priests and rulers finally con¬ 
vinced him that Stephen was a blasphemer, that the Christ 
whom the martyred disciple had preached was an impostor, and 
that those ministering in holy office must be right. . . . 

4. “The priests and rulers had hoped that by vigilant effort 
and stern persecution the heresy might be suppressed. Now 
they felt that they must carry forward in other places the 
decided measures taken in Jerusalem against the new teaching. 
For the special work that they desired to have done at Da¬ 
mascus, Saul offered his services. . . . 

5. “Filled with fear, and almost blinded by the intensity of 
the light, the companions of Saul heard a voice, but saw no 
man. But Saul understood the words that were spoken; and 
to him was clearly revealed the One who spoke — even the 
Son of God. In the glorious Being who stood before him, he 
saw the Crucified One. 

6. “Upon the soul of the stricken Jew the image of the 
Saviour’s countenance was imprinted forever. The words spoken 
struck home to his heart with appalling force. Into the dark¬ 
ened chambers of his mind there poured a flood of light, re- 


60 



‘’As he journeyed, he came near Damascus; and suddenly there shined round 
about him a light from heaven.” 






















61 


vealing the ignorance and error of his former life, and his 
present need of the enlightenment of the Holy Spirit. . . . 

7. “The brightness of Christ’s glory had been too intense for 
his mortal eyes; and when it was removed, the blackness of 
night settled upon his vision. He believed that this blindness 
was a punishment from God for his cruel persecution of the 
followers of Jesus. . . . 

8. “These days of close self-examination and of heart humilia¬ 
tion were spent in lonely seclusion. The believers, having been 
given warning of the purpose of Saul in coming to Damascus, 
feared that he might be acting a part, in order the more 
readily to deceive them; and they held themselves aloof, refusing 
him their sympathy. 

9. “He had no desire to appeal to the unconverted Jews, 
with whom he had planned to unite in persecuting the believers; 
for he knew that they would not even listen to his story. Thus 
he seemed to be shut away from all human sympathy. His only 
hope of help was in a merciful God, and to Him he appealed in 
brokenness of heart. . . . 

10. “The conversion of Saul is a striking evidence of the 
miraculous power of the Holy Spirit to convict men of sin.”— 
A. A., vp. 112-120. 


XIX. THE BAPTISM OF SAUL 
Study Acts 9: 10-22. 

1. Who was Ananias? 

2. What did the Lord tell him to do? 

3. What did the Lord say Saul had seen? 

4. Why did Ananias fear to go to Saul? 

5. What did the Lord tell Ananias that made him willing to go? 



62 


6. In whose house was Saul? 

7. In what street was this house? 

8. How did Ananias address Saul? 

9. What did he do for Saul? 

10. What occurred immediately? 

11. When was Saul baptized? 

12. What did he preach in the synagogues? 

13. What did his hearers say? 

14. Were the Jews able to overcome him in argument? 

Readings 

Acts 22: 3, 12-16; 

21: 11-14, 39; 

20: 22-24 

Memory Verse 

He is a chosen vessel unto Me, to bear My name before the 
gentiles, and kings, and the children of Israel: for I will show 
him how great things he must suffer for My name’s sake. 
Acts 9: 15, 16. 

Notes 

1. “In the record of the conversion of Saul important prin¬ 
ciples are given us, which we should ever bear in mind. Saul 
was brought directly into the presence of Christ. He was one 
whom Christ intended for a most important work, one who 
was to be a 'chosen vessel’ unto Him; yet the Lord did not at 
once tell him of the work that had been assigned him. He ar¬ 
rested him in his course and convicted him of sin; but when 
Saul asked, 'What wilt Thou have me to do?’ the Saviour placed 
the inquiring Jew in connection with His church, there to obtain 
a knowledge of God’s will concerning him. . . . 

2. ''In this case, Ananias represents Christ, and also repre¬ 
sents Christ’s ministers upon the earth who are appointed to 
act in His stead. In Christ’s stead, Ananias touches the eyes of 


Rom. 1:1 2 Cor. 11: 22-33 

1 Tim. 2:7 4. A., Chap. XII 

Eph. 3: 1-8 





la|^jBnvy 










%o 




“Arise, and g-o into the street which is called 
Slraig-ht, and inquire in the house of Judas for 
one called Saul, of Tarsus.” 




















64 


Saul, that they may receive sight. In Christ’s stead, he places 
his hands upon him, and as he prays in Christ’s name, Saul 
receives the Holy Ghost. All is done in the name and by the 
authority of Christ. Christ is, the fountain; the church is the 
channel of communication.”—A. A., pp. 120, 122. 


XX. SAUL’S ESCAPES 
Study Acts 9: 23-31. 

1. To what country did Saul go from Damascus? Gal. 1: 17. 

2. To what city did he return? Gal. 1: 17. 

3. What did the Jews plot against Saul? Who learned of this? 

4. What was done to prevent his escape from Damascus ? 

2 Cor. 11: 32. 

5. How did the disciples help him to escape? 2 Cor. 11: 33. 

6. To what city did he then go? Gal. 1: 18. 

7. How long since he had been there before? Gah 1: 18. 

8. How long was he at Jerusalem? Gal. 1: 18. 

9. Why would not the disciples receive him? 

- 10. Who interceded for him? 

11. Which of the apostles did he meet at Jerusalem? Gal. 

1: 18, 19. 

12. How did he preach the gospel at Jerusalem? 

13. With whom did he dispute? 

14. Why did he leave Jerusalem? Acts 22: 17-21. 

15. To what place did the brethren send him? 

16. What was the condition of the churches at this time? 

Readings 

Joshua 2: 15 Gal. 1: 15-20 Acts 22: 17-22 

1 Sam. 19: 12 2 Cor. 11: 32, 33 A. A., Chap. XIII 



65 


Memory Verse 

Then had the churches rest throughout all Judea and Galilee 
and Samaria, and were edified; and walking in the fear of the 
Lord, and in the comfort of the Holy Ghost, were multiplied. 
Acts 9: 31. 

Notes 

1. “The news of Paul’s conversion had come to the Jews as 

a great surprise. . . . The opposition grew so fierce that 

Paul was not allowed to continue his labors at Damascus. A 
messenger from heaven bade him leave for a time; and he ‘went 
into Arabia,’ where he found a safe retreat. 

2. “Here, in the solitude of the desert, Paul had ample op¬ 
portunity for quiet study and meditation. He calmly reviewed 
his past experience, and made sure work of repentance. He 
sought God with all his heart, resting not until he knew for 
a certainty that his repentance was accepted and his sin 
pardoned. 

3. “He longed for the assurance that Jesus would be with 
him in his coming ministry. He emptied his soul of the preju¬ 
dices and traditions that had hitherto shaped his life, and 
received instruction from the Source of truth. Jesus communed 
with him, and established him in the faith, bestowing upon him 
a rich measure of wisdom and grace. . . . 

4. “From Arabia Paul ‘returned again unto Damascus,’ and 
‘preached boldly ... in the name of Jesus.’ Unable to with¬ 
stand the wisdom of his arguments, ‘the Jews took counsel to 
kill him.’ . . . 

5. “After his escape from Damascus, Paul went to Jerusa¬ 
lem, about three years having passed since his conversion. His 
chief object in making this visit, as he himself declared after¬ 
ward, was ‘to see Peter.’ . . . 

5 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 


66 



6. ‘^The future apostle to the gentiles was now in the city 
where many of his former associates lived; and to these Jew¬ 
ish leaders he longed to make plain the prophecies' concerning 
the Messiah, which had been fulfilled by the advent of the 


Saviour. Paul felt sure that these teachers in Israel, with 
whom he had once been so well acquainted, were as sincere 
and honest as he had been. But he had miscalculated the spirit 
of his Jewish brethren, and in the hope of their speedy con¬ 
version he was doomed to bitter disappointment. . . . 


“In Damascus . . . through a window in a basket 
was I let down by the wall, and escaped.” 








67 


7. ^Taul was inclined to remain at Jerusalem, where he 
could face the opposition. To him, it seemed an act of cowardice 
to flee, if by remaining he might be able to convince some of 
the obstinate Jews of the truth of the gospel message, even if 
to remain should cost him his life. . . . 

8. "‘Upon learning of this vision, the brethren hastened Paul’s 
secret escape from Jerusalem, for fear of his assassination. . . . 
The departure of Paul suspended for a time the violent oppo¬ 
sition of the Jews, and the church had a period of rest, in 
which many were added to the number of believers.”— A. A., 
pp. 123-130, 




CHAPTER FOUR 
Peter 


XXL PETER AT LYDDA AND JOPPA 

Study Acts 9: 32-43. 

1. As Peter traveled about, to what city did he come? 

2. Were there disciples in this city? 

3. What afflicted person did Peter find at Lydda? 

4. How long had ^neas been sick? 

5. What did Peter say to him? Was he healed? 

6. Who saw the miracle? What was the result? 

7. What disciple lived at Joppa? 

8. What was the character of Tabitha? What sad thing oc¬ 

curred ? 

9. Where did her friends lay her? For whom did they send? 

10. When Peter came, to what place was he taken? 

11. What were the widows doing? 

12. Did Peter allow them to remain in the room? 

13. What wonderful miracle was performed? 

14. To whom did he present her alive? 

15. What was the effect of this miracle? 

16. Where did Peter live for a long time? 


Readings 


1 Tim. 2:9, 10 
Titus 3: 8 


Isa. 58: 6, 7 
Matt. 9: 25 
A. A., Chap. XIV 


Matt. 25: 34-36 
James 2: 15-20 


Outline Acts 9. 
( 68 ) 



69 



“Thei-e was at Joppa a certain disciple . . . called Dorcas: this woman was 
full of good works and almsdeeds.” 






70 


Memory Verse 

And Peter said unto him, ‘‘Mneas, Jesus Christ maketh thee 
wliole: arise, and make thy bed.” And he arose immediately. 
Acts 9: 34. 

Notes 

1. “On the difference of names which so frequently occurs 
in some parts of the Scriptures, Calmet makes the following 
judicious remarks: ‘As both Greek and Hebrew, or Syriac, were 
commonly spoken in Palestine, most persons had two names, one 
Greek and the other Hebrew. Thus Peter was called Cephas 
in Hebrew, and Petros in Greek. Paul was called Saul in 
Hebrew, and Paulos in Greek. The person in verse 36, Tahitha 
in Hebrew, and Dorcas in Greek. And the paralytic person cured 
by Peter, Hananiah in Hebrew, Aineas in Greek. So Thomas 
was the Hebrew name of the apostle, who in Greek was called 
DidymusJ ”— Clarke’s Commentary. 

2. “The saints” were Christians, converted Jews. Peter 
visited all the Christians in Judea. Among other places he came 
to Lydda. 

3. “Saron,” a contraction of “Sharon.” Lydda and Joppa 
were towns in the vale, or valley, of Sharon. Locate on your 
map all places mentioned in the lesson. 

4. None of the apostles had ever raised a dead person to 
life. Peter may have been sent for before Dorcas died, in the hope 
that he might restore her to health. The fact that they had 
prepared her for burial would seem to indicate that they had no 
expectation that Peter could do anything for her after she 
was dead. 

5. The news of these miracles made the people favorable to 
the gospel, so that Peter remained and taught them for a 
long time. 

6. The Jews held the trade of tanner in contempt. They 
thought it an unclean business. The fact that Peter made his 


71 


home with one who was engaged in this work, shows that he 
began to see that^ it was not that without but that within a 
man that defiles him and makes him unclean in the sight of God. 


XXII. CORNELIUS OF CAESAREA, AND PETER’S VISION 
Study Acts 10: 1-18. 

1. Who was Cornelius? 

2. What was his character and that of his household? 

3. When did he have a vision? 

4. What did an angel say to him? What did Cornelius reply? 

5. What came up as a memorial before God? 

6. What was Cornelius directed to do? Whom did Cornelius 

send? 

7. Where was Peter when the messengers drew near the city 

of Joppa? 

8. While Peter waited for dinner, what occurred? 

9. What did he see descending from heaven? 

10. What was in the vessel? What did a voice command him? 

11. What objection did Peter make? What did the voice reply? 

12. How many times was this done? Did Peter understand the 

vision ? 

13. Who arrived as he was thinking about it? 

Readings 

Acts 11: 5-14 
Matt. 6: 1-15 
Luke 11: 41; 12: 33 

Memory Verse 

Thy prayers and thine alms are come up for a memorial be¬ 
fore God. Acts 10: 4. 


Mai. 3:16 Eze. 4: 14 

Lev. 11: 1-31; 20: 25 A. A., Chap. XIV 
Deut. 14: 3-20 



72 



Notes 

1. A centurion was the captain of a hundred men. The Italian 
band was a cohort, or regiment, of soldiers from Italy; that is, 

Roman soldiers. A legion 
consisted of ten cohorts. 
The fifth, tenth, and fif¬ 
teenth legions were sta¬ 
tioned in Judea. Roman 
historians speak of the 
Italian band as a part of 
the tenth legion. 

2. “A devout man” 
means one who worshiped 
the true God. Yet he 
was a gentile, and a 
Roman soldier. Though 
not even a proselyte to 
I the Jewish religion, he 

seems to have observed 
i their hours of prayer, 

which were the third, 

I sixth, and ninth hours, or 

I nine, twelve, and three 

•j o’clock. The first was the 

hour of the morning sac¬ 
rifice ; the last, the evening 
! sacrifice. 


His people, 
remembrance.” 

4. “What thou 


3. This lesson shows 
that God keeps a record 
of the prayers and alms, 
yea, of all the deeds, of 
It is all faithfully written down in His “book of 


‘■‘There waS a certain man in Caesarea 
called Cornelius, a, centurion.” 


oughtest to do.” Evidently Cornelius had 




73 


been perplexed to know his duty concerning some matter, and 
had been praying about it. The angel might have told him what 
to do, but instead, directed him to send for one of Christ’s 
representatives in the church He had left on earth. Again, 
as in the case of Paul, we see that God expects His church 
to be the channel of light and blessing on earth. 

5. God knows exactly where each one lives, whether on the 
street called Straight or in the tanner’s house by the seaside. 
He knows where every one who studies these lessons lives; and 
more than all else. He knows how each one lives. 

6. Cornelius not only served God himself, but was faith¬ 
ful in teaching the members of his household to worship and 
serve the Lord. It seems also that his influence extended to 
his soldiers. 

7. The houses in Judea were built with flat roofs, upon which 
the people walked, talked, meditated, and prayed. It was a 
usual place for prayer. The roof was protected by a low wall, 
which screened the worshipers from the observation of people 
on other roofs. 

8. “All manner of beasts,” both those considered clean and 
those considered unclean. “Four corners” represents corners of 
the earth. All mankind was represented in the sheet. Peter had 
been taught by the law of Moses that some animals are clean, 
others unclean. The laws of the rabbis had taught him to make 
the same distinction among men,— to regard the Jew as clean, 
the gentile unclean. 

9. While Peter meditated upon the vision, wondering what 
it meant, the messengers came, and their request helped him 
to understand the meaning of what he had seen in the vision. 


74 


XXIIL CORNELIUS BAPTIZED 


Study Acts 10: 19-48. 


1. What did the Spirit tell Peter to do? 

2. How did the men deliver their message? 

3. When did Peter start for Caesarea? Who accompanied him 

4. Who were gathered at the home of Cornelius? 

5. Why would Peter not allow Cornelius to worship him? 

6. What was unlawful for a Jew to do? 

7. How did Cornelius relate his experience? 

8. What did Peter now perceive? 

9. What had God sent to the children of Israel? 

10. Where was the word preached? When? 

11. Who were witnesses of all that Jesus did? 

12. What-had Jesus commanded them to testify? 

13. While Peter was speaking, what occurred? 

14. Who were astonished? Why? 

15. What did Peter ask concerning their baptism? 


Readings 


Deut. 10: 17 
2 Chron. 19:7 
Job 34: 19 

Rom. 2: 11; 3:29, 30; 


Eph. 2: 11-22 
Acts 11: 12-14 
Rev. 19: 10; 22: 8, 9 
John 4:9; 18: 28 
Matt. 28: 2, 3 
Heb. 6: 10 
A. A., Chap. XIV 


10: 11-13 
1 Peter 1: 17 
Gal. 3:27-29 


Outline Acts 10. 

Memory Verse 

Of a truth I perceive that God is no respecter of persons 
but in every nation he that feareth Him, and worketh right 
eousness, is accepted with Him. Acts 10: 34, 35. 


75 


Notes 

1. He called them in. Because they were gentiles they stood 
outside until he asked them to come in. He lodged them. Al¬ 
ready Peter saw and accepted enough of the vision to cause him 
to treat these gentiles with courteous hospitality. 

2. “Certain brethren from Joppa accompanied him/’ doubtless 
as witnesses of all that should be said and done. 

3. “Cornelius waited,” after assembling a large company of 
relatives and friends. This shows that he had perfect faith that 
some one would come to teach them. 

4. “Worshiped.” Cornelius, though a true servant of God, 
had not yet learned that only God is to be worshiped. Probably 
in his earlier life he had worshiped the gods, and still sup¬ 
posed that any being of a superior order was a lawful object 
of worship. 

5. “Ye know.” Without doubt there were many present who 
knew the exclusive customs of the Jews. To these Peter speaks 
as witnesses that he, by coming into the house of Cornelius, 
was doing an unusual thing. 

“Without gainsaying,” without questioning whether he ought 
to do so. He knew he ought, because God had shown him. 

6. “That word, I say, ye know.” Peter here refers to their 
knowledge of the events in the life of Christ. 

“Anointed” by the Holy Ghost at His baptism. Jesus then 
became the Messiah. 

“We are witnesses.” Peter may refer not only to the 
apostles, but also to the six brethren who accompanied him. 

7. “In the land of the Jews, and in Jerusalem.” Jerusalem 
had special privileges and distinction that the rest of the land 
did not have. It is often mentioned as if in a sense separate 
from the land of which it is the capital. 

8. They received the Holy Ghost before they were baptized, 
which proved conclusively that the gentiles were accepted with 
God the same as the Jews, and therefore as worthy of baptism. 


76 


XXIV. PETER’S REPLY TO HIS BRETHREN 

Study Acts 11: 1-18. 

1. What did the apostles and brethren in Judea hear? 

2. Who contended with Peter? Where? 

3. Of what did they accuse him? 

4. How fully did Peter relate his experience? 

5. What had he seen in vision? ^ 

6. What was he commanded to do? 

7. When he protested, what did God tell him? 

8. Who was waiting at the door? 

9. What did the Spirit direct him to do? 

10. How many brethren accompanied him to Caesarea? 

11. What did he say Cornelius had told him? 

12. What had occurred when Peter began to speak to the gentiles? 

13. What had this caused Peter to remember? 

14. By what argument did he justify his own course of action? 

15. When the brethren heard Peter’s experience, what did they 

say? 

Memory Verse 

Forasmuch then as God gave them the like gift as He did 
unto us, who believed on the Lord Jesus Christ; what was I, 
that I could withstand God? Acts 11:17. 

Notes 

1. The brethren complained not because the gentiles had 
accepted the gospel, but because Peter had associated with them 
in so familiar a manner. Peter defended himself simply by re¬ 
lating all the circumstances. He entered into no labored argu¬ 
ment, but drew a few plain conclusions. His words convinced 
the brethren that God accepted the gentiles. 

2. By a succession of providential circumstances, God had 
opened the way for the gospel to be carried to the gentiles. 


77 


These were:— 

(a) Persecution which scattered believers. 

(b) Conversion of Samaritans. 

(c) Conversion of eunuch. 

(d) Conversion of Saul. 

(e) Vision of Peter. 

(f) Conversion of Cornelius. 


XXV. SPREAD OF THE GOSPEL 
Study Acts 11: 19-30. 

1. How far did the disciples go who were scattered by the great 

persecution ? 

2. To whom only did they preach? 

3. What did some men of Cyprus and Cyrene do when they 

came to Antioch? 

4. What was their success? To whom did tidings of these 

things come? 

5. Whom did the church at Jerusalem send to Antioch? 

6. What did Barnabas see when he came? 

7. How was he affected by it? How did he exhort them? 

8. What is said of his character? Of his success as a minister 

of Christ? 

9. For what purpose did he go to Tarsus? 

10. How did Paul and Barnabas spend the following year? 

11. Where were the disciples first called Christians? 

12. Who came from Jerusalem to Antioch? What did Agabus 

foretell ? 

13. When was his prophecy fulfilled? 

14. What did the disciples determine to do? 

15. By whom were their gifts taken to Jerusalem? 



78 


headings 

Acts 8: 1 Rom. 15 : 25-27 

1 Cor. 12: 28 A. A., Chap. XVI 

Outline Acts 11. 

Memory Verse 

Now they which were scattered abroad upon the persecution 
that arose about Stephen traveled as far as Phenice, and Cyprus, 
and Antioch, preaching the Word to none but unto the Jews only. 
Acts 11: 19. 

Notes 

1. Phenice was a country between Galilee and Syria on the 
coast of the Mediterranean Sea. Cyprus is an island in the 
northeastern part of the Mediterranean Sea, near the mainland. 
Antioch was a city of Syria, built by Seleucus Nicator, near the 
river Orontes. It was a Greek city, but many Romans lived 
there, and also a large number of Jews. Cyrene was a city in 
northern Africa. Find each of these countries and cities, and 
add their names to your map. 

2. The Grecians mentioned in the twentieth verse were not 
Jews that spoke the Greek language, but were people of the 
Greek race, heathen Greek who worshiped the gods of Greece 
and Rome. Many of these became Christians. The Jews usually 
spoke of all people not of their own nation as Greeks. 

3. ^The hand of the Lord’^ means the power of God was 
with them. This is why many were converted. Without this, 
even an apostle could do no good. It is only God who can 
convert the sinful heart. 

4. Barnabas was a Levite from the island of Cyprus, but 
had been in Jerusalem, we suppose, since Pentecost. He was 
sent to Antioch to assist those already there in preaching the 
gospel. He felt the need of still more workers, and went to 
Tarsus for Saul. 


79 


5. Tarsus in Cilicia was the birthplace of Saul, and his home 
before he went to Jerusalem to study under Gamaliel. Saul 
had gone to Tarsus when obliged to leave Jerusalem, which was 
five or six years before this call to Antioch, or A. D. 39 or 40. 

6. “Much people was added unto the Lord.’^ If all who 
preach the gospel had the character of Barnabas, this same 
result would more often follow the preaching of the gospel. 



ANTIOCH IN SYRIA 

7. “It was in Antioch that the disciples were first called 
Christians. The name was given them because Christ was the 
main theme of their preaching, their teaching, and their con¬ 
versation. Continually they were recounting the incidents that 
had occurred during the days of His earthly ministry, when His 
disciples were blessed with His personal presence. 

8. “Untiringly they dwelt upon His teachings and His mira¬ 
cles of healing. With quivering lips and tearful eyes they spoke 







80 


of His agony in the garden, His betrayal, trial, and execution, 
the forbearance and humility with which He had endured the 
contumely and torture imposed upon Him by His enemies, and 
the godlike pity with which He had prayed for those who per¬ 
secuted Him. His resurrection and ascension, and His work 
in heaven as the Mediator for fallen man, were topics on which 
they rejoiced to dwell.”— A. A., p. 157. 

9. The prophecy of a famine was fulfilled A. D. 45 and 
later. When a famine occurred, the Christians in Judea suf¬ 
fered probably because of the dearth in Judea, and also be¬ 
cause they had in the beginning given up all to the common 
fund, and later had been much persecuted. We may be sure 
that besides having to suffer personal harm, their possessions 
were taken from them. 

The custom of taking contributions for the poor Chris¬ 
tians of Judea was followed by Paul and others for many 
years. Rom. 15: 26; 1 Cor. 16: 1-3; 2 Cor. 9:1; Acts 24: 17. 


XXVL PETER DELIVERED FROM PRISON 

Study Acts 12: 1-23. 

1. Whom did Herod persecute? Who was killed by him? 

2. Why did he put Peter in prison? When? 

3. When did he intend to put him to death? 

4. What did the church do for Peter? 

5. How was Peter guarded the night before the day set for his 

execution ? 

6. By whom was Peter awakened? What was he told to do? 

7. How did they get out of the prison? 

8. When did the angel leave Peter? 

9. To whose home did Peter go? Who were there? 



81 


10. How did his deliverance affect them? 

11. What did Peter tell them? Where did he go? 

12. Why were the keepers at the prison put to death? 

13. Where did Herod live for some time? 

14. Why did the people of Tyre and Sidon worship him as a god? 

15. How did Herod die? Why? 

Readings 

Matt. 4: 21 
Ex. 12: 2-5; 23: 15 
John 21: 18 
Ps. 34: 7 

Outline Acts 12. 

Memory Verse 

Peter therefore was kept in prison: but prayer was made 
without ceasing of the church unto God for him. Acts 12: 5. 

Notes 

1. “Herod the king’' was Herod Agrippa I, son of Aristobulus, 
and therefore grandson of Herod the Great. He was brother 
of Herodias and nephew of Herod Antipas. After the ban¬ 
ishment of Archelaus, A. D. 7, Judea was ruled by Roman gov¬ 
ernors until A. D. 41, when Claudius Caesar made Herod Agrippa 
I king of Judea and Samaria. He was already tetrarch'of Galilee. 
Thus the dominions of Herod the Great were united under his 
grandson. He died A. D. 44, as related in this lesson. 

2. Like his grandfather, Herod Agrippa I was professedly 
a proselyte to the Jewish religion. He was a strict observer of 
the law, and was very desirous of securing the favor of the Jews, 
with the hope that their influence and support might enable 
him to retain his position and honors. 

3. Easter. “The occurrence of this word in the A. V. of 
Acts 12: 4 is chiefly noticeable as an example of want of con¬ 
sistency in the translators. In the earlier English versions 

6 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 


Dan. 3: 28; 6: 22 
Heb. 1: 14 
Ps. 33: 18, 19 
Eze. 27: 17 


Ps. 115: 1 
1 Peter 1: 24 
A. A., Chap. XV 


82 



'Easter’ had been frequently used as the translation of pascha. 
At the last revision, ‘Passover’ was substituted in all passages 
but this.”— Smith's Bible Dictionary. 

4. “Herod’s act in putting James to death was applauded 
by the Jews, though some complained of the private manner in 
which it was accomplished, maintaining that a public execution 
would have more thoroughly intimidated the believers and those 
sympathizing with them. 

5. “Herod therefore held Peter in custody, meaning still 
further to gratify the Jews by the public spectacle of his death. 
But it was suggested that it would not be safe to bring the 
veteran apostle out for execution before all the people then 
assembled in Jerusalem. It was feared that the sight of him 
being led out to die might excite the pity of the multitude.”— 
A. A., p. 






83 


6. “On what account Herod was thus displeased, is not re¬ 

lated by any historian, as far as I have been able to ascertain. 
. . . Blastus was probably a eunuch, and had considerable 

influence over his master Herod; and to reach the master, it 
is likely they bribed the chamberlain. 

7. “ ‘Their country was nourished by the king’s country.’ 
That is, they had all their supplies from Galilee; for Tyre and 
Sidon, being places of trade and commerce, with little terri¬ 
tory, were obliged to have all their provisions from the coun¬ 
tries under Herod’s jurisdiction. This had been the case even 
from the days of Solomon, as we learn from 1 Kings 5: 11.”— 
Clarke's Commentary. 

8. “Herod . . . went down to Caesarea and there exhibited 
shows and games in honor of Claudius, and made vows for 
his health. On the second day of these shows, he put on a 
garment made wholly of silver, and of a contexture most truly 
wonderful, and came into the theater early in the morning, at 
which time the silver of his garment, being illuminated by the 
first reflection of the sun’s rays, shone out after a surprising 
manner, and was so resplendent as to spread a horror over those 
who looked intently upon him: and presently his flatterers cried 
out, one from one place, and another from another, ‘He is a 
god,’ and they added, ‘Be thou merciful to us, for although we 
have hitherto reverenced thee only as a man, yet shall we hence¬ 
forth own thee as superior to mortal nature.’ Nor did the king 
rebuke nor reject their impious flattery. But looking up, he saw 
an owl on a certain rope over his head, and immediately con¬ 
ceived that this bird was to him a messenger of ill tidings; and 
he fell into the deepest sorrow; a severe pain also arose in his 
bowels, and he died after five days severe illness.”— Josephus. 

9. “The same angel who had come from the royal courts 
to rescue Peter, had been the messenger of wrath and judg¬ 
ment to Herod. . . . This demonstration of divine justice had 
a powerful influence upon the people. The tidings that the 


84 


apostle of Christ had been miraculously delivered from prison 
and death, while his persecutor had been stricken down by the 
curse of God, were borne to all lands, and became the means 
of leading many to a belief in Christ.”—A. A., p. 152, 


SUMMARY OF THE FIRST PERIOD 

This period begins with the ascension of Christ. The first 
“act” of the apostles was to choose Matthias to fill the place left 
vacant by the death of Judas. This was followed by the events 
of Pentecost, when three thousand were converted in a day. 
Peter and John healed a lame man at the temple, were arrested, 
tried, but released. The fate of Ananias and Sapphira prevented 
other hypocrites from joining the disciples. The apostles per¬ 
formed marvelous wonders, which caused the two most promi¬ 
nent ones, Peter and John, to be arrested the second time. 
They were delivered from prison by an angel. Gamaliel spoke 
in their behalf. They were scourged and released. 

Stephen, one of the seven deacons chosen to attend to the 
distribution of food, was arrested because of his zeal in pro¬ 
claiming the gospel, brought before the Sanhedrin, and after 
delivering a solemn and powerful defense, was stoned. Saul, 
a pupil of Gamaliel’s, was especially active in causing the death 
of Stephen, and afterward led the great persecution against the 
disciples, but on his way to Damascus he was converted. He 
spent three years in Arabia, returned to Damascus, preached the 
gospel in that city, escaped from it in a basket let down over 
the wall, and went to Jerusalem, where he remained but fifteen 
days because of the attempt of the Jews to kill him. He escaped 
safely from Jerusalem, and went to his old home at Tarsus in 
Cilicia. There he remained until Barnabas sought him out to 
help him in the work at Antioch, where they labored together for 



85 



DAMASCUS 




86 


a year. The prophet Agabus having prophesied of a famine, the 
believers gathered alms and sent it to the brethren in Judea by 
the hands of Barnabas and Saul. 

Those who were scattered abroad by the great persecution 
“went ever 3 rwhere preaching the Word.” Philip went to Samaria. 
He was very successful. Peter and John were sent to assist him. 
Peter rebuked Simon Magus. Philip was called by an angel to 
go on a journey. He met a eunuch going home to Ethiopia from 
Jerusalem, and baptized him. Then the Spirit of the Lord caught 
away Philip. He was at Azotus, and preached in all the cities 
on the coast, until he came to Csesarea, where he afterward made 
his home. 

Peter, in visiting all the disciples in Judea, healed ^neas 
at Lydda, and raised Dorcas to life at Joppa, where he tarried 
for some time with Simon the tanner. Here he had his vision 
of the sheet, and was called to Csesarea to preach the gospel to 
Cornelius, a gentile. By this experience he learned that God 
accepted and loved the gentiles the same as the Jews. He was 
called to account for his association and fellowship with gentiles, 
and ably defended himself by relating his experience. 

The first persecution of the followers of Christ was instigated 
by the Jewish leaders. Later Herod the king, to please the 
Jews, beheaded James and imprisoned Peter, who was delivered 
by an angel. Soon after, Herod, while receiving divine honors, 
suffered an awful death at Csesarea. 

The disciples who carried the gospel to Antioch met with 
such wonderful success that the church at Jerusalem sent Bar¬ 
nabas to assist them. The believers were first called Christians 
at Antioch. This city became the headquarters of the work 
among the gentiles. 

The center of the work of this period is Jerusalem; the central 
figure, if there be one, is Peter, hence the first twelve chapters 
of the “Acts” are sometimes called the Petrine portion, and the 
remaining chapters are called the Pauline portion, of this book. 


87 


REVIEW 

1. How many books of the Bible did Luke write? Name them. 

2. To whom did he address them? 

3. How many days was Jesus on earth after His resurrection? 

4. What special promise did Jesus make to His disciples both 

before His death and after His resurrection? 

5. From what mountain did Jesus ascend? In what manner? 

6. Will He come to earth again? How? 

7. How did Judas die? Where? 

8. Who was chosen to take the place of Judas among the 

apostles ? How ? 

9. What was the feast of Pentecost? When was it held? 

10. How many days were there between the ascension of Christ 

and the day of Pentecost? 

11. How did the disciples spend this time? 

12. How was Jesus' promise fulfilled? 

13. What power was given to the disciples? 

14. In how many different languages did the disciples speak? 

15. What prophecy was fulfilled by this manifestation of the 

Spirit? 

16. What prophecy of the resurrection of Christ did David give? 

17. How did Peter show that this prophecy did not apply to 

David himself? 

18. How many were converted on the day of Pentecost? 

19. What did these disciples do with their property? 

20. What miracle was performed at the Beautiful Gate of the 

temple ? By whom ? 

21. How many of the prophets prophesied of the life and works 

of Jesus? 

22. Why, when, where, and by whom were Peter and John 

first arrested? 

23. What questions were asked them? 

24. How did Peter, in his reply, show the power of Jesus' name? 


88 


25. What sentence was pronounced upon Peter and John? How 

was it received? 

26. How were the believers affected by this experience? 

27. Who was Barnabas? 

28. What man and his wife tried to deceive the apostles? 

29. To whom did they lie? What was their fate? 

30. What wonderful miracles were performed by the apostles 

at this time? 

31. Why were Peter and John arrested the second time? 

32. How were they delivered from prison? 

33. Of what were they accused? How did they answer? 

34. What great Jewish teacher spoke to the council? What 

did he say? 

35. How were the disciples punished? Over what did they 

rejoice? 

36. What two classes of Jews were among the disciples? 

37. What complaint did one make against the other? 

38. Name the seven deacons. Why were they appointed? 

39. Which one of them was arrested and brought before the 

council ? 

40. Give a synopsis of Stephen’s defense. 

41. Why did he close it so abruptly? 

42. How was he put to death? 

43. Who was the leader in the great persecution of the disciples? 

44. To what cities and countries were the disciples scattered by 

the great persecution? 

45. In what city was there great joy? Why? 

46. What was the sin of Simon the sorcerer? 

47. Why were Peter and John sent to Samaria? 

48. Which one of the deacons was sent on a long journey? 

By whom? 

49. Whom did he meet near Gaza? 

50. What was the man reading? Where and how was he 

baptized ? 


89 


51. Who obtained permission to arrest the disciples at Damascus? 

52. Who met him near Damascus? How? 

53. How long was he blind? How did he receive his sight? 

54. To what place did Saul go from Damascus? 

55. After he returned to Damascus, how did he escape from 

that city? 

56. How many days did he spend at Jerusalem? Why no longer? 

57. Which of the apostles only did Saul meet at Jerusalem? 

58. Where did Saul go from Jerusalem? 

59. What miracle did Peter perform at Lydda? 

60. What woman was raised to life at Joppa? 

61. In whose home did Peter live at Joppa? 

62. What Roman soldier was a very godly man? 

63. What assurance was given him that his ways pleased the 

Lord? 

64. Where did he live? Was he a Jew or a gentile? 

65. Relate the vision by which Peter learned that there is sal¬ 

vation for the gentiles. 

66. In what other way was this shown to Peter? 

67. In what respect was Peter’s sermon to Cornelius and his 

household different from those he spoke to the Jews? 

68. Who was accused of eating with gentiles? 

69. How did he show that God accepted the gentiles the same as 

He did the Jews? 

70. Who first carried the gospel to Antioch? 

71. What two men labored at Antioch a whole year? 

72. Where were the disciples first called Christians? 

73. Which one of the twelve apostles was killed by Herod? 

74. When, where, why, and by whom was Peter imprisoned 

the third time? 

75. How was he delivered? 

76. At whose home in Jerusalem was a prayer meeting held? 

77. For what were the disciples praying? 


90 


78. What and where are the following? — Jerusalem, Antioch, 

Samaria, Gaza, Ethiopia, Egypt, Joppa, Phenice, C 3 ^rus, 
Damascus, Arabia, Crete, Gyrene, Tarsus, Mesopotamia, 
Rome. 

79. By whom and under what circumstances were the following 

words spoken ? — 

“For John truly baptized with water; but ye shall be bap¬ 
tized with the Holy Ghost not many days hence.” 

80. “Let his habitation be desolate, and let no man dwell 

therein: and his bishopric let another take.” 

81. “These men are full of new wine.” 

82. “Because Thou wilt not leave My soul in hell, neither wilt 

Thou suffer Thine Holy One to see corruption.” 

83. “Repent, and be baptized every one of you in the name of 

Jesus Christ for the remission of sins, and ye shall 
receive the gift of the Holy Ghost.” 

84. “Silver and gold have I none; but such as I have give I 

thee: In the name of Jesus Christ of Nazareth rise up 
and walk.” 

85. “And His name through faith in His name hath made this 

man strong, whom ye see and know: yea, the faith which 
is by Him hath given him this perfect soundness in the 
presence of you all.” 

86. “Repent ye therefore, and be converted, that your sins may 

be blotted out, when the times of refreshing shall come 
from the presence of the Lord.” 

87. “Whether it be right in the sight of God to hearken unto 

you more than unto God, judge ye.” 

88. “Why hath Satan filled thine heart to lie to the Holy Ghost, 

and to keep back part of the price of the land?” 

89. “Go, stand and speak in the temple to the people all the 

words of this life.” 

90. “We ought to obey God rather than men.” 

91. “Refrain from these men, and let them alone: for if this 

counsel or this work be of men, it will come to naught: 


91 


but if it be of God, ye can not overthrow it; lest haply 
ye be found even to fight against God/' 

92. “It is not reason that we should leave the word of God, 

and serve tables." 

93. “Behold, I see the heavens opened, and the Son of man 

standing on the right hand of God." 

94. “Lord Jesus, receive my spirit." 

95. “Lord, lay not this sin to their charge." 

96. “Give me also this power, that on whomsoever I lay hands, 

he may receive the Holy Ghost." 

97. “Thy money perish with thee, because thou hast thought 

that the gift of God may be purchased with money." 

98. “I perceive that thou art in the gall of bitterness, and in 

the bond of iniquity." 

99. “Understandest thou what thou readest?" 

100. “I pray thee, of whom speaketh the prophet this? of him¬ 

self, or of some other man?" 

101. “Saul, Saul, why persecutes! thou Me?" 

102. “Brother Saul, the Lord, even Jesus, that appeared unto 

thee in the way as thou earnest, hath sent me, that thou 
mightest receive thy sight, and be filled with the Holy 
Ghost." 

103. “Thy prayers and thine alms are come up for a memorial 

before God." 

104. “Of a truth I perceive that God is no respecter of persons: 

but in every nation he that feareth Him, and worketh 
righteousness, is accepted with Him." 

105. “Can any man forbid water, that these should not be bap¬ 

tized, which have received the Holy Ghost as well as we?" 

106. “Thou wentest in to men uncircumcised, and didst eat with 

them." 

107. “Then hath God also to the gentiles granted repentance 

unto life." 

108. “Arise up quickly." 


92 


109. '‘Now I know of a surety, that the Lord hath sent His 

angel, and hath delivered me out of the hand of Herod, 
and from all the expectation of the people of the Jews.” 

110. “Go show these things unto James, and to the brethren.” 

111. “The people gave a shout, saying. It is the voice of a god, 

and not of a man.” 






cfftSiq 




W3g<^S®* £ 


’iff^ 


uIUi.c# 


•O 




f \ fe ^ ^^**^*^v 






























CHAPTER FIVE 

The First Missionary Journey 


XXVIL PAUL AND BARNABAS SENT ON A MISSION 
Study Acts 12: 24, 25; 13: 1-13. 


1. From what place did Saul and Barnabas return to Antioch? 

2. Upon what errand had they been to Jerusalem? 

3. Name the prophets and other teachers in the church at 

Antioch. 

4. What did the Holy Ghost direct them to do? 

5. By whom were Saul and Barnabas sent forth? 

6. Where is Seleucia? To what island did they sail? 

7. In what city did they preach? 

8. To what city did they come on the other side of the island? 

9. What false prophet lived at Paphos‘S 

10. Who was Sergius Paulus? 

11. Why did Paul rebuke Bar-jesus, or El 3 nnas? 

12. What judgment was visited upon him? 

13. Whose faith was strengthened by this miracle? 

14. In what province is Perga? 

15. Who there left Paul and Barnabas, and returned to Jeru¬ 

salem ? 

16. To what city did the apostles go? 

Readings 

Rom. 16:21; 1:1; 10: 15 Matt. 13: 38 

Isa. 42: 8 Acts 15: 37-39 

Ex. 7:11 John 8:44 

2 Tim. 3: 8, 9 A. A. Chaps. XVI and XVII 

(93) 



94 


Draw a map and locate upon it all places mentioned in the 
lesson. 

Memory Verse 

The word of God grew and multiplied. Acts 12: 24. 

Notes 

1. Paul and Barnabas returned to Antioch from Jerusalem, 
where they had been to deliver the contribution collected for 
the poor brethren in Judea. Acts 11: 27-30. 

2. “Simeon-Niger, or Simon the Black, either because of his 

complexion or his hair. It was on reasons of this kind that sur¬ 
names, surnoms, name upon name, were first imposed. . . . 

3. “Manaen. Our margin has given the proper meaning of 
the original word, a foster brother; i. e., Manaen was the son 
of the woman who nursed Herod Antipas; and the son, also, 
whose milk the young Herod shared.’^— Clarke’s Commentai'y. 

4. '‘Bar-jesus, i, e., son of Jesus or Joshua. . . . 'Elymas' 
is the interpretation of the word ‘sorcerer,^ not of the word ‘Bar- 
jesus,' as some have imagined.’’— Clarke’s Commentary. 

5. John Mark was a nephew of Barnabas. His mother was 
a Christian. It was at her home that the disciples met to pray 
for Peter’s deliverance. Acts 12: 12. 

6. “Both Paul and Barnabas had already received their 
commission from God Himself, and the ceremony of the laying 
on of hands added no new grace or virtual qualification. It 
was an acknowledged form of designation to an appointed office, 
and a recognition of one’s authority in that office. By it the 
seal of the church was set upon the work of God.”— A. A,, 

pp. 161, 162. 


95 


XXVIII. PAUL’S SERMON AT ANTIOCH 

Study Acts 13: 14-37. 

1. To what city in Pisidia did the apostles come? 

2. Where did they go on the Sabbath? 

3. What was read in the synagogue? 

4. What invitation did they receive from the rulers of the 

synagogue ? 

5. How did Paul address them? 

6. Where did he begin the history of Israel? 

7. How long were the children of Israel in the wilderness? 

8. How did they gain possession of Canaan? 

9. How long were they ruled by judges? 

10. Why did God give them a king? How long did he reign? 

11. What did God say of David? 

12. Of whose seed had God raised up a Saviour? 

13. Who preached the baptism of repentance before Jesus came? 

14. What testimony did John bear concerning Jesus? 

15. To whom is salvation given? 

16. Why did the Jews condemn and slay the Saviour? 

17. Of all that had been written concerning Jesus, how much 

was fulfilled? 

18. Who raised Him from the dead? 

19. What glad tidings did Paul proclaim? 

20. What prophecies concerning Christ, given through David, 

had been fulfilled? 

Readings 

Hosea 13: 11 1 Cor. 2:8 

Ps. 16: 10; 89: 20 A. A., Chap. XVII 

Memory Verse 

I have found David the son of Jesse, a man after Mine own 
heart, which shall fulfill all My will. Of this man’s seed hath 


96 


God according to His promise raised unto Israel a Saviour, Jesus. 
Acts 13: 22, 23. 

Notes 

1. The Antioch of this lesson is Antioch in Pisidia. Though 
Antioch was a gentile city, there were Jews in the place, and 
they had here a synagogue. Paul here, as in every other place, 
first preached the gospel to the Jews. He addressed those who 
were Jews by birth and those who were proselytes to the 
Jewish religion. 

2. The rabbis frequently call the Canaanites, Hittites, Gir- 
gashites, Amorites, Hivites, Perizzites, and Jebusites the seven 
nations. See Clarke’s Commentary on Acts 13: 19. 

3. “The sure mercies of David” are a resurrection from the 
dead of the Seed of David, which is Christ, and through Him, 
of all who believe in Him. 

4. “David died, was buried, and never rose again; therefore 
David can not be the person spoken of here. The words are 
true of some other person, and they can be applied to Jesus 
Christ only; and in Him they are most exactly fulfilled.”— 
Clarke's Commentary. 

5. “The Spirit of God accompanied the words that were 
spoken, and hearts were touched. The apostle’s appeal to Old 
Testament prophecies, and his declaration that these had been 
fulfilled in the ministry of Jesus of Nazareth, carried conviction 
to many a soul longing for the advent of the promised Messiah. 
And the speaker’s words of assurance that the ‘glad tidings’ of 
salvation were for Jew and gentile alike, brought hope and joy 
to those who had not been numbered among the children of 
Abraham according to the flesh.”— A. A., pp. 172, 173. 


97 


XXIX. PAUL’S SERMON AT ANTIOCH (CONTINUED) 
Study Acts 13: 38-52. 

1. Through whom is there forgiveness of sins? 

2. By whom are men justified? 

3. Could they be justified by the law of Moses? 

4. What had the prophets spoken concerning them? 

5. What did the gentiles beseech the apostles to do? 

6. Who followed Paul and Barnabas after the service? 

7. Who came to hear the Word the next Sabbath? 

8. Who contradicted Paul? Why? 

9. What did Paul and Barnabas say to them? 

10. To whom did they turn? Who were made glad by this? 

11. Where was the word of the Lord published? 

12. How were Paul and Barnabas compelled to leave? 

13. What did they do when they left? 

14. To what city did they next come? 

15. With what were the disciples filled? 

Readings 

Rom. 8: 3 
Heb. 7: 19 
Matt. 10: 6-15 
Rom. 1: 16 

Outline Acts 13. 

Locate Antioch and Iconium on your map. 

Memory Verse 

Then Paul and Barnabas waxed bold, and said, “It was neces¬ 
sary that the word of God should first have been spoken to you: 
but seeing ye put it from you, and judge yourselves unworthy of 
everlasting life, lo, we turn to the gentiles.” Acts 13: 46. 

7 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 


Deut. 32: 21 
Isa. 42: 6; 49: 6 
A. A., Chap. XVII 


98 


1. “In turning to the gentiles in Antioch of Pisidia, Paul 
and Barnabas did not cease laboring for the Jews elsewhere, 
wherever there was a favorable opportunity to gain ■ a hearing. 
Later, in Thessalonica, in Corinth, in Ephesus, and in other im¬ 
portant centers, Paul and his companions in labor preached the 
gospel to both Jews and gentiles. But their chief energies were 
henceforth directed toward the building up of the kingdom of 
God in heathen territory, among peoples who had but little or 
no knowledge of the true God and of His Son. 

2. “The hearts of Paul and his associate workers were drawn 
out in behalf of those who were 'without Christ, being aliens 
from the commonwealth of Israel, and strangers from the 
covenants of promise, having no hope, and without God in the 
world.’ Through the untiring ministrations of the apostles to 
the gentiles, the ‘strangers and foreigners’ who ‘sometimes were 
far off’ learned that they had been ‘made nigh by the blood of 
Christ,’ and that through faith in His atoning sacrifice, they 
might become ‘fellow citizens with the saints, and of the house¬ 
hold of God.’ . . . 

3. “The apostles were not discouraged by this treatment; 
they remembered the words of their Master: ‘Blessed are ye, 
when men shall revile you, and persecute you, and shall say 
all manner of evil against you falsely, for My sake. Rejoice, 
and be exceeding glad: for great is your reward in heaven: for 
so persecuted they the prophets which were before you.’ ”— 
A. A., pp. 17Jf-176, 


XXX. PAUL AND BARNABAS AT ICONIUM AND LYSTRA 

Study Acts 14: 1-18. 

1. To what place in Iconium did the apostles go together? 

2. What was the result of their preaching? 



99 


3. Who prejudiced the gentiles? 

4. Were all the people turned against the apostles? 

5. What was plotted against the apostles? 

6. To what place did they flee? 

7. What afflicted person was at Lystra? 

8. What did Paul perceive? How was the man healed? 

9. What did the people say? What did they call Barnabas? 

Paul? 

10. What did the priest of Jupiter prepare to do? 

11. When Paul and Barnabas learned the intentions of the people, 

what did they do? 

12. Whom did they tell the people to worship? 

13. What had God allowed the nations to do in the past? 

14. What evidence, of the true God had they always had? 

15. Did the people willingly give up their plan to sacrifice to 

the apostles? 

Readings 

2 Tim. 3: 10-12 Matt. 10: 23 

Heb. 2: 3, 4 A. A., Chap. XVIII 

Locate Iconium, Lystra, Derbe, and Lycaonia on the map. 

Memory Verse 

Sirs, why do ye these things? We also are men of like 
passions with you, and preach unto you that ye should turn from 
these vanities unto the living God, which made heaven, and 
earth, and the sea, and all things that are therein. Acts 14: 15. 

Notes 

1. '‘Driven by persecution from Iconium, the apostles went 
to Lystra and Derbe in Lycaonia. These towns were inhabited 
largely by a heathen, superstitious people, but among them were 
some who were willing to hear and accept the gospel message. In 
these places and in the surrounding country, the apostles decided 
to labor, hoping to avoid Jewish prejudice and persecution. . . . 


100 


2. “The apostles endeavored to impart to these idolaters a 
knowledge of God the Creator, and of His Son, the Saviour of 
the human race. . . . Thus, in the Spirit and power of God, 
Paul and Barnabas preached the gospel in Lystra. ... 

3. “ 'The gods are come down to us in the likeness of men.^ 
This statement was in harmony with a tradition of theirs that 
the gods occasionally visited the earth. Barnabas they called 
Jupiter, the father of gods, because of his venerable appear¬ 
ance, his dignified bearing, and the mildness and benevolence ex¬ 
pressed in his countenance. Paul they believed to be Mercury, 
'because he was the chief speaker,' earnest and active, and 
eloquent with words of warning and exhortation.”— A. A., 
pp, 179-181, 


XXXL PAUL AND BARNABAS RETURN TO ANTIOCH 

Study Acts 14: 19-28. 

1. Who came to Lystra? 

2. What did they persuade the people to do? 

3. Did they kill Paul? 

4. Who were about him when he rose up and went into the city? 

5. To what cities did Paul and Barnabas return? 

6. What did they tell the believers in each place? 

7. What officers were ordained in every church? 

8. Through what province did they pass on their return journey? 

9. Where did they preach the Word? 

10. To what seaport town did they come? 

11. For what city did they sail? 

12. Of what did they give a full account? 

13. Where did they remain a long time? 



101 


Readings 

2 Cor. 11: 25 Matt. 10: 38, 39; 

2 Tim. 3: 10-15; 2: 8-12 16: 24-26 

A. A., Chap. XVIII 

Outline Acts 14. 

Locate Derbe. and trace the return journey of the apostles, 
on the map. 

Memory Verse 

When they had ordained them elders in every church, and 
had prayed with fasting, they commended them to the Lord, on 
whom they believed. Acts 14: 23. 

Notes 

1. “The disappointment that the Lystrians had suffered in 
being refused the privilege of offering sacrifice to the apostles, 
prepared them to turn against Paul and Barnabas with an 
enthusiasm approaching that with which they had hailed them 
as gods. Incited by the Jews, they planned to attack the apostles 
by force. The Jews charged them not to allow Paul an oppor¬ 
tunity to speak, alleging that if they were to grant him this 
privilege, he would bewitch the people. . . . 

2. “Yielding to the influence of evil, the Lystrians became 
possessed with a satanic fury, and seizing Paul, mercilessly 
stoned him. ... In this dark and trying hour, the company 
of Lystrian believers, who through the ministry of Paul and 
Barnabas had been converted to the faith of Jesus, remained 
loyal and true. . . . 

3. “Among those who had been converted at Lystra, and 
who were eyewitnesses of the sufferings of Paul, was one who 
was afterward to become a prominent worker for Christ, and 
who was to share with the apostle the trials and the joys of 
pioneer service in difficult fields. This was a young man named 
Timothy. When Paul was dragged out of the city, this youth¬ 
ful disciple was among the number who took their stand beside 


102 


his apparently lifeless body, and who saw him arise, bruised 
and covered with blood, but with praises upon his lips because 
he had been permitted to suffer for the sake of Christ. . . . 

4. “As an important factor in the spiritual growth of the 
new converts, the apostles were careful to surround them with 
the safeguards of gospel order. Churches were duly organized in 
all places in Lycaonia and Pisidia where there were believers. 
Officers were appointed in each church, and proper order and 
system was established for the conduct of all the affairs per¬ 
taining to the spiritual welfare of the believers. . . . 

5. “And Paul did not forget the churches thus established. 
. . . However small a company might be, it was nevertheless 
the object of his constant solicitude. . . . When men of 
promise and ability were converted, as in the case of Timothy, 
Paul and Barnabas sought earnestly to show them the necessity 
of laboring in the vineyard. . . . This careful training of new 
converts was an important factor in the remarkable success that 
attended Paul and Barnabas as they preached the gospel in 
heathen lands.” — A, A., pp. 183-187. 

6. “ ‘And there [at Antioch] they abode long time.’ How 
long the apostles tarried here we can not tell, but we hear no 
more of them till the council of Jerusalem mentioned in the fol¬ 
lowing chapter, which is generally supposed to have been held 
in the year 51 of our Lord; and if the transactions of this 
chapter took place in A. D. 46, as chronologers think, then there 
are five whole years of Paul’s ministry, and that of • other 
apostles, which St. Luke passes by in perfect silence. 

“It is very likely that all this time Paul and Barnabas were 
employed in extending the work of God through the different 
provinces contiguous to Antioch. . . . Many of the tribulations 
through which the apostle Paul passed are not mentioned by St. 
Luke, particularly those of which he himself speaks in 2 Cor. 
11:23-27. . . . Probably most of these happened in the five 
years which elapsed between the apostles’ return to Antioch, 
and the council of Jerusalem.”— Clarke's Commentary. 


103 











/ 


Di’aw an outline map like this one and upon it sketch Paul’s first missionary journey. 



























CHAPTER SIX 

The First Council of the Christian Church 


XXXII. THE COUNCIL AT JERUSALEM (A. D. 51) 

Study Acts 15: 1-11. 

1. What did certain men teach at Antioch? 

2. From what country did they come? Who disputed with them? 

3. What did the brethren at Antioch decide to do? 

4. Who brought Paul and Barnabas on their way? 

5. Through what provinces did they pass? 

6. What caused great joy to all the brethren? 

7. By whom were the apostles received at Jerusalem? 

8. How long since Paul had been there before? 

9. What did they declare to their brethren? Gal. 2: 1, 2. 

10. What did the Pharisees say was necessary? 

11. Who assembled to consider the matter? 

12. Was the question easily decided? 

13. What did Peter say the brethren knew? 

14. What had God given to gentile as well as to Jewish converts? 

15. Had God made any difference between them? 

16. What had been an unbearable yoke? How are all men saved? 


Readings 

John 7: 22, 23 
Rom. 4: 8-13 


Gal. 5: 1-6 
Phil. 3: 2, 3 


Gen. 17: 10-14 
A. A., Chap. XIX 


Draw a map and locate on it Phenice, Samaria, and Judea, 
and trace the apostles’ journey from Antioch to Jerusalem. 


( 104 ) 



105 


Memory Verse 

Now therefore why tempt ye God, to put a yoke upon the 
neck of the disciples, which neither our fathers nor we were 
able to bear? But we believe that through the grace of the 
Lord Jesus Christ we shall be saved, even as they. Acts 15: 10, 11. 

Notes 

1. “The Jewish converts generally were not inclined to move 
as rapidly as the providence of God opened the way. From the 
result of the apostles' labors among the gentiles it was evident 
that the converts among the latter people would far exceed the 
Jewish converts in number. The Jews feared that if the restric¬ 
tions and ceremonies of their law were not made obligatory upon 
the gentiles as a condition of church fellowship, the national 
peculiarities of the Jews, which had hitherto kept them distinct 
from all other people, would finally disappear from among those 
who received the gospel message. 

2. “The Jews had always prided themselves upon their divinely 
appointed services; and many of those who had been converted 
to the faith of Christ still felt that since God had once clearly 
outlined the Hebrew manner of worship, it was improbable that 
He would ever authorize a change in any of its specifications. 
They insisted that the Jewish laws and ceremonies should be 
incorporated into the rites of the Christian religion. 

3. “They were slow to discern that all the sacrificial offerings 
had but prefigured the death of the Son of God, in which type 
met antitype, and after which the rites and ceremonies of the 
Mosaic dispensation were no longer binding. . . . 

4. “At Jerusalem, the delegates from Antioch met the breth¬ 
ren of the various churches, who had gathered for a general 
meeting; and to them they related the success that had attended 
their ministry among the gentiles. They then gave a clear 
outline of the confusion that had resulted because certain con¬ 
verted Pharisees had gone to Antioch declaring that in order to 


106 


be saved, the gentile converts must be circumcised and keep the 
law of Moses. 

5. “This question was warmly discussed in the assembly. 
Intimately connected with the question of circumcision, were 
several others demanding careful study. One was the problem 
as to what attitude should be taken toward the use of meats 
offered to idols. Many of the gentile converts were living among 
ignorant and superstitious people, who made frequent sacrifices 
and offerings to idols. 

6. “The priests of this heathen worship carried on an ex¬ 
tensive merchandise with the. offerings brought to them; and 
the Jews feared that the gentile converts would bring Christianity 
into disrepute by purchasing that which had been offered to 
idols, thereby sanctioning, in some measure, idolatrous customs. 

7. “Again, the gentiles were accustomed to eat the flesh of 
animals that had been strangled, while the Jews had been divinely 
instructed that when beasts were killed for food particular care 
was to be taken that the blood should flow from the body, 
otherwise the meat would not be regarded as wholesome. 

8. “God had given these injunctions to the Jews for the 
purpose of preserving their health. The Jews regarded it as 
sinful to use blood as an article of diet. They held that the 
blood was the life, and that the shedding of blood was in con¬ 
sequence of sin. 

9. “The gentiles, on the contrary, practiced catching the blood 
which flowed from the sacrificial victim, and using it in the 
preparation of food. The Jews could not believe that they ought 
to change the customs they had adopted under the special di¬ 
rection of God. Therefore as things then stood, if Jew and 
gentile should attempt to eat at the same table, the former 
would be shocked and outraged by the latter. 

10. “The gentiles, and especially the Greeks, were extremely 
licentious; and there was danger that some unconverted in 
heart, would make a profession of faith without renouncing their 


107 


evil practices. The Jewish Christians could not tolerate im¬ 
morality that was not even regarded as criminal by the heathen. 

11. “The Jews, therefore, held it as highly proper that cir¬ 
cumcision and the observance of the ceremonial law should be 
enjoined on the gentile converts as a test of their sincerity and 
devotion. . . . 

12. “The various points involved in the settlement of the 
main question at issue seemed to present before the council in¬ 
surmountable difficulties. . . . Peter reasoned that the Holy 
Spirit had decided the matter under dispute by descending with 
equal power upon the uncircumcised gentiles and the circum¬ 
cised Jews. . . . 

13. “This yoke was not the law of ten commandments, as 
some who oppose the binding claims of the law assert; Peter 
here referred to the law of ceremonies, which was made null 
and void by the crucifixion of Christ. Peter’s address brought 
the assembly to a point where they could listen with patience to 
Paul and Barnabas, who related their experience in working 
for the gentiles.”— A. A., pp. lS9-19Jf. 


XXXIII. THE DECISION OF THE COUNCIL 

Study Acts 15: 12-29. 

) 

1. To whom did the council next listen? 

2. What did Paul and Barnabas tell them? 

3. How did James address them? 

4. What prophecy did he say agreed with the words of Peter? 

5. What is known to God? 

6. What sentence did James pronounce? 

7. How often were the writings of Moses read? 



108 


8. Whom was the church pleased to send with Paul and 

Barnabas ? 

9. To whom did they write letters? 

10. What did they say they had heard? 

11. What did it seem good to them to do? 

12. How did they recommend Paul and Barnabas? 

13. Who was sent with these apostles? Why? 

14. From what four things were they to abstain? 

15. Was Titus circumcised ? Gal. 2: 1-3. 

16. What thing only was required of Paul and Barnabas? 

Gal. 2: 9, 10. 

17. Why did Paul reprove Peter and Barnabas at Antioch? 

Gal. 2: 11-14. 

Readings 

Amos 9: 11, 12 1 Corinthians 8; 10: 20, 28 

Galatians 2 A. A., Chap. XIX 

Memory Verse 

It seemed good to the Holy Ghost, and to us, to lay upon you 
no greater burden than these necessary things. Acts 15: 28. 

Notes 

1. “James presided at the council, and his final decision was, 
‘Wherefore my sentence is, that we trouble not them, which from 
among the gentiles are turned to God.’ This ended the discus¬ 
sion. In this instance \ye have a refutation of the doctrine held 
by the Roman Catholic Church — that Peter was the head of the 
church. Those who, as popes, have claimed to be his successors, 
have no Scriptural foundation for their pretensions. Nothing 
in the life of Peter gives sanction to the claim that he was 
elevated above his brethren as the vicegerent of the Most 
High. . . . 

2. “James sought to impress the minds of his brethren with 


109 


the fact that, in turning to God, the gentiles had made a great 
change in their lives, and that much caution should be used not 
to trouble them with perplexing and doubtful questions of minor 
importance, lest they be discouraged in following Christ. 

3. “The gentile converts, however, were to give up the cus¬ 
toms that were inconsistent with the principles of Christianity. 
The apostles and elders therefore agreed to instruct the gentiles 
by letter to abstain from meats offered to idols, from fornication, 
from things strangled, and from blood. They were to be urged 
to keep the commandments, and to lead holy lives. They were 
also to be assured that the men who had declared circumcision 
to be binding were not authorized to do so by the apostles. . . . 

4. “The council which decided this case was composed of 
apostles and teachers who had been prominent in raising up 
the Jewish and gentile Christian churches, with chosen dele¬ 
gates from various places. Elders from Jerusalem and deputies 
from Antioch were present, and the most influential churches 
were represented. The council moved in accordance with the dic¬ 
tates of enlightened judgment, and with the dignity of a church 
established by the divine will. . . . 

5. “Not all, however, were pleased with the decision; there 
was a faction of ambitious and self-confident brethren who dis¬ 
agreed with it. . . . 

6. “When Peter, at a later date, visited Antioch, he won the 
confidence of many by his prudent conduct toward the gentile 
converts. For a time he acted in accordance with the light given 
from heaven. He so far overcame his natural prejudice as to 
sit at table with the gentile converts. But when certain Jews 
who were zealous for the ceremonial law, came from Jerusalem, 
Peter injudiciously changed his deportment toward the converts 
from paganism. . . . 

7. “Peter ‘ saw the error into which he had fallen, and im¬ 
mediately set about repairing the evil that had been wrought, 
so far as was in his power. God, who knows the end from the 


110 


beginning, permitted Peter to reveal this weakness of character, 
in order that the tried apostle might see that there was nothing 
in himself whereof he might boast. ... 

8. “God also saw that in time to come some would be so 
deluded as to claim for Peter and his pretended successors the 
exalted prerogatives that belong to God alone. And this record 
of the apostle’s weakness was to remain as a proof of his falli¬ 
bility, and of the fact that he stood in no way above the level 
of the other apostles.”— A. A., pp. 19Jf,-199. 

















CHAPTER SEVEN 
The Second Missionary Journey 


XXXIV. FROM ANTIOCH TO PHILIPPI 

Study Acts 15:30-41; 16:1-12. 

1. When the apostles returned to Antioch, who gathered to hear 

the letter read? 

2. How was the decision of the council received? 

3. Who also exhorted the people? 

4. Who continued to teach at Antioch? 

5. What did Paul propose to Barnabas? 

6. About what did they disagree? 

7. What did they finally do? 

8. To what island did Barnabas and Mark go? 

9. Through what countries did Paul and Silas travel? 

10. Did Paul ever have a different opinion of John Mark? Col. 

4: 10, 11; 2 Tim. 4: 11. 

11. To what cities did Paul and Silas come? 

12. Why did Paul desire Timotheus to join in the work? 

13. Why did he circumcise Timotheus? 

14. Under whose labors had Timotheus become a Christian? 

2 Tim. 1: 2. 

15. What had been his education? Who were his teachers? 

2 Tim. 1: 4, 5; 3: 14, 15. 

16. What did the apostles deliver to all the churches? What 

was the result? 

17. Through what provinces did they travel ? 


(Ill) 



112 


18. What did Paul see and hear in a vision? 

19. Who are meant by “we"’? Acts 16: 10. 

20. To what city in Macedonia did they go? 


Readings 
Lev. 17:11-14 
Rev. 2: 14, 20 
Rom. 16:21 
1 Cor. 4: 17 


2 Tim. 1: 2-8 


Phil. 2: 19-23 
1 Thess. 3: 2-6 
1 Tim. 1: 2 


1 Cor. 9: 20 
A. A., Chaps. XX 
and XXI 


Locate on a map all places mentioned, and trace the journey 
of the apostles. 

Outline Acts 15. 

Memory Verse 

And a vision appeared to Paul in the night; There stood a 
man of Macedonia, and prayed him, saying, “Come over into 
Macedonia, and help us.’’ Acts 16: 9. 


Notes 


1. “Barnabas was ready to go with Paul, but wished to take 
with them Mark, who had again decided to devote himself to 
the ministry. To this Paul objected. . . . He was not inclined 
to excuse Mark’s weakness in deserting the work for the safety 
and comforts of home. He urged that one with so little stamina 
was unfitted for a work requiring patience, self-denial, bravery, 
devotion, faith, and a willingness to sacrifice, if need be. even 
life itself. ... 

2. “Timothy’s father was a Greek, and his mother a Jewess. 
From a child he had known the Scriptures. The piety that he 
saw in his home life was sound and sensible. The faith of his 
mother and his grandmother in the sacred oracles was to him 
a constant reminder of the blessing in doing God’s will. The 
word of God was the rule by which these two godly women 
had guided Timothy. . . . 

3. “Timothy was a mere youth when he was chosen by God 
to be a teacher; but his principles had been so established by 


113 


his early education that he was fitted to take his place as Paul’s 
helper. And though young, he bore his responsibilities with 
Christian meekness. 

4. “As a precautionary measure, Paul wisely advised Timi 
othy to be circumcised,— not that God required it, but in ordei^ 
to remove from the minds of the Jews that which might be an 
objection to Timothy’s ministration. In his work Paul was to 
journey from city to city in many lands, and often he would 
have opportunity to preach Christ in Jewish synagogues, as well 
as in other places of assembly. If it should be known that 
one of his companions in labor was uncircumcised, his work 
might be greatly hindered by the prejudice and bigotry of the 
Jews. ... 

5. “Paul loved Timothy, his ‘own son in the faith.’ The 
great apostle often drew the younger disciple out, questioning 
him in regard to Scripture history; and as they traveled froni 
place to place, he carefully taught him how to do successful 

work. . . . 

6. “The apostle Paul felt a deep responsibility for those 
converted under his labors. Above all things he longed that 
they should be faithful. ... He trembled for the result of 
his ministry. . . . 

7. “Having visited the churches in Pisidia and the neighbor¬ 
ing region, Paul and Silas, with Timothy, pressed on into 
‘Phrygia and the region of Galatia,’ where with mighty power 
they proclaimed the glad tidings of salvation. The Galatians 
were given up to the worship of idols, but as the apostles preached 
to them, they rejoiced in the message that promised freedom 
from the thralldom of sin.”— A. A., pp. 202-207. 


8 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 


114 



“T call to remembrance the iinfei.a:ne(l faith that is in thee, which dwelt first 
in lliy grandmother l^ois, and thy mother Eunice; . . . and that from a child 
thou hast known tlie Holy Scriptures.” 




115 


XXXV. PAUL AND SILAS AT PHILIPPI 

Study Acts 16: 13-40. 

1. Where did the Jews of Philippi gather on the Sabbath for 

prayer? 

2. Who first accepted Christianity in Philippi? 

3. What gracious invitation did she give the apostles? 

4. Who followed them as they went to prayer? 

5. What did she cry after the apostles? 

6. What did Paul finally do? 

7. What did her masters do with Paul and Silas? Why? 

8. Who also rose up against the apostles? 

9. How were the apostles punished? 

10. What did they do at midnight? 

11. What was the effect of the earthquake? 

12. What was the keeper of the prison about to do? 

13. How did Paul prevent his killing himself? 

14. What anxious question did the keeper ask? 

15. To how many did Paul and Silas preach the word of the 

Lord? 

16. When were they all baptized? 

17. What order did the sergeants receive from the magistrates? 

18. What did the magistrates fear? 

19. What did the apostles do before they left Philippi? 

Readings 

2 Cor. 6: 3-10; 11: 23-28 Luke 3: 10 A. A., Chap. XXI 
Matt. 10: 16-18 Matt. 8: 34 

Outline Acts 16. 

Memory Verse 

"‘Sirs, what must I do to be saved?’' And they said, “Believe 
on the Lord Jesus Christ, and thou shalt be saved, and thy 
house.” Acts 16: 30, 31. 


IIG 


Notes 

1. “The proseucha was a place of prayer, or a place used 
for worship, where there was no synagogue. It was a large 
building uncovered, with seats as in an amphitheater. Buildings 
of this sort the Jews had by the seaside, and by the sides of 
rivers. 

2. “ ‘Lydia, a seller of purple.’ She probably had her name 



PHILIPPI 

from the province of Lydia, in which the city of Thyatira was 
situated. The Lydian women have been celebrated for their 
beautiful purple manufactures.”— Clarke’s Commentary. 

3. “A certain damsel.” “This woman was a special agent of 
Satan. . . . The words of recommendation uttered by this woman 
were an injury to the cause of truth, distracting the minds of 
the people from the teachings of the apostles, and bringing dis¬ 
repute upon the gospel; and by them many were led to believe 







117 


that the men who spoke with the Spirit and power of God 
were actuated by the same spirit as this emissary of Satan.”— 
A. A,, p. 212. 

4. “Paul and Silas felt that .to maintain the dignity of 



“The jailer . . . thrust them into the inner prison, and made their feet 

fast in the stocks.” 


Christ’s church, they must not submit to the illegal course pro¬ 
posed by the Roman magistrates. The apostles were Roman 
citizens, and it was unlawful to scourge a Roman save for the 
most flagrant crime, or to deprive him of his liberty without 
a fair trial and condemnation. , . . 










118 


5. ^‘The Philippians could but acknowledge the nobility and 
generosity of the apostles in their course of action, especially 
in forbearing to appeal to a higher power against the magistrates 
who had persecuted them. . , . Christianity was placed upon a 
high plane, and the converts to the faith were greatly strengthened. 

6. “Thus we have the establishment of the church at Philippi 
under peculiar circumstances, and its numbers steadily increased. 
Among them were men of wealth and influence, whose noble 
generosity and ready sympathy were ever on the side of right. 
They often came to the aid of the apostles in their affliction 
and pecuniary necessity. [Phil. 4: 15, 16.] 

7. “He sends also salutations from the brethren to Caesar’s 
household; for officers in the employment of the emperor had 
been converted under the labors of the apostles, and through 
the wonderful manifestation of God in their deliverance from 
prison.”— S. P., Vol. 3, pp. 385-387. 


XXXVI. AT THESSALONICA AND BEREA 
Study Acts 17: 1-15. 

1. Through what cities did the apostles pass on their way to 

Thessalonica ? 

2. What place of meeting had the Jews at Thessalonica? 

3. What was Paul’s custom? 

4. How many Sabbaths did Paul teach in the synagogue? 

5. What did he preach? 

6. Who believed the gospel at Thessalonica? 

7. Who set the city in an uproar? 

8. Whose house was assaulted? Why? 

9. Why were Jason and other brethren brought before the 

rulers ? 



119 


10. Of what were the apostles accused? 

11. Who were troubled by these things? 

12. On what conditions were Jason and the brethren released? 

13. Who sent Paul and Silas away? To what place? 

14. In what respect were the Bereans nobler than the Thessa- 

lonians? 

15. Who accepted the gospel at Berea? 

16. Who came from Thessalonica? For what purpose? 

17. What did the brethren do immediately? Who remained at 

Berea ? 

18. To what city was Paul conducted? For whom did he send 

at once? 

Readings 


Luke 4: 16; 24: 25-27, 46; 


John 5:39 
1 Thess. 1:1-3 
A. A., Chaps. XXII 
and XXIII 


23:2 

John 19:12 
1 Peter 2: 12 


Locate all places mentioned in the lesson, and trace on the 
map the apostles’ journey. 

Memory Verse 

These were more noble than those in Thessalonica, in that 
they received the Word with all readiness of mind, and searched 
the Scriptures daily, whether those things were so. Acts 17: 11. 


Notes 


1. ‘‘After leaving Philippi, Paul and Silas made their way to 
Thessalonica. Here they were given the privilege of addressing 
large congregations in the Jewish synagogue. Their appear¬ 
ance bore evidence of the shameful treatment they had recently 
received, and necessitated an explanation of what had taken 
place. . . . 

2. “In preaching to the Thessalonians, Paul appealed to the 
Old Testament prophecies concerning the Messiah. Christ in 


120 


His ministry had opened the minds of His disciples to these 
prophecies. . . . Peter, in preaching Christ, had produced his 
evidence from the Old Testament. Stephen had pursued the 
same course. And Paul also, in his ministry, appealed to the 
scriptures foretelling the birth, sufferings, death, resurrection, 
and ascension of Christ. ... 

3. ‘Taul was a believer in the second coming of Christ; so 



THESSALONICA 


clearly and forcibly did he present the truths concerning this 
event, that upon the minds of many who heard, there was made 
an impression which never wore away. . . . 

4. “The minds of the Bereans were not narrowed by preju¬ 
dice. ^ They were willing to investigate the truthfulness of the 
doctrines preached by the apostles. . . . Wherever the truths 
of the gospel are proclaimed, those who honestly desire to do 
right are led to a diligent searching of the Scriptures. . 






121 


5. ‘‘Thus persecution followed the teachers of truth from 
city to city. . . . Paul’s hasty departure from Berea deprived 
him of the opportunity he had anticipated of visiting the breth¬ 
ren at Thessalonica. 

6. “On arriving at Athens, the apostle sent the Berean breth¬ 
ren back with a message to Silas and Timothy to join him im¬ 
mediately. Timothy had come to Berea prior to Paul’s departure, 
and with Silas had remained to carry on the work so well begun 
there, and to instruct the new converts in the principles of the 
faith.”—A. A., pp. 221-233. 


XXXVIL PAUL AT ATHENS 
Study Acts 17: 16-34. 

1. How did Paul feel when he was left alone at Athens? 

2. With whom did he dispute? In what place? 

3. What classes of philosophers encountered him? 

4. What did some say? What did others say? 

5. Why did they make these remarks? 

6. To what place did they take him? What request did they 

make ? 

7. How did the Athenians spend their time? 

8. What did Paul perceive about the men of Athens? 

9. What had he observed as he passed by? Whom did he 

declare to them? 

10. Does God dwell in man-made temples? 

11. Why is He not worshiped with men’s hands? 

12. What is the relation of men to one another? 

13. What has God determined concerning their habitations? 

Why? 

14. Is He far from His creatures? What did Paul quote from 

a Greek poet? 



122 

15. What ought we not to think? What had God overlooked 

in the past? 

16. What did He now call upon men to do? What has He ap¬ 

pointed ? 

17. What assurance have we that this will be done? 

18. Why did some mock? What did others say? 

19. Did any at Athens receive the gospel? 

Readings 

Gen. 2: 7 
1 Thess. 3:1 
Job 12: 10; 33: 4 
Isa. 40: 18; 42: 5; 

57: 15: 16 

Outline Acts 17. 

Where is Athens? 

Memory Verse 

Because He hath appointed a day, in the which He will judge 
the world in righteousness by that Man whom He hath ordained; 
whereof He hath given assurance unto all men, in that He hath 
raised Him from the dead. Acts 17: 31. 

Notes 

1. “The city of Athens was the metropolis of heathendom. 
Here Paul did not meet with an ignorant, credulous populace, 
as at Lystra, but with a people famous for their intelligence 
and culture. Everywhere statues of their gods and of the deified 
heroes of history and poetry met the eye, while magnificent 
architecture and paintings represented the national glory and 
the popular worship of heathen deities. 

2. “The senses of the people were entranced by the beauty and 
splendor of art. On every hand sanctuaries and temples, involv¬ 
ing untold expense, reared their massive forms. Victories of 


Deut. 32: 8 

Rom. 1: 20; 2: 16; 14: 10 
Acts 14: 16 
A. A., Chap. XXIII 


123 


arms, and deeds of celebrated men, were commemorated by 
sculpture, shrines, and tablets. All these made Athens a vast 
gallery of art. 

3. “As Paul looked upon the beauty and grandeur surround¬ 
ing him, and saw the city wholly given to idolatry, his spirit 
was stirred with jealousy for God, whom he saw dishonored on 



ATHENS 


every side; and his heart was drawn out in pity for the people 
of Athens, who, notwithstanding their intellectual culture, were 
ignorant of the true God. 

4. “The apostle was not deceived by that which he saw in 
this center of learning. His spiritual nature was so alive to 
the attraction of heavenly things, that the joy and glory of the 
riches which will never perish made valueless in his eyes the 
pomp and splendor with which he was surrounded. As he saw 













124 



the magnificence of Athens, he realized its seductive power over 
lovers of art and science, and his mind was deeply impressed 
with the importance of the work before him. . . . 

5. “In their pride of intellect and human wisdom may be 
found the reason why the gospel message met with compara¬ 
tively little success among the Athenians. The worldly-wise 


“They took him, and brought him unto Areopagus. . . . Then Paul stood in 
the midst of Mars! Hill.” 

men who come to Christ as poor lost sinners, will become wise 
unto salvation; but those who come as distinguished men, ex¬ 
tolling their own wisdom, will fail of receiving the light and 
knowledge that He alone can give. . . . 

6. “Inspiration has given us this glance into the life of the 
Athenians, who, with all their knowledge, refinement, and art, 
were yet sunken in vice, that it might be seen how God, through 
His servant, rebuked idolatry, and the sins of a proud, self- 
sufficient people. The words of the apostle, and the description of 
his attitude and surroundings, as traced by the pen of inspira- 




125 


tion, were to be handed down to all coming generations, bearing 
witness of his unshaken confidence, his courage in loneliness and 
adversity, and the victory he gained for Christianity in the 
very heart of paganism/’— A. A., pp, 233-2^1. 


XXXVIII. PAUL AT CORINTH 


Study Acts 18: 1-17. 


1. To what city did Paul go from Athens? 

2. Who were Aquila and Priscilla? 

3. Why had they left Rome? Why did Paul live with them? 

4. What did he do every Sabbath? 

5. Who joined him at Corinth? How had he felt before they 

came? 

6. Who opposed Paul? What did Paul say to them? 

7. At whose house did Paul now teach? 

8. What persons of infiuence believed on the Lord? 

9. How did the Lord encourage Paul? 

10. How long did Paul remain at Corinth? 

11. Who was deputy of Achaia? Who made an insurrection? 

12. Before whom was Paul brought? Of what was he accused? 

13. How did Gallio dismiss the case? 

14. How did he treat Paul’s accusers? 

15. Who was beaten before Gallio? Was the deputy at all 

infiuenced by this? 

16. What letter did Paul write at Corinth? 1 Thess. 3: 1-6. 


Readings 


1 Cor. 4: 12; 16: 19 
Job 32: 18 
Rom. 16: 3, 4 
1 Thessalonians 


2 Thess. 3: 8 
2 Tim. 4: 19 
A. A., Chap. XXIV 



126 


Memory Verse 

Then spake the Lord to Paul in the night by a vision, ‘‘Be 
not afraid, but speak, and hold not thy peace: for I am with 
thee, and no man shall set on thee to hurt thee: for I have 
much people in this city.” Acts 18: 9, 10. 



“Paul . . . found a certain Jew named Aquila, . . . with his wife Priscilla. 
. . . And because he was of the same craft, he abode with them: . . . for . . . 
they were tentmakers.” 
































127 


Notes 

1. Paul did not wait at Athens for Silas and Timothy, but 
leaving word for them to follow him, went at once to Corinth. 
“During the first century of the Christian era Corinth was one 
of the leading cities not only of Greece, but of the world. 
Greeks, Jews, and Romans, with travelers from every land, 
thronged its streets, eagerly intent on business and pleasure. . . . 

2. “At the very beginning of his labors in this thoroughfare 
of travel, Paul saw on every hand serious obstacles to the 
progress of his work. The city was almost wholly given up to 
idolatry. Venus was the favorite goddess; and with the worship 
of Venus were connected many demoralizing rites and cere¬ 
monies. The Corinthians had become conspicuous, even among 
the heathen, for their gross immorality. . . . 

3. “In preaching the gospel in Corinth, the apostle followed 
a course different from that which had marked his labors at 
Athens. ... He determined to avoid elaborate arguments and 
discussions, and ‘not to know anything’ among the Corinthians, 
‘save Jesus Christ, and Him crucified.’ . . . 

4. “To the minds of multitudes living at the present time, 
the cross of Calvary is surrounded by sacred memories. Hal¬ 
lowed associations are connected with the scenes of the cruci¬ 
fixion. But in Paul’s day, the cross was regarded with feel¬ 
ings of repulsion and horror. . . . 

5. “Paul well knew how his message would be regarded by 
both the Jews and the Greeks of Corinth. ‘We preach Christ 
crucified,’ he admitted, ‘unto the Jews a stumblingblock, and 
unto the Greeks foolishness.’ . . . 

6. “But to Paul, the cross was the one object of supreme 
interest. Ever since he had been arrested in his career of 
persecution against the followers of the crucified Nazarene, he 
had never ceased to glory in the cross. . . . 

7. “Silas and Timothy had ‘come from Macedonia’ to help 
Paul, and together they labored for the gentiles. . . . The 


128 


apostle’s efforts were not confined to public speaking; there 
were many who could not have been reached in that way. He 
spent much time in house-to-house labor, thus availing himself 
of the familiar intercourse of the home circle. . . . 

8. '‘Paul’s efforts in Corinth were not without fruit. Many 
turned from the worship of idols to serve the living God, and a 
large church was enrolled under the banner of Christ. Some 
were rescued from among the most dissipated of the gentiles, 
and became monuments of the mercy of God and the efficacy 
of the blood of Christ to cleanse from sin.”— A. A., pp. 2JkS-252, 


XXXIX. PAUL’S FIRST LETTER TO THE THESSALONIANS 

Study 1 Thessalonians 1-3. 

1. Who wrote this letter? 1 Thess. 1:1. 

2. Who had just come from Thessalonica? 1 Thess. 3: 6. 

3. What news did he bring? 1 Thess. 3: 6. 

4. How did Timothy’s report affect Paul ? 1 Thess. 3: 7. 

5. For what purpose had Timothy been sent to Thessalonica? 

1 Thess. 3: 1-5. 

6. How deep was Paul’s interest in the Thessalonians? 1 Thess. 

3: 8-13; 1:2. 

7. How had they received the gospel ? 1 Thess. 1: 3-6; 2: 13. 

8. For what things does Paul praise them? 1 Thess. 1: 7-10. 

9. What had been Paul’s example and manner of life among 

them? 1 Thess. 2:1-12. 

10. Who had persecuted the Thessalonians? 1 Thess. 2: 14. 

11. Who had persecuted the churches of Judea? 1 Thess. 2: 14-16. 

12. Why had Paul not visited the Thessalonians? 1 Thess. 

2: 17, 18. 

13. What was Paul’s glory and joy? 1 Thess. 2: 19, 20. 



129 


Heading 

A. A., Chap. XXV 

Notes 

1. “The arrival of Silas and Timothy from Macedonia, during 
Paul’s sojourn in Corinth, had greatly cheered the apostle. They 
brought him 'good tidings’ of the ‘faith and charity’ of those 
who had accepted the truth during the first visit of the gospel 
messengers to Thessalonica. Paul’s heart went out in tender 
sympathy toward these believers, who, in the midst of trial and 
adversity, had remained true to God. He longed to visit them 
in person, but as this was not then possible, he wrote to them. 

2. “In this letter to the church at Thessalonica, the apostle 
expresses his gratitude to God for the joyful news of their in¬ 
crease of faith. . . . The apostle declared that in their faith¬ 
fulness in following the Lord, they were ‘ensamples to all that 
believe in Macedonia and Achaia.’ . . . The Thessalonian be¬ 
lievers were true missionaries. . . . 

3. “In this first epistle, Paul referred to his manner of labor 
among the Thessalonians. He declared that he had not sought 
to win converts through deception or guile.”— A. A., pp. 255, 256. 


XL. PAUL’S FIRST LETTER TO THE THESSALONIANS 
(CONTINUED) 

Study 1 Thessalonians 4; 5. 

1. From whom had the Thessalonians learned how they should 

live? 1 Thess. 4:1, 2. 

2. Of what was it not necessary to write? 1 Thess. 4: 9. 

3. In what should they increase? 1 Thess. 4: 10. 

9 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 



130 


4. What three things were they to do? 1 Thess. 4: 11. 

5. Of what truth were they not to be ignorant? 1 Thess. 4: 13. 

6. Shall the dead rise again? When? 1 Thess. 4:14, 15. 

7. Who will be caught up with them to meet the Lord? 1 Thess. 

4:16-18. 

8. What truth did they know perfectly? 1 Thess. 5: 1-4. Why? 

1 Thess. 5: 5. 

9. What should those do who know this truth? 1 Thess. 5: 6-11. 

10. How should the officers of the church be treated? 1 Thess. 

5: 12, 13. 

11. What exhortation did he give the officers? 1 Thess. 5: 14, 15. 

12. What general admonitions did he give? 1 Thess. 5: 16-22. 

13. For what did he pray? 1 Thess. 5:23, 24. 

14. What request did he make? 1 Thess. 5: 25. 

15. How were they to greet one another? 1 Thess. 5: 26. 

16. To whom was the epistle to be read? 1 Thess. 5: 27. 

17. With what benediction did he close? 1 Thess. 5:28. 

Heading 

A. A., Chap. XXV 
Memory Verse 

For the Lord Himself shall descend from heaven with a 
shout, with the voice of the Archangel, and with the trump of 

God: and the dead in Christ shall rise first: then we which are 

alive and remain shall be caught up together with them in the 
clouds, to meet the Lord in the air: and so shall we ever be with 
the Lord. 1 Thess. 4: 16, 17. 

Notes 

1. ‘Tn his first epistle to the Thessalonian believers, Paul 
endeavored to instruct them regarding the true state of the 
dead. He spoke of those who die as being asleep — in a state 
of unconsciousness. [1 Thess. 4: 13-18.] 


131 


2. ^‘The Thessalonians had eagerly grasped the idea that 
Christ was coming to change the faithful who were alive, and 
to take them to Himself. They had carefully guarded the lives 
of their friends, lest they should die, and lose the blessing which 
they looked forward to receiving at the coming of their Lord. 
But, one after another, their loved ones had been taken from 
them; and with anguish the Thessalonians had looked for the 
last time upon the faces of their dead, hardly daring to hope 
to meet them in a futhre life. 

3. ‘^As Paul’s epistle was opened and read, great joy and 
consolation was brought to the church by the words revealing 
the true state of the dead. Paul showed that those living when 
Christ should come would not go to meet their Lord in advance 
of those who had fallen asleep in Jesus. The voice of the 
Archangel and the trump of God would reach the sleeping ones, 
and the dead in Christ should rise first, before the touch of 
immortality should be given to the living. . . . 

4. “The Thessalonian believers were greatly annoyed by 
men coming among them with fanatical ideas and doctrines. 
. . . The church had been properly organized, and officers had 
been appointed to act as ministers and deacons. But there were 
some, self-willed and impetuous, who refused to be subordinate 
to those who held positions of authority in the church. . . . 
In view of this, Paul called the attention of the Thessalonians 
to the respect and deference due to those who had been chosen 
to occupy positions of authority in the church.”— A. A., pp, 
257-262, 


132 


XLI. PAUL’S SECOND LETTER TO THE THESSALONIANS 

Study 2 Thessalonians 1-3. 

1. Who addressed the church in this letter? 2 Thess. 1: 1. 

2. For what did they thank God? 2 Thess. 1: 3-6. 

3. What will be the punishment of those who obey not the 

gospel? 2 Thess. 1:7-9. When? 2 Thess. 1:10. 

4. For what did the writers of this letter pray? 2 Thess. 

1 : 11 , 12 . 

5. What had troubled the Thessalonians? 2 Thess. 2:1, 2. 

6. What must occur before the coming of Christ? 2 Thess. 2: 3. 

7. What is the character of the man of sin? 2 Thess. 2: 4. 

8. What was then developing in the church? 2 Thess. 2: 5-10. 

9. Why should God send a strong delusion? 2 Thess. 2: 10-12. 

10. For what did the apostles give thanks? 2 Thess. 2: 13, 14. 

11. To what were the Thessalonians to hold? 2 Thess. 2: 15. 

12. What was the apostles’ prayer for them? 2 Thess. 2: 16, 17. 

13. Why did they ask for their prayers? 2 Thess. 3:1, 2. 

14. What did they believe the Christians at Thessalonica would 

do? 2 Thess. 3: 3-5. 

15. What did they command them? 2 Thess. 3: 6. 

16. What had been the example of the apostles among them? 

2 Thess. 3: 7-10. 

17. What did they say of those who would not work? 2 Thess. 

3: 10-12. 

18. In what should no Christian weary? 2 Thess. 3: 13. 

19. How should one be treated who did not obey this letter? 

2 Thess. 3: 14, 15. 

20. Who wrote the salutation? 2 Thess. 3:16-18. 

Reading 

A. A., Chap. XXV 


133 


Notes 

1. “Silvanus” and “Timotheus’’ are Greek forms of the names 
“Silas’^ and “Timothy.” 

2. “His [Paul’s] words were misapprehended by some of the 
Thessalonian brethren. They understood him to express the 
hope that he himself would live to witness the Saviour’s ad¬ 
vent. . . . 

3. “In his second letter, Paul sought to correct their mis¬ 
understanding of his teaching. . . . But before the coming of ' 
Christ, important developments in the religious world, foretold 
in prophecy, were to take place. . . . 

4. “Paul’s words were not to be misinterpreted. It was 
not to be taught that he, by special revelation, had warned the 
Thessalonians of the immediate coming of Christ. Such a posi¬ 
tion would cause confusion of faith; for disappointment often 
leads to unbelief. ... 

5. “The apostle charged them not to neglect their duties or 
resign themselves to idle waiting. After their glowing anticipa¬ 
tions of immediate deliverance, the round of daily life and the 
opposition that they must meet would appear doubly forbidding. 
He therefore exhorted them to steadfastness in the faith.”— 
A. A., pp. 26U-267. 


XLIL PAUL RETURNS TO ANTIOCH 
Study Acts 18: 18-22. 

1. Did Paul remain longer at Corinth? 

2. For what country did he sail? Who accompanied him? 

3. How far did Aquila and Priscilla go with Paul? 

4. Who had made a vow? What ceremony did he perform at 

Cenchrea ? 



134 


5. Where did he meet the Jews? How? 

6. What did they wish him to do? 

7. Why could he not be persuaded to remain longer-with them? 

8. At what city in Palestine did he land? 

9. What church did he visit? To what city did he go? 

10. How long did he remain at Antioch? 

11. Carefully review Paul’s second missionary journey, using 

the map. 

Readings 

Num. 6: 18 Eccl. 5 : 4, 5 James 4: 15 

Acts 21: 23, 24 Rom. 16: 1 A. A., Chap. XXVI 

Memory Verse 

He . . . bade them farewell, saying, must by all means 
keep this feast that cometh in Jerusalem: but I will return again 
unto you, if God will.” Acts 18: 20, 21. 

Notes 

1. “After leaving Corinth, Paul’s next scene of labor was 
Ephesus. He was on his way to Jerusalem to attend an ap¬ 
proaching festival; and his stay at Ephesus was necessarily brief. 
He reasoned with the Jews in the synagogue, and so favorable 
was the impression made upon them that they entreated him to 
continue his labors among them. His plan to visit Jerusalem 
prevented him from tarrying then; but he promised to return 
to them, ‘if God will.’ Aquila and Priscilla had accompanied him 
to Ephesus, and he left them there to carry on the work that 
he had begun.”— A. A., p. 269. 

2. “Gone up, and saluted the church.” When the expres¬ 
sion “go up” is used, it is understood to refer to Jerusalem. 
“The church” could be no other than the church at Jerusalem, 
which in a sense was the mother church. Paul seemed always to 
desire to show respect to this church and its leaders, and to 
gain and keep their sympathy and confidence. 


135 


3. He returned to Antioch at the close of each missionary 
journey except the last one. This city contained the church 
that had first sent him out. It might be said to be the head¬ 
quarters of the work among the gentiles, as Jerusalem was of 
all the gospel work, but more especially of that among the Jews. 






CHAPTER EIGHT 
The Third Missionary Journey 


XLIIL PAUL IN GALATIA AND PHRYGIA; APOLLOS 
AT EPHESUS 


Study Acts 18:23-28. 


1. In what provinces did Paul labor when he began his third 

journey? 

2. What work did he do in the churches? 

3. What order did he give the churches in Galatia? 1 Cor. 16: 1-4. 

4. Why was this? Gal. 2: 10. 

5. Had Paul been in Phrygia and Galatia before? Acts 16:6. 

6. Who came to Ephesus? Of what nationality was Apollos? 

Where was he born? 

7. What was his ability as a speaker? His knowledge of the 

Scriptures ? 

8. In what was he instructed? 

9. How did he teach? Why? What only did he know? 

10. Who explained the gospel to him more fully? 

11. Where did Apollos wish to go? 

12. Who wrote letters of recommendation for him? 

13. What did he accomplish in Achaia? 


Readings 

Gal. 4: 13^5 
1 Cor. 1: 12; 3:4-7 
Titus 3: 13 

Outline Acts 18. 

(136) 


Rom. 12: 11 
A. A., Chap. XXVI 



137 


Memory Verse 

This man was instructed in the way of the Lord; and being 
fervent in the spirit, he spake and taught diligently the things of 
the Lord, knowing only the baptism of John. Acts 18: 25. 

Notes 

1. The brethren in Judea were poor, and had already been 
assisted by contributions from the churches raised up by Paul 
and Barnabas. At the council held at Jerusalem A. D. 51, Paul 
and Barnabas were admonished still to remember the poor in 
Judea. Paul faithfully carried out this injunction wherever 
he went. 

2. ‘Tt was at this time that ^a certain Jew named Apollos, 
born at Alexandria, an eloquent man, and mighty in the Scrip¬ 
tures, came to Ephesus.’ He had heard the preaching of John 
the Baptist, had received the baptism of repentance, and was 
a living witness that the work of the prophet had not been in 
vain. . . . 

3. “Apollos was desirous of going on into Achaia, and the 
brethren at Ephesus ‘wrote, exhorting the disciples to receive 
him’ as a teacher in full harmony with the church of Christ. . . . 
The success that attended Apollos in preaching the gospel led 
some of the believers to exalt his labors above those of Paul. 
This comparison of man with man brought into the church a 
party spirit that threatened to hinder greatly the progress of 
the gospel. . . . 

4. “Paul had sought to impress upon the minds of his Co¬ 

rinthian brethren the fact that he and the ministers associated 
with him were but men commissioned by God to teach the 
truth; that they were all engaged in the same work; and that they 
were alike dependent upon God for success in their labors. The 
discussion that had arisen in the church regarding the relative 
merits of different ministers was not in the order of God, but 
was the result of cherishing the attributes of the natural 
heart. . . . 


138 


5. ‘'It was Paul who had first preached the gospel in 
Corinth, and who had organized the church there. This was 
the work that the Lord had assigned him. Later, by God’s 
direction, other workers were brought in, to stand in their 
lot and place. The seed sown must be watered, and this Apollos 
was to do. He followed Paul in his work, to give further in¬ 
struction, and to help the seed sown to develop. He won his 
way to the hearts of the people; but it was God who gave the 
increase. It is not human, but divine power, that works trans¬ 
formation of character. Those who plant and those who water, 
do not cause the growth of the seed; they work under God, as 
His appointed agencies, cooperating with Him in His work. To 
the Master Worker belongs the honor and glory that comes with 
success.”— A. A., pp. 269-27J^. 


XLIV. PAUL AT EPHESUS 
Study Acts 19: 1-20. 

1. While Apollos was at Corinth, to what city did Paul come? 

2. What question did he ask certain disciples? 

3. Why did they not know of the Holy Ghost? What did Paul 

teach them? 

4. After they were baptized, what did they receive? 

5. What did this give them power to do? 

6. How many were there who had this experience? 

7. Where did Paul preach for three months? 

8. Why did he leave the synagogue? 

9. Where did he then preach the word of God? 

10. How long did he continue thus to preach? Who heard the 
word of the Lord? 



139 


11. What special miracles were wrought through Paul? 

12. Who attempted to perform miracles in the name of Jesus? 

13. What did the evil spirit answer? 

14. How did the man possessed by demons treat the exorcists? 

15. What was the effect on thpse who knew of this circumstance? 

16. What evidence of true repentance did many of them give? 

17. What was the value of the books burned? 

Readings 

1 Sam. 3: 7 Jude 10 

Matt. 3:11 A. A., Chap. XXVII 

Memory Verse 

And many that believed came, and confessed, and showed 
their deeds. Acts 19: 18. 

Notes 

1. “While Apollos was preaching at Corinth, Paul fulfilled 
his promise to return to Ephesus. He had made a brief visit 
to Jerusalem, and had spent some time at Antioch, the scene 
of his early labors. Thence he traveled through Asia Minor, 
‘over all the country of Galatia and Phrygia,’ visiting the 
churches which he himself had established, and strengthening 
the faith of the believers. 

2. “In the time of the apostles, the western portion of Asia 
Minor was known as the Roman province of Asia. Ephesus, 
the capital, was a great commercial center. Its harbor was 
crowded with shipping, and its streets were thronged with 
people from every country. Like Corinth, it presented a prom¬ 
ising field for missionary effort. 

3. “The Jews, now widely dispersed in all civilized lands, 
were generally expecting the advent of the Messiah. When John 
the Baptist was preaching, many, in their visits to Jerusalem at 
the annual feasts, had gone out to the banks of the Jordan to 
listen to him. There they had heard Jesus proclaimed as the 


140 



“Many of them also which used curious arts brought their books together, 
and burned them before all men.” 

















141 


Promised One, and they had carried the tidings to all parts 
of the world. Thus had Providence prepared the way for the 
labors of the apostles. 

4. “On his arrival at Ephesus, Paul found twelve brethren, 
who, like Apollos, had been disciples of John the Baptist, and 
like him had gained some knowledge of the mission of Christ. 
They had not the ability of Apollos, but with the same sin¬ 
cerity and faith they were seeking to spread abroad the knowl¬ 
edge they had received. 

5. “These brethren knew nothing of the mission of the Holy 
Spirit. . . . Then the apostle set before them the great truths 
that are the foundation of the Christian’s hope. . . . With deep 
interest and grateful, wondering joy, the brethren listened to 
Paul’s words. By faith they grasped the wonderful truth of 
Christ’s atoning sacrifice, and received Him as their Re¬ 
deemer. . . . 

6. “Ephesus was not only the most magnificent, but the most 
corrupt of the cities of Asia. Superstition and sensual pleasure 
held sway over her teeming population. Under the shadow of 
her temples, criminals of every grade found shelter, and the 
most degrading vices flourished. 

7. “Ephesus was a popular center for the worship of Diana. 
The fame of the magnificent temple of ‘Diana of the Ephesians,’ 
extended throughout all Asia and the world. Its surpassing 
splendor made it the pride, not only of the city, but of the 
nation. The idol within the temple was declared by tradition 
to have fallen from the sky. Upon it were inscribed symbolic 
characters, which were believed to possess great power. Books 
had been written by the Ephesians to explain the meaning and 
use of these symbols. 

8. “Among those who gave close study to these costly books, 
were many magicians, who wielded a powerful influence over 
the minds of the superstitious worshipers of the image within 
the temple. . . . 


142 


9. accepting Christianity, some of the believers had not 
fully renounced their superstitions. To some extent they still 
continued the practice of magic. ... 

10. “These treatises on divination contained rules and forms 
of communication with evil spirits. They were the regulations 
of the worship of Satan,— directions for soliciting his help and 
obtaining information from him. . . . 

11. “It is fondly supposed that heathen superstitions have 
disappeared before the civilization of the twentieth century. But 
the word of God and the stern testimony of facts declare that 
sorcery is practiced in this age as verily as in the days of the 
old-time magicians. The ancient system of magic is, in reality, 
the same as what is now known as modern Spiritualism.''— 
A. A., pp. 281-289. 


XLV. DIANA OF THE EPHESIANS 
Study Acts 19: 21-41. 

1. To what city did Paul plan to go? 

2. Through what countries did he expect to pass on his journey? 

3. To what distant city did he wish to go after he had been to 

Jerusalem? 

4. Whom did he send into Macedonia? 

5. What occurred in Ephesus at this time? 

6. Who was the leader in the insurrection against Paul? Why? 

7. Whom did he call together? What did they know? 

8. What had Paul done almost throughout Asia? 

9. What was in danger of being despised and destroyed? 

10. Who worshiped Diana? What was the effect of Demetrius's 

speech ? 

11. With what was the whole city filled? 



143 


12. Whom did they take with them into the theater? Why did 

Paul not go in? 

13. What did the assembly do? Did they know why they had 

come together? 

14. Who was brought forward to speak? 

15. Why was he not allowed to do so? 

16. What did the mob cry for two hours? Who quieted the 

people ? 

17. What did he say they all knew about Diana? Why should they 

be quiet? 

18. What did the town clerk say about the men they had arrested? 

19. What should Demetrius have done? 

20. Of what were they in danger? Who dismissed them? 

Readings 

Rom. 16: 23 2 Cor. 1: 8-19 

2 Tim. 4: 14, 15, 20 A. A., Chap. XXVIII 

Outline Acts 19. 

Notes 

1. “For over three years, Ephesus was the center of Paul’s 
work. A flourishing church was raised up here; and from this 
city the gospel spread throughout the province of Asia, among 
both Jews and gentiles. 

2. “The apostle had now for some time been contemplating 
another missionary journey. He ‘purposed in the spirit, when he 
had passed through Macedonia and Achaia, to go to Jerusalem, 
saying. After I have been there, I must also see Rome.’ In 
harmony with this plan, ‘he sent into Macedonia two of them that 
ministered unto him, Timotheus and Erastus;’ but feeling that 
the cause in Ephesus still demanded his presence, he decided to 
remain until after Pentecost. An event soon occurred, however, 
which hastened his departure. 

3. “Once a year, special ceremonies were held at Ephesus in 


144 


honor of the goddess Diana. These attracted great numbers 
of people from all parts of the province. Throughout this 
period, festivities were conducted with the utmost pomp and 
splendor. . . . 

4. “In his speech Demetrius had said, This our craft is in 
danger.’ These words reveal the real cause of the tumult at 
Ephesus, and also the cause of much of the persecution which 
followed the apostles in their work. Demetrius and his fellow 
craftsmen saw that by the teaching and spread of the gospel 
the business of image making was endangered. The income of 
pagan priests and artisans was at stake; and for this reason 
they aroused against Paul the most bitter opposition. . . . 

5. “ ‘Paul . . . departed for to go into Macedonia.’ On this 
journey he was accompanied by two faithful Ephesian brethren, 
Tychicus and Trophimus. 

6. “Paul’s labors in Ephesus were concluded. His ministry 
there had been a season of incessant labor, of many trials, and 
of deep anguish. ... 

7. “And while thus battling against opposition, pushing for¬ 
ward with untiring zeal the gospel work, and guarding the in¬ 
terests of a church yet young in the faith, Paul was bearing upon 
his soul a heavy burden for all the churches. 

8. “News of apostasy in some of the churches of his plant¬ 
ing caused him deep sorrow. He feared that his efforts in their 
behalf might prove to be in vain. Many a sleepless night was 
spent in prayer and earnest thought, as he learned of the methods 
employed to counteract his work. As he had opportunity and as 
their condition demanded, he wrote to the churches, giving re¬ 
proof, counsel, admonition, and encouragement. In these letters 
the apostle does not dwell on his own trials, yet there are occa¬ 
sional glimpses of his labors and sufferings in the c^se of 
Christ. Stripes and imprisonment, cold and hunger and thirst, 
perils by land and by sea, in the city and in the wilderness,, 
from his own countrymen, from the heathen, and from false 


145 


brethren,— all this he endured for the sake of the gospel. He 
was 'defamed,' 'reviled,' made ‘the offscouring of all things,' 
'perplexed,' 'persecuted,' ‘troubled on every side,' ‘in jeopardy 
every hour,' ‘alway delivered unto death for Jesus' sake.' 

9. "Amidst the constant storm of opposition, the clamor of 
enemies, and the desertion of friends, the intrepid apostle almost 
lost heart. But he looked back to Calvary, and with new ardor 
pressed on to spread the knowledge of the Crucified. ... He 
sought no discharge from the warfare till he should lay off 
his armor at the feet of his Redeemer."—A. A., pp. 291-297. 


XLVI. PAUL'S FIRST LETTER TO THE CORINTHIANS 

(Written at Ephesus) 

Study 1 Corinthians 1-6. 

1. Who brought word to Paul at Ephesus from the church at 

Corinth? 1 Cor. 1: 11. 

2. What was the condition of the church? 1 Cor. 1: 10, 11. 

3. Into how many parties was the church divided? 1 Cor. 

1: 12, 13: 

4. What did their strife and contention show? 1 Cor. 3:1-4. 

5. To whom should honor and praise be given — to ministers 

or to God? 1 Cor. 3: 5-9, 21; 4: 6, 7. 

6. How had Paul built? 1 Cor. 3: 10-15. 

7. What is the body of the Christian? 1 Cor. 3: 16, 17; 6: 19. 

8. Does it belong to us? 1 Cor. 6: 19, 20. 

9. How had Paul preached the gospel to the Corinthians? 

1 Cor. 2: 1-5. 

10. What were some of the reasons why the Corinthians should 
have shown greater respect to Paul? 1 Cor. 4: 11-15. 

10 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 



146 


11. Whom had he sent to Corinth? 1 Cor. 4: 16, 17. 

12. How did he think they should treat Timothy? 1 Cor. 

16:10,11. 

13. What other person refused to go? 1 Cor. 16: 12. 

14. What did Paul intend to do soon? 1 Cor. 4: 18-21; 16: 5-9. 

15. Should Christians go to law with one another? 1 Cor. 6: 1. 

Why not? 1 Cor. 6:1-6. 

16. What would be a better thing to do? 1 Cor. 6:7, 8. 

17. What had some of the Corinthians been before they were 

converted? 1 Cor. 6:9-11. 

Reading 

A. A., Chap. XXIX 
Memory Verse 

Know ye not that ye are the temple of God, and that the 
Spirit of God dwelleth in you? If any man defile the temple 
of God, him shall God destroy; for the temple of God is holy, 
which temple ye are. 1 Cor. 3: 16, 17. 

Notes 

1. “The first epistle to the Corinthian church was written 
by the apostle Paul during the latter part of his stay at 
Ephesus. For no others had he felt a deeper interest or put 
forth more untiring effort than for the believers in Corinth. . . . 

2. “The members of the church at Corinth were surrounded 
by idolatry and sensuality of the most alluring form. While the 
apostle was with them, these influences had but little power 
over them. . . . 

3. “After the departure of Paul, however, unfavorable con¬ 
ditions arose; tares that had been sown by the enemy appeared 
among the wheat, and erelong these began to bring forth their 
evil fruit. This was a time of severe trial to the Corinthian 
church. 

4. “The apostle was no longer with them, to quicken their 


147 



CORINTH 

















148 


zeal and aid them in their endeavors to live in harmony with 
God; and little by little many became careless and indifferent, 
and allowed natural tastes and inclinations to control them. He 
who had so often urged them to high ideals of purity and up¬ 
rightness, was no longer with them; and not a few who, at 
the time of their conversion, had put away their evil habits, re¬ 
turned to the debasing sins of heathenism. 

5. “Paul had written briefly to the church, admonishing them 
'not to company’ with members who should persist in profligacy; 
but many of the believers perverted the apostle’s meaning, 
quibbled over his words, and excused themselves for disre¬ 
garding his instruction. 

6. “A letter was sent to Paul by the church, asking for 
counsel concerning various matters, but saying nothing of the 
grievous sins existing among them. The apostle was, however, 
forcibly impressed by the Holy Spirit that the true state of the 
church had been concealed, and that this letter was an attempt 
to draw from him statements which the writers could construe 
to serve their own purposes. 

7. “About this time there came to Ephesus members of the 
household of Chloe, a Christian family of high repute in Corinth. 
Paul asked them regarding the condition of things, and they 
told him that the church was rent by divisions. The dissensions 
that had prevailed at the time of Apollos’ visit had greatly in¬ 
creased. False teachers were leading the members to despise 
the instructions of Paul. . . . 

8. “As this picture was presented before him, Paul saw that 
his worst fears were more than realized. . . . Gladly would 
he have visited Corinth at once, had this been the wisest course 
to pursue. But he knew that in their present condition the be¬ 
lievers would not profit by his labors, and therefore he sent 
Titus to prepare the way for a visit from himself later on. 

9. “Then, putting aside all personal feelings over the course 
of those whose conduct revealed such strange perverseness, and 


149 


keeping his soul stayed upon God, the apostle wrote to the 
church at -Corinth one of the richest, most instructive, most 
powerful of all his letters.”— A. A., pp. 298-301, 


XLVIL PAUL’S FIRST LETTER TO THE CORINTHIANS 
(CONTINUED) 

Study 1 Corinthians 8-11. 

1. What knowledge did Paul say the Corinthians had concerning 

idols? 1 Cor. 8: 4; 10: 19-21. 

2. What would some do who had not this knowledge? 1 Cor. 8: 7. 

3. What advice did Paul therefore give concerning the eating 

of meat offered to idols? 1 Cor. 8: 9-12; 10: 27-33. 

4. What did he say he would do? 1 Cor. 8: 13. 

5. What principle did he give concerning the wages of the 

gospel minister? 1 Cor. 9:13, 14. 

6. Had he required any of the churches to support him? 1 Cor. 

9: 15-18. 

7. Why had he not done this? 1 Cor. 9: 19. 

8. How many can win in a race? 1 Cor. 9: 24. 

9. How do men live who wish to win in a race? 1 Cor. 9: 25. 

10. What did Paul do that he might win in the Christian race? 

1 Cor. 9: 26, 27. 

11. What did the Corinthians do when they assembled to eat 

the Lord’s supper? 1 Cor. 11: 16-21. 

12. Where should they have eaten their meals? 1 Cor. 11: 22. 

13. How was the Lord’s supper instituted? 1 Cor. 11:23-25. 

14. How should this ordinance be celebrated? 1 Cor. 11:26-34. 

Reading 

A. A., Chap. XXX 



150 


Memory Verse 

Every man that striveth for the mastery is temperate in all 
things. 1 Cor. 9: 25. 

Notes 

1. “In the hope of impressing vividly upon the minds of 
the Corinthian believers the importance of firm self-control, 
strict temperance, and unflagging zeal in the service of Christ, 
Paul in his letter to them made a striking comparison between 
the Christian warfare and the celebrated foot races held at 
stated intervals near Corinth. 

2. “Of all the games instituted among the Greeks and the 
Romans, the foot races were the most ancient and the most 
highly esteemed. They were witnessed by kings, nobles, and 
statesmen. Young men of rank and wealth took part in them, 
and shrank from no effort or discipline necessary to obtain the 
prize. . . . 

3. “In referring to these races as a figure of the Christian 
warfare, Paul emphasized the preparation necessary to the suc¬ 
cess of the contestants in the race,— the preliminary discipline, 
the abstemious diet, the necessity for temperance. . . . 

4. “In the Corinthian games, the last few strides of the 
contestants in the race were made with agonizing effort to keep 
up undiminished speed. So the Christian, as he nears the goal, 
will press onward with even more zeal and determination than at 
the first of his course. 

5. “Paul presents the contrast between the chaplet of fading 
laurel received by the victor in the foot races, and the crown 
of immortal glory that will be given to him who runs with 
triumph the Christian race. . . . 

6. “One hand only could grasp the coveted garland. • Some 
might put forth the utmost effort to obtain the prize, but as 
they reached forth the hand to secure it, another, an instant 
before them, might grasp the coveted treasure. . . . 


151 


7. “Such is not the case in the Christian warfare. Not one 
who complies with the conditions will be disappointed at the 
end of the race. . . . 

8. “Paul feared lest, having preached to others, he him¬ 
self should be a castaway. He realized that if he did not carry 
out in his life the principles he believed and preached, his 
labors in behalf of others would avail him nothing. . . . 

9. “Paul knew that his warfare against evil would not end 
so long as life should last. Ever he realized the need of putting 
a strict guard upon himself, that earthly desires might not over¬ 
come spiritual zeal. With all his power he continued to strive 
against natural inclinations. Ever he kept before him the ideal 
to be attained, and this ideal he strove to reach by willing obedi¬ 
ence to the law of God. His words, his practices, his passions,— 
all were brought under the control of the Spirit of God.'’— 
A. A., pp. 309-315, 


XLVIII. PAUL’S FIRST LETTER TO THE CORINTHIANS 
(CONTINUED) 

Study 1 Corinthians 12; 14. 

1. Of what would Paul not have them to be ignorant? 

1 Cor. 12: 1. 

2. Does the Spirit give to every one the same gift? 1 Cor. 

12:4-11. Name the gifts. 

3. Of what is the body composed? 1 Cor. 12: 12, 14. 

4. Could the body give up one of its members without loss to 

itself? 1 Cor. 12: 15-22. 

5. What is the effect upon all if one member suffer? 1 Cor. 

12: 25, 26. 

6. Christians are members of what body? 1 Cor. 12:12, 27. 



152 


7. What different gifts have the different members of the' 

church? 1 Cor. 12: 28-31. 

8. What is the difference between the gift of tongues and the 

gift of prophecy? 1 Cor. 14: 1-4. 

9. Which is the greater gift? 1 Cor. 14:5. Why? 1 Cor. 

14: 6-21. 

10. What is the purpose of the gift of tongues? 1 Cor. 14:22. 

Of the gift of prophecy? 1 Cor. 14: 22. 

11. What rule is given for the exercise of these gifts in the 

public service? 1 Cor. 14:26-33. 

12. How should all things be done? 1 Cor. 14:39, 40. 

Memory Verse 

Wherefore tongues are for a sign, not to them that believe, 
but to them that believe not: but prophesying serveth not for 
them that believe not, but for them which believe. 1 Cor. 14: 22. 

Notes 

1. The gifts are called spiritual because they are the gifts 
of the Spirit. They are the gifts that Christ gave to the church 
when He ascended. Eph. 4: 8. They are to remain in the church 
until all come into the unity of the faith, until the church is 
perfect. Eph. 4: 13. This will not be until Christ comes. There¬ 
fore the gifts will be in the church until the end. 

2. Though there are many different gifts, they are all given 
by the same Spirit. But each gift is necessary, and is given not 
only for the benefit of the one who has it, but for all others. 

3. Paul illustrates his subject by the human body, which is 
composed of different parts. While some parts seem more im¬ 
portant, if we should lose the smallest fraction of one, the body 
would be imperfect, deformed. We are members of the body 
of Christ, and the gifts are manifested in different members,— 
one has the gift of teaching, another of prophecy, another of 
discerning of spirits. If one of these gifts is lacking, the body, 
which is the church, is imperfect. 


153 


4. It is also true that if one member of our body is injured, 
all the members suffer with it. So if one member of the body 
of Christ suffers, from whatsoever cause, all the members suffer 
with it. If one is found who is careless and indifferent con¬ 
cerning his brother’s welfare, it is proof that he is not a member 
of the body of Christ. 

5. In chapter fourteen Paul shows that the gift of prophecy 
is much more profitable to the church than is the gift of tongues, 
and is therefore to be earnestly desired. The gift of tongues is 
of no value and should not be exercised unless the gift of in¬ 
terpretation accompanies it. No gift is for the honor of the 
one who has it, but is for the benefit of others. 

6. Paul said he would rather speak five words that could be 
understood, and thereby benefit some one, than “ten thousand 
words in an unknown tongue.” 

7. “The gifts are already ours in Christ, but their actual 
possession depends upon our reception of the Spirit of God. 

8. “The promise of the Spirit is not appreciated as it should 
be. Its fulfillment is not realized as it might be. It is the ab¬ 
sence of the Spirit that makes the gospel ministry so powerless. 
Learning, talents, eloquence, every natural or acquired endow¬ 
ment, may be possessed; but without the presence of the Spirit 
of God, no heart will be touched, no sinner be won to Christ. 
On the other hand, if they are connected with Christ, if the gifts 
of the Spirit are theirs, the poorest and most ignorant of His 
disciples will have a power that will tell upon hearts. God 
makes them the channel for the outworking of the highest in¬ 
fluence in the universe.”— C. 0. L., pp. 327, 328. 


154 


XLIX. PAUL’S FIRST LETTER TO THE CORINTHIANS 
(CONTINUED) 

Study 1 Corinthians 13; 15 

1. If we speak with tongues but have not love, what do we 

become? 1 Cor. 13: 1. 

2. How are prophecy and faith compared with love? 1 Cor. 13: 2. 

3. What good deeds count for nothing without love? 1 Cor. 13: 3. 

4. What is the character of love? 1 Cor. 13: 4-7. 

5. What gifts will cease to be exercised? 1 Cor. 13: 8-10. 

6. What grace shall never fail? 1 Cor. 13: 8. 

7. Is our knowledge and experience perfect? 1 Cor. 13: 11, 12. 

8. Which is the greatest grace? 1 Cor. 13: 13. 

9. What proof is given of the resurrection of Christ? 1 Cor. 

15:1-11. 

10. What did some say? 1 Cor. 15: 12. 

11. If Christ had not a resurrection, what would be true? 1 

Cor. 15: 13-19. 

12. Who is the first fruits of the dead? 1 Cor. 15:20. Why? 

1 Cor. 15:21-23. 

13. What will He do in the end? 1 Cor. 15:24-28. 

14. What questions do some ask? 1 Cor. 15: 35. 

15. By what illustrations are the questions answered? 1 Cor. 

15: 36-41. 

16. What comparisons are made between the present and the 

future body? 1 Cor. 15:42-49. 

17. What can not inherit the kingdom of heaven ? 1 Cor. 15: 50. 

18. When will this great change take place? 1 Cor. 15:51-55. 

19. What direction was given concerning the collection for the 

poor Christians of Judea? 1 Cor. 16: 1-4. 

Memory Verse 

If I speak with the tongues of men and of angels, but have 
not love, I am become sounding brass, or a clanging cymbal. 


155 


And if I have the gift of prophecy, and know all mysteries and 
all knowledge; and if I have all faith, so as to remove moun¬ 
tains, but have not love, I am nothing. And if I bestow all my 
goods to feed the poor, and if I give my body to be burned, but 
have not love, it profiteth me nothing. Love suffereth long, and 
is kind; love envieth not; love vaunteth not itself, is not puffed 
up, doth not behave itself unseemly, seeketh not its own, is not 
provoked, taketh not account of evil; rejoiceth not in unright¬ 
eousness, but rejoiceth with the truth; beareth all things, be- 
lieveth all things, hopeth all things, endureth all things. Love 
never faileth: but whether there be prophecies, they shall be 
done away; whether there be tongues, they shall cease; whether 
there be knowledge, it shall be done away. For we know in 
part, and we prophesy in part; but when that which is perfect 
is come, that which is in part shall be done away. When I 
was a child, I spake as a child, I felt as a child, I thought as a 
child: now that I am become a man, I have put away childish 
things. For now we see in a mirror, darkly; but then face to 
face: now I know in part; but then shall I know fully even as 
also I was fully known. But now abideth faith, hope, love, these 
three; and the greatest of these is love. 

Notes 

1. In our last lesson we studied the gifts of the Spirit. In 
this lesson we have the first and greatest of the fruits of the 
Spirit, which is love. This fruit of the Spirit, love, is greater 
than any or all of the gifts of the Spirit, for if it were possible 
for us to have them all, and yet we had not love, the gifts 
would be of no value to us or to others. 

2. ‘'He that loveth not knoweth not God; for God is love.'' 
Many will come up in the Judgment and say, “Lord, Lord, have 
we not prophesied in Thy name? and in Thy name have cast 
out devils? and in Thy name done many wonderful works?" But 
the Saviour will answer, “I never knew you: depart from Me, 


156 


ye that work iniquity.” He will not know them, because they 
are destitute of love. 

3. This world believes that the greatest power is force; but 
it is not. Love is the greatest power, the only real power in 
the universe. The changes made by force are always transient, 
they continue but a short time; but the changes produced by 
love are eternal, they abide forever. 

4. The kingdoms of this world are all founded by force. One 
by one they pass away. The kingdom of Christ is a kingdom of 
love. It “shall never be destroyed.” 

5. Napoleon Bonaparte, strange to say, recognized this prin¬ 
ciple. He once said: “Jesus Christ was more than a man. Alex¬ 
ander, Caesar, Charlemagne, and myself founded great empires ^ 
but upon what did the creations of our genius depend? — Upon 
force. Jesus alone founded His empire upon love, and to this 
very day millions would die for Him.”— Geikie's ''Life of 
Christ” p. 2, 

6. The resurrection of the dead is the hope of the Christian. 
If there were no resurrection, it would be vain to believe in 
Christ, for death would be the end of our existence. 

7. Christ is called the first fruits of the resurrection, because 
He is first in importance of all who have risen from the dead, 
and because the resurrection of all others depends upon His 
resurrection. Some rose from the dead before Christ, as Moses, 
but it was by virtue of the promised resurrection of Christ that 
he was given life. 

8. Some refuse to believe in the resurrection, because they 
can not understand how it can ever be accomplished. We believe 
many things that we can not understand. To be able to under¬ 
stand God’s ways, it would be necessary for us to be infinite, 
equal to God. 

9. Physiologists tell us that the particles that compose our 
bodies change constantly, and that to change every atom of 
our bodies requires about seven years. If we have been separated 


157 


from a friend for seven years, or twice seven years, when we 
meet him again, we recognize him at once, and we say that he 
is the very same man we knew before, though there is not a 
particle of matter in his body that was there when we knew 
him before. 

10. Identity depends upon character, not upon substance. 
Those who come up in the resurrection will have the same char¬ 
acter, nature, disposition, as when they died; and though the 
righteous will have incorruptible bodies, with no trace of disease 
or deformity, yet they will be the same beings they were on 
earth, and will recognize their friends and be recognized by 
them. “Then shall I know even as also I am known.” 

11. Paul gave directions as to when and how they were to 
make their collection for the poor Christians of Judea. Each 
one, on the first day of the week, was to take account of his 
business, and lay aside an offering at home, so that it would 
be ready when Paul came. 


L. PAUL IN GREECE AND MACEDONIA 
Study Acts 20: 1-3. 

1. What did Paul do when the uproar in Ephesus ceased? 

2. For what place did he depart? 

3. What city did he visit on the way? 2 Cor. 2: 12. 

4. Had he been at Troas before? Acts 16: 8-11. 

5. For whom did he wait at Troas? 2 Cor. 2: 13. 

6. What did Paul do in Macedonia? 

7. How was'Paul comforted at this time? 2 Cor. 7:5, 6. 

8. What report did Titus bring about the church at Corinth? 

2 Cor. 7: 7-16. 

9. How long did Paul stay in Greece? 



158 


10. How had he expected to go to Syria? 

11. Why did he change his plans? 

12. Through what province did he return? 

Readings 

2 Cor. 2; 12, 13; 7; 11: 26 Acts 16: 8-11 A. A., Chap. XXXI 

Memory Verse 

For godly sorrow worketh repentance to salvation not to be 
repented of: but the sorrow of the world worketh death. 2 
Cor. 7: 10. 

Notes 

1. “From Ephesus Paul set forth on another missionary tour, 
during which he hoped to visit once more the scenes of his' 
former labors in Europe. Tarrying for a time at Troas, ‘to 
preach Christ’s gospel,’ he found some who were ready to 
listen to his message. . . . 

2. “He had hoped to meet Titus at Troas, and to learn from 
him how the words of counsel and reproof sent to the Corinthian 
brethren had been received; but in this he was disappointed. 
... He therefore left Troas, and crossed over to Macedonia, 
where, at Philippi, he met Timothy. 

3. “During this time of anxiety concerning the church at 
Corinth, Paul hoped for the best; yet at times feelings of deep 
sadness would sweep over his soul, lest his counsels and ad¬ 
monitions might be misunderstood. ‘Our flesh had no rest,’ he 
afterward wrote, ‘but we were troubled on every side; without 
were fightings, within were fears. Nevertheless God, that com- 
forteth those that are cast down, comforted us by the coming 
of Titus.’ 

4. “This faithful messenger brought the cheering news that 
a wonderful change had taken place among the Corinthian be¬ 
lievers. Many had accepted the instruction contained in Paul’s 
letter, and had repented of their sins. ... 


159 


5. ‘‘Filled with joy, the apostle sent another letter to the 
Corinthian believers, expressing his gladness of heart because 
of the good work wrought in them.”— A. A., pp. 323, 32Jf. 

6. In this lesson we have many important events covering 
probably quite a period of time. Paul went from Ephesus to 
Troas, then to Philippi, where he commenced his second letter 
to the Corinthians. He went on to other churches in Macedonia, 
met Titus, finished the letter, and sent it to Corinth. After a 
time he went into Greece, and “abode there three months,” during 
which time he visited Corinth. It was probably while at Corinth 
that he wrote the letter to the Galatians and also the one to 
the Romans. 

7. “After many unavoidable delays, Paul at last reached 
Corinth, the scene of so much anxious labor in the past, and 
for a time the object of deep solicitude. He found that many 
of the early believers still regarded him with affection, as the 
one who had first borne to them the light of the gospel. As 
he greeted these disciples, and saw the evidences of their 
fidelity and zeal, he rejoiced that his work in Corinth had not 
been in vain.”— A. A., p. 372. 


LI. PAUL’S SECOND LETTER TO THE CORINTHIANS 

Study 2 Corinthians. 

1. To whom is this epistle addressed? 2 Cor. 1:1. 

2. What experience had Paul just had in Asia? 2 Cor. 1: 8-10; 

Acts 19. 

3. What had been Paul’s plan? 2 Cor. 1: 15, 16. 

4. Why had he not gone to Corinth sooner? 2 Cor. 1:23. 

5. Why had he written his first letter to them? 2 Cor. 2: 1-4. 

6. How should they treat the one who had sinned so griev¬ 

ously? 2 Cor. 2:5-11. 



160 


7. What was Paul’s experience as a minister of Christ? 2 Cor. 

4: 8-11; 6: 4-10. 

8. Should Christians form partnerships vv^ith unbelievers? 2 

Cor. 6: 14-18. 

9. What great burden was on Paul’s mind when he came into 

Macedonia? 2 Cor. 2:12, 13; 7:5. 

10. How was Paul comforted? 2 Cor. 7: 6, 13-16. 

11. What report did Titus bring? 2 Cor. 7:7. 

12. How had Paul’s letter been received? 2 Cor. 7: 8-12. 

13. Whose example does he hold before the Corinthians? 2 

Cor. 8: 1-9. 

14. What advice did he give? 2 Cor. 8: 10-15. 

15. Who had also personally labored for them? 2 Cor. 8: 16-24. 

16. To whom did Paul boast of the liberality of the Corinthians? 

2 Cor. 9: 1-5. 

17. How should we give? 2 Cor. 9: 6-10. 

18. What had some said about Paul? 2 Cor. 10:9, 10. 

19. How had Paul been kept from self-exaltation? 2 Cor. 12: 

5-11. 

20. What was his benediction? 2 Cor. 13:11-14. 

Reading 

A. A., Chap. XXXII 
Memory Verse 

Every man according as he purposeth in his heart, so let him 
give; not grudgingly, or of necessity; for God loveth a cheer¬ 
ful giver. 2 Cor. 9: 7. 

Notes 

1. ^‘For some time Paul had been carrying a burden of 
soul for the churches,— a burden so heavy that he could scarcely 
endure it. False teachers had sought to destroy his influence 
among the believers, and to urge their own doctrines in the 
place of gospel truth. . . . 


161 


2. ‘‘But now one cause of anxiety was removed. At the 
tidings of the acceptance of his letter to the Corinthians, Paul 
broke forth into words of rejoicing. ... In expressing his joy 
over their reconversion and their growth in grace, Paul ascribed 
to God all the praise for this transformation of heart and 
life. . . . 

3. “It was the custom of the day for a general victorious 
in warfare to bring with him on his return a train of captives. 
On such occasions incense bearers were appointed, and as the 
army marched triumphantly home, the fragrant odor was to 
the captives appointed to die, a savor of death, showing that 
they were nearing the time of their execution; but to those of 
the prisoners who had found favor with their captors, and whose 
lives were to be spared, it was a savor of life, in that it showed 
them that their freedom was near. 

4. “Paul was now full of faith and hope. . . . Like incense 
the fragrance of the gospel was to be diffused throughout the 
world. To those who should accept Christ, the message would 
be a savor of life unto life; but to those who should persist in 
unbelief, a savor of death unto death.'’— A. A,, pp. 325, 326. 


LIL PAUL’S LETTER TO THE GALATIANS 

(Written at Corinth) 

Study Galatians. 

1. Who wrote this letter? To whom? Gal. 1:1, 2. 

2. What caused Paul great surprise and distress? Gal. 1:6, 7. 

3. What did he say of those who preached another gospel? 

Gal. 1: 8-10. 

4. Had Paul received the gospel from men? Gal. 1: 11, 12. 

11 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 



162 

5. What heresy had he opposed at Jerusalem and at Antioch? 

Gal. 2: 3-14. 

6. Who were very foolish ? Why ? Gal. 3: 1-5. 

7. How is man justified? Gal. 3: 11-14. 

8. What is the purpose of the law? Gal. 3:24-27. 

9. Who are the seed of Abraham? Gal. 3:28, 29. 

10. To what former customs and beliefs had the Galatians turned? 

Gal. 4: 9-11. 

11. How had they received the gospel? Gal. 4: 12-16. 

12. What did he desire to do for them? Gal. 4: 20. 

13. In what should we stand fast? Gal. 5: 1, 13. 

14. How is the law fulfilled? Gal. 5: 14. 

15. What are the works of the flesh? Gal. 5: 19-21. 

16. What are the fruits of the Spirit? Gal. 5:22-26. 

17. What is the law of reaping and sowing? Gal. 6: 7, 8 

18. What is peculiar about this letter? Gal. 6: 11. 

19. Upon whom did Paul pronounce the blessing of God? Gal. 

6: 16-18. 


Reading 

A. A., Chap. XXXVI 

Memory Verse 

But that no man is justified by the law in the sight of God, 
it is evident: for, The just shall live by faith. Gal. 3: 11. 

Notes 

1. “While tarrying at Corinth, Paul had cause for serious 
apprehension concerning some of the churches already estab¬ 
lished. Through the influence of false teachers who had arisen 
among the believers in Jerusalem, division, heresy, and sen¬ 
sualism were rapidly gaining ground among the believers in 
Galatia. These false teachers were mingling Jewish traditions 
with the truths of the gospel. Ignoring the decision of the 


16S 


general council at Jerusalem, they urged upon the gentile con¬ 
verts the observance of the ceremonial law. 

2. ‘The situation was critical. The evils that had been 
introduced threatened speedily to destroy the Galatian churches. 

3. “Paul was cut to the heart, and his soul was stirred by 
this open apostasy on the part of those to whom he had faith¬ 
fully taught the principles of the gospel. He immediately wrote 
to the deluded believers, exposing the false theories that they 
had accepted, and with great severity rebuking those who were 
departing from the faith. . . . 

4. “How different from Pauks manner of writing to the 
Corinthian church, was the course he pursued toward the Gala¬ 
tians! The former he rebuked with caution and tenderness; the 
latter, with words of unsparing reproof. The Corinthians had 
been overcome by temptation. Deceived by the ingenious soph¬ 
istry of teachers who presented errors under the guise of truth, 
they had become confused and bewildered. . . . 

5. “In the Galatian churches, open, unmasked error was sup¬ 
planting the gospel message. . . . The apostle saw that if the 
believers in Galatia were saved from the dangerous influences 
which threatened them, the most decisive measures must be 
taken, the sharpest warnings given. . . . 

6. “In his effort to regain the confidence of his brethren in 
Galatia, Paul ably vindicated his position as an apostle of Christ. 
. . . Not from men, but from the highest Authority in heaven, 
had he received his commission. And his position had been 
acknowledged by a general council at Jerusalem, with the de¬ 
cisions of which Paul had complied in all his labors among the 
gentiles. . . . The apostle was forced, by the opposition of his 
enemies, to take a decided stand in maintaining his position and 
authority. . . . 

7. “The apostle’s earnest words of entreaty were not fruit¬ 
less. The Holy Spirit wrought with mighty power, and many 
whose feet had wandered into strange paths, returned to their 
former faith in the gospel.”— A. A., pp. 383-388. 


164 


LIIL PAUL’S LETTER TO THE ROMANS 

(Written at Corinth) 

Study Romans 1-6. 

1. Who wrote this epistle? Rom. 1: 1. 

2. To whom was it written? Rom. 1: 7. 

3. What was the reputation of the church at Rome? Rom. 1: 8. 

4. What did Paul very much wish to do? Rom. 1: 9-13. 

5. To whom was he a debtor? Rom. 1: 14-16. 

6. How do the just live? Rom. 1: 17. 

7. How do men lose the knowledge of God? Rom. 1: 18-23. 

8. Is God a respecter of persons? Rom. 2:9-13. 

9. What difference is there between Jew and gentile? Rom. 

3: 9-12, 23. 

10. Who is a true Jew? Rom. 2: 28, 29. 

11. How was Abraham justified? Rom. 4: 1-4. 

12. How are all men justified? Rom. 4: 5-8. 

13. What promise was made to Abraham? Rom. 4: 13. 

14. Did he receive the promise through the law or through faith? 

Rom. 4: 14-22. 

15. How many die because Adam sinned? Rom. 5: 12. 

16. How many will be made alive because Christ died? Rom. 

5: 14-19. 

17. Is eternal life earned, or is it a gift? Rom. 6: 23. 

Reading 

A. A., Chap. XXXV 
Memory Verse 

Therefore being justified by faith, we have peace with God 
through our Lord Jesus Christ. Rom. 5: 1. 

Notes 

1. '‘During his sojourn at Corinth, Paul found time to look 
forward to new and wider fields of service. His contemplated 


165 


journey to Rome especially occupied his thoughts. To see the 
Christian faith firmly established at the great center of the 
known world, was one of his dearest hopes and most cherished 
plans. A church had already been established in Rome, and the 
apostle desired to secure the cooperation of the believers there 
in the work to be accomplished in Italy and in other countries. 
To prepare the way for his labors among these brethren, many 
of whom were as yet strangers to him, he sent them a letter, 
announcing his purpose of visiting Rome, and his hope of plant¬ 
ing the standard of the cross in Spain. 

2. “In his epistle to the Romans, Paul set forth the great 
principles of the gospel. He stated his position on the questions 
which were agitating the Jewish and the gentile churches, and 
showed that the hopes and promises which had once belonged 
especially to the Jews were now offered to the gentiles also. 

3. “With great clearness and power the apostle presented the 
doctrine of justification by faith in Christ. 

4. “He hoped that other churches also might be helped by 
the instruction sent to the Christians at Rome; but how dimly 
could he foresee the far-reaching influence of his words! Through 
all ages the great truth of justification by faith has stood as 
a mighty beacon to guide repentant sinners into the way of life. 
It was this light that scattered the darkness which enveloped 
Luther’s mind, and revealed to him the power of the blood of 
Christ to cleanse from sin. The same light has guided thousands 
of sin-burdened souls to the true Source of pardon and peace. 
For the epistle to the church at Rome, every Christian has reason 
to thank God.”— A. A., pp. 373, 37Jf,. 

5. In the letter to the Galatians Paul outlined the great prin¬ 
ciples of the doctrine of justification by faith; but in the epistle 
to the Romans he gave an extended, thorough, and logical pres¬ 
entation of the subject. 

6. Paul was debtor to all because of what God had done for 
him in revealing to him the gospel. Paul was more than willing 
to acknowledge his obligation. “From faith to faith,”—from 


166 


the faith that appropriates the righteousness of Christ, we ad¬ 
vance to living faith that reproduces His life in us. . 

7. Paul shows how men lost the knowledge of God. They 
did not recognize and honor Him as Creator, therefore they lost 
the knowledge, the comprehension, of the Godhead; for it is by 
the things that we can see, that we are enabled to grasp the 
attributes of Him who made them. 

8. The Jews thought that they were such favorites of Heaven 
that God would overlook things in them that He would not in 
gentiles, but Paul told them that with God “there is no respect of 
persons,'^ for both Jews and gentiles he proved to be under the 
condemnation of sin. 

9. Paul uses Abraham as an illustration of a true Jew, one 
who obtained righteousness by faith and not by works, and this 
before he was circumcised, showing that a man might be justified 
without circumcision. The Jews had had greater privileges than 
the gentiles, because to them had been committed the law of 
God and a full understanding of its requirements. This was the 
advantage of being born a Jew. But their responsibility also 
was greater. To whom much is given, of him much is required. 


LIV. PAUL’S LETTER TO THE ROMANS (CONTINUED) 

Study Romans 7-11. 

1. What did Paul say of the law? Rom. 7: 12, 14. 

2. What is man naturally? Rom. 7: 14. 

3. Can man unaided keep the law? Rom. 7: 15-21; 8: 7. 

4. How is man made able to keep the law ? Rom. 7: 22-25; 

8: 3, 4. 

5. Who are the sons of God? Rom. 8: 14-17. 

6. How does the Spirit help our infirmities ? Rom. 8: 26. 



167 


7. What do we know all things do? Rom. 8: 28. 

8. Can we be separated from the love of Christ? Rom. 8: 35-39. 

9. For whose salvation did Paul have a great burden? Rom. 

9: 1-5. 

10. Who are true Israelites? Rom. 9:6-8. 

11. What was Paul’s prayer and heart’s desire for Israel? Rom. 

10 : 1 . 

12. What mistake did Israel make? Rom. 10:2-4. 

13. Has God cast away Israel? Rom. 11: 1-5. 

14. What had the gentiles received through the fall of Israel? 

Rom. 11:11-15. 

15. Should the gentiles boast because they took the place of 

Israel? Rom. 11:16-19. 

16. Why were the branches broken off? Rom. 11:20-25. 

17. How many of the true Israel shall be saved? Rom. 11:26. 

Memory Verse 

There is therefore now no condemnation to them which are 
in Christ Jesus, who walk not after the flesh, but after the Spirit. 
Rom. 8: 1. 

Notes 

1. In the seventh chapter of Romans Paul shows the holy 
character of the law, and also that an unconverted person can 
not keep it though he try ever so hard. He makes the condition 
of such a one seem to be most terrible, as it really is, by an 
illustration taken from the customs of ancient times. This 
illustration begins in verse twenty-three. The one who tries 
to do right in his own strength is compared to a besieged city 
which is at last taken by storm and the inhabitants carried away 
into captivity. The poor captive is bound by chains to a dead 
body, from which he can not free himself. 

2. What a terrible picture this is! But it is a true one, as 
all know who have tried to keep the law of God in their own 
strength. Every moment, one feels an awful condemnation of 


168 


conscience, with a fear of eternal death, and with the apostle 
many cry out, “Who shall deliver me?’’ The answer is, “Jesus 
Christ our Lord.” 

3. The eighth chapter shows the condition of one who has 
been delivered from captivity to Satan, and who can now keep 
the law of God, because where Satan ruled before, Christ now 
reigns and by His Spirit enables him to keep the law. 

4. Though freed from the condemnation of sin, we still suffer 
pain, disease, and adversity in this life; but we may know that 
all things, even these afflictions, are working for our good. God 
has a wise purpose in them for us. None of these things nor 
any other thing can separate us from the love of God. We 
ourselves alone can break the connection. 

5. Paul loved his own people, the Jews, and longed for their 
salvation, though some accused him of having turned against his 
own people in favor of the gentiles. He knew that not all the 
children of Abraham were the true Israel of God, for many had 
tried to earn the righteousness of Christ by works. Such are not 
the true Israelites. 

6. God did not cast off any who were the true Israel, those to 
whom righteousness was imputed because of their faith. Paul 
proved this by himself. There were still a few, a remnant, who 
were counted true Israelites. 

7. Israel is compared to a tame olive tree. Some of the 
branches, not all, were broken off. These represented the Jews 
who trusted to works for salvation, who did not accept the right¬ 
eousness of Christ. Branches of a wild olive tree were grafted 
into the tree in place of the branches broken off. These repre¬ 
sented the gentiles who believed on Christ and trusted in Him 
for salvation. 

8. Paul says the gentiles should not boast because they had 
taken the place of the Jews, because they too might be broken 
off for the same reason, unbelief. The gentiles should have re¬ 
joiced that though the Jews had been broken off, they could 
be grafted in again if they had faith in Christ. The true Israel 


169 


are those who are Christ’s, and all these shall be saved. Gal. 
3: 29; Rom. 11: 26. 


LV. PAUL’S LETTER TO THE ROMANS (CONTINUED) 
Study Romans 12-16. 

1. How should our bodies be presented to God? Rom. 12: 1, 2. 

2. How should we treat one another? Rom. 12: 3, 10. 

3. What principles of right living did Paul express? Rom. 

12: 9-21. 

4. To whom should we be subject? Why? Rom. 13: 1-7. 

5. What is the fulfilling of the law? Rom. 13: 10. 

6. How should we live? Why? Rom. 13:11-14. 

7. How should one who is weak in the faith be treated? Rom. 

14: 1-9, 14-23. 

8. Why should we not judge another? Rom. 14: 10-13. 

9. What ought the strong ones to do? Rom. 15: 1-3. 

10. What mighty power had God given to Paul? Rom. 15; 18-21. 

11. Of what plans for the future did Paul tell them? Rom. 

15: 22-33. 

12. Whom did he recommend to them? Why? Rom. 16: 1, 2. 

13. How did he speak of Priscilla and Aquila? Rom. 16: 3, 4. 

14. How does he speak of other fellow laborers? Rom. 16: 

‘ 5-16, 21-23. 

15. With what benediction did he close his letter? Rom. 16: 

24-27. 


Memory Verse 


Be not overcome of evil, but overcome evil with good. Rom. 

12 : 21 . 



170 


Notes 

1. Paul besought all Christians to present their bodies a living 
sacrifice, probably referring, figuratively, to the sacrifices on 
the altar. When a person selected an animal for a burnt offer¬ 
ing, he chose the best he had and offered all of it. Likewise 
when we give ourselves to God, we should give all there is of 
us, and do it not as a dead ceremony, but with living faith in 
Christ, who alone can make our offering acceptable. 

2. “Be not conformed.” They were not to revive usages that 
Christ had abolished, neither were they to observe customs or 
follow principles of the world that were contrary to the teach¬ 
ings of Christ. We should be molded by Christ, not by the 
world. The Christian should be completely changed, inwardly 
and outwardly. A change in some of the things that are 
contrary to the Spirit of God is not sufficient. 

3. The Christian should at all times show the deepest respect 
for law, and obey all laws that are not contrary to the require¬ 
ments of God. Obedience to God’s law must ever be first. When 
God’s law and man’s law conflict, we must say with the apostles, 
“We ought to obey God rather than men.” 

4. Some are weak in the faith; that is, they do not fully 
understand principles or doctrines. With these we are not 
to engage in unprofitable arguments, nor to judge them as if 
they were accountable to us. 

5. “It seems very probable that there were considerable mis¬ 
understandings between the Jewish and gentile Christians at 
Rome, relative to certain customs which were sacredly observed 
by the one, and disregarded by the other. The principal subject 
of dispute was concerning meats and days. The converted Jew, 
retaining a veneration for the law of Moses, abstained from 
certain meats, and was observant of certain days; while the 
converted gentile, understanding that the Christian religion laid 
him under no obligations to such ceremonial points, had no regard 
to either. 


171 


6. “It appears further that mutual censures and uncharitable 
judgments prevailed among them; and that brotherly love and 
mutual forbearance did not generally prevail. The apostle, in 
this part of his epistle, exhorts that in such things, not essential 
to religion, and in which both parties, in their different way of 
thinking, might have an honest meaning and serious regard to 
God, difference of sentiments might not hinder Christian fellow¬ 
ship and love; but that they would mutually forbear each other, 
make candid allowance, and especially not to carry their gospel 
liberty so far as to prejudice a weak brother, a Jewish Chris¬ 
tian, against the gospel itself and tempt him to renounce Chris¬ 
tianity. . . . Probably Paul had learned these particulars from 
Aquila and Priscilla, who were lately come from Rome. Acts 
18: 2, 3.”— Clarke's Commentary. 

7. The purpose of PauFs going to Jerusalem was particularly 
to carry the contribution he had collected from the gentile 
churches. He hoped this might touch the hearts of the Jewish 
Christians and cause them to regard the gentile converts with 
more favor. He hoped after that to go to Spain, and expected 
to visit Rome on his way to that distant land. 

8. “Phebe is here termed a servant, a deaconess of the church 
at Cenchrea (a port near Corinth). There were deaconesses in 
the primitive church, whose business it was to attend the female 
converts at baptism; to instruct the catechumens, or persons who 
were candidates for baptism; to visit the sick, and those who 
were in prison; and, in short, perform those religious offices 
for the female part of the church, which could not with propriety 
be performed by men. 

9. “They were chosen in general out of the most experienced 
of the church; and were ordinarily widows who had borne 
children. It is evident that they were ordained to their office, 
by the imposition of the hands of the bishop. The form of 
prayer used on the occasion is extant in the apostolical consti¬ 
tutions. In the tenth or eleventh century the order became 


172 


extinct in the Latin church, but continued in the Greek church 
till the end of the twelfth century.”— Clarke’s Commentary. 

10. It is supposed that Phebe carried this letter to the church 
at Rome. Priscilla and Aquila evidently had returned to Rome 
some time before. The others mentioned were probably also 
Paul’s converts who had gone to Rome. 


LVL PAUL STARTS FOR JERUSALEM 


Study Acts 20: 4-16. 


1. Who accompanied Paul on this journey? 

2. Where did these laborers wait for Paul while he tarried at 

Philippi? 

3. How long a time was required for the journey to Troas? 

4. How long was Paul at Troas? 

5. For what purpose did the disciples at Troas come together? 

When? 

6. How long did Paul preach? 

7. Where were they all assembled? 

8. What sad accident occurred? How was Eutychus restored 

to life? 

9. When did Paul leave them? How did they feel about the 

young man? 

10. To what place did Paul’s companions sail? 

11. How did Paul go from Troas to Assos? 

12. What places did they pass before they came to Miletus? 


Readings 


Col. 4: 10 
1 Kings 17: 21, 22 


2 Kings 4: 32-37 
A. A., Chap. XXXVII 



173 


Memory Verse 

Trouble not yourselves; for his life is in him. Acts 20: 10. 

Notes 

1. “Paul greatly desired to reach Jerusalem before the Pass- 
over, as he would thus have an opportunity to meet those who 
should come from all parts of the world to attend the feast. 
Ever he cherished the hope that in some way he might be 
instrumental in removing the prejudice of his unbelieving coun¬ 
trymen, so that they might be led to accept the precious light 
of the gospel. He also desired to meet the church at Jerusalem, 
and bear to them the gifts sent by the gentile churches to the 
poor brethren in Judea. And by this visit he hoped to bring 
about a firmer union between the Jewish and the gentile con¬ 
verts to the faith. 

2. “Having completed his work at Corinth, he determined 
to sail directly for one of the ports on the coast of Palestine. 
All the arrangements had been made, and he was about to step 
on board the ship, when he was told of a plot laid by the Jews 
to take his life. In the past these opposers of the faith had 
been foiled in all their efforts to put an end to the apostle’s 
work. . . . 

3. “Upon receiving warning of the plot, Paul decided to go 
around by way of Macedonia. His plan to reach Jerusalem in 
time for the Passover services had to be given un but he hoped 
to be there at Pentecost. 

4. “Accompanying Paul and Luke were 'Sopater of Berea; and 
of the Thessalonians, Aristarchus and Secundus; and Gains of 
Derbe, and Timotheus; and of Asia, Tychicus and Trophimus.’ 
Paul had with him a large sum of money from the gentile 
churches, which he purposed to place in the hands of the breth¬ 
ren in charge of the work in Judea; and because of this he 
made arrangements for these representative brethren from vari¬ 
ous contributing churches, to accompany him to Jerusalem 


174 


5. Philippi Paul tarried to keep the Passover. Only Luke 
remained with him, the other members of the company passing 
on to Troas to await him there. The Philippians were the most 
loving and true-hearted of the apostle’s converts, and during 
the eight days of the feast he enjoyed peaceful and happy com¬ 
munion with them. 

6. “Sailing from Philippi, Paul and Luke reached their com¬ 
panions at Troas five days later, and remained for seven days 
with the believers in that place. 

7. “Upon the last evening of his stay the brethren 'came 
together to break bread.’ . . . They assembled in an 'upper 
chamber’ on the third story. There, in the fervency of his love 
and solicitude for them, the apostle preached until midnight. . . . 
They partook of the communion, and then Paul 'talked a long 
while, even till break of day.’ 

8. “The ship on which Paul and his companions were to con¬ 
tinue their journey, was about to sail, and the brethren hastened 
on board. The apostle himself, however, chose to take the 
nearer route by land between Troas and Assos, meeting his com¬ 
panions at the latter city. This gave him a short season for 
meditation and prayer. 

9. “The difficulties and dangers connected with his coming 
visit to Jerusalem, the attitude of the church there toward him 
and his work, as well as the condition of the churches and the 
interests of the gospel work in other fields, were subjects of 
earnest, anxious thought; and he took advantage of this special 
opportunity to seek God for strength and guidance.”—A. A., 
pp. 389-392. 

10. The pronouns “we” and “us,” Acts 20: 5, 6, show that 
Luke accompanied Paul from Philippi to Troas. He probably 
had been at Philippi all the years that intervened between Paul’s 
first visit there and this time. Luke continued to be Paul’s com¬ 
panion until their journey ended at Jerusalem. 


175 


LVII. THE MEETING AT MILETUS 


Study Acts 20: 17-38. 


1. Why did Paul not stop at Ephesus? 

2. For whom did he send? 

3. What did Paul say of his ministry among the Ephesians? 

4. What did he know concerning his future experiences? 

5. How was he affected by these things? 

6. Did he expect to see the Ephesian brethren again? 

7. What duty had he never shunned? 

8. To what were they to take heed? 

9. What did he know concerning the future of the church? 

10. To whom did he commend them? 

11. What words of Jesus were they to remember? 

12. How did Paul and the elders part? 


Eeadings 


Mark 1: 15 
Luke 24: 47 
Matt. 7: 15, 16 
1 John 2: 18, 19 
1 Sam. 12: 3 
1 Cor. 4: 11-13 
Acts 18: 3 


2 Cor. 7:2; 11:9; 


12: 17, 18; 4: 1 

1 Thess. 2:9; 3:3 

2 Thess. 3: 8 

Rom. 8: 35-39; 15: 25, 26 

2 Tim. 4: 6-8 

A. A., Chap. XXXVII 


Locate on the map all places mentioned in the lesson, and 
trace Paul's journey from the time he left Greece until he arrived 
at Miletus. 

Outline Acts 20. 

Memory Verse 

But none of these things move me, neither count I my life 
dear unto myself, so that I might finish my course with joy, 
and the ministry, which I have received of the Lord Jesus, to 
testify the gospel of the grace of God. Acts 20: 24. 


176 


Notes 

1. '‘As the travelers sailed southward from Assos, they passed 
the city of Ephesus, so long the scene of the apostle’s labors. 
Paul had greatly desired to visit the church there; for he had 



“They all wept sore, and fell on Paul’s neck, and kissed him. . . . And they 
accompanied him unto the ship.” 


important instruction and counsel to give them. But upon con¬ 
sideration he determined to hasten on; for he desired, ‘if it were 
possible for him, to be at Jerusalem the day of Pentecost.’ 

2. “On arriving at Miletus, however, about thirty miles from 
Ephesus, he learned that it might be possible to communicate 


























177 


with the church before the ship should sail. He therefore im¬ 
mediately sent a message to the elders, urging them to hasten 
to Miletus, that he might see them before continuing his jour¬ 
ney. . . . 

3. ‘Ye . . . shall see my face no more.^ Paul had not 
designed to bear this testimony, but while he was speaking, the 
Spirit of inspiration came upon him, confirming his fears that 
this would be his last meeting with his Ephesian brethren. . . . 

4. “ ‘I have not shunned to declare unto you all the counsel 

of God.’ No fear of giving offense, no desire for friendship or 
applause, could lead Paul to withhold the words that God had 
given him for their instruction, warning, or correction. . . . 

The minister of Christ is not to present to the people only 
those truths that are the most pleasing, while he withholds 
others that might cause them pain. He should watch with deep 
solicitude the development of character. If he sees that any 
of his flock are cherishing sin, he must as a faithful shepherd 
give them from God’s word the instruction that is applicable 
to their case. Should he permit them in their self-confidence to 
go on unwarned, he would be held responsible for their souls. . . . 

5. “Some of the Ephesian brethren were wealthy; but Paul 
had never sought personal benefit from them. It was no part 
of his message to call attention to his own wants. . . . Amidst 
his arduous labors and extensive journeys for the cause of 
Christ, he was able, not only to supply his own wants, but to 
spare something for the support of his fellow laborers and the 
relief of the worthy poor. This he accomplished only by unre¬ 
mitting diligence and the closest economy.”— A. A., pp. 392-396. 

6. “By his fidelity to the truth, Paul inspired intense hatred; 
but he also inspired the deepest and warmest affection. Sadly 
the disciples followed him to the ship, their hearts filled with 
anxiety, both for his future and for their own. The apostle’s 
tears flowed freely as he parted from these brethren, and after 
he had embarked there came to him from the shore the sound of 


12 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 


178 


weeping. With heavy hearts the elders turned homeward, know¬ 
ing that they could expect no further help from him who had 
felt so deep an interest and labored with so great zeal for them 
and for the church under their care.”— S. L. P., p. 202, 


LVIIL PAUL ARRIVES AT JERUSALEM 


Study Acts 21: 1-17. 


1. At what three places did Paul and his companions touch 

after leaving Miletus? 

2. What ship did they board at Patara? 

3. On which side of Cyprus did they sail? 

4. At what city did they land? Why? 

5. How long did they remain there? Why? 

6. What did these disciples say to Paul? 

7. Describe the parting with these disciples. 

8. How long did they remain at Ptolemais? 

9. For what place did Paul’s company depart the next day? 

10. At whose home were they entertained in Csesarea? 

11. How many daughters had Philip? 

12. What gift of the Spirit did they have? 

13. What did Agabus prophesy? What was Paul willing to do? 

14. When he would not be persuaded, what did the disciples 

say? 

15. When they resumed their journey, who accompanied them? 

16. How were they received at Jerusalem? 


Readings 


Eph. 4: 11, 12 
2 Tim. 4: 5 
Joel 2: 28 


Matt. 6: 10; 26: 42 
A. A., Chap. XXXVIl 



179 


Locate all places mentioned in the lesson. 

Trace on the map the journey of Paul from Corinth to 
Jerusalem. 

Memory Verse 

And when he would not be persuaded, we ceased, saying, 
'‘The will of the Lord be done.” Acts 21: 14. 

Notes 

1. “Never before had the apostle approached Jerusalem with 
so sad a heart. He knew that he would find few friends and 
many enemies. He was nearing the city which had rejected 
and slain the Son of God, and over which now hung the threat- 
enings of divine wrath. Remembering how bitter had been his 
own prejudice against the followers of Christ, he felt the deepest 
pity for his deluded countrymen. And yet how little could he 
hope that he would be able to help them! The same blind 
wrath which had once burned in his own heart, was now with 
untold power kindling the hearts of a whole nation against him. 

2. “And he could not count upon the sympathy and support 

of even his own brethren in the faith. The unconverted Jews 
who had followed so closely upon his track, had not been slow 
to circulate the most unfavorable reports at Jerusalem, both 
personally and by letter, concerning him and his work; and 
some, even of the apostles and elders, had received these reports 
as truth, making no attempt to contradict them, and manifesting 
no desire to harmonize with him. , 

3. “Yet in the midst of discouragements, the apostle was not 
in despair. He trusted that the voice which had spoken to his 
own heart would yet speak to the hearts of his countrymen, and 
that the Master whom his fellow disciples loved and served 
would yet unite their hearts with his in the work of the gospel.” 
— A. A., P2J. 397, 398. 


180 















ISl 

LIX. PAUL PERFORMS THE CEREMONY OF 
PURIFICATION 

Study Acts 21: 18-26. 

1. Whom did Paul and his companions meet on the day fol¬ 

lowing their arrival at Jerusalem? 

2. What did Paul tell them? How was his report received? 

3. What did they say of the number of Jews who believed? 

4. For what were all these very zealous? 

5. What had been reported concerning Paul’s teachings? 

6. Who did the elders say would come together? Why? 

7. What did they advise Paul to do? 

8. Why did they wish him to perform this ceremony? 

9. What decree did they repeat? 

10. What did Paul do the next day? 

11. Why did Paul do this? 

Readings 

Rom. 15: 18, 19; 10:2 Gal. 1: 14 

Numbers 6 A. A., Chap. XXXVIII 

Memory Verse 

And when he had saluted them, he declared particularly what 
things God had wrought among the gentiles by his ministry. 
Acts 21: 19. 

Notes 

1. “On this occasion, Paul and his companions formally pre¬ 
sented to the leaders of the work at Jerusalem the contributions 
forwarded by the gentile churches for the support of the poor 
among their Jewish brethren. 

2. “The gathering of these contributions had cost the apostle 
and his fellow workers much time, anxious thought, and weari¬ 
some labor. The sum, which far exceeded the expectations of 


182 


the elders at Jerusalem, represented many sacrifices and even 
severe privations on the part of the gentile believers. 

3. “These freewill offerings betokened the loyalty of the 
gentile converts to the organized work of God throughout the 
world, and should have been received by all with grateful acknowl¬ 
edgment; yet it was apparent to Paul and his companions that 
even among those before whom they now stood were some who 
were unable to appreciate the spirit of brotherly love that had 
prompted the gifts. . . . 

4. “This was the golden opportunity for all the leading 
brethren to confess frankly that God had wrought through 
Paul, and that at times they had erred in permitting the reports 
of his enemies to arouse their jealousy and prejudice. But 
instead of uniting in an effort to do justice to the one who 
had been injured, they gave him counsel which showed that they 
still cherished a feeling that Paul should be held largely re¬ 
sponsible for the existing prejudice. . . . 

5. “Those who advised Paul to take this step had not fully 
considered the great peril to which he would thus be exposed. 
At this season, Jerusalem was filled with worshipers from many 
lands. As, in fulfillment of the commission given him by God, 
Paul had borne the gospel to the gentiles, he had visited many 
of the world’s largest cities, and he was well known to thousands 
who from foreign parts had come to Jerusalem to attend the 
feast. Among these were men whose hearts were filled with 
bitter hatred for Paul; and for him to enter the temple on a 
public occasion was to risk his life. For several days he passed 
in and out among the worshipers, apparently unnoticed; but 
before the close of the specified period, as he was talking with a 
priest concerning the sacrifices to be offered, he was recognized 
by some of the Jews from Asia.”—A. A., pp. 399-4.06. 


18 B 


SUMMARY OF THE SECOND PERIOD 

This period includes the three missionary journeys of Paul. 
In the first journey Paul and Barnabas started from Antioch 
in Syria, visited the island of Cyprus, the early home of the 
latter, and cities in the southern part of Asia Minor. They 
established churches at Iconium, Antioch in Pisidia, Lystra, and 
Derbe, and “ordained them elders in every church.” 

They returned to Antioch and “abode long time.” During 
this time certain men from Judea came to Antioch, and created 
great dissension in the church by teaching that Christians must 
keep the law of Moses, the ceremonial law, or they could not 
be saved. A great council at Jerusalem decided against these 
Judaizers, and a letter was written to the gentile churches, giving 
the decision of the council. This did not, however, restore har¬ 
mony. The Judaizing brethren continued to teach their heresy 
in the churches that Paul had raised up. The effect was to 
destroy the work of the gospel. Paul labored hard to counter¬ 
act the influence of these men, and wrote letters to the churches 
to explain the truths of God more fully. 

On the second journey, Paul set out with Silas, Barnabas 
having taken John Mark with him. At Lystra, Paul chose 
Timothy “to go forth with him.” Later he was joined by Titus 
and others. He visited the churches of his former labors, and 
delivered to them the decree of the council. He also went 
throughout Phrygia and Galatia. Being forbidden to preach the 
gospel in the province of Asia, and in Bithynia, he went to 
Troas, where in vision he was called into Macedonia. 

He accordingly entered the continent of Europe, establishing 
churches at Philippi, Thessalonica, Berea, Corinth, and Athens. 
On his return journey he touched at Ephesus, went to Jerusalem 
and “saluted the church,” and then returned to Antioch, as he 
had done at the close of the first journey. While at Corinth 
he wrote the two letters to the Thessalonians. 

He began his third journey by going over Galatia and 


184 


Phrygia, ‘'strengthening the churches/’ Then he went to Ephe¬ 
sus, where he remained three years. Near the close of his stay 
there, he wrote a letter to the Corinthians, which has been 
lost. This not eliciting a satisfactory response, he wrote another, 
the first extant letter to the Corinthians. He sent it to them by 
Titus, and then went to Troas and waited for Titus. But as Titus 
did not come, Paul became so anxious that he sailed for Philippi, 
in Macedonia. At length Titus came with good news from Cor¬ 
inth, and Paul immediately wrote the second letter. 

Paul labored for a while in Macedonia, then went into Greece, 
therefore visited Corinth. After remaining in Greece three 
months, he started on his return journey. He came back through 
Macedonia, “abode seven days’’ at Troas, met the elders of 
Ephesus at Miletus, landed at Tyre, also at Caesarea, then went 
up to Jerusalem. Here ended the third missionary journey. 
Doubtless he would have gone to Antioch as before, had he 
not been arrested in Jerusalem. 


« 






185 


REVIEW 

1. At what city did each of Paul’s missionary journeys begin? 

Where did each end? 

2. Trace the first journey on the map, and name the places at 

which churches were established. 

3. Write a character sketch of John Mark. 

4. When was the first general council of the Christian church 

held? 

5. What question was settled by this council? 

6. For what reason did one apostle publicly rebuke another 

apos.tle? 

7. For what purpose did Paul collect alms from the gentile 

churches? Write a short paper upon this subject. 

8. Trace on the map the second missionary journey. 

9. How many places where Paul had been on his first journey 

did he visit on the second journey? 

10. Name the new churches established on his second journey. 

11. Why and where did he write the two letters to the Thessa- 

lonians ? 

12. Who were Paul’s companions on his second journey? 

13. Write the history of Timothy. 

14. What church was always commended by Paul? 

15. What people were nobler than the Thessalonians ? 

16. Where did Paul depend upon worldly wisdom and learning 

for success? 

17. Why did he say to the Corinthians, “I determined not to 

know anything among you, save Jesus Christ, and Him 
crucified”? 

18. What learned man received instruction from two humble 

Christians ? 

19. Trace on the map Paul’s third missionary journey. 

20. What churches did Paul visit on his third journey, that he 

had established during previous missionary tours? 


186 


21. Give a brief history of the church at Corinth. Name those 

who labored there at different times. 

22. Did Paul establish any new churches on his third journey? 

23. What was the character of the Corinthian church? 

24. Why did Paul write the first letter to the Corinthians? 

The second? 

25. Where did Paul hold an all-night meeting? Why? 

26. From what place did Paul write the letter to the Galatians? 

27. What conditions in the Galatian churches made this letter 

necessary ? 

28. What great city did Paul for many years hope to visit? 

What country? 

29. What is the principal theme, or subject, of the letter to the 

Romans ? 

30. From what place did Paul send for the elders of an important 

church? Why? 

31. At what city did the third missionary journey end? Why? 
Who spoke each of the following quotations, to whom, when, 

and where? — 

32. ‘'Separate Me Barnabas and Saul for the work whereunto 

I have called them.'' 

33. “Sirs, why do ye these things?" 

34. “Except ye be circumcised after the manner of Moses, ye 

can not be saved." 

35. “Come over into Macedonia, and help us." 

36. “These men are the servants of the most high God, which 

show unto us the way of salvation." 

37. “Sirs, what must I do to be saved?" 

38. “What will this babbler say?" 

39. “I found an altar with this inscription, TO THE UN¬ 

KNOWN GOD." 

40. “We will hear thee again of this matter." 

41. “Your blood be upon your own heads; I am clean: from 

henceforth I will go unto the gentiles." 




42. '^We have not so much as heard whether there be any Holy 

Ghost.’' 

43. ‘'Jesus I know, and Paul I know; but who are ye?” 

44. “Great is Diana of the Ephesians.” 

45. “Trouble not yourselves; for his life is in him.” 

46. “Ye know, from the first day that I came into Asia, after 

what manner I have been with you at all seasons.” 

47. “It is more blessed to give than to receive.” 

48. “What mean ye to weep and to break mine heart?” 

49. “The will of the Lord be done.” 

50. “They are informed of thee, that thou teachest all the Jews 

which are among the gentiles to forsake Moses.” 







CHAPTER NINE 
Paul a Prisoner 


LX. PAUL ARRESTED 
Study Acts 21: 27-40. 

1. Who saw Paul in the temple? When? 

2. What did they do? Of what did they accuse him? 

3. Whom had they seen with him? 

4. What wrong conclusion did they draw? 

5. Who joined together against Paul? 

6. From what place was he taken? 

7. What did the mob purpose to do? 

8. Who heard that Jerusalem was in an uproar? 

9. How was Paul rescued? What did the chief captain wish 

to know? 

10. Why could he not learn what Paul had done? 

11. To what place did he command the soldiers to take Paul? 

12. How was he taken up the stairs? Why? 

13. What did the people cry? 

14. What did Paul say to the chief captain? 

15. Whom did the chief captain suppose Paul to be? 

16. In what language did Paul speak to the people? 

Readings 

Luke 23: 18 Acts 5: 36; 22: 22 A. A., Chap. XXXVIII 

Outline Acts 21. 

( 188 ) 



189 


Memory Verse 

Paul said, “I am a man which am a Jew of Tarsus, a city in 
Cilicia, a citizen of no mean city: and, I beseech thee, suffer me 
to speak unto the people.’' Acts 21: 39. 



TARSUS 

Notes 


1. "‘By the Jewish law, it was a crime punishable with death 
for an uncircumcised person to enter the inner courts of the 
sacred edifice. Paul had been seen in the city in company with 
Trophimus, an Ephesian, and it was conjectured that he had 
brought him into the temple. This he had not done, and being 
himself a Jew, his act in entering the temple was no violation 
of the law. . . . 

2. ‘Tn the midst of the tumult, the apostle Vas calm and 





190 


self-possessed. His mind was stayed upon God, and he knew 
that angels of heaven were about him. He felt unwilling to 
leave the temple without making an effort to set the truth before 
his countrymen.’^ 

3. “When we think of Paul’s great desire to be in har¬ 
mony with his brethren, his tenderness toward the weak in the 
faith, his reverence for the apostles who had been with Christ, 
and for James, the brother of the Lord, and his purpose to be¬ 
come all things to all men, so far as he could without sacri¬ 
ficing principle,— when we think of all this, it is less surprising 
that he was constrained to deviate from the firm, decided course 
that he had hitherto followed. But instead of accomplishing 
the desired object, his efforts for conciliation only precipitated 
the crisis, hastened his predicted sufferings, and resulted in 
separating him from his brethren, depriving the church of one 
of its strongest pillars, and bringing sorrow to Christian hearts 
in every land.”— A. A., pp, ^05-^8. 


LXI. PAUL’S SPEECH ON THE STAIRS 

Study Acts 22. 

1. Why did the people listen to Paul so quietly? 

2. What did he say of his nationality and birthplace? Of his 

education ? 

3. Whom had he persecuted? 

4. What occurred to him near Damascus? 

5. Who was it that spoke to Paul? 

6. How did he enter Damascus? Why? 

7. How did he receive his sight again? 

8. What work was given him to do? 

9. Who spoke to him in the temple at Jerusalem? 



191 


10. Why did Paul think he ought to stay in Jerusalem? 

11. Where did the Lord say He would send him? 

12. What did the people cry out against Paul? 

13. What did the chief captain command? 

14. What question did Paul ask a centurion? Why was he not 

scourged ? 

15. Who summoned the council? For what purpose? 

Readings 
Acts 9 

2 Cor. 11:22 
Phil. 3: 5, 6 

Outline Acts 22. 

Memory Verse 

And He said unto me, “Depart: for I will send thee far hence 
unto the gentiles.’' Acts 22: 21. 

Notes 

1. “None could deny the apostle’s statements, as the facts 
that he referred to were well known to many who were still 
living in Jerusalem. He then spoke of his former zeal in perse¬ 
cuting the disciples of Christ even unto death; and he narrated 
the circumstances of his conversion, telling his hearers how his 
own proud heart had been led to bow to the crucified Nazarene. 
Had he attempted to enter into argument with his opponents, 
they would have stubbornly refused to listen to his words, but 
the relation of his experience was attended with a convincing 
power that for the time seemed to soften and subdue their hearts. 

2. “He then endeavored to show that his work among the 
gentiles had not been entered upon from choice. He had desired 
to labor for his own nation; but in that very temple the voice 
of God had spoken to him in holy vision, directing his course 
‘far hence unto the gentiles.’ 


Luke 11: 39 Acts 16: 37; 25: 16 

1 Tim. 1: 13 A. A., Chap. XXXVIII 

Gal. 1: 12 


192 


3. “Hitherto the people had listened with close attention, but 
when Paul reached the point in his history where he was ap¬ 
pointed Christ's ambassador to the gentiles, their fury broke 
forth anew. Accustomed to look upon themselves as the only 
people favored by God, they were unwilling to permit the de¬ 
spised gentiles to share the privileges which had hitherto been 
regarded as exclusively their own."— A. A., pp. 4^09, 410. 


LXIL PAUL BEFORE THE SANHEDRIN 

Study Acts 23: 1-15. 

1. How did Paul address the council? How had he always 

lived ? 

2. What did the high priest Command them that stood by? 

3. What did Paul say? Who reproved him? 

4. How did Paul acknowledge his mistake? 

5. How many classes of persons were in the council? 

6. For what was Paul called in question? 

7. What was the effect of his words on the two parties? 

8. What was the difference in the teachings of the Sadducees 

and the Pharisees? 

9. Who took Paul’s part? What did they say? 

10. What did the chief captain fear? 

11. What did he do to save Paul’s life? 

12. How did the Lord encourage Paul that night? 

13. For what purpose did some of the Jews join together? 

14. How many were in this conspiracy? What did they vow? 

15. To whom did they tell their plans? 



193 


Readings 



Acts 24: 16 

Heb. 13: 18 

Ex. 22: 28 

2 Cor. 1: 12 

1 Kings 22: 24 

2 Peter 2: 10 

2 Tim. 1: 3 

John 18:22; 7; 51 

A. A., Chap. XXXVIIT 

Memory Verse 




The night following the Lord stood by him, and said, “Be of 
good cheer, Paul: for as thou hast testified of Me in Jerusalem, 
so must thou bear witness also at Rome.” Acts 23: 11. 


Notes 

1. “The apostle was now to be tried by the same tribunal of 
which he himself had been a member before his conversion. As 
he stood before the Jewish rulers, his bearing was calm and his 
countenance revealed the peace of Christ. . . . 

2. “The position which the Jews as God’s professed people 
occupied before an unbelieving world, caused the apostle intense 
anguish of spirit. How would those heathen officers look upon 
them? — claiming to be worshipers of Jehovah, and assuming 
sacred office, yet giving themselves up to the control of blind, 
unreasoning anger, seeking to destroy even their brethren who 
dared to differ with them in religious faith, and turning their 
most solemn deliberative council into a scene of strife and wild 
confusion. Paul felt that the name of his God had suffered 
reproach in the eyes of the heathen.”— A. A., pp. 


LXIIL PAUL TAKEN TO CAESAREA 

Study Acts 23: 16-35. 

1. How did Paul learn of the plot against him? 

2. To whom did Paul send the young man? 

13 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 



194 


3. What did the centurion report to the chief captain? 

4. What did the captain ask the young man? 

5. What order did the captain give two centurions? Why? 

6. To whom did he purpose to send Paul? 

7. How did he address Felix? Why had he rescued Paul? 

8. What had he learned concerning the charge against Paul? 

9. Why did he send him to Felix? 

10. How far did the soldiers take Paul that night? 

11. When did they return to the castle? 

12. To whom did the horsemen deliver Paul and the letter? 

13. When Felix read the letter, what question did he ask Paul? 

14. When did he say he would give him a hearing? 

15. Where was Paul kept? 

Reading 

A. A., Chap. XXXVIII 

Outline Acts 23. / 

Where was Caesarea? 

Memory Verse 

Whom I perceived to be accused of questions of their law, 
but to have nothing laid to his charge worthy of death or of 
bonds. Acts 23: 29. 

Notes 

1. “The case of Paul was not the first in which a servant 
of God had found among the heathen an asylum from the malice 
of the professed people of Jehovah. In their rage against Paul, 
the Jews had added another crime to the dark catalogue which 
marked the history of that people. They had still further 
hardened their hearts against the truth, and had rendered their 
doom more certain. ... 

2. “Had the leaders in the church fully surrendered their 
feeling of bitterness toward the apostle, and accepted him as 


195 


one specially called of God to bear the gospel to the gentiles, the 
Lord would have spared him to them. God had not ordained 
that Paul’s labors should so soon end; but He did not work a 
miracle to counteract the train of circumstances to which the 
course of the leaders in the church at Jerusalem had given 
rise. . . . 

3. “Satan is constantly working through his agents to dis¬ 
hearten and destroy those whom God has chosen to accomplish 
a great and good work. . . . Too often he succeeds in bring¬ 
ing upon them, through their own brethren, such sorrow of 
heart that God graciously interposes to give His persecuted 
servants rest. After the hands are folded upon the pulseless 
breast, when the voice of warning and encouragement is silent, 
then the obdurate may be aroused to see and prize the blessings 
they have cast from them. Their death may accomplish that 
which their life has failed to do.”— A. A., pp. 

4. When Peter was cast into prison, the church united in 
earnest prayer for him, but no such interest was manifested in 
Paul. Only a boy, a relative of Paul’s, made an effort to save 
his life. 


LXIV. PAUL BEFORE FELIX 

Study Acts 24. 

1. How long before Paul’s accusers came? Who were they? 

2. With what flattering words did Tertullus begin his speech? 

3. What did he say Paul had been found to be? 

4. What had he attempted to profane? 

5. How could Felix learn the truth of these words? 

6. Who agreed with Tertullus ? 

7. Who then received permission to speak? 



196 


8, Why was Paul especially glad to present his case before Felix? 

9. How long since he came to Jerusalem? 

10. Could his enemies prove any of the accusations?' 

11. What did Paul admit? What hope did he have? 

12. What had he brought to his nation after his long absence? 

13. Who should have been at his trial? 

14., To what time did Felix defer his decision? 

15. When did he hear Paul again? Who was Drusilla? 

16. Of what did Paul speak to Felix? 

17. How was Felix affected by Paul’s words? 

18. What did Felix hope to receive? 

19. Why did he not release Paul? 

Readings 

Luke 23: 2 Dan. 12: 2 

1 Peter 2: 12 John 18: 31 

John 5: 28, 29 Rom. 15: 25 

Outline Acts 24. 

Memory Verse 

And as he reasoned of righteousness, temperance, and judg¬ 
ment to come, Felix trembled, and answered, “Go thy way for 
this time; when I have a convenient season, I will call for thee.” 
Acts 24: 25. 

Notes 

1. “The character of Felix was base and contemptible. It was 
said of him that ‘in the practice of all kinds of lust and cruelty, 
he exercised the power of a king with the temper of a slave.’ . . . 

2. “So violent and cruel had been the.course of Felix, that 
few had ever before dared even to intimate to him that his 
character and conduct were not faultless. But Paul had no fear 
of man. He plainly declared his faith in Christ, and the reasons 
for that faith, and was thus led to speak particularly of those 


Gal. 2: 10 
Ex. 23: 8 

A. A., Chap. XXXIX 


197 


virtues essential to Christian character, but of which the haughty 
pair before him were so strikingly destitute. . . . 

3. ‘'The Jewish princess [Drusilla] well understood the sacred 
character of that law which she had so shamelessly transgressed; 
but her prejudice against the Man of Calvary steeled her heart 
against the word of life. But Felix had never before listened 
to the truth; and as the Spirit of God sent conviction to his 
soul, he became deeply agitated. Conscience, now aroused, made 
her voice heard; and Felix felt that Paul’s words were true. 
. . . Never before had his soul been so filled with terror. The 
thought that all the secrets of his career of crime were open 
before the eye of God, and that he must be judged according to 
his deeds, caused him to tremble with dread. . . . 

4. “Felix was finally summoned to Rome because of gross 
wrongs committed against the Jews. Before leaving Caesarea 
in answer to this summons, he thought to ‘show the Jews a 
pleasure’ by allowing Paul to remain in prison. But Felix 
was not successful in his attempt to regain the confidence of 
the Jews. He was removed from office in disgrace, and Porcius 
Festus was appointed to succeed him, with headquarters at 
Caesarea. 

5. “A ray of light from heaven had been permitted to shine 
upon Felix when Paul reasoned with him concerning righteous¬ 
ness, temperance, and a judgment to come. That was his 
heaven-sent opportunity to see and to forsake his sins. But he 
said to the messenger of God, ‘Go thy way for this time; when 
I have a convenient season, I will call for thee.’ He had slighted 
his last offer of mercy. Never was he to receive another call 
from God.”—A. A., pp, J^19-^27. 


198 


LXV. PAUL BEFORE FESTUS 

Study Acts 25: 1-12. 

1. How soon did Festus go to Jerusalem after his arrival in 

the province? 

2. Who informed him against Paul? 

3. What favor did they desire? 

4. What was their plan? 

5. What reason did Felix give for not granting their request? 

6. What should they do if they were able? 

7. How long did he remain at Jerusalem? 

8. How soon was Paul brought before him? 

9. Could Paul’s enemies prove any of their charges against him? 

10. How did Paul answer for himself? 

11. What did Festus ask Paul? Why? 

12. Before whose judgment seat was Paul tried? Was this the 

proper place? 

13. Under what circumstances would he be willing to die? 

14. To whom did he appeal? 

15. With whom did Festus confer? 

16. What was his decision? 

Readings 

Mark 15: 3 Luke 23: 2, 10 A. A., Chap. XL 

Memory Verse 

For if I be an offender, or have committed anything worthy 
of death, I refuse not to die: but if there be none of these things 
whereof these accuse me, no man may deliver me unto them. 
Acts 25: 11. 

Notes 

1. “Festus discerned that the question in dispute related 
wholly to Jewish doctrines, and that, rightly understood, there 
was nothing in the charges against Paul, could they be proved, 


m 


that would render him subject to sentence of death, or even to 
imprisonment. Yet he saw clearly the storm of rage that would 
be created if Paul were not condemned or delivered into their 
hands. And so, ‘willing to do the Jews a pleasure,’ Festus turned 
to Paul, and asked if he was v/illing to go to Jerusalem under his 
protection, to be tried by the Sanhedrin. 

2. “The apostle knew that he could not look for justice 
from the people who by their crimes were bringing down upon 
themselves the wrath of God. . . . Weary of strife, his active 
spirit could ill endure the repeated delays and wearing suspense 
of his trial and imprisonment. He therefore decided to exercise 
his privilege, as a Roman citizen, of appealing to Csesar. . . . 

3. “In the future, men claiming to be Christ’s representatives 
will take a course similar to that followed by the priests and 
rulers in their treatment of Christ and the apostles. In the great 
crisis through which they are soon to pass, the faithful servants 
of God will encounter the same hardness of heart, the same 
cruel determination, the same unyielding hatred. . . . 

4. “God desires His people to prepare for the soon-coming 
crisis. Prepared or unprepared, they must all meet it; and 
those only who have brought their lives into conformity to the 
divine standard, will stand firm at that time of test and trial.” 
— A. A., pp. 429-^32. 


LXVL PAUL BEFORE AGRIPPA 

Study Acts 25: 13-27. 

1. Who came to Caesarea to salute Festus? 

2. Of whose case did Festus speak to Agrippa? 

3. Who had desired Festus to sentence Paul? 

4. How had he explained the Roman law to the Jews? 



200 


5. Was their accusation such as he had expected? 

6. What was the difference between Paul and the Jews as 

Festus understood it? 

7. Why had he asked Paul to go to Jerusalem? 

8. When Paul appealed to Caesar, what had Festus commanded? 

9. What desire did Agrippa express? Was it granted? 

10. Who assembled to hear Paul? When? 

11. What explanation of the prisoner’s case did Festus make? 

12. Why had he determined to send Paul to Caesar? 

13. What seemed an unreasonable thing to him? 

14. Why had he brought Paul before Agrippa? 

Reading 

A. A., Chap. XLI 
Outline Acts 25. 

Memory Verse 

It is not the manner of the Homans to deliver any man to 
die, before that he which is accused have the accusers face to 
face, and have license to answer for himself concerning the 
crime laid against him. Acts 25: 16. 

Notes 

1. “Paul had appealed to Caesar, and Festus could not do 
otherwise than send him to Rome. But some time passed before 
a suitable ship could be found; and as other prisoners were to 
be sent with Paul, the consideration of their cases also occa¬ 
sioned delay. This gave Paul opportunity to present the reasons 
of his faith before the principal men of Caesarea, and also before 
King Agrippa II, the last of the Herods. . . . 

2. “And now Paul, still manacled, stood before the assembled 
company. What a contrast was here presented! Agrippa and 
Bernice possessed power and position, and because of this they 
were favored by the world. But they were destitute of the traits 
of character that God esteems. They were transgressors of His 


201 


law, corrupt in heart and life. Their course of action was ab¬ 
horred by heaven. 

3. “The aged prisoner, chained to his soldier guard, had in 
his appearance nothing that would lead the world to pay him 
homage. Yet in this man, apparently without friends or wealth 
or position, and held a prisoner for his faith in the Son of 
God, all heaven was interested. Angels were his attendants. 
Had the glory of one of those shining messengers flashed forth, 
the pomp and pride of royalty would have paled; king and 
courtiers would have been stricken to the earth, as were the 
Roman guards at the sepulcher of Christ.”—A. A., pp. U33-US5. 


LXVII. PAUL’S DEFENSE BEFORE AGRIPPA 

Study Acts 26. 

1. What permission did Agrippa give Paul? 

2. Why was Paul especially glad to answer before Agrippa? 

3. What could all testify of Paul if they would? 

4. For what was he judged? 

5. Is the resurrection of the dead an incredible thing? 

6. What had he thought he ought to do? 

7. Where and how had he persecuted the saints? 

8. Relate the circumstances attending his conversion. 

9. Of what things was he made a witness? 

10. To what people was he sent? To what was he obedient? 

11. Why were the Jews determined to kill him? 

12. By whose help had he continued to witness? To whom*^ 

13. What did he preach? 

14. How did Festus interrupt him? What did Paul answer? 

15. What question did he ask Agrippa? 

16. To what was Agrippa almost persuaded? 



202 


17. What earnest desire did Paul express? Who then left the 

room ? 

18. What was Agrippa’s decision? 

19. Write out the decisions of Lysias, Felix, Festus, and Agrippa, 

and compare them. 

Keadings 

Matt. 3: 8 
Luke 24: 27, 44-48 
John 10: 20 
Phil. 3:5, 10, 11 

Outline Acts 26. 

Memory Verse 

Whereupon, 0 King Agrippa, I was not disobedient unto the 
heavenly vision. Acts 26: 19. 

Notes 

1. ‘‘King Agrippa now gave Paul liberty to speak for himself. 
The apostle was not disconcerted by the brilliant display or the 
high rank of his audience; for he knew of how little worth are 
worldly wealth and position. Earthly pomp and power could not 
for a moment daunt his courage or rob him of his self-control.” 
— A. A., p. Jf35. 

2. “Did the mind of Agrippa at these words revert to the 
past history of his family, and their fruitless efforts against Him 
whom Paul was preaching? Did he think of his great-grand¬ 
father Herod, and the massacre of the innocent children of 
Bethlehem? of his great-uncle Antipas, and the murder of John 
the Baptist? of his own father, Agrippa I, and the martyrdom 
of the apostle James? 

3. “Did he see in the disasters which speedily befell these 
kings an evidence of the displeasure of God in consequence of 
their crimes against His servants? Did the pomp and display 


Gen. 3: 15; 22: 18; 49: 10 1 Tim. 1: 13 

Deut. 18: 15 Gal. 1: 13 

Rom. 15: 8 Isa. 42: 6, 7 

John 16:2 


203 


of that day remind Agrippa of the time when his own father, 
a monarch more powerful than he, stood in that same city, 
attired in glittering robes, while the people shouted that he was 
a god? Had he forgotten how, even before the admiring shouts 
had died away, vengeance, swift and terrible, had befallen the 
vainglorious king? Something of all this flitted across Agrippa’s 
memory; but his vanity was flattered by the brilliant scene be¬ 
fore him, and pride and self-importance banished all nobler 
thoughts. ... 

4. “The Jewish king had been instructed in the law and the 
prophets, and he had learned from credible witnesses some of 
the facts of which Paul had spoken. Hence the arguments which 
were so new and strange to Festus, were clear and convincing to 
Agrippa. . . . 

5. “Though Agrippa was a Jew, he did not share the bigoted 
zeal and blind prejudice of the Pharisees. He had no desire to 
see freedom of thought suppressed by violence. ‘This man,’ he 
said, ‘might have been set at liberty, if he had not appealed unto 
Caesar.’ 

6. “But now that the case had been referred to that higher 
tribunal, it was beyond the jurisdiction of Festus or Agrippa. 
Yet, two years afterward, the result of that day’s proceedings 
saved the life so precious to the cause of God. Festus, finding 
that his own judgment of the case, on the grounds of Roman 
justice, was sustained from a Jewish standpoint by the protector 
of the temple, sent a letter to the emperor stating that no legal 
charge could be found against the prisoner. And Nero, cruel 
and unscrupulous as he was, dared not put to death a man 
whom Lysias, Felix, Festus, and Agrippa pronounced guiltless, 
and whom even the Sanhedrin could not condemn.”— S. L. P., 
pp. 255-261. 


204 


LXVIII. PAUL’S JOURNEY FROM CAESAREA TO CRETE 

Study Acts 27: 1-13. 

1. To whom was Paul delivered? For what purpose? 

2. What ship did they take? Past what coast did they intend 

to sail? 

3. Who accompanied Paul? Where did they touch the next day? 

4. What was Paul permitted to do? 

5. On which side of■ Cyprus did they pass? Why? 

6. Over what sea did they go? 

7. In what ship did they embark at Myra? 

8. How did they sail many days? Why? 

9. To what island did they come? 

10. What harbor did they reach? What city was near? 

11. Why was sailing now so dangerous? 

12. What did Paul say would occur on the voyage? 

13. Whom did the centurion believe? 

14. What did the majority wish to do? 

15. What harbor did they think a better place to winter than 

Fair Havens? 

16. What favorable wind was blowing? 

17. Near what island did they sail? 

Reading 

A. a'., Chap. XLII 
Memory Verse 

Sirs, I perceive that this voyage will be with hurt and much 
damage, not only of the lading and ship, but also of our lives. 
Acts 27: 10. 

Notes 

1. “Adramyttium was situated upon the west coast of the 
province of Asia; therefore the travelers could perform but a 


205 


part of their journey in a ship bound for that city. But in 
some of the larger ports at which the vessel touched, they would 
be likely to find a ship in which they could embark for Rome.” 
— S, L. P., p. 261, ■ 

2. “In the first century of the Christian era, traveling by 
sea was attended with peculiar hardship and peril. Mariners 
directed their course largely by the position of the sun and 
stars; and when these did not appear, and there were indica¬ 
tions of storm, the owners of vessels were fearful of venturing 
into the open sea. During a portion of the year, safe navigation 
was almost impossible. 

3. “The apostle Paul was now called upon to endure the try¬ 
ing experiences that would fall to his lot as a prisoner in chains 
during the long and tedious voyage to Italy. One circumstance 
greatly lightened the hardship of his lot,— he was permitted 
the companionship of Luke and Aristarchus. In his letter to 
the Colossians, he afterward referred to the latter as his ‘fellow 
prisoner;’ but it was from choice that Aristarchus shared Paul’s 
bondage, that he might minister to him in his afflictions. 

4. “The voyage began prosperously. The following day they 
cast anchor in the harbor of Sidon. Here Julius, the centurion, 
‘courteously entreated Paul,’ and being informed that there were 
Christians in the place, ‘gave him liberty to go unto his friends 
to refresh himself.’ This permission was greatly appreciated by 
the apostle, who was in feeble health. . . . 

5. “At Fair Havens they were compelled to remain for some 
time, waiting for favoring winds. Winter was approaching 
rapidly; ‘sailing was now dangerous;’ and those in charge of 
the vessel had to give up hope of reaching their destination 
before the season for travel by sea should be closed for the 
year. The only question now to be decided was, whether to 
remain at Fair Havens or attempt to reach a more favorable 
place in which to winter. 

6. “This question was earnestly discussed, and was finally 


206 


referred by the centurion to Paul, who had won the respect of 
both sailors and soldiers. The apostle unhesitatingly advised 
remaining where they were. . . . But ‘the master and the owner 
of the snip,' and the majority of passengers and crew, were un¬ 
willing to accept this counsel. . . . 

7. “The centurion decided to follow the judgment of the 
majority. Accordingly ‘when the south wind blew softly,' they 
set sail from Fair Havens, in the hope that they would soon 
reach the desired harbor."—A. A., pp. k39-UUl- 


LXIX. THE GREAT STORM 

Study Acts 27: 14-29. 

1. What great wind arose? What was the ship allowed to do? 

Why? 

2. Near what island did they drift? 

3. What did they accomplish with difficulty? 

4. What did they do to the ship? How? 

5. What did they do to avoid the quicksands? 

6. What did they do the next day? Why? 

7. How did they still further lighten the ship on the third day? 

8. Why did they give up all hope? 

9. Could they prepare or eat food? Of what did Paul remind 

them? 

10. To what did he exhort them? What comforting assurance 

did he give them? 

11. What had an angel told him? What did Paul believe? 

12. Where did he tell them they would be cast? 

13. How long did they drift in the storm? 

14. Where were they? What did the seamen think? 



207 


15. In how many fathoms of water were they? What did they 

fear? 

16. What did they do to save the ship from going upon the rocks? 

Readings 

Jonah 1 2 Tim. 1: 3 

Dan. 6:16 A. A., Chap. XLII 

Memory Verse 

There stood by me this night the angel of God, whose I am, 
and whom I serve, saying, “Fear not, Paul; thou must be brought 
before Caesar; and, lo, God hath given thee all them that sail 
with thee.’^ Acts 27: 23, 24. 

Note 

“For fourteen days they drifted under a sunless and star¬ 
less heaven. The apostle, though himself suffering physically, 
had words of hope for the darkest hour, a helping hand 
in every emergency. He grasped by faith the arm of Infinite 
Power, and his heart was* stayed upon God. He had no fears 
for himself; for he knew that God would preserve him to wit¬ 
ness at Rome for the truth of Christ. But his heart yearned 
with pity for the poor souls around him, sinful, degraded, and 
unprepared to die. As he earnestly pleaded with God to spare 
their lives, it was revealed to him that his prayer was granted.^' 
— A. A., p. U2, 


LXX. THE SHIPWRECK 

Study Acts 27: 30-44. 

1. What did the sailors attempt to do? How were they 
prevented ? 



208 


2. What did Paul say all must do? Why did he wish them 

to eat ? 

3. What assurance of safety did he give them? 

4. What example did he set for them? 

5. What was the effect upon all? 

6. How many persons were on board the ship? 

7. How did they lighten the ship? 

8. Did they recognize the land to which they had come? 

9. Into what place did they endeavor to bring the ship? 

10. How did they accomplish their purpose? 

11. How was the ship damaged? What did the soldiers advise? 

12. Why did not the centurion follow their counsel? 

13. What direction did he give for getting to land? 

14. How many reached the land in safety? 

Readings 

Luke 12: 7; 21: 18 2 Cor. 11: 26, 27 A. A., Chap. XLII 

Outline Acts 27. 

Memory Verse 

Wherefore I pray you to take som.e meat: for this is for 
your health: for there shall not an hair fail from the head of 
any of you. Acts 27: 34. 

Notes 

1. “At break of day the outlines of the stormy coast were 
dimly visible, but no familiar landmarks could be seen. So 
gloomy was the outlook that the heathen sailors, losing all cour¬ 
age, ‘were about to flee out of the ship,^ and feigning to make 
preparations for casting ‘anchors out of the foreship,’ they had 
already let down the lifeboat when Paul, perceiving their base 
design, said to the centurion and the soldiers, ‘^Ixcept these abide 
in the ship, ye can not be saved.’ ... 

2. “The most critical hour was still before them. Again the 


209 



apostle spoke words of encouragement, and entreated all, both 
sailors and passengers, to take some food. . . . 

3. “Paul and the other prisoners were now threatened by 
a fate more terrible than shipwreck. The soldiers saw that 


“They which could swim . . . cast themselves first into the sea: . . . and 
the rest, some on boards, and some on broken pieces of the ship.” 

while endeavoring to reach land it would be impossible for them 
to keep their prisoners in charge. Every man would have all 
he could do to save himself. Yet if any of the prisoners were 
missing, the lives of those who were responsible for them would 
be forfeited. Hence the soldiers desired to put all the prisoners 
to death. The Roman law sanctioned this cruel policy, and the 

14 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 










^10 


plan would have been executed at once, but for him to whom all 
alike were under deep obligation. Julius the centurion knew that 
Paul had been instrumental in saving the lives of all on board; 
and, moreover, convinced that the Lord was with him, he feared 
to do him harm.’’— A. A., pp, 


1 . 

2 . 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6 . 

7. 

8 . 
9. 

10 . 

11 . 

12 . 

13. 

14. 

15. 

16. 

17. 

18. 


LXXL FROM MELITA TO ROME 

Study Acts 28: 1-16. 

Upon what island were they cast? How did the people treat 
them? 

What did Paul help to gather? By what was he bitten? 
What did the people expect? What did they say? 

What caused them to change their minds? 

Who was the chief man of the island? 

How did he receive and entertain the shipwrecked men? 

Who was very ill? How was he healed? 

What other miracles did Paul perform? 

How did the people show their gratitude? 

How long did the ship’s company remain on the island? 

In what ship did they leave the island? 

How many days did they spend at Syracuse? 

How did they come to Rhegium? 

What favored the voyage to Puteoli? 

How long did they remain at Puteoli? 

Who came to meet them? Where? How was Paul en¬ 
couraged ? 

To whom did the centurion deliver the prisoners? 

Where and how was Paul permitted to live? 



211 


Readings 


Rom. 1: 14 
1 Cor. 14; 11 
Col. 3: 11 


Mark 6: 5; 16: 17, 18 

Luke 4:40; 10: 19 

A. A., Chaps. XLII and XLIII 


Locate all places mentioned, and trace Paul’s journey from 
Caesarea to Rome. 

Memory Verse 

And from thence, when the brethren heard of us, they came 
to meet us as far as Appii Forum, and the Three Taverns: whom 
when Paul saw, he thanked God, and took courage. Acts 28: 15. 


Notes 


1. “During the three months that the ship’s company re¬ 
mained at Melita, Paul and his fellow laborers improved many 
opportunities to preach the gospel. In a remarkable manner the 
Lord wrought through them. For Paul’s sake, the entire ship¬ 
wrecked company were treated with great kindness; all their 
wants were supplied, and upon leaving Melita they were lib¬ 
erally provided with everything needful for their voyage. . . . 

2. “With the opening of navigation, the centurion and his 
prisoners set out on their journey to Rome. An Alexandrian 
ship, the ‘Castor and Pollux,’ had wintered at Melita on her way 
westward, and in this the travelers embarked. Though some¬ 
what delayed by contrary winds, the voyage was safely accom¬ 
plished, and the ship cast anchor in the beautiful harbor of 
Puteoli, on the coast of Italy. 

3. “In this place there were a few Christians, and they en¬ 
treated the apostle to remain with them for seven days, a privi¬ 
lege kindly granted by the centurion. Since receiving Paul’s 
epistle to the Romans, the Christians of Italy had eagerly looked 
forward to a visit from the apostle. They had not thought to 
see him come as a prisoner, but his sufferings only endeared him 
to them the more. The distance from Puteoli to Rome, being 


212 


but a hundred and forty miles, and the seaport being in constant 
communication with the metropolis, the Roman Christians were 
informed of Paul’s approach, and some of them started to meet 
and welcome him. 

4. “On the eighth day after landing, the centurion and his 
prisoners set out for Rome. Julius willingly granted the apostle 
every favor which it was in his power to bestow; but he could 
not change his condition as a prisoner, or release him from the 
chain that bound him to his soldier guard. It was with a heavy 
heart that Paul went forward to his long-expected visit to the 
world’s metropolis. How different the circumstances from those 
he had anticipated! How was he, fettered and stigmatized, to 
proclaim the gospel? His hopes of winning many souls to the 
truth in Rome, seemed destined to disappointment. 

5. “At last the travelers reach Appii Forum, forty miles from 
Rome. As they make their way through the crowds that throng 
the great thoroughfare, the gray-haired old man, chained with 
a group of hardened-looking criminals, receives many a glance 
of scorn, and is made the subject of many a rude, mocking jest. 

6. “Suddenly a cry of joy is heard, and a man springs from 
the passing throng and falls upon the prisoner’s neck, embracing 
him with tears and rejoicing, as a son would welcome a long- 
absent father. Again and again is the scene repeated, as, with 
eyes made keen by loving expectation, many discern in the chained 
captive the one who at Corinth, at Philippi, at Ephesus, had 
spoken to them the words of life. 

7. “As the warm-hearted disciples eagerly flock around their 
father in the gospel, the whole company is brought to a stand¬ 
still. The soldiers are impatient of delay, yet they have not 
the heart to interrupt this happy meeting; for they too have 
learned to respect and esteem their prisoner. In that worn, 
pain-stricken face, the disciples see reflected the image of Christ. 
They assure Paul that they have not forgotten him, nor ceased 
to love him; that they are indebted to him for the joyful hope 


213 


which animates their lives, and gives them peace toward God. 
In the ardor of their love, they would bear him upon their 
shoulders the whole way to the city, could they but have the 
privilege. 

8. “Few realize the significance of those words of Luke, that 
when Paul saw his brethren ‘he thanked God, and took courage.’ 
In the midst of the weeping, sympathizing company of believers, 
who were not ashamed of his bonds, the apostle praised God 
aloud. The cloud of sadness that had rested upon his spirit 
was swept away. His Christian life had been a succession of 
trials, sufferings, and disappointments, but in that hour he felt 
abundantly repaid. . . . 

9. “At Rome the centurion Julius delivered up his prisoners 
to the captain of the emperor’s guard. The good account which 
he gave of Paul, together with the letter from Festus, caused 
the apostle to be favorably regarded by the chief captain, and 
instead of being thrown into prison, he was permitted to live in 
his own hired house. Although still constantly chained to a 
soldier, he was at liberty to receive his friends, and to labor for 
the advancement of the cause of Christ.”— A. A., pp. 


LXXII. PAUL AT ROME 
Study Acts 28: 17-31. 

1. Whom did Paul call together? When? 

2. What did he say he had not done? 

3. Had he been found guilty by any of his judges? 

4. Why had he appealed to Csesar? 

5. Why had he desired to speak to them? 

6. Of what did they assure him? 

7. What did they desire? Why? 



214 



“Paul dwelt two whole years in Ivis own hired house, 
preaching the kingdom of God, ' 








215 


8. When did he preach to them? How long? 

9. What was his subject? His authority? 

10. Did they believe his words? 

11. What prophecy did Paul quote? Why? 

12. To what people is salvation sent? 

13. What did the Jews do after they left Paul’s house? 

14. How long did Paul live at Rome? 

15. Where did he live? How did he spend his time? 

Readings 

Eph. 6: 18, 19 Rom. 11:7-11 A. A., Chap. XLIII 

Memory Verse 

He expounded and testified the kingdom of God, persuading 
them concerning Jesus, both out of the law of Moses, and out 
of the prophets. Acts 28: 23. 

Notes 

1. “Many of the Jews who had been banished from Rome 
some years previously, had been allowed to return, so that large 
numbers were now to be found there. To these, first of all, 
Paul determined to present the facts concerning himself and his 
work, before his enemies should have opportunity to embitter 
them against him. . . . 

2. “He said nothing of the abuse which he had suffered at 
the hands of the Jews, or of their repeated plots to assassi¬ 
nate him. His words were marked with caution and kindness. 
. . . He related his own experience, and presented arguments 
from the Old Testament Scriptures with simplicity, sincerity, and 
power. . . . 

3. “Many months passed by after Paul’s arrival in Rome, 
before the Jews of Jerusalem appeared in person to present 
their accusations against the prisoner. . . . 

4. “In the providence of God, this delay resulted in the 
furtherance of the gospel. Through the favor of those who had 


216 


Paul in charge, he was permitted to dwell in a commodious 
house, where he could meet freely with his friends, and also 
present the truth daily to those who came to hear.' . . . 

5. “During this time, the churches that he had established 
in many lands were not forgotten. Realizing the dangers that 
threatened the converts to the new faith, the apostle sought so 
far as possible to meet their needs by letters of warning and 
practical instruction. 

6. “And from Rome he sent out consecrated workers to labor 
not only for these churches, but in fields that he himself had not 
visited. These workers, as wise shepherds, strengthened the 
work so well begun by Paul; and the apostle, kept informed of 
the condition and dangers of the churches, by constant communi¬ 
cation with them, was enabled to exercise a wise supervision 
over all. 

7. “Thus, while apparently cut off from active labor, Paul 
exerted a wider and more lasting influence than if he had been 
free to travel among the churches as in former years. As a 
prisoner of the Lord, he had a firmer hold upon the affections 
of his brethren; and his words, written by one under bonds 
for the sake of Christ, commanded greater attention and respect 
than they did when he was personally with them. . . . 

8. “Among Paul’s assistants at Rome were many of his 
former companions and fellow workers. Luke, ‘the beloved 
physician,’ who had attended him on the journey to Jerusalem, 
through the two years’ imprisonment at Caesarea, and upon his 
perilous voyage to Rome, was with him still. Timothy also min¬ 
istered to his comfort. Tychicus, ‘a beloved brother, and a faith¬ 
ful minister and fellow servant in the Lord,’ stood nobly by the 
apostle. Demas and Mark were also with him. Aristarchus and 
Epaphras were his ‘fellow prisoners.’ ”— A. A., pp. Jf50-Jf55, 



217 


LXXIIL PAUL’S LETTER TO THE EPHESIANS 

Study Ephesians. 

1. Who wrote this letter? Eph. 1: 1. 

2. How does Paul speak of himself? Eph. 3: 1. 

3. How had the mystery of the gospel been made known to 

Paul? Eph. 3:3-5. 

4. Of what special truth had he been made a minister? Eph. 

3: 6-9. 

5. What was his desire for his converts? Eph. 3: 13. 

6. How did he pray they might be strengthened? Eph. 3: 14-16. 

7. What did he desire them to comprehend? Eph. 3: 17-19. 

8. What did Jesus give to His followers when He ascended? 

Eph. 4:7-11. 

9. For what purpose were these gifts granted to the church? 

Eph. 4: 12-16. 

10. Who is represented by the husband? By the wife? Eph. 

5: 22-33. 

11. How should children and parents treat each other? Eph. 

6: 1-4. 

12. What should be the relation between master and servant? 

Eph. 6: 5-9. 

13. Why is it necessary to wear the whole armor of God? 

Eph. 6: 10-12. 

14. What is the armor, and what is the purpose of each part? 

Eph. 6: 13-17. 

15. For whom did Paul desire that they should pray? Why? 

Eph. 6: 18-20. 

16. Who did he say would tell them about him? Eph. 6: 21, 22. 

17. With what benediction did he close this letter? Eph. 6: 23, 24. 

Memory Verse 

Wherefore take unto you the whole armor of God, that ye 
may be able to withstand in the evil day, and having done all, to 
stand. Eph. 6: 13. 


218 


Notes 

1. The epistle to the Ephesians is one of the letters written 
by Paul while he was a prisoner at Rome. He also wrote 
Colossians, Philippians, and Philemon during this first im¬ 
prisonment. 

2. Paul tenderly reminds the Ephesians that it was because 
he preached the gospel to the gentiles that he suffered imprison¬ 
ment. The mystery which had been made known to Paul by 
revelation is God manifest in the flesh. Paul’s special burden 
was to preach this mystery to the gentiles, which meant that 
they should be fellow heirs with the Jews of the salvation pro¬ 
vided in Jesus Christ. This had been made known by the 
prophets, but not in the clear and unmistakable manner that it 
was now revealed by the Spirit through Paul. 

3. Paul could never forget that he had persecuted the church 
of Christ, and therefore, though he boldly maintained that he 
had the honor of receiving divine revelations, yet he said in 
humility, I “am less than the least of all saints.” 

4. Paul feared that the churches might be discouraged when 
they heard of his imprisonment. He desired them to understand 
that his bbnds were to be a blessing to them, an example of 
how a Christian should suffer, if necessary, for his faith, and 
that if they bore their trials with a Christlike patience, many 
others would be led to accept the Saviour because of their 
example. 

5. We shall never be able to comprehend the love of God, 
but we should always be striving to do so. God is the Father 
of all, because He is the Creator of all. 

6. Paul’s earnest desire was that unity should characterize the 
churches of Jesus Christ. When Jesus ascended. He gave to 
the church gifts which were especially designed to bring it to 
a state of unity and perfection. 

7. It is a great blessing to have a good example to follow. 
Christians have a perfect example before them always. They 


219 


have no excuse for getting into wrong ways. ^^Be ye therefore 
followers of God, as dear children.” 

8. Paul used the relation of husband and wife to illustrate 
the relation which should exist between Christ and His church. 
The obligations existing between parents and children are mutual. 
Each has duties to the other, and sad are the results if either 
fails. 

9. Many do not see the necessity of putting on the whole 
armor. In ancient times, when armor was worn, men put on 
a complete set of armor when they expected to meet an espe¬ 
cially formidable foe. The apostle tried to impress us with the 
necessity of a full spiritual equipment by enumerating the forces 
leagued against our souls. 

10. Paul expected to have to defend himself at the court 
of Nero, and deeply did he feel the need of divine aid. He 
therefore entreats those to whom he wrote, especially to re¬ 
member him when they prayed for the saints. If they wished 
to learn more about the conditions and circumstances of his life 
at this time, they could get the information from Tychicus, who 
doubtless carried his letter to the Ephesians. 


LXXIV. PAUL’S LETTER TO THE COLOSSIANS 

(Written at Rome) 

Study Colossians. 

1. To whom did Paul write this letter? Col. 1:1, 2. 

2. Where was this letter to be read? Col. 4: 16. 

3. For what did Paul thank God? Col. 1:3-6, 9-12. 

4. Who had labored at Colosse? Col. 1: 7. 

5. What report had Epaphras given of the Colossians? Col. 1: 8. 

6. In whom do we have redemption? Col. 1: 13-20. 



220 

7. To how many had the gospel been preached? Col. 1: 23. 

8. What is the mystery of the gospel? Col. 1:26, 27. 

9. What great burden did Paul have for the Colossians and 

Laodiceans? Col. 2:1-3. 

10. How were they to walk? Col. 2:6, 7. 

11. What danger threatened them? Col. 2:8. 

12. What was taken away by the death of Christ? Col. 2: 13-17. 

13. What great change had taken place in the Colossians? 

Col. 3: 5-13. 

14. Which is the greatest of all graces in the Christian char¬ 

acter? Col. 3: 14; 1 Corinthians 13. 

15. What instruction is given to wives? Husbands? Children? 

Servants? Masters? Col. 3:18-25. 

16. Who were to carry this letter to the Colossians? Col. 4: 7-9. 

17. Who sent greetings to the Colossians? Col. 4: 10-15. 

18. What special message was sent to Archippus? Col. 4: 17. 

19. Who wrote the salutation? What were they to remember? 

Col. 4:18. 

Reading 

A. A., Chap. XLV 
Memory Verse 

To whom God would make known what is the riches of the 
glory of this mystery among the gentiles; which is Christ in you, 
the hope of glory. Col. 1: 27. 

Notes 

1. There are many points of similarity between the last 
epistle studied and this one, especially in their phraseology. One 
example will be sufficient to show this: Eph. 5: 19: ‘Tn psalms 
and hymns and spiritual songs, singing and making melody in 
your heart to the Lord.’' Col. 3: 16: ‘Tn psalms and hymns and 
spiritual songs, singing with grace in your hearts to the Lord.” 

2. Doubtless these letters were written at or nearly the 


221 


same time, and as they are upon the same subject, the '^mystery 
of God, it is but natural that the apostle should have used 
similar expressions in the two. 

3. Though Timothy is mentioned in the salutation, no one 
has ever considered him as being in any wise its author. Prob¬ 
ably he was Paul’s amanuensis, or scribe. Because of Paul’s 
defective eyesight, it was necessary for him to dictate his 
letters. However, he wrote the salutation with his own hand. 
Col. 4: 18; also 1 Cor. 16: 21; and 2 Thess. 3: 17, “The salutation 
of Paul with mine own hand, which is the token in every epistle: 
so I write.” It seems that this was the means which the apostle 
took to show without a doubt that he was the author of the 
epistle. 

4. Laodicea and Hierapolis were cities of Phrygia, and 
Colosse was situated near them. It would therefore be an 
easy matter for the Colossians to pass this letter on to the 
Laodiceans, and to receive one from them. 

5. It is not known who preached the gospel at Coxosse, though 
Epaphras is mentioned as having labored there. Paul had been 
in Phrygia twice (Acts 16:6; 18:23), and probably had been 
at Colosse, though of this we can not certainly know. In the 
epistle, he refers to a number of things in the church that had 
been told him by others. 

6. The great burden of Paul’s heart was that the hearts of 
believers should be knit together. This is the burden of all true 
ministers of God; for by the unity of the believers, the divine 
origin of the Christian religion is proved. 

7. Paul knew that they were in danger of being spoiled 
through philosophy. Philosophers are supposed to be the wisest 
of wise men, but any system of philosophy devised by man is 
vain deceit, makes one empty headed and without heart culture. 
But in Christ “dwelleth all the fullness of the Godhead bodily.” 

8. 'Blotting out the handwriting of ordinances.’ By the 
handwriting of ordinances, the apostle most evidently means the 
ceremonial law: this was against them, for they were bound to 


222 


fulfill it; and it was contrary to them, as condemning them for 
the neglect and transgression of it. . . . 

9. ‘Nailing it to His cross.' When Christ was nailed to 
the cross, our obligation to fulfill these ordinances was done away. 

10. “ ‘Let no man judge you in meat, or in drink.' The 
apostle speaks here in reference to some particulars of the 
handwriting of ordinances which had been taken away; viz., 
the distinction of meats and drinks, what was clean and unclean, 
according to the law; and the necessity of observing certain 
holy days or festivals, such as the new moons, and particular 
sabbaths, or those which should be observed with more than 
ordinary solemnity. All these had been taken out of the way, 
and nailed to the cross, and were no longer of moral obligation. 
There is no intimation here that the Sabbath 'was done away, 
or that its moral use was superseded by the introduction of 
Christianity. I have shown elsewhere that ‘Remember the Sab¬ 
bath day, to keep it holy,' is a command of perpetual obligation, 
and can never be superseded but by the final termination of 
time."— Clarke's Commentary. 


LXXV. PAUL'S LETTER TO PHILEMON 

(Written at Rome) 

Study Philemon. 

1. Who wrote this letter? To whom? 

2. Whom did Paul always mention in his prayers? 

3. What was the character of Philemon? 

4. For what reason might Paul have been very bold to advise 

Philemon ? 

5. Why would he rather persuade him? 



223 


6. How did Paul speak of himself? 

7. On whose behalf did he write this letter? 

8. To whom had Onesimus been unprofitable? 

9. To whom was he now profitable? 

10. Why did Paul not keep Onesimus with him? 

11. What may have been the reason that Onesimus was led to 

run away? 

12. How should Philemon receive him? 

13. What was Paul willing to repay? 

14. What did Philemon owe to Paul? 

15. What confidence did Paul have in Philemon? 

16. What did he ask Philemon to prepare for him? Why? 

17. Who sent greetings to Philemon? 

18. With what benediction did Paul close this letter? 

19. With whom did Onesimus return to his master at Colosse? 

Col. 4: 7-9. 

Readings 

Eph. 6:5-9 Titus 2:9, 10 

Col. 3: 22-25; 4: 1 1 Peter 2: 18-21 

1 Tim. 6:1,2 

Memory Verse 

Perhaps he therefore departed for a season, that thou should- 
est receive him forever. Philemon 15. 

Notes 

1. “Among those who gave their hearts to God through the 
labors of Paul in Rome, was Onesimus, a pagan slave who had 
wronged his master, Philemon, a Christian believer in Colosse, 
and had escaped to Rome. In the kindness of his heart, Paul 
sought to relieve the poverty and distress of the wretched fugi¬ 
tive, and then endeavored to shed the light of truth into his 
darkened mind. Onesimus listened to the words of life, con¬ 
fessed his sins, and was converted to the faith of Christ. . . . 


Lev. 25: 39-55 
A. A., Chap. XLIII 


224 


2. '‘The apostle asked Philemon, in view of the conversion of 
Onesimus, to receive the repentant slave as his own child, show¬ 
ing him such affection that he would choose to dwell with his 
former master, ‘not now as a servant, but above a servant, a 
brother beloved.’ . . . 

3. “Paul’s letter to Philemon shows the influence of the 
gospel upon the relation between master and servant. Slave¬ 
holding was an established institution throughout the Roman 
empire, and both masters and slaves were found in most of the 
churches for which Paul labored. In the cities, where slaves 
often greatly outnumbered the free population, laws of terrible 
severity were regarded as necessary to keep them in subjection. 

4. “A wealthy Roman often owned hundreds of slaves, of 
every rank, of every nation, and of every accomplishment. With 
full control over the souls and bodies of these helpless beings, he 
could inflict upcn them any suffering he chose. . . . The 
tendency of the whole system was hopelessly degrading. 

5. “It was not the apostle’s work to overturn arbitrarily or 
suddenly the established order of society. To attempt this 
would be to prevent the success of the gospel. But he taught 
principles which struck at the very foundation of slavery, and 
which, if carried into effect, would surely undermine the whole 
system.”— A. A., pp. ^56-460. 


LXXVI. PAUL’S LETTER TO THE PHILIPPIANS 

(Written at Rome) 

Study Philippians. 

1. To whom is this letter addressed? Phil. 1:1, 2. 

2. For what did Paul thank God? Phil. 1:3-5. 



225 


3. What effect had PauFs imprisonment upon the success of 

the gospel ? Phil. 1: 12-18. 

4. Which did he choose, life or death? Phil. 1: 19-25. 

5. What experience did they have similar to his? Phil. 1: 29, 30. 

6. Whom did he expect soon to send to them? Phil. 2: 19-23. 

7. What did he himself expect soon to do? Phil. 2: 24. 

8. Whom had he already sent? Phil. 2: 25-30. 

9. Of what might Paul have boasted? Phil. 3: 4-6. 

10. Why did he count these things loss? Phil. 3: 7-11. 

11. Did Paul count himself perfect? Phil. 3: 12-14. 

12. What change will occur when Jesus comes? Phil. 3:21. 

13. Whom did he beseech to be in harmony with each other? 

Phil. 4:2. 

14. What other disciples did he mention? Phil. 4: 3. 

15. Upon what things should we think? Phil. 4: 8. 

16. What had the Philippians just done for Paul? Phil. 4: 10, 18. 

17. When had they sent him gifts before? Phil. 4: 14-17. 

18. Who sent greetings to the Philippians? Phil. 4: 21-23. 

Reading 

A. A., Chaps. XLIV and XLV 
Memory Verse 

Let this mind be in you, which was also in Christ Jesus. 
Phil. 2: 5. 

Notes 

1. “The gospel has ever achieved its greatest success among 
the humbler classes. . . . Yet while the apostle’s work began 
with the humble and the lo\vly, its influence extended until it 
reached the very palace of the emperor. 

2. “Rome was at this time the metropolis of the world. The 
haughty Csesars were giving laws to nearly every nation upon 
the earth. King and courtier were either ignorant of the humble 
Nazarene, or regarded Him with hatred and derision. And yet 

15 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 


226 


in less than two years the gospel found its way from the 
prisoner’s lowly home into the imperial halls. . . . 

3. ‘‘Not by Paul’s sermons, but by his bonds,' was the at¬ 
tention of the court attracted to Christianity. It was as a 
captive that he broke from so many souls the bonds that held 
them in the slavery of sin. . . . 

4. “Paul’s letter to the Philippians, like the one to the 
Colossians, was written while he was a prisoner at Rome. . . . 
By Epaphroditus, Paul sent the Philippian believers a letter 
in which he thanked them for their gifts to him. Of all the 
churches, that of Philippi had been the most liberal in supply¬ 
ing Paul’s wants. . . . 

5. “Though he was a prisoner, Paul was not discouraged. 
Instead, a note of triumph rings through the letters that he 
wrote from Rome to the churches. ‘Rejoice in the Lord alway,’ 
he wrote to the Philippians, ‘and again I say. Rejoice.’ ”— 
A. A., pp. 


LXXVII. PAUL’S FIRST LETTER TO TIMOTHY 

(Probably ivritten in Macedonia) 

Study 1 Timothy. 

1. What does Paul call Timothy in his address? 1 Tim. 1:1, 2. 

2. Where did Paul wish Timothy to r-emain? Why? 1 Tim. 

1: 3, 4. 

3. What had caused some to turn aside from the faith? 1 

Tim. 1: 5-7. 

4. What is the purpose of law? 1 Tim. 1: 8-10. 

B. What had been committed to Paul? 1 Tim. 1: 11, 12. 

6. What had he once been ? 1 Tim. 1: 13. 

7. Why did Paul obtain mercy? 1 Tim. 1: 14-16. 



227 


8. Who had made shipwreck of faith? 1 Tim. 1: 18-20. 

9. What did Paul hope to do soon? 1 Tim. 3: 14, 15. 

10. How only could Timothy be a good minister? 1 Tim. 4: 6-8. 

11. Of what was Timothy to be an example? 1 Tim. 4: 11-16. 

12. What charge did he give Timothy? 1 Tim. 6; 11-14. 

13. What was Timothy especially to avoid? 1 Tim. 6:20. 

Reading 

A. A., Chap. XLVI 
Memory Verse 

Fight the good fight of faith, lay hold on eternal life, where- 
unto thou art also called, and hast professed a good profession 
before many witnesses. 1 Tim. 6: 12. 

Notes 

1. “While Paul’s labors in Rome were being blessed to the 
conversion of many souls and the strengthening and encour¬ 
agement of the believers, clouds were gathering that threat¬ 
ened not only his own safety, but also the prosperity of the 
church. . . . 

2. “The Jews were now more active than ever in their efforts 
against Paul. . . . Paul could hope for little justice from the 
Caesar to whom he had appealed. Nero was more debased in 
morals, more frivolous in character, and at the same time capable 
of more atrocious cruelty, than any ruler who had preceded him. 
The reins of government could not have been intrusted to a 
more despotic ruler. . . . 

3. “From the viewpoint of human judgment, Paul’s con¬ 
demnation before such a judge was certain. But the apostle 
felt that so long as he was loyal to God, he had nothing Jo fear. 
The One who in the past had been his protector could shield 
him still from the malice of the Jews, and from the power of 
Caesar. 

4. “And God did shield His servant. At Paul’s examination 


228 


the charges against him were not sustained; and contrary to the 
general expectation, and with a regard for justice wholly at vari¬ 
ance with his character, Nero declared the prisoner guiltless. 
Paul’s bonds were removed; he was again a free man. 

5. “Had his trial been longer deferred, or had he from any 
cause been detained in Rome until the following year, he would 
doubtless have perished in the persecution which then took place. 
During Paul’s imprisonment, the converts to Christianity had 
become so numerous as to attract the attention and arouse the 
enmity of the authorities. The anger of the emperor was espe¬ 
cially excited by the conversion of members of his own house¬ 
hold, and he soon found a pretext to make the Christians the 
objects of his merciless cruelty. 

6. “About this time a terrible fire occurred in Rome, by which 
nearly one half of the city was burned. Nero himself, it was 
rumored, had caused the flames to be kindled, but to avert sus¬ 
picion he made a pretense of great generosity by assisting the 
homeless and destitute. He was, however, accused of the crime. 
The people were excited and enraged, and in order to clear him¬ 
self, and also to rid the city of a class whom he feared and hated, 
Nero turned the accusation upon the Christians. . . . 

7. “From this terrible persecution Paul was spared;' for 
soon after his release he had left Rome. This last interval of 
freedom he diligently improved in laboring among the churches. 
He sought to establish a firmer union between the Greek and the 
Eastern churches, and to fortify the minds of the believers against 
the false doctrines that were creeping in to corrupt the faith. 
The trials and anxieties that Paul had endured, had preyed upon 
his physical powers. The infirmities of age were upon him. He 
felt that he was now doing his last work.”— A. A., pp, .^85-^88. 

8. It is supposed that Paul was liberated in the year A. D. 
64, and that he went among the churches, visited the island of 
Crete, then went into Macedonia. Probably while in Macedonia, 
A. D. 65, he wrote his first letter to Timothy, whom he had 
left in charge of the work at Ephesus. Paul expected to spend 


229 


the winter at Nicopolis, and then to go into Asia Minor. He 
tells Timothy, in this letter, that he expects to come to him 
shortly. He also wrote a letter to Titus, whom he had left on 
the island of Crete. 1 Tim. 1:3; 4: 13; 3: 14; Titus 1: 5, 
12; 3: 12. 


LXXVIII. FAULTS LETTER TO TITUS 

Study Titus. 

1. How does Paul speak of his own hope and calling? Titus 

1: 1-3. 

2. How does he address Titus? Titus 1: 4. 

3. Why had he left Titus in Crete? Titus 1:5. 

4. What should be the character of an elder, or bishop? Titus 

1: 6-9. 

5. What was the character of the Cretans? Titus 1: 11, 12. 

6. What would therefore be necessary? Titus 1: 13-16. 

7. What should be the character of aged men? Of aged women? 

Of young men? Of young women? Titus 2: 1-6. 

8. In what was Titus to be an example? Titus 2:7, 8. 

9. To what was he to exhort servants ? Titus 2: 9, 10. 

10. What was he to teach? How? Titus 2: 11-15. 

11. Of what was he to put the church in mind? Titus 3: 1, 2. 

12. What were they once? Titus 3:3-7. 

13. What was he to teach and also to avoid? Titus 3:8, 9. 

14. How are heretics to be treated? Titus 3: 10, 11. 

15. To what place was Titus to come to meet Paul? Titus 3: 12. 

16. Whom did Paul ask him to help on their journey? Titus 3: 13. 

17. How did Paul close this letter? Titus 3: 15. 

Memory Verse 

These things speak, and exhort, and rebuke with all au¬ 
thority. Let no man despise thee. Titus 2: 15. 



230 


Notes 

1. There is a similarity in language and subject matter 
between the first epistle to Timothy and the epistle to Titus. It 
is natural that this should be so, since these epistles were written 
at or near the same time, to two persons doing a similar work. 
Timothy and Titus were both young ministers who had been 
left in charge of important churches. Titus was to finish work 
begun by Paul in the island of Crete. 

2. The office of elder is the most important in a local church. 
Paul explains to Titus, as he also explained to Timothy, the 
qualification such a person should have. It was especially need¬ 
ful that the elders should be worthy and capable persons, because 
of the general character of the Cretans. It was necessary to 
rebuke their wrongdoing and to deal with them firmly. 

3. The special danger in Crete, as in every other plac^, was 
from the false Jewish teachers who were everywhere trying to 
undo the work of Paul. 

4. Titus was also instructed how to relate himself to each 
class in the church, the young and the old. Though young him¬ 
self, he was to live so consistent a life that no one would have 
occasion to disregard his words. '‘Let no man despise thee.'’ 

5. Paul intended to send some one to take the place of Titus 
in Crete. Evidently he had some other work for Titus to do, 
and wanted him to come to Nicopolis for instructions. 

6. Zenas is not mentioned elsewhere in the Scriptures, but 
with Apollos we are well acquainted, from what we have learned 
of him in Acts 18: 24; 1 Cor. 1: 12; 3:5, 6; 4:6. Either Paul 
had leTt these persons at Crete, or he had heard that they were 
passing through on their way to other churches. It was the 
custom for the churches to defray the expenses of evangelists 
and other ministers, from place to place. 3 John 6. 

7. From this letter and from other of Paul's letters we learn 
that Paul had many helpers who, while he-was in prison, con¬ 
tinued their labors, probably under his direction, as they did 


231 


now, when he was once more at liberty. How precious to them, 
as to him, must have been the few months that he was per¬ 
mitted to labor in person with them and for the churches! 


LXXIX. PAUL’S SECOND LETTER TO TIMOTHY 
Study 2 Timothy 1; 2. 

1. How does Paul again address Timothy? 2 Tim. 1:1, 2. 

2. For what did he thank God? Whom did he desire to see? 

2 Tim. 1: 3, 4. 

3. What did Paul call to remembrance? 2 Tim. 1: 5. 

4. Of what did he put Timothy in remembrance? 2 Tim. 1:6, 7. 

5. Of what was Timothy never to be ashamed? 2 Tim. 1: 8. 

6. Why did Paul suffer persecution? 2 Tim. 1: 9-12; 2: 7-10 

7. To what was Timothy to hold fast? 2 Tim. 1: 13, 14. 

8. Who had turned away from Paul? 2 Tim. 1: 15. 

9. What had Onesiphorus done for Paul at Rome and at Ephe¬ 

sus? 2 Tim. 1: 16-18. 

10. To whom was Timothy to teach the things he had learned 

from Paul? 2 Tim. 2: 1, 2. 

11. What lesson did he draw from the life of the soldier? 2 

Tim. 2: 3-5. 

12. What will be the reward of those who suffer with Christ? 

2 Tim. 2: 11-13. 

13. What kind of workman must Timothy be? 2 Tim. 2: 14-16. 

14. Who had erred in doctrine? What was the result? 2 Tim. 

2: 17-19. 

15. What kind of vessel may each one be? 2 Tim. 2: 20, 21. 

16. What should be the teaching, spirit, and deportment of a 

servant of God? 2 Tim. 2:22-26. 



232 


Reading 

A. A., Chap. XLVII 

Memory Verse 

I know whom I have believed, and am persuaded that He is 
able to keep that which I have committed unto Him against that 
day. 2 Tim. 1: 12. 

Notes 

1. “Paul’s work among the churches, after his acquittal at 
Rome, could not escape the observation of his enemies. Since 
the beginning of the persecution under Nero, the Christians 
had everywhere been a proscribed sect. After a time the 
unbelieving Jews conceived the idea of fastening upon Paul the 
crime of instigating the burning of Rome. Not one of them 
thought for a moment that he was guilty; but they knew that 
such a charge, made with the faintest show of plausibility, would 
seal his doom. Through their efforts, Paul was again arrested, 
and hurried away to his final imprisonment. 

2. “On his second voyage to Rome, Paul was accompanied by 
several of his former companions; others earnestly desired to 
share his lot, but he refused to permit them thus to imperil their 
lives. The prospect before him was far less favorable than at 
the time of his former imprisonment. The persecution under 
Nero had greatly lessened the number of Christians in Rome. 
Thousands had been martyred for their faith, many had left the 
city, and those who remained were greatly depressed and in¬ 
timidated. 

3. “Upon his arrival at Rome, Paul was placed in a gloomy 
dungeon, there to remain until his course should be finished. . . . 

4. “The few friends who had shared the burdens of the 
apostle, now began to leave him, some by desertion, and others 
on missions to the various churches. Phygellus and Hermogenes 
were the first to go. Then Demas, dismayed by the thickening 
clouds of difficulty and danger, forsook the persecuted apostle. 


233 


Crescens was sent by Paul to the churches of Galatia, Titus to 
Dalmatia, Tychicus to Ephesus. Writing to Timothy of this ex¬ 
perience, Paul said, ‘Only Luke is with me.’ Never had the 
apostle needed the ministrations of his brethren as now, enfeebled 



THE MAMERTINE PRISON 


as he was by age, toil, and infirmities, and confined in the damp, 
dark vaults of a Roman prison. The services of Luke, the be¬ 
loved disciple and faithful friend, were a great comfort to Paul, 
and enabled him to communicate with his brethren and the 
world without. . . . 

5. “The desire for love and sympathy is implanted in the 
heart by God Himself. Christ, in His hour of agony in Geth- 
semane, longed for the sympathy of His disciples. And Paul, 
though apparently indifferent to hardship and suffering, yearned 





234 


for sympathy and companionship. The visit of Onesiphorus, tes¬ 
tifying to his fidelity at a time of loneliness and desertion, 
brought gladness and cheer to one who had spent’ his life in 
service for others.”— A. A., pp. 


LXXX. PAUL’S SECOND LETTER TO TIMOTHY 
(CONTINUED) 

Study 2 Timothy 3; 4. 

1. What will be the character of the people in the last days? 

2 Tim. 3: 1-9, 13. . 

2. Of whose life did Timothy have full knowledge? 2 Tim. 

3: 10-12. 

3. In what should Timothy continue?, 2 Tim. 3: 14. 

4. How had Timothy been instructed in childhood? 2 Tim. 3: 15. 

5. How is all Scripture given? For what purpose? 2 Tim. 

3: 16, 17. 

6. What charge did Paul give Timothy? 2 Tim. 4: 1-5. 

7. What did Paul know concerning the nearness of his own 

death? 2 Tim. 4: 6. 

8. What testimony did he bear? 2 Tim. 4:7. 

9. What is laid up for him and for all who are faithful? 

2 Tim. 4:8. 

10. What did he desire Timothy to do at once? 2 Tim. 4: 9, 21. 

11. Who had deserted him? 2 Tim. 4: 10. 

12. Who only was with Paul? Whom was Timothy to bring with 

him? 2 Tim. 4:11. 

13. Who had been sent to Ephesus? 2 Tim. 4: 12. 

14. What did Paul wish Timothy to bring to him from Troas? 

2 Tim. 4: 13. 

15. Against whom did he warn Timothy? 2 Tim. 4: 14, 15. 



235 


16. Who only was with Paul at his first hearing? 2 Tim. 4: 16, 17. 

17. How did he express his faith? 2 Tim. 4: 18. 

18. To whom did he send greetings? 2 Tim. 4: 19. 

19. Where was Erastus? Trophimus? 2 Tim. 4:20. 

20. What was Paul’s last benediction? 2 Tim. 4:22. 

Reading 

A. A., Chaps. XLVIII, XLIX, and L 
Memory Verse 

I have fought a good fight, I have finished my course, I 
have kept the faith. 2 Tim. 4:7. 

1. “When Paul was summoned to appear before the emperor 
Nero for trial, it was with the near prospect of certain death. 
The serious nature of the crime charged against him, and the 
prevailing animosity toward Christians, left little ground for 
hope of a favorable issue. 

2. “Among the Greeks and Romans it was customary to 
allow an accused person the privilege of employing an advocate 
to plead in his behalf before courts of justice. By force of argu¬ 
ment, by impassioned eloquence, or by entreaties, prayers, and 
tears, such an advocate often secured a decision in favor of the 
prisoner, or failing in this, succeeded in mitigating the severity 
of the sentence. 

3. “But when Paul was summoned before Nero, no man 
ventured to act as his counsel or advocate; no friend was at 
hand even to preserve a record of the charges brought against 
him, or of the arguments that he urged in his own defense. 
Among the Christians at Rome, there was not one who came 
forward to stand by him in that trying hour. ». *.. . 

4. “Paul before Nero — how striking the contrast! . . . 

Without money, without friends, without counsel, the. aged pris¬ 
oner stood before Nero — the countenance of the emperor bear¬ 
ing the shameful record of the passions that raged within; the 
face of the accused telling of a heart at peace with God. . . . 


236 


* 



S*' 

F f 4 


ti ^ 

B . 



65a .'i 











ROME, SHOWING THE FORUM 











































237 


5. ‘‘From the judgment hall of Caesar, Paul returned to his 
cell, realizing that he had gained for himself only a brief respite. 
. . . Sitting day after day in his gloomy cell, knowing that at 
a word or a nod from Nero his life might be sacrificed, Paul 
thought of Timothy, and determined to send for him. To 
Timothy had been committed the care of the church at Ephesus, 
and he had therefore been left behind when Paul made his last 
journey to Rome. . . . 

6. “During Paul’s final trial before Nero, the emperor had 
been so strongly impressed with the force of the apostle’s words, 
that he deferred the decision of the case, neither acquitting nor 
condemning the accused servant of God. But the emperor’s 
malice against Paul soon returned. . . . Not long afterward 
Nero pronounced the decision that condemned Paul to a martyr’s 
death. Inasmuch as a Roman citizen could not be subjected to 
torture, he was sentenced to be beheaded. 

7. “Paul was taken in a private manner to the place of 
execution. Few spectators were allowed to be present; for his 
persecutors, alarmed at the extent of his influence, feared that 
converts might be won to Christianity by the scenes of his death. 
But even the hardened soldiers who attended him listened to his 
words, and with amazement saw him cheerful and even joyous 
in the prospect of death. . . . 

8. “The apostle was looking into the great beyond, not with 
uncertainty or dread, but with joyous hope and longing expecta¬ 
tion. As he stands at the place of martyrdom, he sees not the 
sword of the executioner or the earth so soon to receive his 
blood; he looks up through the calm blue heaven of that summer 
day to the throne of the Eternal. . . . 

9. “Well-nigh a score of centuries have passed since Paul 
the Aged poured out his blood as a witness for the word of 
God and the testimony of Jesus Christ. No faithful hand re¬ 
corded for the generations to come the last scenes in the life 
of this holy man; but Inspiration has preserved for us his dying 


238 


testimony. Like a trumpet peal his voice has rung out through 
all the ages since, nerving with his own courage thousands of 
witnesses for Christ, and wakening in thousands of sorrow- 
stricken hearts the echo of his own triumphant joy: 'I am now 
ready to be offered, and the time of my departure is at hand. 
I have fought a good fight, I have finished my course, I have 
kept the faith: henceforth there is laid up for me a crown of 
righteousness, which the Lord, the righteous Judge, shall give 
me at that day: and not to me only, but unto all them also that 
love His appearing.’’'— A. A., pp. ^92-513. 




239 


SUMMARY OF THE THIRD PERIOD 

Paul was arrested at Jerusalem on his return from his third 
missionary tour. He was removed to Caesarea, and was a pris¬ 
oner there for two years. During this time he was tried before 
each of the Roman governors Felix and Festus, and had a hearing 
before Herod Agrippa II. To save himself from being sent back 
to Jerusalem for trial, he appealed to Caesar. 

After a long and wearisome journey, during which he suf¬ 
fered shipwreck, he reached Rome, where he was permitted to 
live by himself in his own hired house with the soldier that kept 
him. Here he wrote the letters to the Ephesians, the Colossians, 
Philemon, and the Philippians. At the end of two years he 
was released. 

When Paul was liberated, he probably labored among the 
churches, endeavoring to overcome erroneous practices and 
teachings that had been brought in by false teachers. He visited 
the island of Crete, and deft Titus in charge of the work on that 
island. He then went into Macedonia. He wrote a letter to 
Timothy, who was at Ephesus, in Asia Minor, telling him that 
he hoped soon to visit Ephesus. He also wrote a letter to Titus, 
in which he said that he expected to winter at Nicopolis. Proba¬ 
bly in the spring he started for Ephesus, but got only as far as 
Troas, where he was arrested and taken to Rome. He was 
charged with the crime of having burned Rome. Here in his 
dungeon at Rome he wrote his last letter, the second to Timothy. 
He was beheaded by Nero probably about the year 66 A. D. 

Not all Bible students agree as to who it was that wrote the 
Epistle to the Hebrews. Most of them believe that Paul is the 
author. 


240 


REVIEW 

1. On what charge was Paul arrested at Jerusalem? 

2. Why was he taken to Caesarea? How long was he there? 

3. On what occasions in his life did Paul relate the storv of 

his wonderful conversion? 

4. - What was Paul’s native city? To what tribe did he belong? 

To what sect? Where and by whom was he educated? 

5. Name the persons before whom Paul had hearings while he 

was a prisoner at Caesarea. 

6. Why did he appeal to Caesar? 

7. Who was emperor of Rome during Paul’s imprisonment? 

8. Trace on the map Paul’s journey to Rome, and relate the 

various incidents connected with it. 

9. How long was Paul’s first imprisonment at Rome? 

10. Name the epistles written during this.time 

11. When were 1 Timothy and Titus written? 

12. What two letters to churches are similar in thought and 

phraseology ? 

13. Under what circumstances was the second letter to Timothy 

written ? 

14. How many of Paul’s epistles have we? Name each, and give 

the probable date and place of.writing. 

15. Which epistle was written to the master of a fugitive slave? 

16. ‘How did Paul spend the time between his two imprisonments 

at Rome? 

17. Where and how did Paul die? 

18. Write a character sketch of Paul. 

Who spoke the following quotations, and under what cir¬ 
cumstances ? — 

19. '‘Men of Israel, help: This is the man, that teacheth all men 

everywhere against the people, and the law, and this 
place: and further brought Greeks also into the temple, 
and hath polluted this holy place.” 


241 


20. “Away with such a fellow from the earth: for it is not fit 

that he should live.” 

21. “Is it lawful for you to scourge a man that is a Roman, 

and uncondemned?” 

22. “God shall smite thee, thou whited wall.” 

23. “Be of good cheer, Paul: for as thou hast testified of Me in 

Jerusalem, so must thou bear witness also at Rome.” 

24. “We have bound ourselves under a great curse, that we will 

eat nothing until we have slain Paul.” 

25. “We have found this man a pestilent fellow, and a mover 

of sedition among all the Jews throughout the world, and 
a ringleader of the sect of the Nazarenes.” 

26. “Go thy way for this time; when I have a convenient season, 

I will call for thee.” 

27. “Wilt thou go up to Jerusalem, and there be judged of these 

things before me?” 

28. “It seemeth to me unreasonable to send a prisoner, and not 

withal to signify the crimes laid against him.” 

29. “I was not disobedient unto the heavenly vision.” 

30. “Almost thou persuadest me to be a Christian.” 

31. “I exhort you to be of good cheer: for there shall be no loss 

of any man’s life among you, but of the ship.” 

32. “No doubt this man is a murderer.” 

33. “For the hope of Israel I am bound with this chain.” 

34. “Be it known therefore unto you, that the salvation of God 

is sent unto the gentiles, and that they will hear it.” 

35. “All the saints salute you, chiefly they that are of Csesar’s 

household.” 

36. “The Lord give mercy unto the house of Onesiphorus; for 

he oft refreshed me, and was not ashamed of my chain.” 

37. “Thou hast fully known my doctrine, manner of life, pur¬ 

pose, faith, long-suffering, charity, patience, persecutions, 
afflictions.” 

16 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 


242 


38. “The cloak that I left at Troas with Carpus, when thou 

comest, bring with thee, and the books, but especially the 
parchments.'’ 

39. “Alexander the coppersmith did me much evil: the Lord re¬ 

ward him according to his works.” 

40. “I am now ready to be offered, and the time of my de¬ 

parture is at hand.” 

41. “The Lord Jesus Christ be with thy spirit. Grace be with 

you. Amen.” 


THE EPISTLES OF PAUL 

1. 1 Thessalonians written at Corinth — Second journey. 

2. 2 Thessalonians written at Corinth — Second journey. 

3. 1 Corinthians written at Ephesus — Third journey. 

4. 2 Corinthians commenced at Philippi — Third journey. 

5. Galatians written at Corinth — Third journey. 

6. Romans written at Corinth — Third journey. 

7. Ephesians written at Rome — First imprisonment. 

8. Colossians written at Rome — First imprisonment. 

9. Philemon written at Rome — First imprisonment. 

10. Philippians written at Rome — First imprisonment. 

11. 1 Timothy written in-Macedonia or Achaia. 

12. Titus written in Macedonia or Achaia. 

13. 2 Timothy written at Rome — Second imprisonment, 

14. Hebrews not known when or where written. 



PART II 


The Plan of Salvation 


LXXXI. THE WORD OF GOD 

1. Inspiration of the Word 

2 Tim. 3: 16, 17. The word of God is inspired. 

2. Attributes of the Word 

John 6: 63. The word of God is spirit and life. 

Isa. 40: 8. The word of God is eternal. 

Heb. 4: 12. The word of God is living, powerful. 

3. Work of the Word 

Ps. 33: 6, 9. The word of God creates. 

1 Peter 1: 23. The word of God causes the sinner to be born 
again. 

Ps. 119: 101. The word of God keeps from sin. 

John 17: 17. The word of God sanctifies the believer. 

4. Love for the Word 

Jer. 15: 16. The word of God is joy to those who love it. 

5. Study of the Word 

John 5: 39. The word of God should be earnestly studied. 

6. Doers of the Word 

James 1: 22-25. The doers of the Word are blessed. 

(243) 



244 


Readings 

2 Peter 1: 20, 21 
Eph. 6: 17 
Heb. 1: 1 
2 Sam. 23: 2 
Ps. 17: 4 
Ps. 119: 103, 105 


James 1: 18 
Acts 17: 11 
Luke 8: 11 
2 Peter 3: 5 


Jer. 23: 29 


2 Tim. 2: 14, 15 


Luke 11: 28 
1 Cor. 2: 13 
Deut. 8: 3 


Ed., pp. 123-192 
C. 0. L., pp. 107-114 


Notes 


1. “Every part of the Bible is given by inspiration of God, 
and is profitable. The Old Testament no less than the New should 
receive attention. As we study the Old Testanient, w^ shall 
find living springs bubbling up where the careless reader dis¬ 
cerns only a desert. The book of Revelation, in connection with 
the book of Daniel, especially demands study.’’— Ed,, p. 191. 

“The word of God, like the character of its Author, pre¬ 
sents mysteries that can never be fully comprehended by finite 
beings. . . . The mysteries of the Bible, so far from being an 
argument against it, are among the strongest evidences of its 
divine inspiration. If it contained no account of God but that 
which we could comprehend; if His greatness and majesty could 
be grasped by finite minds, then the Bible would not, as now, 
bear the unmistakable evidences of divinity. The greatness of 
its themes should inspire faith in it as the word of God. . . . 
The fact needs to be emphasized, and often repeated, that the 
mysteries of the Bible are not such because God has sought to 
conceal truth, but because our own weakness or ignorance 
makes us incapable of comprehending or appropriating truth. 
The limitation is not in His purpose, but in our capacity. Of 
those very portions of Scripture often passed by as impossible 
to be understood, God desires us to understand as much as our 
minds are capable of receiving.”— Ed., pp. 169-171. 

2. “In every command and in every promise of the word of 
God is the power, the very life of God, by which the command 


245 


may be fulfilled and the promise realized. He who by faith 
receives the Word is receiving the very life and character of 
God.’’—C. O. L., V. 38. 

3. “Receive into the soul by faith the incorruptible seed of 
the Word, and it will bring forth a character and a life after the 
similitude of the character and the life of God.”— C. 0. L., p. 38. 

“If we would live a true Christian life, the conscience must 
be quickened by constant contact with the word of God. . . . 
We must eat the word of God,— make it a part of ourselves.”— 
Test., Vol. 7, p. 195. 

4. “As our physical life is sustained by food, so our spiritual 
life is sustained by the word of God. And every soul is to re¬ 
ceive life from God’s word for himself. As we must eat for 
ourselves in order to receive nourishment, so we must receive 
the Word for ourselves. We are not to obtain it merely through 
the medium of another’s mind. We should carefully study the 
Bible, asking God for the aid of the Holy Spirit, that we may 
understand His word. We should take one verse, and concentrate 
the mind on the task of ascertaining the thought which God has 
put in that^verse for us. We should dwell upon the thought until 
it becomes our own, and we know ‘what saith the Lord.’ . . . 

5. “By looking constantly to Jesus with the eye of faith, we 
shall be strengthened. God will make the most precious revela¬ 
tions to His hungering, thirsting people. They will find that 
Christ is a personal Saviour. As they feed upon His word, they 
find that it is spirit and life. The Word destroys the natural, 
earthly nature, and imparts a new life in Christ Jesus. The 
Holy Spirit comes to the soul as a Comforter. By the trans¬ 
forming agency of His grace, the image of God is reproduced 
in the disciple; he becomes a new creature. Love takes the 
place of hatred, and the heart receives the divine similitude. 
This is what it means to live ‘by every word that proceedeth 
out of the mouth of God.’ This is eating the bread that comes 
down from heaven.”— D. A., pp. 390, 391. 


246 


6. ‘'The student of the Bible should be taught to approach 
it in the spirit of a learner. We are to search its pages, not for 



“God’s holy word was prized when ’twas unsafe 
to read it.” 


proof to sustain our opinions, but in order to know what God 
says. A true knowledge of the Bible can be gained only through 
the aid of that Spirit by whom the Word was given. And in 
order to gain this knowledge we must live by it. All that God’s 




247 


word commands, we are to obey. All that it promises, we may 
claim. The life which it enjoins is the life that, through its 
power, we are to live.’’— Ed., p. 189. 

“With the word of God in his hands, every human being, 
wherever his lot in life may be cast, may have such compan¬ 
ionship as he shall choose. In its pages he may hold converse 
with the noblest and best of the human race, and may listen 
to the voice of the Eternal as He speaks with men. As he 
studies and meditates upon the themes into which ‘the angels 
desire to look,’ he may have their companionship. He may 
follow the steps of the heavenly Teacher, and listen to His 
words as when He taught on mountain and plain and sea. He 
may dwell in this world in the atmosphere of heaven, imparting 
to earth’s sorrowing and tempted ones thoughts of hope and 
longings for holiness; himself coming closer and still closer into 
fellowship with the Unseen; like him of old who walked with 
God, drawing nearer and nearer the threshold of the eternal 
world, until the portals shall open, and he shall enter there. 
He will find himself no stranger. The voices that will greet 
him are the voices of the holy ones, who, unseen, were on 
earth his companions,— voices that here he learned to dis¬ 
tinguish and to love. He who through the word of God has 
lived in fellowship with heaven, will find himself at home in 
heaven’s companionship.”— Ed., p. 127. 


LXXXIL THE FATHER 


1. The Deity 

Matt. 28: 19. The Father is the first of the three persons 
of the Godhead. 



248 


2. The Father 
Eph. 3:14, 15. 

3. Nature 

Job 11: 7-9. 


The family of the universe is named after 
the Father. 


God is infinite; man is finite, therefore we 
can never fully comprehend God. 

Ex. 3: 14. God is self-existent. 

John -5: 26. God has life in Himself. 

Ps. 36: 9. God is the source, or fountain, of all life. 

1 Tim. 6: 15, 16. God only has immortality. 

John 4: 24. God is a spirit. 

4. Appearance 
Dan. 7:9; 

Eze. 1: 26, 27. 

5. Dwelling Place 

1 Kings 8: 30. 

6. Attributes 
1 John 4: 8. 

1 John 1: 5. 

John 17: 11. 

Job 36: 5. 

Isa. 40: 28. 

Ps. 139: 7-12. 

7. Name 

Ex. 33: 18-20; His name is His character; His character is 
34: 5-7. His glory. 

8 Knowing God 

Job 22: 21. We should become acquainted with God. 


God is a personal being. 

God’s dwelling place is in heaven. 

God is love. 

God is light. 

God is holy. 

God is omnipotent (all-powerful). 

God is omniscient (all-wise). 

God is omnipresent (everywhere present). 


Readings 

Rom. 11: 33-36 
1 Tim. 1: 17 
Ps. 73: 25; 89: 6 
Eccl. 5: 2 


Isa. 40: 26, 27 
Matt. 19: 26 
Col. 2: 3 
John 17: 3 


Prov. 23: 26 
1 John 3: 1-3 
Ed., p. 169 
M. H., pp. 427-438 


249 


Notes 

1. The solemn words of the baptismal service name the 
three persons of the Godhead. Because there are three, the 
term “trinity” is often used. 

2. Before infinite power had been manifest in creative acts, 
the Father, the Son, and the Holy Spirit existed alone. But 
even Deity could not be content to exist by Himself. God 
created a universe too vast for us to comprehend, and filled it 
with holy, happy beings, to whom He was Father because 
He was Creator. 

Children are named after their father. God is Father of 
the whole family of heaven and earth, parent to every being 
in the universe. The sad truth that some will not own Him as 
such does not alter the fact. 

Illustration: There once came into a mining town in the 
Rockies a young man who gave his name as Brown — son of 
gambler Brown, he said. He was an intelligent, handsome young 
man, but also reckless and dissipated. Later, there also arrived 
in the town a dignified elderly gentleman. Lord -, a noble¬ 

man of England. He was searching for his long lost son. He 
recognized him in the young man Brown. But Brown refused 
to acknowledge the relationship. An unblemished name, wealth, 
honors, a peerage, awaited him if he would but say. This is 
my father, I am his son. 

But he would not. He stoutly insisted, “I am not your son; 
my father is Brown, the gambler.” Men who saw father and 

son said, “Your features are like Lord -'s, your hair is the 

same color, but your words and your ways are like Brown’s.” 

That young man was really the nobleman’s son by birth. 
Nothing could ever^ change that fact, but in character he was 
indeed the child of the gambler. 

Every being in the universe is the child of God. Some, 
however, will not acknowledge their sonship. This can not 
change the fact that by creation they are the sons of God, 




250 


though in character they are the children of the devil. “Ye are 
of your father the devil.^' To all God says, “Son, give Me thine 
heart.’' Those who respond by acknowledging their relationship 
to their heavenly Father, become the sons of God not only by 
creation, but also by redemption. They receive the adoption 
of sons. Gal. 4: 5-7. 

“Beloved, now are we the sons of God, and it doth not yet 
appear what we shall be: but we know that, when He shall 
appear, we shall be like Him; for we shall see Him as He is.” 
The image of God will be fully restored. Then it will be said. 
The children are like their Father. 

3. The fact that we can not comprehend the origin, ex¬ 
istence, nature, or attributes of God should be no hindrance 
to our faith, but rather a help. We do not understand our 
fellow mortals, our equals in mind and being. Why should we 
say, then, “I will not believe in God, because I do not under¬ 
stand Him”? 

Such questions as “Where did God come from?” “How can 
it be that He has existed always?” “Everything has a begin¬ 
ning, why not God?” are childish in the extreme. It is im¬ 
possible that a finite mind should comprehend the infinite. For 
us to be able to comprehend God, it would be necessary for us 
to be equal or superior in our being to Him; that is, be gods. 
Read M. H., pp. 429, 430. 

Ex. 3: 14 might be paraphrased like this: “I am the One 
that exists by My own power, or the One that has ‘life in 
Himself,’ power to exist within Myself.” God is the Source of 
life, therefore the Author of all life. By this God meant to 
distinguish Himself from all false gods, as the self-existent 
Creator, the originator of all life. Himself “the fountain of life.” 

“The youth need to understand the deep truth underlying the 
Bible statement that with God ‘is the fountain of life.’ Not 
only is He the originator of all, but He is the life of every¬ 
thing that lives. It is His life that we receive in the sunshine, 


251 


in the pure, sweet air, in the food which builds up our bodies 
and sustains our strength. It is by His life that we exist hour 
by hour, moment by moment.”— Ed., pp. 197, 198. 

Since God is self-existent, has life in Himself, He has power 
to perpetuate His own existence eternally. That is. He is 
immortal. He may confer immortality, as He will upon the 
redeemed in the resurrection. They will be immortal, but even 
then there will be a sense in which He alone has immortality, 
the power to exist forever and to give created beings eternal 
life, for no created being will ever have power to confer im¬ 
mortality upon another. They receive life for themselves, but 
not in themselves. 

4. The fact that God is a spirit, a spiritual being, does not 
in any sense imply that He is not a real, personal being. The 
redeemed will be spiritual beings with spiritual bodies. 1 Cor. 
15: 44. These bodies will be real and will be tangible, for they 
will build houses and dwell in them, plant vineyards and eat 
the fruit of them. “Mine elect shall long enjoy the work of 
their hands.” Isa. 65:21, 22. A spiritual body then has a 
mouth and hands and uses them. 

A spiritual being is more real than we mortal, sinful beings 
are; for we are subject to corruption, are dying every moment 
of our lives, are full of the germs of decay and death. 

5. God has a dwelling place, a fixed habitation in heaven, 
but is everywhere present in His universe by His representative, 
the Holy Spirit. 

6. An attribute is “that which is considered as belonging to, 
inherent in, or characteristic of a being or thing.” God is 
infinite in all His attributes. Though we can not at all com¬ 
prehend any of His attributes, yet we believe them, and faith 
makes them real to us. We trust in His power to care for us, 
in His wisdom to do that which is best for us; His love breaks 
our hard hearts; His light illumines our darkened souls; we are 


252 


comforted always because we know that He is ever present with 
us; and we strive to be holy as “He is holy/' 

“No searching" means that it is impossible for us ever to 
find, to know, or to comprehend the heights and depths of the 
wisdom of God. 

The Scripture does not say that God possesses love and light, 
but that He is love and He is light. No earthly illustration 
will suffice to explain these attributes, for of none bn earth can 
it be said. He is love, or. He is light. Sometimes we see a faint 
reflection of that light, our souls are enraptured with a slight 
manifestation of that love, in a heart that beats beside ours; 
but, 0, to comprehend a being who is love and light, one who is 
the source of all the love and all the light that blesses the 
universe! 

7. When Moses said, “I beseech Thee, show me Thy glory," 
the Lord answered, “I wiirproclaim the name of the Lord before 
thee." When He fulfilled this promise. He proclaimed His char¬ 
acter. This shows that glory, name, and character, are syno¬ 
nyms when applied to God, for His character is what He is, 
and that is His glory. A name, when given by God, or used 
by Him, always signifies the character of the one who bears it. 
When men speak of the glory of God, they usually refer to the 
exceeding brightness that surrounds His person; but this is 
only a visible manifestation of His true, real glory, which is 
His character. 

8. To know God, is to love Him. If we were really ac¬ 
quainted with Him, we should be so enraptured with His love¬ 
liness of character, so impressed with His justice and mercy 
toward us and toward all His creatures, that we would hasten 
to make our peace with Him. To those who know Him aright, 
as He really is, and thus rightly relate themselves to Him, He 
will give eternal life. John 17: 3. 


253 


LXXXIIL THE SON 


1. Nature 


John 3: 16. The Son is the ^only-begotten of God. 

John 5: 26. The Son has life in Himself, given by the 

Father. 


Prov. 8: 22-30 
Micah 5:2. 


’ The Son is eternal. 


2. Relation to the Father 


Isa. 9: 6. The Son is the Father’s Counselor. 

3. Attributes 

Col. 2: 9. The attributes of the Son are the same as the 
Father’s. 


4. Appearance 

Heb. 1:3; The Son is the express image of the Father’s 
Rev. 1: 13-16. person. 

5. Agent in Creation 

Col. 1: 15-17. All things were created by the Son. 

6. Relation to the Angels 

Heb. 1: 4, 9. He is above them because He is their Creator. 
1 The^*^ 4 * 16 * 

T h ^’ 9 ^- ' commander of the heavenly hosts, His 

' name is Michael, the Archangel. 

Jude 9. 


7. The Plan of Salvation 

Zech. 6: 12, 13. The plan was made in a “counsel of 

peace.” 

Rom. 16:25 (margin). The plan was a secret between Fa¬ 
ther and Son through “times eter¬ 
nal.” 


Readings 

Hebrews 1 
John 14: 9 


2 Cor. 4: 4 
Zech. 13: 7 


M. H., pp. 409-426 


254 


Notes 

1. The Son is the second person of the Godhead, the only- 
begotten of God. The Father recognizes Him as His Son, and 
calls Him God. The first chapter of the book of Hebrews sets 
forth the wonderful majesty, glory, and power of the Son 
as one equal with the Father, and superior to all created beings. 

Illustration: Mr. A is a man of power and influence. His 
son exactly resembles him, physically, mentally, morally. In 
business they are partners; their plans, purposes, methods, are 
the same. The son’s influence and authority are in every way 
equal to the father’s. To transact business, men will as soon 
approach one as the other. Which is greater? — Neither, so 
far as others are concerned. We expect, however, the son to 
show deference, respect, and honor to his father, because he 
is his father, the author of his being; but men in their rela¬ 
tion to them know only that one is father, the other son. 

Jesus as the Son of God said, as we should expect a son 
to say, “My Father is greater than I.” 

The Son “has life in Himself.” So also has the Father. 
But it is said of the life of the Son, that it was given to Him 
by the Father. There is a difference in the way in which the 
Son obtained life, but the life that He now possesses is not 
different from the Father’s. He can confer life upon bther 
beings, the same as can the Father. 

Micah 5: 2, margin, reads, “from the days of eternity.” The 
Son has an eternal existence. Prov. 8:22-30 shows that He 
existed before any of the created works of God. The relation¬ 
ship of Father and Son is beautifully expressed in the words, 
“As one brought up with Him: and I was daily His delight.” 
We sometimes use like phrases to express the most intimate and 
affectionate association between earthly parent and son. 

2. One of the supreme titles of the Son is “Counselor.” No 
one else could be the Father’s counselor, for there is no one 
else of the same order of being, therefore no one else who 


255 


could comprehend and enter into all the plans and purposes 
of the Father. 

Zech. 13: 7. The etymology of “fellow’’ is fe, property; lag, 
a laying together; that is, one who puts his possessions, pur¬ 
poses, plans — his all — beside ours, and shares all that may 
mean. God the Father speaks of God the Son as “the Man 
that is My Fellow,” the one who shares all His purposes, plans, 
and responsibilities. Who can even faintly comprehend the 
divine comradeship of Gods? Earthly parents ofttimes find 
their sweetest joy, their chief delight, in their association with 
their children. What must be the delight of the Father with 
the Son! And yet God so loved you and me that rather than 
allow us to perish. He gave that only Son, that beloved Son, to 
die, that we might have life and not death. It was the Father’s 
broken heart that gave the command, “Awake, 0 sword, against 
. . . the Man that is My Fellow.” Wonderful, incompre¬ 

hensible love! 

The position of the Son of God has ever been at the right 
hand of God. Though He took the sinner’s place, which Satan 
hoped He must ever keep, yet when He returned to His heav¬ 
enly home. He was placed again in His original position, the one 
of greatest honor, influence, and power in all the universe. 

3. “Fullness” implies completeness, nothing lacking. Since 
m the Son is all the “fullness of the Godhead,” He must possess 
all the attributes that pertain to the Father. Omnipotence, 
omniscience, omnipresence, etc., are attributes of Deity, of all 
persons of the Godhead. Read M. H., pp. 421, 422. 

4. According not only to the Scripture statement, but also to 
the description, the Son perfectly resembles the Father. This 
outward resemblance indicates perfect similarity in character. 
Jesus said, “He that hath seen Me hath seen the Father.” The 
character of the Father was perfectly revealed in Jesus. 

“I then beheld the beauty and loveliness of Jesus. His robe 
was whiter than the whitest white. No language can describe 


256 


His glory and exalted loveliness.” —''Early Writings,” old edition, 
p. new edition, p. 51. 

"1 have often seen the lovely Jesus, that He* is a person. 
I asked Him if His Father was a person and had a form like 
Himself. Said Jesus, ‘I am in the express image of My Father’s 
person.' ”—"Early Writings,” old edition, p. 67; new edition, p. 77. 

5. “All things were created by Him, and for Him.” Christ 
was the active agent in creation. Therefore one of His titles 
is “everlasting Father.” 

6. The Son is superior to every other being “by inheritance.” 
He is God, and all others are the creatures, or creations, of God. 
A creature can never become God. Not even an angel, though 
as highly exalted as Lucifer, could ever become equal to the Son 
of God. The very fact that angels are created and He begotten 
precludes this forever. 

“Michael the Archangel,” the chief, or commander, of the 
angels. This is the position and name of the Son of God among 
the angels. “Michael” means “who is like God.” 

7. The “counsel of peace” was the counsel by which the plan 
of salvation was devised,— the plan by which peace might be 
restored to the universe should any being ever rebel against the 
government of God. “Between Them both” shows that the Fa¬ 
ther and the Son were equally interested in providing a way by 
which sinners might be saved from the consequences of trans¬ 
gression. 

This plan was a secret, and through “times eternal” it 
remained unrevealed, because no necessity arose for putting it 
into operation, and because it could not be comprehended before 
sin existed. Had sin never come into the universe, the plan 
would have remained locked in the bosom of the Godhead. 

Rev. 13: 8. No promise of God can ever fail; it is as sure 
as the fulfillment. Christ is the Lamb slain from the founda¬ 
tion of the world because God promised then that He would 
die for the sins of men, and that promise was just as sure as 
the fulfillment when He died on Calvary’s cross. 


257 


LXXXIV. THE HOLY SPIRIT 


1. Name 

Matt. 28: 19. The Holy Spirit is the “third person of the 
Godhead.” 

2. Nature 


Heb. 9: 14. The Holy Spirit is eternal. 

Ps. 139:7-12. The Holy Spirit is everywhere present as the 
representative of the Father and the Son. 
John 3: 8. The Holy Spirit is known by the effect He 
produces. 

3. Appearance 
Mark 1 * 10 * 

Acts 2*1 4 ' Holy Spirit assumes different symbolic forms. 

4. Work 


John 16:7-15; 

14: 16,17, 26; 
Eph. 1: 13. 

Eze. 1: 12, 20. 

Luke 11: 13. 
Matt. 12 : 31, 32; 
Eph. 4:30. ^ 


The Holy Spirit reproves, guides, teaches, 
comforts with the presence of Christ, 
and seals the saints of God. 

The Holy Spirit is always accompanied 
by the angels. 

God is willing to give the Hoiy Spirit. 

There is no salvation for one who forever 
grieves away the Holy Spirit. 


Readings 
Ps. 51: 11 


Heb. 6: 4-6 A. A., Chaps. IV and V 


Notes 


1. Each person of the Godhead has many different names. 
Some of those which are synonymous with “Holy Spirit” are “Holy 
Ghost,” “Spirit of God,” “Spirit of truth,” “Spirit of Christ,” 
and the “Comforter.” 

“The Holy Spirit is Christ’s representative, but divested of 
the personality of humanity, and independent thereof.”— D. A., 
p. 669. 

17 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 


25S 


The Holy Spirit is eternal, coexistent with the Father and 
the Son. Jesus said, 'T and My Father are one.'' The Holy 
Spirit is Their representative, therefore the three are '‘one" and 
"indivisible." 

This question was asked by David: "Whither shall I go 
from Thy Spirit?" He then repeats the question in this form: 
"Or whither shall I flee from Thy presence?" This shows that 
wherever the Spirit is, there is the presence of God. He could 
find no place in the universe where he could be hidden from God, 
because the Spirit of God is everywhere present. This explains 
how the Father and the Son, though personal beings, and having 
a certain abiding place, are present in every spot in the universe. 
Again we see that omnipresence is an attribute of the Godhead. 

No man ever saw the wind; yet no sane person doubts that 
there is wind, for we see the swaying boughs, the quivering 
leaves, the dust storms in the distance, and tremble before the 
blast of the hurricane. We feel the might of the wind, we see 
the results of its power, and because of the effects it produces 
we believe there is wind. 

Upon evidence of the same character, we believe there is a 
Holy Spirit; for though we can not see Him, we may feel His 
power working in our hearts, and see the results of His holy 
influence in the lives of others. The Holy Spirit is recognized 
by what He does. 

3. Whenever the Holy Spirit has appeared to man. His ap¬ 
pearance has been symbolic, not literal. Therefore we do not 
know His form. To Christ at His baptism He assumed the form 
of a dove, emblematic of love and peace as revealed in the char¬ 
acter of our Saviour. On the day of Pentecost He appeared as 
cloven tongues of fire. This symbol indicated the burning zeal 
of those who receive it, and the parting of the flame signified 
that a diversity of gifts was bestowed upon the disciples. 

4. "In describing to His disciples the office work of the Holy 
Spirit, Jesus sought to inspire them with the joy and hope that 


259 


inspired His own heart. He rejoiced because of the abundant 
help He had provided for His church. The Holy Spirit was the 
highest of all gifts that He could solicit from His Father for 
the exaltation of His people. The Spirit was to be given as a 
regenerating agent, and without this the sacrifice of Christ would 
have been of no avail. 

“The power of evil had been strengthening for centuries, and 
the submission of men to this satanic captivity was amazing. 
Sin could be resisted and overcome only through the mighty 
agency of the third person of the Godhead, who would come with 
no modified energy, but in the fullness of divine power. It is 
the Spirit that makes effectual what has been wrought by 
the world’s Redeemer. It is by the Spirit that the heart is made 
pure. TlM*ough the Spirit the believer becomes a partaker of 
the divine nature. Christ has given His Spirit as a divine power 
to overcome all hereditary and cultivated tendencies to evil, and 
to impress His own character upon His church. . . . 

“The preaching of the Word will be of no avail without the 
continual presence and aid of the Holy Spirit. This is the only 
effectual teacher of divine truth. Only when the truth is accom¬ 
panied to the heart by the Spirit will it quicken the conscience 
or transform the life.” 

“The Comforter is called ‘the Spirit of truth.’ His work is 
to define and maintain the truth. He first dwells in the heart as 
the Spirit of truth, and thus He becomes the Comforter. There 
is comfort and peace in the truth, but no real peace or comfort 
can be found in falsehood.”— D. A., p. 671, 

“Eph. 1: 13, 14. *The earnest of the Hol/y Spirit.’ In the 
early times, when land was sold, the owner cut a turf from the 
greensward and cast it into the cap of the purchaser as a token 
that it was his; or he tore off a branch of a tree and put it 
into the new owner’s hand to show that he was entitled to all 
the products of the soil; and when the purchaser of the house 
received seizin, or possession, the key of the door, or a bundle 


260 


of thatch plucked from the roof, signified that the building was 
yielded up to him. 

“The God of all grace has given to His people all the per¬ 
fections of heaven to be their heritage forever, and the earnest 
of His Spirit is to them the blessed token that all things are 
theirs. The Spirit’s work of comfort and sanctification is a part 
of heaven’s covenant blessings, a turf from the soil of Canaan, 
a twig from the tree of life, the key to mansions in the skies. 
Possessing the earnest of the Spirit, we have received seizin 
of heaven.”— Spurgeon, 

“The Holy Spirit is the mighty energy of the Godhead, the 
life and power of God flowing out from Him to all parts of the 
universe, and thus making living connection between His throne 
and all creation. As is expressed by another: The Holy Spirit 
is the breath of spiritual life in the soul. The impartation of 
the Spirit is the impartation of the life of Christ.’ It thus 
makes Christ everywhere present. To use a crude illustration, 
just as a telephone carries the voice of a man, and so makes 
that voice present miles away, so the Holy Spirit carries with 
it all the potency of Christ in making Him everywhere present 
with all His power, and revealing Him to those in harmony 
with His law. Thus the Spirit is personified in Christ and God, 
but never revealed as a separate person. Never are we told 
to pray to the Spirit; but to God for the Spirit. . . . 

“The Spirit is the creative power of God by which angels 
and all other creatures came into existence. God fills them with 
His Spirit, His life, and makes them ministers of His life and 
power to others, especially to His people. He takes His con¬ 
secrated people and makes them also ministers of His blessings 
to mankind. The angels are no more the Spirit of God than 
are His people .”—''Questions and Answers” pp. 181, 182. 

“Christ has promised the gift of the Holy Spirit to His church, 
and the promise belongs to us as much as to the first disciples. 
But like every other promise, it is given on conditions. . . . 


261 


We can not use the Holy Spirit. The Spirit is to use us. Through 
the Spirit God works in His people ‘to will and to do of His 
good pleasure.' But many will not submit to this. They want 
to manage themselves. This is why they do not receive the 
heavenly gift. . . . This promised blessing, claimed by faith, 
brings all other blessings in its train."— D. A., p. 672, 

The Holy Spirit softens the heart, causes us to hate sin and 
to repent of all our wrongdoing. Without the Spirit, we should 
never have one good impulse, nor the least sorrow or regret for 
our sins. Unless we repent, we can never be forgiven. There¬ 
fore if we grieve the Spirit entirely away from us, we are lost, 
for there is no other power that can cause us even to desire to 
make our peace with God. 

“The Holy Spirit is the breath of spiritual life in the soul. 
The impartation of the Spirit is the impartation of the life of 
Christ. It imbues the receiver with the attributes of Christ." 
— D. A., p. 805, 


LXXXV. THE LAW OF GOD 

1. The Constitution of God's Government 
Ps. 40: 8. The law is the will of God. 

2. The Character of the Law 

Ps. 19: 7, 8. The law is perfect, pure, right. 

Ps. 119: 142. The law is truth. 

Prov. 6: 23. The law is light. 

Ps. 119: 172. The law is righteousness. 

Rom. 7: 12. The law is holy, just, and good. 
Rom. 7: 14. The law is spiritual. 

James 1: 25. The law is a perfect law of liberty. 
James 2: 8. The law is a royal law. 



Readings 

Neh. 9: 13 Psalm 119 Hosea 8: 12 P. P., Chap. XXVII 

Notes 

1 . There can be no government either human or divine with¬ 
out law. Law is necessary to order even among sinless beings. 
No one would know what was expected of him if the will of one 
supreme were not made known. 

God has expressed His will in ten great principles, or words, 
which are called the ten commandments. The first four com¬ 
mandments express the duty of all beings to God; the last six, 
their duty to one another. 

The law of God is the constitution of His government. It 
is the standard of character, and therefore is called the moral law. 

2. The law is the character of God expressed in words. As 
long as any being keeps this law, his character is like the char¬ 
acter of God. 

‘‘The law of God is as sacred as Himself. It is a revelation 
of His will, a transcript of His character, the expression of divine 
love and wisdom. The harmony of creation depends upon the 
perfect conformity of all beings, of everything animate and in¬ 
animate, to the law of the Creator. 

"‘God has ordained laws for the government, not only of living 
beings, but of all the operations of nature. Everything is under 
fixed laws, which can not be disregarded. But while every¬ 
thing in nature is governed by natural laws, man alone, of 
all that inhabits the earth, is amenable to moral law. To man, 
the crowning work of creation, God has given power to under¬ 
stand His requirements, to comprehend the justice and benefi¬ 
cence of His law, and its sacred claims upon him; and of man 
unswerving obedience is required.''—P. P., p. 52. 

“Transcript" means an exact copy; the law is an exact copy of 
the character of God. The attributes of the law are the attri¬ 
butes of God. It is just and good, holy, righteous, perfect. It 


263 



(hee ony *^(o 

, P^{S 

! Slf# 

<Il= 8 «rdS"& 

them ihThSM^S^ii" 

‘M’nSSiZfl^rfpr 

^y command, 

thaii labor, and dn dl thy work- 

sorvantnorpty caiiRPrlT 

^iranger^at is within ihy aPfes- 
for m SIX t^ys ihe Lord lS^ 
ea^^h ^,e sea. andaV 
idc in them is.and resfed the sevpnif, 

’h^-^ohbMJqy.aml heUaweJit. 


fty maflier: that 
be long upon 

fe^Lor/%God.glv«ft 

Shoushalfno^ kill. 

ad,8fe ““■»«< 

c/ 

, ¥iir 

O'lou shall! tiof sfoal, 

IS" 

falsf wi'/nesi*ad? 

ne.^hbor 

,, S'”;! shaif no< cnve( 

Vnai^Ua,.^, 

^ f ctiVBf fty neWJ,- 

iorswife, nor hfe man- 

norTi'l’""'' 

"O' l"3 ox, nor hi., ass no,- 
-n7<hi„jJ<haiis%;4. 












264 


is a law of liberty to those who keep it, for they never feel its 
restraints, never sense its condemnation. The psalmist says, ‘T 
will walk at liberty: for I seek Thy precepts.” Ps, 119:45. 

It is a royal law, not only because it is the law of the King 
of the universe, but because of the holiness, purity, perfection, of 
its character. 


‘‘0, perfect law of the Most High, 

Law ever holy, just, and good! 

No other code with thee can vie. 

Unrivaled thou hast ever stood. 

“Let thy ten words my soul convert 
From every false and sinful way; 

Write thy pure precepts on my heart. 

That from thy truth I may not stray.” 

— R. F. Cottrell. 


LXXXVL THE LAW OF GOD (CONTINUED) 

1. Perpetuity of the Law 

Ps. 111:7,8. The law stands fast forever. 

Ps. 119: 89. The law is settled in heaven. 

Ps. 119: 172,142, 152. The law is everlasting. 

Isa. 51: 6. The law will never be abolished. 

Matt. 5: 17, 18. The law will never pass away. 

2 . Keeping the Law 

Matt. 22: 36-40; Love God with all the heart, and your neigh- 
Mark 12 : 30-33. bor as yourself. 

Rom. 13: 10. Love is the fulfilling of the law. 

3. Breaking the Law 

1 John 3: 4. Sin is the transgression of the law. 

James 2: 10. To break one commandment is to break all. 



265 


Readings 

Jer. si: 33; 16: 11 Ps. 1: 2 Gen. 26:5 

Isa. 51: 7 James 2: 8, 9 P. P., Ghap. XXIX 

Prov. 3:1;4:2;7:2 

Notes 

1. '^Perpetuity, the quality or state of being perpetual; un¬ 
ending or unlimited time.” The law of God is eternal, because 
God is eternal. 

God never changes. He is '‘the same yesterday, and to-day, 
and forever.” Therefore the law never changes. If it did, it 
would not be an exact copy, or transcript, of His character. The 
law of God is immutable; that is, unchangeable. It is right¬ 
eousness, and righteousness will never be abolished. 

“One jot, yod h), the smallest letter in the Hebrew alphabet. 
One tittle, points of certain letters.”— Clarke's Commentary. 

“It is the Creator of men, the Giver of the law, who declares 
that it is not His purpose to set aside its precepts. Everything 
in nature, from the mote in the sunbeam to the worlds on high, 
is under law. And upon obedience to these laws the order and 
harmony of the natural world depend. So there are great prin¬ 
ciples of righteousness to control the life of all intelligent beings, 
and upon conformity to these principles the well-being of the 
universe depends. 

“Before this earth was called into being, God's law existed. 
Angels are governed by its principles, and in order for earth 
to be in harmony with heaven, man also must obey the divine 
statutes. . . . Speaking of the law, Jesus said, ‘I am not come 
to destroy, but to fulfill.' He here used the word ‘fulfill' in the 
same sense as when He declared to John the Baptist His pur¬ 
pose to ‘fulfill all righteousness;' that is, to fill up the measure 
of the law's requirement, to give an example of perfect con¬ 
formity to the will of God. . . . 

“By His own obedience to the law, Christ testified to its 


266 


immutable character, and proved that through His grace it could 
be perfectly obeyed by every son and daughter of Adam. On 
the mount He declared that not the smallest iota should pass 
from the law till all things should be accomplished,— all things 
that concern the human race, all that relates to the plan of 
redemption. 

'‘He does not teach that the law is ever to be abrogated, but 
He fixes the eye upon the utmost verge of man’s horizon, and 
assures us that until this point is reached, the law will retain 
its authority, so that none may suppose it was His mission to 
abolish the precepts of the law .”—''Mount of Blessing ” pp. 76-79. 

2 . " ‘God is love.’ His nature. His law, is love. It ever 
has been; it ever will be. ‘The high and lofty One that inhabiteth 
eternity,’ ‘whose ways are everlasting,’ changeth not. With Him 
‘is no variableness, neither shadow of turning.’ . . . 

“The law of love being the foundation of the government of 
God' the happiness of all intelligent beings depends upon their 
perfect accord with its great principles of righteousness.”— 
P. P., pp. 33, 3U. 

We can not keep the law of God from a sense of duty alone. 
Only a willing, cheerful obedience is acceptable to God, and 
we can not give this unless we love God supremely and our 
neighbor as ourselves. We do not keep the law because we are 
afraid God will punish us if we do not, but because we love 
Him so much we will not grieve Him by doing anything con¬ 
trary to His will, and because we want to be like Him. 

Prove that love is the fulfilling of the law, by testing each 
commandment. If we love God, we will not even think of taking 
His name in vain, of worshiping other gods, making images to 
them, and we will be only too glad to have a Sabbath day on 
which to meditate upon His goodness. If we love man, we will 
not need even to be reminded to honor our parents, and we could 
not — really could not — steal or kill or covet. So you see 
“love is the fulfilling of the law.” 


267 


3. The moment we break one of the commandments, we are 
out of harmony with God; and this is sin. We are in rebellion 
against Him, and are called transgressors of His law. “Trans- 
gress’" means to walk across. Instead of respecting, honoring, 
obeying the law, we have walked across it, showing our disrespect 
for it, and therefore of God. 

'Tt is not the greatness of the act of disobedience that con¬ 
stitutes sin, but the fact of variance from God’s expressed will 
in the least particular. . . . There is not a commandment of 
the law that is not for the good and happiness of man, both 
in this life and in the life to come. In obedience to God’s law, 
man is surrounded as with a hedge, and kept from the evil. He 
who breaks down this divinely erected barrier at one point, has 
destroyed its power to protect him; for he has opened a way by 
which the enemy can enter, to waste and ruin .”—''Mount of 
Blessing” pp. 81, 82. 


LXXXVII. PRINCIPLES 

1. Since God is good. He must desire His universe to be in¬ 
habited by beings who are like Himself — good. 

2 . Since God is the Creator of every being in the universe, 
every one should honor and obey Him. 

3. The Creator can have pleasure only in beings who honor 
and obey Him because they love Him. 

4. He therefore has given every being the power of choice. 
Each may do God’s will or not, just as he chooses. 

5. Each being created must be tested, that it may be known 
whether he will always honor and obey God. 

6 . If he endures the test, he may be trusted to have life 
forever; that is, eternal life. 

7. The time given in which to exercise power of choice, to 
develop character, is called by man probation. 



268 


8 . All choices are to be made in harmony with the will of 
God. The will of God is His law. 

9. Therefore the standard of character is the law of God. 

10. The control of the Creator is limited during the period of 
probation. 

11. It is right that the creature should give an account of the 
way he has used the power of choice during his probation. The 
investigation of man's choices (deeds) is called an Investigative 
Judgment. 

12 . It is right that he should be rewarded according to the 
choices he has made. If he has chosen to obey, he may live — 
live forever; if he has chosen to disobey, he must die — die eter¬ 
nally. The reward for right choices and the punishipent for 
wrong ones is called the Executive Judgment. 

ITotes 

A principle is a general truth, a statement that is self-evident. 
The principles given here are truths which, while they may not 
all be directly stated in the Bible, may be easily inferred. They 
are so evidently right that they need no proof, but we may seek 
to understand the reasons why they are true. 

1 . Rev. 4: 11 says that all things were created for the pleas¬ 
ure of God. This being so. He must desire that all the beings 
He has created should be in harmony with Him; for He could 
have no pleasure in rebels — which all are who do not do the 
will of God. 

2. 'The duty to worship God is based upon the fact that He 
is the Creator, and that to Him all other beings owe their ex¬ 
istence."— G. C., p. U36. 

3. If a mother knew that her little girl loved and obeyed her 
because she was obliged to, because she was made to love her 
and could not help herself, it would not give that mother any 
pleasure to have her little daughter say, 'T love you." Neither 
could we give pleasure to God if we loved and obeyed Him be¬ 
cause we could not help ourselves — because we must. 


269 


‘The law of love being the foundation of the government of 
God, the happiness of all intelligent beings depends upon their 
perfect accord with its great principles of righteousness. God 
desires from all His creatures the service of love,— service that 
springs from an appreciation of His character. He takes no 
pleasure in a forced obedience; and to all He grants freedom of 
will, that they may render Him voluntary service.”— P. P., p, 3^. 

4. Because of this, God gave every being that He ever created, 
the power of choice, the power to obey or to disobey. He prom¬ 
ised each one that if he obeyed Him, he should live forever. Of 
course God knew that this power of choice made it possible for 
some one to disobey — to sin. But He provided a remedy for sin. 

5. God created each and every being sinless, but each one 
must develop a character. We develop character by the choices 
we make. If we choose to do the will of God, we develop a 
righteous, holy character, one in harmony with God. 

6. When this character is developed, it is safe to give eternal 
life, but not before. If eternal life had been given at creation, 
Satan and evil angels and all the wicked, as well as the good 
angels and the righteous, would have eternal life. They could 
never be destroyed. They would be immortal, and live for¬ 
ever in sin. 

7. Every being is or has been on probation. With man pro¬ 
bation is closed at death. If he is living when the Investigative 
Judgment is finished, it will close then. Probation is the most 
solemn and important period of the existence of any being, for 
during this time his destiny is decided forever. 

8. God makes known His will — His law — to all the beings 
He has created, that they may understand what He desires of 
them, that they may know what is right and what is wrong, and 
how to choose. If God did not make known His law to His 
creatures, each one would decide for himself what is right and 
what is wrong, and there would be as many standards as there 
are beings in the universe. 


270 


9. But God has made known His law, a copy of His own 
character, and this is the standard of character for every creature 
He has made. 

10. When God gives His creatures the power of choice. He 
does not try to control them in making their choices. Each 
one is a free moral agent. That means that though God tries 
in many ways to persuade him by the Holy Spirit to make choices 
in harmony with His will. He does not compel any one to serve 
Him, or restrain any one from doing contrary to His will. 

A little boy once said, “Papa, I wish I might do as I please 
for one week, with no one to say. You must do this, or You must 
not do that.'’ “Very well, my son, you may have this privilege. 
For one week you will be free to do as you choose. Neither your 
mother nor I will interfere to prevent your doing what you 
wish. But you know our will, you know what we wish you 
to do, and the reasons why you should do as we desire. While 
we shall not interfere with you during the week, yet because 
we are your parents, it will be right for us at the end of the 
week to consider how you have used your privileges, and to 
approve or condemn what you have done, according as your deeds 
have been in accordance with our will or contrary to it." 

11. This week might be called this little boy’s probation. At 
the end of it he gave an account of the way he had used the 
power of choice. His parents investigated his conduct. God 
will make an investigation of the conduct of each of His crea¬ 
tures. “For God shall bring every work into judgment, with 
every secret thing, whether it be good, or whether it be evil.’’ 
For this purpose He keeps an accurate record of everything His 
creatures do, even their most secret thoughts. This record will 
be publicly examined, that every being in the universe may know 
that God is just, and deals justly with all His creatures. 

12. When every case has been examined, God will announce 
the result. Some will have made right choices, developed right¬ 
eous characters. Of them He will say, “He that is righteous, 
let him be righteous still.’’ It will be safe to give eternal life 


271 


to these, because they will always be in harmony with God. They 
' have chosen to do His will. Their characters are established. 

But some there will be who would not do the will of God. 
They rebelled against Him and developed unjust, wicked char¬ 
acters. Of them He will say, “He that is unjust, let him be 
unjust still: and he which is filthy, let him be filthy still.’’ These 
would never change, either. No matter how long they were per¬ 
mitted to live, they would always rebel against God, refuse to do 
His will. It is better that they should go out of existence, for 
they would never be happy in heaven, and on earth they would 
destroy themselves. 

“Sow an act, and you reap a habit; sow a habit, and you 
reap a character; sow a character, and you reap a destiny.” 

“The sinner could not be happy in God’s presence; he would 
shrink from the companionship of holy beings. Could he be per¬ 
mitted to enter heaven, it would have no joy for him. The spirit 
of unselfish love that reigns there — every heart responding to 
the heart of Infinite Love — would touch no answering chord in 
his soul. His thoughts, his interests, his motives would be alien 
to those that actuate the sinless dwellers there. He would be a 
discordant note in the melody of heaven. Heaven would be to 
him a place of torture; he would long to be hidden from Him 
who is its light, and the center of its joy. It is no arbitrary 
decree on the part of God that excludes the wicked from heaven; 
they are shut out by their own unfitness for its companionship. 
The glory of God would be to them a consuming fire. They would 
welcome destruction, that they might be hidden from the face 
of Him who died to redeem them.”— S. C, 


272 


LXXXVIII. THE ANGELS 


1. Nature 

Ps. 148: 2, 5. 
Col. 1: 16. 
Heb. 1: 7. 
Heb. 1: 4. 

Ps. 8: 4, 5. 


The angels are created beings. 

The angels were created by Christ. 

The angels are spirits. 

The angels are a much lower order of being 
than Christ. 

The angels are a little higher order of being 
than man. 


Ps. 103: 20; 

2 Thess. 1: 7. 


The angels excel in strength. 


2. Classes, or Orders 

Eze. 10: 20, 21. One order of the angels is the cherubim. 

Isa. 6: 2. Another order of the angels is the seraphim. 


3. Number 
Dan. 7: 10; 
Heb. 12: 22. 


The angels are innumerable. 


4. Work 

Ps. 103: 19-21; The angels are God’s ministers or serv- 

Heb. 1: 14. ants. 

Rev. 14: 18; 16: 5, 6. Each angel has a specific work to do. 
Rev. 12: 4; 

Isa. 14: 13; The angels are called the stars of God. 

Job 38: 7. 


5. Home 

Isa. 6: 1-4; 
Ezekiel 1 and 10; 
Rev. 5: 11-13. 


Visions of the home of the Deity and of 
the angels. 


273 


Headings 

Rev. 3: 5; 14: 10; 
21: 12 

2 Peter 2: 4,11 
1 Peter 3: 22; 1: 12 


Hebrews 1; 2: 2, 5,16; 
13: 2 

1 Tim. 5:21 

Ps. 68:17; 78: 25, 49 


Matt. 18: 10 
Gen. 28: 12 
John 1:51 
Luke 12: 8, 9; 15: 10 


Notes 

1. Christ is the Creator of the principalities and powers of 
heaven as well as of earth. Jude 6 tells us that some of the 
angels kept not their “first estate’’—margin, “principality.” 

The angels are spiritual beings, and therefore are not limited 
by conditions of time and place as we material beings are; yet, 
like God, who also is a spirit, they are real beings and do a 
real work. 

The angels are wonderful beings, mighty in strength and 
wisdom, yet they can not in any wise be compared to the, Son 
of God. He is Creator, they are His creatures, dependent upon 
Him for life and power and wisdom — yes, for all things. To 
say that they are a lower order of being does not degrade them, 
but it exalts Christ. 

“The angels were sinless, but of less value than the law 
of God. They were amenable to law. They were messengers 
to do the will of Christ, and before Him to bow. They were 
created beings and probationers.”— S. P., Vol. 2, p. 10. 

Each order of being, in the universe is perfect in its own 
sphere. The good angels are perfect, and man when created 
was perfect also, yet he was a “little lower than the angels” in 
order of being. Each order has the power of development within 
its own sphere and order, but no amount of development will 
ever make a created being the equal of the Creator. It is reason¬ 
able that angels, as well as man, should worship the Son who was 
associated with the Father in their creation. This they do. 
Heb. 1: 6. 


18 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 


274 



“The ang^el of the Lord encampeth round about lliem that fear Him, and 
delivereth them.” 








275 


We can not imagine the might and power of any spiritual 
being. However, the Bible gives us some examples of the power 
of the angels, and the prophets have attempted to describe their 
glorious appearance. 2 Kings 19: 35; Luke 1: 18-20; Matt. 
28: 2-4; Mark 16: 1-8; Luke 24: 3-7; Eze. 1: 14. 

2. There are different orders, or classes of angels. Two are 
mentioned in the Bible. These are the cherubim and the sera¬ 
phim. There may be others of which we do not know. All is 
order in heaven. Each angel has his special work to do as the 
servant of God to execute His will in all places of His dominion. 

3. When the prophets saw the hosts of angels, they could 
not count them. We could not have comprehended the number 
if the prophets had expressed it. How vast is the universe of 
God! How countless must be the messengers that go to its 
farthest limits and return “like the appearance of a flash of 
lightning.” 

4. “The Bible shows us God in His high and holy place, not 
in a state of inactivity, not in silence and solitude, but sur¬ 
rounded by ten thousand times ten thousand and thousands of 
thousands of holy beings, all waiting to do His will. Through 
these messengers He is in active communication with every part 
of His dominion. By His Spirit He is everywhere present. 
Through the agency of His Spirit and His angels. He ministers 
to the children of men. Above the distractions of the earth He 
sits enthroned; all things are open to His divine survey; and 
from His great and calm eternity He orders that which His 
providence sees best.”— M. H., p. ^17. 

“All the blessings from God to man are through the minis¬ 
tration of holy angels.”— S. P., VoL 2, p. 68. 

“Angels are God’s ministers, radiant with the light ever 
flowing from His presence, and speeding on rapid wing to execute 
His will. But the Son . . . holds supremacy over them all.” 
— P. P., p. 3U- 

“Before the creation of man, angels were in existence; for 
when the foundations of the earth were laid, The morning stars 


276 


sang together, and all the sons of God shouted for joy/ After 
the fall of man, angels were sent to guard the tree of life, and 
this before a human being had died. Angels are in nature 
superior to men; for the psalmist says that man was made 'a 
little lower than the angels.' ... In the presence chamber of 
the King of kings they wait—'angels, that excel in strength,’ 
‘ministers of His, that do His pleasure,’ ‘hearkening unto the 
voice of His word.’”— G. C., pp, 511, 512. 

5. Isaiah and Ezekiel both had visions of the throne of God 
in heaven. There they saw the angels round about the throne, 
and a number of wheels, all seemingly in a. state of confusion 
to the bewildered minds of the prophets, but evidently directed 
by the hand of God. 

“This lesson is taught in a wonderful symbolic representa¬ 
tion given to the prophet Ezekiel during his exile in the land of 
the Chaldeans. The vision was given at a time when Ezekiel 
was weighed down with sorrowful memories and troubled fore¬ 
bodings. The land of his fathers was desolate. Jerusalem was 
depopulated. The prophet himself was a stranger in a land where 
ambition and cruelty reigned supreme. As on every hand he 
beheld tyranny and wrong, his soul was distressed, and he 
mourned day and night. But the symbols presented to him 
revealed a power above that of earthly rulers. 

“Upon the banks of the river Chebar, Ezekiel beheld a whirl¬ 
wind seeming to come from the north, ‘a great cloud, and a fire 
infolding itself, and a brightness was about it, and out of the 
midst thereof as the color of amber.’ A number of wheels, in¬ 
tersecting one another, were moved by four living beings. High 
above all these was the ‘likeness of a throne, as the appearance 
of a sapphire stone; and upon the likeness of the throne was the 
likeness as the appearance of a man above upon it.’ ‘And there 
appeared in the cherubim the form of a man’s hand under their 
wings.’ The wheels were so complicated in arrangement that 
at first sight they appeared to be in confusion; but they moved 


277 


in perfect harmony. Heavenly beings, sustained and guided by 
the hand beneath the wings of the cherubim, were impelling 
these wheels; above them, upon the sapphire throne, was the 
Eternal One; and round about the throne a rainbow, the em¬ 
blem of divine mercy. 

“As the wheel-like complications were under the guidance of 
the hand beneath the wings of the cherubim, so the complicated 
play of human events is under divine control. Amidst the strife 
and tumult of nations. He that sitteth above the cherubim still 
guides the affairs of the. earth.”— Ed., pp. 177, 178. 

“Before the entrance of evil, there was peace and joy through¬ 
out the universe. All was in perfect harmony with the Creator’s 
will. Love for God was supreme, love for one another impartial. 
Christ the Word, the only-begotten of God, was one with the 
eternal Father,— one in nature, in character, and in purpose,— 
the only being in all the universe that could enter into all the 
counsels and purposes of God. By Christ, the Father wrought 
in the creation of all heavenly beings, . . . and to Christ, equally 
with the Father, all heaven gave allegiance.”— G. C., p. U9S. 


LXXXIX. LUCIFER (SATAN) 


1. Name 

Isa. 14: 12. Lucifer was the day-star; the “light bearer.” 

2. Nature 

Eze. 28: 12, 15. Lucifer was perfect when created. 

3. Position 

Eze. 28: 13, 14. Lucifer w^as a covering cherub. 

4. Sin 

Isa. 14: 13, 14. Lucifer coveted a higher position. 

Eze. 28: 5-9, 16, 17. Lucifer wished to be God. 



278 


5. Rebellion in Heaven 

Rev. 12: 4. One third of the angels became rebels with Lucifer. 
Jude 6. The rebellious angels left their positions. 

Rev. 12: 7. Satan and his angels fought for possession of 
heaven. 


6. Fall from Heaven 

Rev. 12: 8, 9. Satan and his angels were cast out of heaven. 
2 Peter 2:4. Satan and his angels are reserved unto judg¬ 
ment. 

Rev. 12: 9; Satan and his angels were cast out into the 
Luke 10: 18. earth. 


Readings 

Matt. 12: 24-30 Rom. 16: 20 S. P., Vol. I, Chap. I 

Ps. 109: 6 1 John 3:8 G. C., Chap. XXIX 

Zech. 3: 1-3 John 8: 44 P. P., Chap. I 

James 4:7 

Notes 

1. “It is impossible to explain the origin of sin so as to give 
a reason for its existence. Yet enough may be understood con¬ 
cerning both the origin and the final disposition of sin, to make 
fully manifest the justice and benevolence of God in all His 
dealings with evil. Nothing is more plainly taught in Scripture 
than that God was in no wise responsible for the entrance of 
sin. . . . Sin is an intruder, for whose presence no reason can 
be given. It is mysterious, unaccountable; to excuse it is to 
defend it. Could excuse for it be found, or cause be shown for 
its existence, it would cease to be sin. . . . 

2. “Sin originated with him who, next to Christ, had been 
most honored of God, and who stood highest in power and glory 
among the inhabitants of heaven. Before his fall, Lucifer was 
first of the covering cherubs, holy and undefiled.”— G, C., pp, 
4-92-^H, 

3. “He stood in the presence of the great Creator, and the 
ceaseless beams of glory enshrouding the eternal God, rested upon 

him. . . . 


279 


4. ‘‘Little by little, Lucifer came to indulge the desire for 
self-exaltation. . . . Though all his glory was from God, this 
mighty angel came to regard it as pertaining to himself. Not 
content with his position, though honored above the heavenly host, 
he ventured to covet homage due alone to the Creator. Instead 
of seeking to make God supreme in the affections and allegiance 
of all created beings, it was his endeavor to secure their service 
and loyalty to himself. And coveting the glory with which the 
infinite Father had invested His Son, this prince of angels as¬ 
pired to power that was the prerogative of Christ alone. . . . 

“In heavenly council the angels pleaded with Lucifer. The 
Son of God presented before him the greatness, the goodness, and 
the justice of the Creator, and the sacred, unchanging nature 
of His law. . . . Before the assembled inhabitants of heaven, 
the King declared that none but Christ, the only-begotten of 
God, could fully enter into His purposes, and to Him it was 
committed to execute the mighty counsels of His will. The Son 
of God had wrought the Father’s will in the creation of all the 
hosts of heaven; and to Him, as well as to God, their homage 
and allegiance were due. Christ was still to exercise divine 
power, in the creation of the earth and its inhabitants. '. . . 

“The angels joyfully acknowledged the supremacy of Christ, 
and prostrating themselves before Him, poured out their love 
and adoration. Lucifer bowed with them; but in his heart there 
was a strange, fierce conflict. Truth, justice, and loyalty were 
struggling against envy and jealousy. The influence of the holy 
angels seemed for a time to carry him with them. As songs of 
praise ascended in melodious strains, swelled by thousands of 
glad voices, the spirit of evil seemed vanquished; unutterable 
love thrilled his entire being; his soul went out, in harmony with 
the sinless worshipers, in love to the Father and the Son. 

“But again he was filled with pride in his own glory. His 
desire for supremacy returned, and envy of Christ was once more 
indulged. . . . 


280 


5. “Leaving his place in the immediate presence of the Father, 
Lucifer went forth to diffuse the spirit of discontent among the 
angels. He worked with mysterious secrecy, and for a time 
concealed his real purpose under an appearance of reverence for 
God. He began to insinuate doubts concerning the laws that 
governed heavenly beings, intimating that though laws might 
be necessary for the inhabitants of the worlds, angels, being more 
exalted, needed no sucn restraint, for their own wisdom was a 
sufficient guide. They were not beings that could bring dishonor 
to God; all their thoughts were holy; it was no more possible 
for them than for God Himself to err. 

“The exaltation of the Son of God as equal with the Father 
was represented as an injustice to Lucifer, who, it was claimed, 
was also entitled to reverence and honor. If this prince of angels 
could but attain to his true, exalted position, great good would 
accrue to the entire host of heaven; for it was his object to secure 
freedom for all. But now even the liberty which they had 
hitherto enjoyed was at an end; for an absolute ruler had been 
appointed them, and to His authority all must pay homage. Such 
.were the subtle deceptions that through the wiles of Lucifer were 
fast obtaining in the heavenly courts. . . . 

“In great mercy, according to His divine character, God bore 
long with Lucifer. The spirit of discontent and disaffection had 
never before been known in heaven. It was a new element, 
strange, mysterious, unaccountable. . . . The time had come for 
a final decision; he must fully yield’to the divine sovereignty, 
or place himself in open rebellion. He nearly reached the de¬ 
cision to return; but pride forbade him. It was too great a sac¬ 
rifice for one who had been so highly honored to confess that 
he had been in error, that his imaginings were false, and to 
yield to the authority which he had been working to prove 
unjust. ... 

“He persistently defended his own course, and fully committed 
himself to the great controversy against his Maker. Thus it 
was that Lucifer, ‘the light bearer,’ the sharer of God’s glory. 


281 


the attendant of His throne, by transgression became Satan, ^the 
adversary’ of God and holy beings, and the destroyer of those 
whom Heaven had committed to his guidance and guardian¬ 
ship. . . . 

“God could employ only such means as were consistent with 
truth and righteousness. Satan could use what God could not,— 
flattery and deceit. He had sought to falsify the word of God, 
and had misrepresented His plan of government, claiming that 
God was not just in imposing laws upon the angels; that in re¬ 
quiring submission and obedience from His creatures. He was 
seeking merely the exaltation of Himself. 

“It was therefore necessary to demonstrate before the in¬ 
habitants of heaven, and of all the worlds, that God’s govern¬ 
ment is just. His law perfect. Satan had made it appear that 
he himself was seeking to promote the good of the universe. The 
true character of the usurper, and his real object, must be 
understood by all. He must have time to manifest himself by 
his wicked works. ... 

6. “Even when he was cast out of heaven. Infinite Wisdom 
did not destroy Satan. Since only the service of love can be ac¬ 
ceptable to God, the allegiance of His creatures must rest upon 
a conviction of His justice and benevolence. The inhabitants of 
heaven and of the worlds, being unprepared to comprehend the 
nature or consequences of sin, could not then have seen the 
justice of God in the destruction of Satan. 

“Had he been immediately blotted out of existence, some 
would have served God from fear rather than from love. The 
influence of the deceiver would not have been fully destroyed, 
nor would the spirit of rebellion have been utterly eradicated. 
For the good of the entire universe through ceaseless ages, he 
must more fully develop his principles, that his charges against 
the divine government might be seen in their true light by all 
created beings, and that the justice and mercy of God and the 
immutability of His law might be forever placed beyond all 
question.”— P. P., pp. 35-4^2. 


282 


XC. CREATION 


1. Creator 

Ps. 33: 6, 9. God created all things by His word. 

John 1: 1-3. Christ is the Word, and by Him all things were 
created. 

2. When 

Gen. 1: 1,2. The heavens and the earth were created ''in the 
beginning.” 

3. How Understood 

Heb. 11:3. We understand creation by faith. 

4. The Power of God 
All things are upheld by the power of God. 

The work of creation occupied six days. 

On the first day light was created. 

On the second day air was created. 

On the third day plants were created. 

On the fourth day sun, moon, and stars were 
created. 

On the fifth day air animals and water animals 
were created. 

On the sixth day land animals and man were 
created. 

6. Purpose 

Isa. 45: 18. The earth was made to be inhabited. 

Rev. 4: 11. All things were created for the pleasure of God. 

7. Nature Reveals God 

Rom. 1: 20. The works of God reveal the Godhead,— the 
Deity. 


Col. 1: 16,17; 
Heb. 1: 3. 

5. Time 

Ex. 20: 11 
Gen. 1: 3-5 
Gen. 1: 6-8. 
Gen. 1: 9-13. 
Gen. 1: 14-19. 

Gen. 1: 20-23. 

Gen. 1: 24-28. 


283 

Headings 

Psalm 104 Job 38-41 P. P., Chap. II 

Test., Vol. VIII, pp. 258, 259 

Notes 

1. “Every manifestation of creative power is an expression 
of infinite love. The sovereignty of God involves fullness of 
blessing to all created beings. . . . 

“The Sovereign of the universe was not alone in His work 
of beneficence. He had an associate,— a coworker who could 
appreciate His purposes, and could share His joy in giving hap¬ 
piness to created beings. Tn the beginning was the Word, and 
the Word was with God, and the Word was God. The same was 
in the beginning with God.' Christ, the Word, the only-begotten 
of God, was one with the eternal Father,— one in nature, in 
character, in purpose,— the only being that could enter into all 
the counsels and purposes of God. . . . 

“The Father wrought by His Son in the creation of all 
heavenly beings. . . . Christ was still to exercise divine power 
in the creation of the earth and its inhabitants.”— P. P., pp. 33-36. 

“In the creation of the earth, God was not indebted to pre¬ 
existing matter. ‘He spake, and it was; ... He commanded, 
and it stood fast.' All things, material or spiritual, stood up 
before the Lord Jehovah at His voice, and were created for His 
own purpose. The heavens and all the host of them, the earth 
and all things therein, came into existence by the breath of His 
mouth.''— M. H., pp. UlUy U13. 

3. “The work of creation can not be explained by science. 
What science can explain the mystery of life?''— M. H., p. 

“There is a constant effort made to explain the work of 
creation as the result of natural causes. . . . ‘The secret things 
belong unto the Lord our God; but those things which are re¬ 
vealed belong unto us and to our children forever.' Just how 
God accomplished the work of creation He has never revealed to 


2S4 


men; human science can not search out the secrets of the Most 
High. His creative power is as incomprehensible as His ex¬ 
istence. ... ' , . 

4. ‘‘Neh. 9:6. As regards this world, God’s work of creation 
is completed. For ‘the works were finished from the founda¬ 
tion of the world.’ But His energy is still exerted in upholding 
the objects of His creation.”— P. P., pp. 113-115. 

“God is constantly employed in upholding and using as His 
servants the things that He has made. He works through the 
laws of nature, using them as His instruments. They are not 
self-acting. Nature in her work testifies of the intelligent pres¬ 
ence and active agency of a Being who moves in all things ac¬ 
cording to His will. ... 

“It is not by inherent power that year by year the earth yields 
its bounties, and continues its march around the sun. The hand 
of the Infinite One is perpetually at work guiding this planet. 
It is God’s power continually exercised that keeps the earth in 
position in its rotation. It is God who causes the sun to rise 
in the heavens. He opens the windows of heaven and gives rain. 
. . . It is by His power that vegetation is caused to flourish, 
that every leaf appears, every flower blooms, every fruit 
develops. 

“The mechanism of the human body can not be fully under¬ 
stood; it presents mysteries that baffle the most intelligent. It 
is not as the result of a mechanism, which, once set in motion, 
continues its work, that the pulse beats, and breath follows 
breath. In God we live and move and have our being. The 
beating heart, the throbbing pulse, every nerve and muscle in 
the living organism, is kept in order and activity by the power 
of an ever present God.”— M. H., pp. JflG, 1^17. 

5. “Like the Sabbath, the week originated at creation, and 
it has been preserved and brought down to us through Bible 
history. God Himself measured off the first week as a sample 
for successive weeks to the close of time. Like every other, it 


285 


consisted of seven literal days. Six days were employed in the 
work of creation; upon the seventh, God rested, and He then 
blessed this day, and set it apart as a day of rest for man. . . . 

“Of each successive day of creation, the sacred record de¬ 
clares that it consisted of the evening and the morning, like 
all other days that have followed. At the close of each day ^is 
given the result of the Creator’s work. The statement is made 
at the close of the first week’s record, ‘These are the genera¬ 
tions of the heavens and of the earth when they were created.’ 
But this does not convey the idea that the days of creatron were 
other than literal days. Each day was called a generation, be¬ 
cause that in it God generated, or produced, some new ^ portion 
of His work.”— P. P., pj). 111, 112. 

“In the creation of man was manifest the agency of a per¬ 
sonal God. When God had made man in His image, the human 
form was perfect in all its arrangements, but it was without life. 
Then a personal, self-existing God breathed into that form the 
breath of life, and man became a living, intelligent being. All 
parts of the human organism were set in action. The heart, the 
arteries, the veins, the tongue, the hands, the feet, the senses, 
the faculties of the mind, all began their work, and all were 
placed under law. Man became a living soul. Through Christ 
the Word, a personal God created man, and endowed him with 
intelligence and power. 

“Our substance was not hid from Him when we were made 
in secret; His eyes saw our substance, yet being imperfect, and 
in His book all our members were written, when as yet there 
were none of them. 

“Above all lower orders of being, God designed that man, the 
crowning work of His creation, should express His thought and 
reveal His glory. But man is not to exalt himself as God.”— 
M. H., p. U5. 

6. “God created the earth to be the abode of holy, happy 
beings. . . . That purpose will be fulfilled, when, renewed by 


286 


the power of God, and freed from sin and sorrow, it shall become 
the eternal abode of the redeemed/'—P. P., p, 67. 

7. “Upon all created things is seen the impress of the Deity. 
Nature testifies of God."— Ed., p. 99. 

“The mighty power that works through all nature and sus¬ 
tains all things is not, as some men of science represent, merely 
an all-pervading principle, an actuating energy. God is a spirit, 
yet He is a personal being; for so He has revealed Himself. . . . 

“God’s handiwork in nature is not God Himself in nature. 
The things of nature are an expression of God’s character and 
power; but we are not to regard nature as God. The artistic 
skill of human beings produces very beautiful workmanship, 
things that delight the eye, and these things reveal to us some¬ 
thing of the thought of the designer; but the thing made is not 
the maker. It is not the work, but the workman, that is counted 
worthy of honor. So while nature is an expression of God’s 
thought, it is not nature, but the God of nature, that is to be 
exalted.’’— M. H., p. 413. 

“Next to the Bible, nature is to be our great lesson book. 
But there is no virtue in deifying nature, for this is exalting the 
thing made above the great Master Builder who designed the 
work, and who every hour keeps it operating according to His 
appointment. . . . 

“The Lord does not work through His laws to supersede the 
laws of nature. He does His work through the laws and prop¬ 
erties of His instruments, and nature obeys a Thus saith the 
Lord.’ 

“The God of nature is perpetually at work. His infinite 
power works unseen, but manifestations appear in the effects 
which the work produces. The same God who guides the planets 
works in the fruit orchard and in the vegetable garden. He 
never made a thorn, a thistle, or a tare. These are Satan’s 
work, the result of degeneration, introduced by him among the 
precious things; but it is through God’s immediate agency that 


287 


every bud bursts into blossom. When He was in the world in 
the form of humanity, Christ said, ‘My Father worketh hitherto, 
and I work.’ John 5: 17. So when the students employ their 
time and strength in agricultural work, in heaven it is said 
of them. Ye ‘are laborers together with God.’ 1 Cor. 3: 9.”— 
Test., Vol. 6, pp. 185-187. 


XCL THE SABBATH 


1. Institution 

Gen. 2: 1-3. God rested on the seventh day, blessed it, and 
sanctified it. 

2. Memorial 

Ex. 20:11. The Sabbath is a memorial of creation. 

3. Purpose 

Eze. 20: 12, 20. The Sabbath is a sign that we know God who 
sanctifies us. 

Mark 2: 27, 28. The Sabbath was made for man. 


4. Observance 
Lev. 23: 32. 

Ex. 20: 8-11 

Isa. 58: 13. 

Isa. 56: 2. 
Matt. 12: 12. 


The Sabbath should be celebrated from evening 
to evening. 

We should keep the Sabbath holy, and not do 
our own work. 

We should call the Sabbath a delight, and not 
do our own pleasure. 

He who keeps the Sabbath is blessed. 

It is lawful to do well on the Sabbath. 


5. A Seal 

Isa. 8:16; The seal of the law is in the fourth com- 
Ex. 20: 10,11. mandment. 



288 


Readings 


Ex. 16: 22-30 
2 Chron. 36: 21 
Neh. 9: 13, 14; 10: 

31; 13: 15-22 
Eze. 46: 1 


Isa. 56: 1-7; 58: 

13, 14; 66: 23 
Amos 8: 5 
Matt. 28: 1 
Mark 16: 1 


Luke 13: 10-16 
P. P., pp. 47-49, 307, 336 
Test., Vol. VI, pp. 349-368 
Test., Vol. VIII, pp. 197-199 
Ed., pp. 250-252 


Notes 

1. “The great Jehovah had laid the foundations of the earth; 
He had dressed the whole world in the garb of beauty, and had 
filled it with things useful to man; He had created all the won¬ 
ders of the land and of the sea. In six days the great work of 
creation had been accomplished. . . . God looked with satisfac¬ 
tion upon the work of His hands. All was perfect, worthy of 
its divine Author, and He rested, not as one weary, but as well 
pleased with the fruits of His wisdom and goodness and the 
manifestations of His glory. 

2. “After resting upon the seventh day, God sanctified it, or 
set it apart, as a day of rest for man. Following the example 
of the Creator, man was to rest upon this sacred day, that as he 
should look upon the heavens and the earth, he might reflect 
upon God’s great work of creation; and that as he should behold 
the evidences of God’s wisdom and goodness, his heart might be 
filled with love and reverence for his Maker.”— P. P., p. U7. 

“ 'The importance of the Sabbath as a memorial of creation 
is that it keeps ever present the true reason why worship is due 
to God,’—because He is the Creator, and we are His creatures. 
‘The Sabbath, therefore, lies at the very foundation of divine 
worship; for it teaches this great truth in the most impressive 
manner, and no other institution does this. The true ground of 
divine worship, not of that on the seventh day merely, but of all 
worship, is found in the distinction between the Creator and His 
creatures. This great fact can never become obsolete, and must 
never be forgotten.’ 


289 


3. “It was to keep this truth ever before the minds of men, 
that God instituted the Sabbath in Eden; and so long as the 
fact that He is our Creator continues to be a reason why we 
should worship Him, so long the Sabbath will continue as its 
sign and memorial. Had the Sabbath been universally kept, 
man’s thoughts and affections would have been led to the Creator 
as the object of reverence and worship, and there would never 
have been an idolater, an atheist, or an infidel. The keeping of 
the Sabbath is a sign of loyalty to the true God.”— G. C,, pp. 
A37, U38. 

“The Sabbath is a sign of Christ’s power to make us holy. 
And it is given to all whom Christ makes holy. As a sign of 
His sanctifying power, the Sabbath is given to all who through 
Christ become a part of the Israel of God.”—D. A., p. 288. 

“In Eden, God set up the memorial of His work of creation, 
in placing His blessing upon the seventh day. The Sabbath was 
committed to Adam, the father and representative of the whole 
human family. Its observance was to be an act of grateful ac¬ 
knowledgment, on the part of all who should dwell upon the 
earth, that God was their Creator and their rightful sovereign; 
that they were the work of His hands, and the subjects of His 
authority. Thus the institution was wholly commemorative, and 
given to all mankind. There was nothing in it shadowy, or of 
restricted application to any people. 

“God saw that a Sabbath was essential for man, even in 
Paradise. He needed to lay aside his own interests and pursuits 
for one day of the seven, that he might more fully contemplate 
the works of God, and meditate upon His power and goodness. 
He needed a Sabbath, to remind him more vividly of God, and 
to awaken gratitude because all that he enjoyed and possessed 
came from the beneficent hand of the Creator. 

4. “God designs that the Sabbath shall direct the mipds of 
men to the contemplation of His created works. Nature speaks 
to their senses, declaring that there is a living God, the Creator, 

19 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 


290 


the Supreme Ruler of all. The heavens declare the glory of God; 
and the firmament showeth His handiwork. Day unto day ut- 
tereth speech, and night unto night showeth knowledge.’ The 
beauty that clothes the earth is a token of God’s love. We may 
behold it in the everlasting hills, in the lofty trees, in the opening 
buds and the delicate flowers. All speak to us of God. The 
Sabbath, ever pointing to Him who made them all, bids men 
open the great book of nature, and trace therein the wisdom, the 
power, and the love of the Creator.”— P. P., p. A8. 

“Nature must continue her unvarying course [on the Sabbath]. 
God could not for a moment stay His hand, or man would faint 
and die. And man also has a work to perform on this day. The 
necessities of life must be attended to, the sick must be cared 
for, the wants of the needy must be supplied. He will not be 
held guiltless who neglects to relieve suffering on the Sabbath. 
. . . The Sabbath is not intended to be a period of useless in¬ 
activity. The law forbids secular labor on the rest day of the 
Lord; the toil that gains a livelihood must cease; no labor for 
worldly pleasure or profit is lawful upon that day; but as God 
ceased His labor of creating, and rested upon the Sabbath and 
blessed it, so man is to leave the occupations of his daily life, and 
devote those sacred hours to healthful rest, to worship, and to 
holy deeds.”— D. A., p. 207, 

“God gave to men the memorial of His creative power, that 
they might discern Him in the works of His hand. The Sab¬ 
bath bids us behold in His created works the glory of the Cre¬ 
ator. ... On the holy rest day, above all other days, we should 
study the messages that God has written for us in nature. We 
should study the Saviour’s parables where He spoke them, in 
the fields and groves, under the open sky, among the grass and 
flowers. As we come close to the heart of nature, Christ makes 
His presence real to us, and speaks to our hearts of His peace 
and love.”— C. 0. L., pp, 25, 26. 

5. “The seal of God’s law is found in the fourth command¬ 
ment. This only, of all the ten, brings to view both the name 


291 


and the title of the Lawgiver. It declares Him to be the Creator 
of the heavens and the earth, and thus shows His claim to rev¬ 
erence and worship above all others. Aside from this precept, 
there is nothing in the decalogue to show by whose authority 
the law is given.”— G. C., p. J/-52. 


XCII. THE FALL OF MAN 


Man was made in the image of God. 
Man was made upright. 

Man was a son of God. 


Man had dominion over the whole earth. 


Man was tested as to his obedience and love. 


1. Nature 
Gen. 1: 26, 27. 

Eccl. 7: 29. 

Luke 3: 38. 

2. Dominion 
Gen. 1:28; 

Ps. 8: 4-8. 

3. Power of Choice 

Gen. 2 : 16, 17. 

4. The Tempter 

Gen. 3: 1. Satan used the serpent as a medium. 

5. The Temptation 

Gen. 3: 2-4. Satan denied the word of God. 

Gen. 3: 5. Satan promised man that he should be as God. 

Gen. 3:6; Eve was tempted by appetite, pleasure, and 

1 John 2: 16. pride. 

6. Results of Sin 

Gen. 3:7-11. Nakedness, shame, dread, and fear. 

Rom. 5:12; 4 . 1 , i n 

6 * 23 Death passed upon all men. 

Rom. 6: 16. Man became a servant of Satan. 

2 Cor. 4:4; 

John 12: 31. 

Job 1: 6. Satan represented this world in the council of 
the sons of God. 


Satan became the “god of this world.” 



292 


Eeadings 

John 14: 30; 16: 11 
1 Tim. 2: 13-15 


Rom. 5': 12-19 
P. P., Chap. Ill 


Notes 


1. “Man was to bear God's image, both in outward resem¬ 
blance and in character. . . . 

“God made man upright; He gave him noble traits of char¬ 
acter, with no bias toward evil. He endowed him with high 
intellectual powers, and presented before him the strongest pos¬ 
sible inducements to be true to his allegiance. Obedience, per¬ 
fect and perpetual, was the condition of eternal happiness. On 
this condition he was to have access to the tree of life. . . . 

“So long as they remained loyal to the divine law, their 
capacity to know, to enjoy, and to love, would continually in¬ 
crease. They would be constantly gaining new treasures of 
knowledge, discovering fresh springs of happiness, and ob¬ 
taining clearer and yet clearer conceptions of the immeasurable, 
unfailing love of God." 

2. “While they remained true to God, Adam and his com¬ 
panion were to bear rule over the earth. Unlimited control was 
given them over every living thing. . . . 

3. “Like the angels, the dwellers in Eden had been placed 
upon probation; their happy estate could be retained only on 
condition of fidelity to the Creator's law. They could obey and 
live, or disobey and perish. . . . 

“The tree of knowledge had been made a test of their obedi¬ 
ence and their love to God." 

“God placed man under law, as an indispensable condition of 
his very existence. He was a subject of the divine government, 
and there can be no government without law. God might have 
created man without the power to transgress His law; He might 
have withheld the hand of Adam from touching the forbidden 
fruit; but in that case man would have been not a free moral 


293 


agent, but a mere automaton. Without freedom of choice, his 
obedience would not have been voluntary, but forced. There 
could have been no development of character. Such a course 
would have been contrary to God’s plan in dealing with the 
inhabitants of other worlds. It would have been unworthy of 
man as an intelligent being, and would have sustained Satan’s 
charge of God’s arbitrary rule. . . . 

4. 'Tn order to accomplish his work unperceived, Satan chose 
to employ as his medium the serpent,— a disguise well adapted 
for his purpose of deception. The serpent was then one of the 
wisest and most beautiful creatures on the earth. ... 

5. “Had she been addressed by a being like the angels, her 
fears would have been excited; but she had no thought that 
the fascinating serpent could become the medium of the fallen 
foe. . . . 

“By partaking of this tree, he declared, they would attain 
to a more exalted sphere of existence, and enter a broader field 
of knowledge. He himself had eaten of the forbiddefi fruit, and 
as a result had acquired the power of speech. And he insinuated 
that the Lord jealously desired to withhold it from them, lest 
they should be exalted to equality with Himself. It was because 
of its wonderful properties, imparting wisdom and power, that 
He had prohibited them from tasting or even touching it. The 
tempter intimated that the divine warning was not to be actually 
fulfilled; it was designed merely to intimidate them. How could 
it be possible for them to die? Had they not eaten of the tree 
of life? God had been seeking to prevent them from reaching 
a nobler development, and finding greater happiness-. . . . 

“Eve really believed the words of Satan, but her belief did 
not save her from the penalty of sin. She disbelieved the words 
of God, and this was what led to her fall. In the Judgment, 
men will not be condemned because they conscientiously believed 
a lie, but because they did not believe the truth, because they 
neglected the opportunity of learning what is truth. . . . 


294 

Whatever contradicts God’s word, we may be sure proceeds 
from Satan. . . . 

6. “After his transgression, Adam at first imagined himself 
entering upon a higher state of existence. But soon the thought 
of his sin filled him with terror. The air, which had hitherto 
been of a mild and uniform temperature, seemed to chill the 
guilty pair. The love and peace which had been theirs was gone, 
and in its place they felt a sense of sin, a dread of the future, 
a nakedness of soul. The robe of light which had enshrouded 
them, now disappeared. . . . From that time the race would 
be afflicted by Satan’s temptations. Instead of the happy labor 
heretofore appointed them, anxiety and toil were to be their lot. 
They would be subject to disappointment, grief, and pain, and 
finally to death. 

“Under the curse of sin, all nature was to witness to man 
of the character and results of rebellion against God. ... So 
long as Adam remained loyal to Heaven, all nature was in sub¬ 
jection to him. But when he rebelled against the divine law, 
the inferior creatures were in rebellion against his rule. . . . 

“The warning given to our first parents—Tn the day that 
thou eatest thereof thou shalt surely die’—did not imply that 
they were to die on the very day when they partook of the for¬ 
bidden fruit. But on that day the irrevocable sentence would be 
pronounced. Immortality was promised them on condition of 
obedience; by transgression they would forfeit eternal life. That 
very day they would be doomed to death. 

“In order to possess an endless existence, man must continue 
to partake of the tree of life. Deprived of this, his vitality would 
gradually diminish until life should become extinct. . . . After 
man’s fall, holy angels were immediately commissioned to guard 
the tree of life. . . . None of the family of Adam were per¬ 
mitted to pass that barrier to partake of the life-giving fruit; 
hence there is not an immortal sinner.”— P. P., pp, 45-60. 

“After tempting man to sin, Satan claimed the earth as his, 


295 





“So He drove out the man; and He placed . . . cherubims, and a flaming 
sword, ... to keep the way of the tree of life," 




































296 


and styled himself the prince of this world. Having conformed 
to his own nature the father and mother of our race, he thought 
to establish here his empire. He declared that men had chosen 
him as their sovereign. Through his control of men, he held 
dominion over the world.^'— D. A., p. 11^, 


XCIII. REDEMPTION 

1. God's Covenant with Man 

Gen. 3: 15. God promised to put enmity between man and 
Satan; to destroy sin. 

John 3: 16. God fulfilled this covenant. 

2. Sold under Sin 

Rom. 7: 14,15. Man is a slave. It is impossible for him to 
obey the law of God. 

3. Redeemed (Bought Back) 

1 Cor. 6: 20. We are not our own. 

1 Peter 1: 18, 19. We have been bought by the blood of Christ. 
Gal. 3: 13; 4: 5. We are redeemed from condemnation of the 
law to become sons of God. 

4. Reconciled 

Rom. 5:10,11 We are reconciled by the death of Christ; 
(margin). saved by His life. 

5. The Dominion Redeemed 

Micah 4: 8. Christ also redeemed the lost dominion. 

6. The Angels' Part 

Heb. 1: 13,14; The angels have a part in the work of 
Ps. 34: 7. redemption. 

Matt. 18: 10. Each child of God has a guardian angel. 



297 


Readingfs 


2 Cor. 5: 18-21 
1 Tim. 2: 5, 6 
Titus 2: 14 
Ps. 37: 29 


Rev. 22 : 3 Luke 1: 68 

Acts 12: 15 Ps. 19: 14 
Rom. 6: 16 Job 1: 6-12 


2 Peter 2: 19 P. P., Chaps. IV, XXXII 
G. C., Chap. XXX 


Notes 


1. Sin so changed the nature of man that he loved sin. He 
had no desire to be freed from its power. God said, 'T will put 
enmity.” This He did by giving a measure of the Spirit of 
God to man. This makes it possible for a sinner to choose to 
do God’s will. Every good impulse, every desire for purity and 
truth, every effort to do right, is the result of the work of the 
Spirit. 

God also promised that the seed of the woman should bruise 
the serpent’s head. The seed is Christ. By His death He “de¬ 
stroyed him that had the power of death, that is, the devil.” 

“The covenant of grace was first made with man in Eden, 
when after the fall, there was given a divine promise that the 
seed of the woman should bruise the serpent’s head. To all 
men this covenant offered pardon, and the assisting grace of 
God for future obedience through faith in Christ. It also prom¬ 
ised them eternal life on condition of fidelity to God’s law. . . . 

“Though this covenant was made with Adam and renewed to 
Abraham, it could not be ratified until the death of Christ. . . . 
The law of God was the basis of this covenant, which was simply 
an arrangement for bringing them again into harmony with the 
divine will, placing them where they could obey God’s law.”— 
P, P., pp. 370, 371, 

“The fall of man filled all heaven with sorrow. . . . There 
appeared no escape for those who had transgressed the law. An¬ 
gels ceased their songs of praise. Throughout the heavenly courts 
there was mourning for the ruin that sin had wrought. . . . 


298 


“But divine love had conceived a plan whereby man might 
be redeemed. The broken law of God demanded the life of the 
sinner. In all the universe there was but one who could, in 
behalf of man, satisfy its claims. Since the divine law is as 
sacred as God Himself, only one equal with God could make 
atonement for its transgression. None but Christ could redeem 
fallen man from the curse of the law, and bring him again into 
harmony with Heaven. Christ would take upon Himself the 
guilt and shame of sin,— sin so offensive to a holy God that 
it must separate the Father and His Son. . . . 

2. “The plan of salvation had been laid before the creation 
of the earth; for Christ is ‘the Lamb slain from the foundation 
of the world;’ yet it was a struggle, even with the King of the 
universe, to yield up His Son to die for the guilty race. But 
‘God so loved the world, that He gave— . . .’ 

3. “God was to be manifest in Christ, ‘reconciling the world 
unto Himself.’ Man had become so degraded by sin that it was 
impossible for him, in himself, to come into harmony with Him 
whose nature is purity and goodness. But Christ, after having 
redeemed man from the condemnation of the law, could impart 
divine power to unite with human effort. Thus by repentance 
toward God and faith in Christ, the fallen children of Adam 
might once more become ‘sons of God.’ 

“The plan by which alone man’s salvation could be secured 
involved all heaven in its infinite sacrifice. The angels could 
not rejoice as Christ opened before them the plan of redemp¬ 
tion; for they saw that man’s salvation must cost their loved 
Com_mander unutterable woe. . . . 

4. “Christ assured the angels that by His death He would 
ransom many, and would destroy him who had the power of 
death. He would recover the kingdom which man had lost by 
transgression, and the redeemed were to inherit it with Him, 
and dwell therein forever. Sin and sinners would be blotted 
out, nevermore to disturb the peace of heaven or earth. . . . 


299 


5. ^‘Not only man but the earth had by sin come under the 
power of the wicked one, and was to be restored by the plan of 
redemption. At his creation, Adam was placed in dominion 
over the earth. But by yielding to temptation, he was brought 
under the power of Satan. ‘Of whom a man is overcome, of the 
same is he brought in bondage.’ When man became Satan’s 
captive, the dominion which he held passed to his conqueror. 
Thus Satan became ‘the god of this world.’ He had usurped 
that dominion over the earth which had been originally given to 
Adam. But Christ, by His sacrifice, paying the penalty 'of sin, 
would not only redeem man, but recover the dominion which he 
had forfeited. All that was lost by the first Adam will be re¬ 
stored by the second.” 

6. “The angels prostrated themselves at the feet of their 
Commander, and offered to become a sacrifice for man. But 
an angel’s life could not pay the debt; only He who created man 
had power to redeem him. Yet the angels were to have a part 
to act in the plan of redemption. Christ was to be made ‘a 
little lower than the angels for the suffering of death.’ As He 
should take human nature upon Him, His strength would not 
be equal to theirs, and they were to minister to Him, to strengthen 
and soothe Him under His sufferings. They were also to be 
ministering spirits, sent forth to minister for them who should 
be heirs of salvation. They would guard the subjects of grace 
from the power of evil angels, and from the darkness constantly 
thrown around them.”— P. P., pp. 63-67. 

“A guardian angel is appointed to every follower of Christ. 
These heavenly watchers shield the righteous from the power 
of the wicked one. This Satan himself recognized when he said, 
‘Doth Job fear God for naught? Hast not Thou made a hedge 
about him, and about his house, and about all that he hath on every 
side?’ . . . The angels appointed to minister to the children of 
God have at all times access to His presence.”— G. C., pp. 512, 513. 

“In all ages God has wrought through holy angels for the 
succor and deliverance of His people. Celestial beings haye 


300 


taken an active part in the affairs of men. They have appeared 
clothed in garments that shone as the lightning; they have come 
as men, in the garb of wayfarers. Angels hav6 appeared in 
human form to men of God. They have rested, as if weary, 
under the oaks at noon. They have accepted the hospitalities of 
human homes. They have acted as guides to benighted travelers. 
They have, with their own hands, kindled the fires of the altar. 
They have opened prison doors, and set free the servants of the 
Lord. Clothed with the panoply of heaven, they came to roll 
away the stone from the Saviour’s tomb.”— G. C., p, 631. 


XCIV. CONVERSION 


1. Need of Conversion 

Rom. 3: 10, 23. All have sinned. 

Rom. 8: 7, 8. No one with carnal mind can keep the law 
of God. 

Matt. 18: 2, 3; We can not enter heaven unless we are con- 
John3:3. verted (changed). 

Jer. 13: 23. We can not change our own hearts. 


2. Conviction 

Acts 2: 37, 38. The first step in conversion is conviction of 
sin. 

John 16:7,8. The Holy Spirit convicts (convinces) of sin. 


3. Repentance 

Rom. 2: 4. The goodness of God leads us to repentance. 

2 Cor. 7: 9,10. True repentance is sincere sorrow for sin. 

Acts 3: 19. If we repent, we shall be converted, and our 
sins will be blotted out. 

God desires all to repent, that they may not 
perish. 


2 Peter 3: 9. 



301 


4. Confession 

Prov. 28: 13. He that confesses his sins shall have mercy. 

1 John 1:9. If we confess our sins, God will forgive them. 

5. Results of Conversion 

Eze. 36: 26, 27; The converted heart can keep the law of God, 

Gal. 5: 22, 23. bear the fruit of the Spirit. 

Readings 

Ps. 34: 18; 51 
Isa. 57: 15; 66: 2 
James 5: 16,19, 20 

Notes 

1. All have sinned. It is impossible for one of us, without 
the help of Jesus, to do right. Our hearts are in rebellion against 
God. Our sinful nature is called in the Bible the carnal mind, 
the old man, and the natural man. Our hearts must be changed, 
or we can never be the children of God, never see the kingdom 
of heaven. This change that is so necessary is called conversion, 
or being “born again.'' “Convert" is from a Latin word which 
means to “turn about." 

2. The first step in conversion is conviction of sin. On the 
day of Pentecost, the people were “pricked in their hearts"— 
which means they were convinced that they were sinners. The 
Holy Spirit enlightened their minds so that they realized how 
sinful they were. Only the Spirit of God can make us know 
what sin is, and cause us to wish to be free from it. 

3. “Repentance includes sorrow for sin, and a turning away 
from it. We shall not renounce sin unless we see its sinfulness; 
until we turn away from it in heart, there will be no real 
change in the life. 

“There are many who fail to understand the true nature of 
repentance. Multitudes sorrow that they have sinned, and even 


Rom. 6: 6 
Eph. 4: 22 
Col. 3: 9 

S. C., Chaps. I-V 


1 Cor. 2: 14 

2 Cor. 7: 8-11; 

5: 17 


302 



“Behold, I stand 


at the door.” 











303 


make an outward reformation, because they fear that their 
wrongdoing will bring suffering upon themselves. But this is 
not repentance in the Bible sense. ... 

'‘The prayer of David after his fall, illustrates the nature of 
true sorrow for sin. His repentance was sincere and deep. There 
was no effort to palliate his guilt; no desire to escape the judg¬ 
ment threatened, inspired his prayer. David saw the enormity 
of his transgression; he saw the defilement of his soul; he loathed 
his sin. It was not for pardon only that he prayed, but for 
purity of heart. He longed for the joy of holiness,— to be re¬ 
stored to harmony and communion with God. . . . 

“Christ is the source of every right impulse. . . . Christ 
must be revealed to the sinner as the Saviour dying for the sins 
of the world; and as we behold the Lamb of God upon the cross 
of Calvary, the mystery of redemption begins to unfold to our 
minds, and the goodness of God leads us to repentance. In 
dying for sinners, Christ manifested a love that is incompre¬ 
hensible; and as the sinner beholds this love, it softens the heart, 
impresses the mind, and inspires contrition [sorrow for sin] in 
the soul. . . . 

“The sinner may resist this love, may refuse to be drawn 
to Christ; but if he does not resist, he will be drawn to Jesus; 
a knowledge of the plan of salvation will lead him to the foot 
of the cross in repentance for his sins, which have caused the 
sufferings of God’s dear Son. . . . 

4. “Confess your sins to God, who only can forgive them, 
and your faults to one another. If you have given offense to 
your friend or neighbor, you are to acknowledge your wrong, 
and it is his duty freely to forgive you. Then you are to seek 
the forgiveness of God, because the brother you have wounded 
is the property of God, and in injuring him you sinned against 
his Creator and Redeemer. . . . 

“If we have not experienced that repentance which is not to 
be repented of, and have not with true humiliation of soul and 


304 


brokenness of spirit confessed our sins, abhorring our iniquity, 
we have never truly sought for the forgiveness of sin; and if we 
have never sought, we have never found the peace of God. . . . 

‘‘Confession of sin, whether public or private, should be heart¬ 
felt and freely expressed. It is not to be urged from the sinner. 
It is not to be made in a flippant and careless way, or forced from 
those who have no realizing sense of the abhorrent character of 
sin. . . . 

“True confession is always of a specific character, and ac¬ 
knowledges particular sins. They may be of such a nature as 
to be brought before God only; they may be wrongs that should 
be confessed to individuals who have suffered injury through 
them; or they may be of a public character, and should then be 
as publicly confessed. But all confession should be definite and 
to the point, acknowledging the very sins of which you are 
guilty. . . . 

5. “Confession will not be acceptable to God without sincere 
repentance and reformation. There must be decided changes 
in the life; everything offensive to God must be put away. This 
will be the result of genuine sorrow for sin. . . . 

“2 Cor. 5: 17. A person may not be able to tell the exact 
time or place, or to trace all the chain of circumstances in the 
process of conversion; but this does not prove him to be un¬ 
converted. . . . 

“While the work of the Spirit is silent and imperceptible, its 
effects are manifest. If the heart has been renewed by the 
Spirit of God, the life will bear witness to the fact. ... A 
change will be seen in the character, the habits, the pursuits. 
The contrast will be clear and decided between what they have 
been and what they are. ... 

“The things they once hated, they now love; and the things 
they once loved, they hate. The proud and self-assertive become 
meek and lowly in heart. The vain and supercilious become 
serious and unobtrusive. The drunken become sober, and the 


305 


profligate pure. The vain customs and fashions of the world are 
laid aside. Christians will seek not the ‘outward adorning/ but 
‘the hidden man of the heart, in that which is not corruptible, 
even the ornament of a meek and quiet spirit.'"— S. C. 


XCV. FAITH AND WORKS 


1. Faith 

Heb. 11: 1. Faith is belief based on God’s word. 

Heb. 11:6. “Without faith it is impossible to please Him.” 

2. How Obtained 

1 Cor. 12: 9. Faith is one of the gifts of the Spirit. 

Rom. 10: 17. Faith comes by hearing the word of God. 
Luke 17: 5. We should pray that our faith may be increased. 


3. Righteousness by Faith 


Rom. 5: 1; 3: 28. 
Phil. 3:9; 

Jer. 23: 6. 

Rom. 1: 16, 17. 

1 John 5: 4. 


We are justified by faith. 

The righteousness of Christ is ours by 
faith. 

“The just shall live by faith.” 

We overcome all temptation by faith. 


4. Works 

James 2: 22. Faith is made perfect by works. 

James 2: 17. Faith without works is dead. 

John 14: 15. We prove our love to God by obedience (works). 
Gal. 6: 9. We must not weary in good works. 

5. Works of Faith 

Hebrews 11. Some things that have been accomplished through 
faith. 


Readings 

1 Cor. 1: 30 Gal. 2:20 D. A., pp. 428, 429, 314, 126, 200 

Rom. 4: 1-8 Ed., pp. 253-261 S. C., Chaps. VI-IX 

20 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 



306 


Notes 

1. “Genuine faith has its foundation in the -promises and 
provisions of the Scriptures. . . . Faith comes by the word of 
God. Then grasp His promise, 'Him that cometh to Me I will 
in no wise cast out.' Cast yourself at His feet with the cry, 
'Lord, I believe; help Thou mine unbelief.' You can never perish 
while you do this — never."— D. A., pp, 126, 4,29. 

“God never asks us to believe, without giving sufficient evi¬ 
dence upon which to base our faith. His existence. His char¬ 
acter, the truthfulness of His word, are all established by testi¬ 
mony that appeals to our reason; and this testimony is abundant. 
Yet God has never removed the possibility of doubt. Our faith 
must rest upon evidence, not demonstration.' Those who wish 
to doubt will have opportunity; while those who really desire 
to know the truth, will find' plenty of evidence on which to rest 
their faith."— S. C. 

2. The evidence God gives is His word. For example: He 
says He made all things by the breath of His mouth. But He 
does not demonstrate this truth by causing an earth to come into 
existence before our eyes. He tells us that He did it, and per¬ 
mits us to look upon the earth that now is and see in it the^ 
wisdom and power of Him who made it. “The invisible things" 
by faith are clearly seen, being understood by “the things that 
are made." 

3. “It was possible for Adam, before the fall, to form a right¬ 
eous character by obedience to God's law. But he failed to do 
this, and because of his sin our natures are fallen, and we can 
not make ourselves righteous. Since we are sinful, unholy, we 
can not perfectly obey a holy law. We have no righteousness of 
our own with which to meet the claims of the law of God. But 
Christ has made a way of escape for us. He lived on earth 
amid trials and temptations such as we have to meet. He lived 
a sinless life. He died for us, and now He offers to take our 
sins and give us His righteousness. If you give yourself to Him, 


307 


and accept Him as your Saviour, then, sinful as your life may 

have been, for His sake you are accounted righteous. Christ’s 

character stands in place of your character, and you ar^ accepted 
before God just as if you had not sinned.” 

4. “Obedience is not a mere outward compliance, but the serv¬ 
ice of love. . . . We do not earn salvation by our obedience; for 
salvation is the free gift of God, to be received by faith But 

obedience is the fruit of faith.”— S. C. 

“The good tree will produce good fruit. If the fruit is un¬ 
palatable and worthless, the tree is evil. So the fruit borne in 
the life testifies as to the condition of the heart and the excel¬ 
lence of the character. Good works can never purchase salva¬ 
tion, but they are an evidence of the faith that acts by love and 
purifies the soul. And though the eternal reward is not bestowed 
because of our merit, yet it will be in proportion to the work 
that has been done through the grace of Christ.”— D. A., p. 31^. 

“Distrust of God is the natural outgrowth of the unrenewed 
heart, which is at enmity with Him. But faith is inspired by the 
Holy Spirit, and it will flourish only as it is cherished. No man 
can become strong in faith without a determined effort.”— 
G. C., p. 527. 


XCVI. PRAYER 


1. Prayer Necessary 

1 Tim. 2: 8. All men should pray. 

1 Thess. 5: 17. We should pray without ceasing. 

2. Acceptable Prayer 

Prov. 28: 9; Prayer will not be heard if there is iniquity 
Ps. 66: 18. in the heart. 

Prov. 15: 8, 29. Prayer of the upright is a delight to God. 
Rom. 8: 26. We know not how to pray. 

Rom. 8: 27. The Spirit makes intercession for us. 

Rev. 8: 3, 4. Incense is offered with prayers. 



308 


3. Secret Prayer 

Matt. 6: 5, 6. God will openly reward secret prayer. 


4. Public Prayer 
Ps. 22: 25; 
35: 18 


We should praise God in public prayer. 


5. Family Prayer 

Jer. 10: 25. All families should pray. 


6. Examples 

Ps. 55: 17; David and Daniel prayed three times 

Dan. 6: 10. a day. 

Luke 9:28,29; 6: 12. Jesus often prayed all night. 


7. Faith and Prayer 
Heb. 11: 6; 

Matt. 21: 22. 


God hears the prayer that is offered in faith. 


Readings 
James 5: 14-18 
Phil. 4: 6 
Eph. 6: 18 
Acts 12: 5; 

10: 31 


Matt. 17: 21 
Dan. 9: 3 
Isa. 56: 7 
M. H., pp. 392, 
393 


S. C., Chap. “The Privilege 
of Prayer” 

Test., Vol. I, pp. 397, 398 
C. 0. L., pp. 139-151 
M. B., pp. 125-130, 151-176 


Notes 

1. “Through nature and revelation, through His providence 
and by the influence of His Spirit, God speaks to us. But these 
are not enough; we need also to pour out our hearts to 

Him. . . . 

“Prayer is the opening of the heart to God as to a friend. 
Not that it is necessary in order to make known to God what 
we are, but in order to enable us to receive Him. Prayer does 
not bring God down to us, but brings us, up to Him. . . . 

“The darkness of the evil one incloses those who neglect to 
pray. The whispered temptations of the enemy entice them 
to sin; and it is all because they do not make use of the privi- 


309 



leges that God has given them in the divine appointment of 
prayer. . . . 

2. ‘‘There are certain conditions upon which we may expect 
that God will hear and answer our prayers. One of the first of 
these is that we feel 
our need of help from 
Him. . . . 

“If we regard iniquity 
in our hearts, if we cling 
to any known sin, the 
Lord will not hear us; 
but the prayer of the 
penitent, contrite soul is 
always accepted. . . . 

“Another element of 
prevailing prayer is faith. 

. . . We are so erring 
and shortsighted that we 
sometimes ask for things 
that would not be a bless¬ 
ing to us, and our heav¬ 
enly Father in love an¬ 
swers our prayers by 
giving us that which will 
be for our highest good,— 
that which we ourselves 
would desire if with vi¬ 
sion divinely enlightened, 
we could see all things as 
they really are.’'— S. C. 

3. “Every sincere prayer is heard in heaven. It may not 

w 

be fluently expressed; but if the heart is in it, it will ascend 
to the sanctuary where Jesus ministers, and He will present it 
to the Father without one awkward, stammering word, beauti- 









310 


ful and fragrant with the incense of His own perfection.”— 
D. A., p. 667. 

“Never should the Bible be studied without prayer. Before 
opening its pages we should ask for the enlightenment of the 
Holy Spirit, and it will be given. . . . 

“Perseverance in prayer has been made a condition of re¬ 
ceiving. . . . Unceasing prayer is the unbroken union of the 
soul with God, so that life from God flows into our life; and 
from our life, purity and holiness flow back to God. . . . 

4. “Seek every opportunity to go where prayer is wont to be 
made. Those who are really seeking for communion with God, 
will be seen in the prayer meeting, faithful to do their duty, 
and earnest and anxious to reap all the benefits they can 
gain. . . . 

5. “We should pray in the family circle; and above all we 
must not neglect secret prayer; for this is the life of the soul. 
It is impossible for the soul to flourish while prayer is neglected. 
Family or public prayer alone is not sufficient. . . . 

6. “Pray in your closet; and as you go about your daily labor, 
let your heart be often uplifted to God. . . . There is no time 
or place in which it is inappropriate to offer up a petition to 
God. There is nothing that can prevent us from lifting up our 
hearts in the spirit of earnest prayer. . . . 

7. “Keep your wants, your joys, your sorrows, your cares, 
and your fears before God. You can not burden Him; you can 
not weary Him. He who numbers the hairs of your head is 
not indifferent to the wants of His children. ‘The Lord is very 
pitiful, and of tender mercy.' His heart of love is touched by 
our sorrows, and even by our utterance of them. Take to Him 
everything that perplexes the mind. Nothing is too great for 
Him to bear, for He holds up worlds. He rules over all the affairs 
of the universe. Nothing that in any way concerns our peace 
is too small for Him to notice. There is no chapter in our ex¬ 
perience too dark for Him to read; there is no perplexity too 
difficult for Him to unravel. No calamity can befall the least 


311 


of His children, no anxiety harass the soul, no joy cheer, no 
sincere prayer escape the lips, of which our heavenly Father 
is unobservant, or in which He takes no immediate interest. 
‘He healeth the broken in heart, and bindeth up their wounds.’ 
The relations between God and each soul are as distinct and full 
as though there were not another soul for whom He gave His 
beloved Son.”—S'. C. 

“Like the patriarchs of old, those who profess to love God 
should erect an altar to the Lord, wherever they pitch their 
tent. If ever there was a time when every house should be a 
house of prayer, it is now. Fathers and mothers should often 
lift up their hearts to God in humble supplication for themselves 
and their children. Let the father, as priest of the household, 
lay upon the altar of God the morning and evening sacrifice, 
while the wife and children unite in prayer and praise. In such 
a household, Jesus will love to tarry.”— P. P., p. IH. 


XCVII. THE GIFT OF PROPHECY 


1. Necessity 
Gen. 1:28; 
2: 15-17. 


Before man sinned, God spoke to him face to face. 


Gen. 3:8; 
Isa. 59: 2. 


Sin has hidden the face of God from man. 


2. Prophets 

Heb. 1: 1, 2. Since sin came into the world, God has spoken 
to man through prophets. 


3. Visions and Dreams 


Num. 12: 6; 

Dan. 2 : 19; 7 : 1; 
Rev. 1: 1. 


God speaks to the prophets in visions and 
dreams by angels through Jesus Christ. 



312 


4. The Gift 

1 Cor. 12: 11. The Spirit of God chooses the prophet. 

1 Cor. 12: 8-10. Prophecy is a gift of the Spirit of God. 

2 Peter 1: 20, 21. Prophecies are inspired by the Holy Spirit. 
1 Peter 1: 10-12. The plan of salvation is revealed to the 

prophets. 


5. Purpose and Importance 

1 Cor. 14: 1, 39. Prophecy is the best of all the gifts. 

Prophecy is especially for those who believe. 
We should not despise prophesyings. 

Where there is no prophetic instruction, the 
people perish for knowledge. 

Those who believe the prophets, shall 
prosper. 


1 Cor. 14: 22. 

1 Thess. 5: 20. 
Prov. 29: 18. 

2 Chron. 20: 20. 


6. Test of a Prophet 

Deut. 13: 1-3; The test of a prophet is not his prophecies 
Isa. 8: 20. only, but his teaching as well. 

7. The Last Church 

Rev. 12: 17; 19: 10. The last church has the spirit of prophecy. 


Headings 

Acts 10: 43 
Lam. 2: 9 
Matt. 24: 24 


1 John 4:1 G. C., old edition. Author’s 

Eph. 4: 11-13 Preface; new edition, 

1 Cor. 13: 8-10 Introduction 

Test., Vol. V, pp. 654-691 


Notes 

1. “Before the entrance of sin, Adam enjoyed open com¬ 
munion with his Maker; but since man separated himself from 
God by transgression, the human race has been cut off from this 
high privilege. By the plan of redemption, however, a way has 
been opened whereby the inhabitants of the earth may still have 
connection with heaven. God has communicated with men by 
His Spirit, and divine light has been imparted to the world by 


313 


revelations to His chosen servants. ‘Holy men of God spake 
as they were moved by the Holy Ghost.' 2 Peter 1:21. . . . 

2. “God has been pleased to communicate His truth to the 
world by human agencies, and He Himself, by His Holy Spirit, 
qualified men and enabled them to do this work. He guided the 
mind in the selection of what to speak and what to write."— 
G. G., old edition, Author*s Preface; neiv edition, Introduction. 

3. “There are many dreams arising from the common things 
of life, with which the Spirit of God has nothing to do. There 
are also false dreams, as well as false visions, which are in¬ 
spired by the spirit of Satan. But dreams from the Lord are 
classed in the word of God with visions, and are as truly the 
fruits of the spirit of prophecy as visions. Such dreams, taking 
into the account the persons who have them, and the circum¬ 
stances under which they are given, contain their own proofs of 
their genuineness."— Test., Vol. 5, p. 658. 

4. There are many gifts of the Spirit. Prophecy is only one 
of them. No one can choose to be a prophet, an apostle, a 
teacher, or to have any other gift of the Spirit. God through 
His Holy Spirit chooses the one who shall be a prophet. He dis¬ 
tributes the gifts as the Spirit “wills." 

5. Prophecy is the best gift of all, because through it we 
receive messages from God, we learn the will of God, know 
what He wants us to do and to be. 

6. The Bible warns us against “false prophets." This shows 
us that there must be true prophets; for if there were no true 
ones, God would tell us to beware of all prophets. He has given 
us a test by which we may Iwiow which is true and which is false. 

If a prophet should foretell something that really came to 
pass, this would not prove him to be a true prophet; for Satan 
can predict any event over which he has control, as he did the 
death of Saul. 

The true test of a prophet is the law, the word of God. If 
he teaches in harmony with the law of God, we know that he 


314 


is a prophet of God. A true prophet never contradicts the tes¬ 
timony of any other true prophet; because they do not speak 
their own thoughts, but the thoughts of God, inspired by His 
Holy Spirit. 

7. Prophecy will not cease until all come into the “unity of 
the faith,” and this will not be until Jesus comes. The very 
last church, “the remnant,” has the testimony of Jesus Christ, 
which “is the spirit of prophecy.” 


XCVIII. THE NATURE OF MAN 


1. Mortal 
Job 4: 17. 

Eph. 4: 17, 18; 
Gen. 3: 24. 


Man is mortal. 

By sin man was cut off from the life of God. 


2. Eternal Life in Christ 

Rom. 6: 23. Eternal life is a gift. 

1 John 5: 11,12. Eternal life is in Christ. 
Col. 3: 3, 4. Christ is our life. 


3. Immortality 
Rom. 2: 7. 

2 Tim. 1: 9, 10. 

1 Cor. 15: 51-55. 

4. Death 
Ps. 13: 3. 

Job 17:13; 

14: 12-14. 

Job 14 : 20, 21; 
Ps. 146: 4; 

Eccl. 9: 5, 6,10. 


We are to seek for immortality. 

By His own death and resurrection Christ 
brought life and immortality to light. 

The righteous will be made immortal when 
they are raised from the dead. 

# 

Death is called a sleep. 

The dead sleep in the grave, waiting their 
change. / 

While asleep in death, man is absolutely un¬ 
conscious, he knows nothing. 



5. The Resurrection 
Acts 24: 14, 15. 


315 


There will be a resurrection of all,— the 
righteous and the wicked. 

Christ died and rose from the dead. 

Through or by means of death He de¬ 
stroyed the power of death. 

He thus obtained the right to open the 
grave and raise the dead. 


1 Cor. 15: 3, 4. 
Heb. 2: 14. 

Rev. 1: 17, 18. 


Readings 

John 3: 14, 15, 36; 
6: 47; 8: 51, 52; 
11: 21-27, 41-44 

Notes 


Ps. 6:5; 115: 17 
Isa. 26: 19; 

38: 18, 19 


G. C., pp. 531-550, 


1. “God is the fountain of life; and when one chooses the 
service of sin, he separates from God, and thus cuts himself 
off from life. He is 'alienated from the life of God.' Christ says, 
‘All they that hate Me love death.’ God gives them existence 
for a time that they may develop their character and reveal 
their principles. This accomplished, they receive the results 
of their own choice.”— D. A., pp. 763, 764. 

2. 1 John 5:11, 12. “Christ became one flesh with us, in 
order that we might become one spirit with Him. It is by 
virtue of this union that we are to come forth from the grave,— 
not merely as a manifestation of the power of Christ, but because, 
through faith. His life has become ours. Those who see Christ 
in His true character, and receive Him into the heart, have 
everlasting life. It is through the Spirit that Christ dwells in 
us; and the Spirit of God, received into the heart by faith, is 
the beginning of the life eternal.”— D. A., p. 388. 

3. “To the believer, Christ is the resurrection and the life. 
In our Saviour the life that was lost through sin is restored; for 
He has life in Himself to quicken whom He will. He is invested 


316 


with the right to give immortality. The life that He laid down 
in humanity, He takes up again, and gives to humanity. T am 
come,’ He said, That they might have life, and that they might 
have it more abundantly.’ ‘Whosoever drinketh of the water that 
I shall give him shall never thirst; but the water that I shall 
give him shall be in him a well of water springing up into ever¬ 
lasting life.’ ‘Whoso eateth My flesh, and drinketh My blood, 
hath eternal life; and I will raise him up at the last day.’ 

4. “To the believer, death is but a small matter. Christ speaks 
of it as if it were of little moment. ‘If a man keep My saying, 
he shall never see death,’ ‘he shall never taste of death.’ To 
the Christian, death is but a sleep, a moment of silence and dark¬ 
ness. The life is hid with Christ in God, and ‘when Christ, who 
is our life, shall appear, then shall ye also appear with Him in 
glory.’ ”— D, A., pp. 786, 787. 

5. “In Christ is life, original, unborrowed, underived. ‘He 
that hath the Son hath life.’ The divinity of Christ is the be¬ 
liever’s assurance of eternal life. ‘He that believeth in Me,’ said 
Jesus, ‘though he were dead, yet shall he live; and whosoever 
liveth and believeth in Me shall never die. Believest thou this?’ 
Christ here looks forward to the time of His second coming. 
Then the righteous dead shall be raised incorruptible, and the 
living righteous shall be translated to heaven without seeing 
death. The miracle which Christ was about to perform in 
raising Lazarus from the dead, would represent the resurrection 
of all the righteous dead.”—D. A., p. 530. 


XCIX. THE WORK OF EVIL ANGELS 


1. Satan 

John 8: 44. 
Rev. 12; 9,10. 
1 Peter 5: 8. 


Satan is a liar, a deceiver, a murderer. 
Satan is an accuser of the brethren. 
Satan seeks to tempt and destroy. 



317 


2. Evil Angels 

Evil angels can trouble men only when God 
permits. 

Evil angels sometimes gain possession of 
those who yield to their temptations. 
The worship of idols is worship of devils. 
Evil angels will work with special power in 
the last days. 

Satan uses mediums to communicate with 
man. 

Satan and his angels can transform them¬ 
selves into angels of light. 

Sorcerers are children of the devil, mediums 
of evil angels. 

God condemns all wizards, familiar spirits, 
necromancers, and sorcerers. 

4. Communication with the Dead 

Isa. 8: 19, 20. All these seek communication with the dead. 

5. Protection from Evil Angels 

Eph. 6: 11. We need the whole armor of God. 

Job 1: 9, 10. God puts a hedge of good angels around those 
who love Him. 

James 4: 7. “Resist the devil, and he will flee from you.” 


Ps. 78: 49; 

Job 1: 12. 

Mark 5: 1-20. 

1 Cor. 10: 19,20. 

1 Tim. 4: 1. 

3. Mediums 
Gen. 3: 1. 

2 Cor. 11: 14, 15. 

Acts 13: 6-10. 

Lev. 20: 6, 27; 
Deut. 18: 10-12; 


Readings 

Job 1; 2 
Matt. 4: 3-11 
Lev. 17: 7 
Deut. 32: 17 
Zech. 13: 1-3 


John 10: 27-29 
Matt. 13: 18, 19, 
24-30, 37-43 
Isa. 28: 15, 17,18 
Ps. 106: 28,37,38 


2 Thess. 2: 9 

Rev. 3: 10 

Luke 11: 14-26 

C. 0. L., pp. 70-75 

G. C., Chaps. XXXI, XXXIV 


P. P., Chaps. LXVI, LXVII 


318 


Notes 

1. Evil spirits, in the beginning created sinless, were equal 
in nature, power, and glory with the holy beings that are now 
God’s messengers. But fallen through sin, they are leagued 
together for the dishonor of God and the destruction of men. 
United with Satan in his rebellion, and with him cast out from 
heaven, they have, through all succeeding ages, cooperated with 
him in his warfare against the divine authority. We are told 
in Scripture of their confederacy and government, of their 
various orders, of their intelligence and subtlety, and of their 
malicious designs against the peace and happiness of men. 

2. “Old Testament history presents occasional mentions of 
their existence and agency; but it was during the time when 
Christ was upon the earth that evil spirits manifested their 
power in the most striking manner. Christ had come to enter 
upon the plan devised for man’s redemption, and Satan deter¬ 
mined to assert his right to control the world. He had suc¬ 
ceeded in establishing idolatry in every part of the earth except 
the land of Palestine. To the only land that had not fully yielded 
to the tempter’s sway, Christ came to shed upon the people the 
light of heaven. Here two rival powers claimed supremacy. 
Jesus was stretching out His arms of love, inviting all who 
would to find pardon and peace in Him. The hosts of dark¬ 
ness saw that they did not possess unlimited control, and they 
understood that if Christ’s mission should be successful, their 
rule was soon to end. Satan raged like a chained lion, and de¬ 
fiantly exhibited his power over the bodies as well as the souls 
of men. 

“The fact that men have been possessed with demons, is 
clearly stated in the New Testament. The persons thus afflicted 
were not merely suffering with disease from natural causes. 
Christ had perfect understanding of that with which He was 
dealing, and He recognized the direct presence and agency of 
evil spirits. . . . 


319 


“Those possessed with devils are usually represented as being 
in a condition of great suffering; yet there were exceptions to 
this rule. For the sake of obtaining supernatural power, some 
welcomed the satanic influence. These of course had no conflict 
with the demons. Of this class were those who possessed the 
spirit of divination,— Simon Magus, Elymas the sorcerer, and 
the damsel who followed Paul and Silas at Philippi. 

“None are in greater danger from the influence of evil 
spirits than those who, notwithstanding the direct and ample 
testimony of the Scriptures, deny the existence and agency of the 
devil and his angels. So long as we are ignorant of their wiles, 
they have almost inconceivable advantage; many give heed to 
their suggestions while they suppose themselves to be following 
the dictates of their own wisdom. This is why, as we approach 
the close of time, when Satan is to work with greatest power to 
deceive and destroy, he spreads everywhere the belief that he 
does not exist. It is his policy to conceal himself and his man¬ 
ner of working.'’— G, C., pp, 513-516. 

4. “Nearly all forms of ancient sorcery and witchcraft were 
founded upon a belief in communion with the dead. Those who 
practiced the arts of necromancy claimed to have intercourse with 
departed spirits, and to obtain through them a knowledge of 
future events. This custom of consulting the dead is referred 
to in the prophecy of Isaiah: ‘When they shall say unto you. 
Seek unto them that have familiar spirits, and unto wizards 
that peep and that mutter; should not a people seek unto their 
God? for the living to the dead?’ 

“This same belief in communion with the dead formed the 
corner stone of heathen idolatry. The gods of the heathen were 
believed to be the deified spirits of departed heroes. Thus the re¬ 
ligion of the heathen was a worship of the dead. . . . (Num. 
25: 1-3; Ps. 106: 28.) 

“The belief in communion with the dead is still held, even 
in professedly Christian lands. Under the name of Spiritualism, 


320 


the practice of communicating with beings claiming to be the 
spirits of the departed, has become widespread. It is calculated 
to take hold of the sympathies of those who have laid their loved 
ones in the grave. Spiritual beings sometimes appear to persons 
in the form of their deceased friends, and relate incidents con¬ 
nected with their lives, and perform acts which they performed 
while living. In this way they lead men to believe that their 
dead friends are angels, hovering over them, and communicating 
with them. Those who thus assume to be the spirits of the de¬ 
parted, are regarded with a certain idolatry, and with manj^ their 
word has greater weight than the word of God. . . . 

“Modern Spiritualism, and the forms of ancient witchcraft 
and idol worship,— all having communion with the dead as 
their vital principle,— are founded upon that first lie by which 
Satan beguiled Eve in Eden: 'Ye shall not surely die.' . . 

“The Hebrews were expressly forbidden to engage, in any 
manner, in pretended communion with the dead. God closed this 
door effectually when He said. The dead know not any¬ 
thing.' ... 

“The ‘familiar spirits' were not the spirits of the dead, but 
evil angels, the messengers of Satan. Ancient idolatry, which, 
as we have seen, comprises both worship of the dead, and pre¬ 
tended communion with them, is declared by the Bible to have 
been demon worship. . . . 

“Modern Spiritualism, resting upon the same foundation, is 
but a revival, in a new form, of the witchcraft and demon 
worship that God condemned .and prohibited of old. It is fore¬ 
told in the Scriptures, which declare that ‘in the latter times some 
shall depart from the faith, giving heed to seducing spirits, and 
doctrines of devils.' "— P. P., pp, 68Jf-686. 

5. “Those who oppose the teachings of Spiritualism are as¬ 
sailing not men alone, but Satan and his angels. They have 
entered upon a contest against principalities and powers and 
wicked spirits in high places. Satan will not yield one inch 


321 


of ground except as he is driven back by the power of heav¬ 
enly messengers. The people of God should be able to meet 
him, as did our Saviour, with the words, Tt is written.^ Satan 
can quote Scripture now as in the days of Christ, and he will 
pervert its teachings to sustain his delusions. Those who would 
stand in this time of peril must understand for themselves the 
testimony of the Scriptures. 

“Many will be confronted by the spirits of devils personating 
beloved relatives or friends, and declaring the most dangerous 
heresies. These visitants will appeal to our tenderest sympa¬ 
thies, and will work miracles to sustain their pretensions. We 
must be prepared to withstand them with the Bible truth that 
the dead know not anything, and that they who thus appear are 
the spirits of devils. 

“Just before us is the ‘hour of temptation, which shall come 
upon all the world, to try them that dwell upon the earth.’ All 
whose faith is not firmly established upon the word of God will 
be deceived and overcome. Satan ‘works with all deceivableness 
of unrighteousness’ to gain control of the children of men; and 
his deceptions will continually increase. But he can gain his 
object only as men voluntarily yield to his temptations. Those 
who are earnestly seeking a knowledge of the truth, and are 
striving to purify their souls through obedience, thus doing what 
they can to prepare for the conflict, will find, in the God of 
truth, a sure defense. ‘Because thou hast kept the word of My 
patience, I also will keep thee,’ is the Saviour’s promise. He 
would sooner send every angel out of heaven to protect His 
people, than leave one soul that trusts in Him to be over¬ 
come by Satan.”— G. C., pp, 559, 560. 

“A guardian angel is appointed to every follower of Christ. 
These heavenly watchers shield the righteous from the power 
of the wicked one.”— G. G., p. 512. 


21 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 


322 


C. 

1. Tithes 
Ps. 24: 1. 

Ps. 115: 16, 

Lev. 27: 30-32. 

2. Tithe Payers 
Gen. 14: 17-24. 

Gen. 28: 20-22. 
Luke 11: 42. 

3. Use of Tithes 
Num. 18: 26-28. 
1 Cor. 9: 13,14. 

4. Offerings 

1 Chron. 16: 29. 
Mai. 3: 3. 

2 Cor. 9 : 6, 7. 
Acts 20: 35. 

5. A Blessing or a 
Mai. 3: 8, 9. 

Mai. 3: 10-12; . 

Prov. 3: 9, 10. 

Readings 

Lev. 27: 28-34 
Heb. 6: 20; 7:4-6 
Deuteronomy 26 
Prov. 11: 24, 25 
Isa. 32: 8 


TITHES AND OFFERINGS 


'The earth is the Lord’s.'' 

The Lord gave the earth to man. 

We should return to the Lord a tithe of all 
we receive. 

Abraham paid tithes to Melchizedek, who 

represented Christ as priest. 

Jacob promised to pay a tithe of all. 

Jesus said that men ought to pay tithes. 

The tithe supported the Levites. 

Those who preach the gospel should be 

supported in the same way. 

We should bring offerings to God. 

Only offerings made in righteousness are 

accepted. 

God loves a cheerful giver. 

‘Tt is more blessed to give than to receive.” 
Curse 

A curse is upon those who rob God in tithes 
and offerings. 

A wonderful blessing is promised those who 
pay tithes and make offerings. 


Eccl. 5: 4, 5 
Acts 10: 4 
Mark 10: 17-22 
1 Cor. 16: 1-3 
Luke 12: 48 


Matt. 10: 8 
P. P., Chaps. L, LI 
Test., Vol. IV, pp. 
462-485 

A. A., Chap. XXXII 


323 


Notes 

1. '‘The system of tithes and offerings was intended to im¬ 
press the minds of men with a great truth,— that God is the 
source of every blessing to His creatures, and that to Him man's 
gratitude is due for the good gifts of His providence. 

“ ‘He giveth to all life, and breath, and all things.’ The 
Lord declares, ‘Every beast of the forest is Mine, and the cattle 
upon a thousand hills.’ ‘The silver is Mine, and the gold is 
Mine.’ And it is God who gives men power to get wealth. As 
an acknowledgment that all things came from Him, the Lord 
directed that a portion of His bounty should be returned to Him 
in gifts and offerings to sustain His worship. 

2. “ ‘The tithe ... is the Lord’s.’ Here the same form of 
expression is employed as in the law of the Sabbath. ‘The 
seventh day is the Sabbath of the Lord thy God.’ God reserved 
to Himself a specified portion of man’s time and of his means, 
and no man could, without guilt, appropriate either for his own 
interests. . . . 

“The people were constantly reminded that God was the true 
proprietor [owner] of their fields, their flocks, and their herds; 
that He sei^t them sunshine and rain for their seedtime and 
harvest, and that everything they possessed was of His crea¬ 
tion, and He had made them stewards of His goods.” 

3. “The tithe was to be exclusively devoted to the use of 
the Levites, the tribe that had been set apart for the service of 
the sanctuary. But this was by no means the limit of the con¬ 
tributions for religious purposes. The tabernacle, as afterward 
the temple, was erected wholly by freewill offerings. . . . From 
time to time, sin offerings and thank offerings were brought to 
God. . . . And the most liberal provision was made for the 
poor. . . . 

“The first that ripened of every product of the land, was 
consecrated to Him. . . . The first fruits were to be pre- 


324 


sented before the Lord at the sanctuary, and were then de¬ 
voted to the use of the priests. ... 

4. “In the days of Israel the tithe and freewill offerings were 
needed to maintain the ordinances of divine service. Should the 
people of God give less in this age? The principle laid down by 
Christ is that our offerings to God should be in proportion to the 



“The tithe ... is the Lord’s.’ 


light and privileges enjoyed. ... The work of the gospel, as it 
widens, requires greater provision to sustain it than was called 
for anciently; and this makes the law of tithes and offerings of 
even more urgent necessity now than under the Hebrew econ¬ 
omy.”— P. P., pp. 525-529. 

“Every member of the family, from the oldest down to the 
youngest, may take part in this work of benevolence. The of- 




325 


ferings of little children may be acceptable and pleasing to God. 
In accordance with the spirit that prompts the gifts will be the 
value of the offering. . . . 

[1 Cor. 16: 1-3.] “The apostle suggests the first day of the 
week as a proper time to review the course of Providence and 
the prosperity experienced, and, in the fear of God, with true 
gratitude of heart for the blessings He has bestowed, to decide 
how much, according to His own devised plan, shall be rendered 
back to Him.”— Test., Vol. S, pp. Jlfl2, U13. 

5. Satan claims this world as his, and he tries in every way 
possible to cause men to serve him. God is the true owner, as we 
know, for He created the world, and redeemed it by the blood 
of Christ. When we pay our tithes and make freewill offerings, 
we say by this that God is the owner and ruler of the world. 
We put ourselves on His side of the great controversy, and show 
that we want to help Him to rescue men from the power of 
Satan. God gave the best He had,— all that He had,— His 
only Son, to save us. What a small thing it is to give back one 
tenth of our money to Him, that the gospel may be preached to 
those who do not know God! 

But when we are so selfish and covetous that we use all our 
money for ourselves, we acknowledge the claims of Satan. We 
say by our actions that Satan is the owner of the world and we 
serve him; we do not care how many poor people go without 
food and clothing, nor how many die in their sins — never know 
God. Surely we do not want to be on Satan’s side; but we do 
want to be God’s true, loyal children. We want the blessing of 
God that is promised to all who bring “all the tithes into the 
storehouse,” and who give as freely as they have received. 


326 


REVIEW 

1. Name three attributes of the word of God. 

2. What does 1 Peter 1:23 teach concerning the word of God? 

3. Repeat 2 Tim. 3:16, 17; Ps. 119:101; John 5:39. 

4. Quote a text that names the persons of the Godhead. 

5. Why is God the Father of every being in the universe? 

6. Show from the Scriptures that God is a personal being. 

7. Name the attributes of God. Give references. 

8. Give the texts that are necessary to show that Michael is 

Christ. 

9. When and where was the plan of salvation made? 

10. Prove that Christ existed before He came to this earth. 

11. What is the work of the Holy Spirit? 

12. Why is there no salvation for one who grieves the Spirit 

away forever? 

13. Repeat five texts upon the character of God’s law. Three 

upon its perpetuity. 

14. Illustrate the truth of Rom. 13: 10 and James 2: 10. 

15. Why did God give each of His creatures the power of choice? 

What is probation? 

16. Write the references for five texts concerning the angels. 

17. What story is told in the following texts? Isa. 14:12-14; 

Eze. 28: 5-17; Rev. 12 : 4, 7-9; Luke 10: 18. Write or 
tell the story. 

18. Give one thought concerning creation from each of the fol¬ 

lowing texts: John 1: 1-3; Heb. 11:3; Heb. 1:3. 

19. Of what is the Sabbath a memorial? Of what is it a sign? 

20. Quote four texts concerning the observance of the Sabbath. 

21. '‘Bind up the testimony, seal the law among My disciples.” 

Give reference. 

22. Show that the seal of the law is in the fourth commandment. 

23. Why did God place the tree of the knowledge of good and 

evil in the garden of Eden? 


327 


24. Explain the meaning of these texts: Rom. 5: 12; Rom. 6:16; 

2 Cor. 4: 4. 

25. What is the meaning of the word “redeem”? “Reconcile”? 

26. What is the angels’ part in the work of redemption? 

27. When was the plan of salvation first revealed? In what 

words? 

28. Why must we be converted? What is conversion? 

29. What is the work of the Holy Spirit in conversion? Of the 

word of God? 

30. What is true repentance? What causes men to repent? Ex¬ 

plain Acts 3: 19. 

31. Quote 1 John 1: 9. What sins should be confessed to God 

only? What to man and to God? In public? In private? 

32. What is faith? How is it obtained? How increased? Quote 

texts. 

33. How do we obtain the righteousness of Christ? 

34. How do we show that we love God? 

35. From the eleventh chapter of Hebrews name five things 

that have been accomplished by faith. 

36. What is prayer? Why should we pray? 

37. What makes our prayers acceptable to God? 

38. Since sin came into the world, how has God communicated 

with man? Give texts. 

39. How long is the gift of prophecy to be in the church? Give 

texts. 

40. Arrange a lesson upon the nature of man using at least ten 

texts. 

41. Write an appropriate sentence after each of the following 

texts: 1 Peter 5:8; Ps. 78: 49; 1 Cor. 10: 19, 20; 2 Cor. 
11:14; Isa. 8:19, 20; James 4:7; Ps. 34:7. 

42. What part of our income belongs to God? Why? 

43. For what purpose should the tithe be used? 

Where are the texts containing these words ? — 

44. “God loveth a cheerful giver.” 


328 


45. ‘‘Without faith it is impossible to please Him.^’ 

46. “The gift of God is eternal life.^' 

» 47. “Holy men of God spake as they were moved by the Holy 

Ghost.’’ 

48. “The just shall live by faith.” 

49. “Repent ye therefore, and be converted.” 

50. “Love is the fulfilling of the law.” 


CL THE WORD MADE FLESH 

1. The First Advent 

Isa. 7: 14. It was prophesied that God should dwell with 
men. 

Ps. 40: 7 8. The Son announced in heaven when He was 
about to come to earth. 

Luke 2: 9-12. An angel announced the birth of the Saviour. 

2. The Incarnation 

John 1: 14. “The Word was made flesh, and dwelt among 
us.” 

Heb. 2: 14-16. Because man was flesh and blood, Jesus be¬ 
came the same. 

Phil. 2: 5-8. Jesus took the form of a servant, the likeness 
of men. 

3. The Mission of Christ 

John 14*6-11. Jesus came to reveal the character of the 
Father. 

Luke 19: 10; Jesus came to seek the lost, to save them 

Matt. 1: 21. from sin. 

4. Jesus Discovers His Mission 

Luke 2: 41-51. Jesus at the Passover discovered that He was 
the Son of God. 



329 


5. The Father Acknowledged the Son 
Matt. 3: 16, 17 ; 

17: 5; 

John 12: 28. 


Three times the Father spoke to the Son; 
twice He called Jesus His beloved Son. 


6. The Temptation of Christ 

Matt. 4: 1-4. Jesus was tempted on appetite. 

Matt. 4: 5-7. He was tempted on love of display, which 
leads to presumption. 

Matt. 4:8-11. He was tempted on the love of the world. 


•7. Sinless 
Heb. 4: 15. 
Heb. 2: 18. 

Heb. 5:7-9; 
2 : 10 . 


Jesus was tempted in every way as we are. 
Because of His experience. He is able to save 
the tempted. 

Jesus was made a perfect Saviour by the things 
that He suffered. 


Eeadings 

Matt. 1: 23 Luke 4: 1-13 John 5: 17-47; 7: 16-18; 

Heb. 10: 5-9 Deut. 8:3 8: 23-29, 42, 58 

Mark 1: 12, 13 D. A., Chaps. I, IV, XII, XIH 

Notes 

1. “ ‘His name shall be called Immanuel, . . . God with 
us.' ‘The light of the knowledge of the glory of God’ is seen ‘in 
the face of Jesus Christ.’ From the days of eternity the Lord 
Jesus Christ was one with the Father; He was ‘the image of God,’ 
the image of His greatness and majesty, ‘the outshining of His 
glory.’ It was to manifest this glory that He came to our world. 
To this sin-darkened earth He came to reveal the light of God’s 
love,— to be ‘God with us.’ Therefore it was prophesied of 
Him, ‘His name shall be called Immanuel.’ . . . This was a vol¬ 
untary sacrifice. Jesus might have remained at the Father’s 
side. He might have retained the glory of heaven, and the 
homage of the angels. But He chose to give back the scepter 


330 


into the Father’s hands, and to step down from the throne of the 
universe, that He might bring light to the benighted, and life 
to the perishing. 

^‘Nearly two thousand years ago, a voice of mysterious import 
was heard in heaven, from the throne of God, ‘Lo, I come.’ 
'Sacrifice and offering Thou wouldst not, but a body hast Thou 
prepared Me.’ . . . ‘Lo, I come (in the volume of the book it 
is written of Me,) to do Thy will, 0 God.’ In these words is 
announced the fulfillment of the purpose that had been hidden 
from eternal ages. Christ was about to visit our world, and to 
become incarnate. He says, ‘A body*hast Thou prepared Me.’ 
Had He appeared with the glory that was His with the Father 
before the world was, we could not have endured the light of 
His presence. That we might behold it and not be destroyed, 
the manifestation of His glory was shrouded. His divinity was 
veiled with humanity,— the invisible glory in the visible human 
form.”— D. A., pp. 19-23, 

" ‘When the fullness of the time was come, God sent forth 
His Son ... to redeem them that were under the law, that we 
might receive the adoption of sons.’ 

“The Saviour’s coming was foretold in Eden. . . . But 
the fulfillment of the promise tarried. . . . Century after 
century passed away; the voices of the prophets ceased. The 
hand of the oppressor was heavy upon Israel, and many were 
ready to exclaim, ‘The days are prolonged, and every vision 
faileth.’ 

“But like the stars in the vast circuit of their appointed 
path, God’s purposes know no haste and no delay. ... In 
heaven’s council the hour for the coming of Christ had been 
determined. When the great clock of time pointed to that hour, 
Jesus was born in Bethlehem.”— D. A., pp, 31, 32, 

2. “God commanded Moses for Israel, ‘Let them make Me a 
sanctuary, that I may dwell among them,’ and He abode in the 
sanctuary, in the midst of His people. ... So Christ set up 


331 


His tabernacle in the midst of our human encampment. He 
pitched His tent by the side of the tents of men, that He might 
dwell among us, and make us familiar with His divine character 
and life. ‘The Word became flesh, and tabernacled among us^ 
[margin].... 

“Since Jesus came to dwell with us, we know that God is 
acquainted with our trials, and sympathizes with our griefs. . . . 

“Satan represents God’s law of love as a law of selflshness. 
He declares that it is impossible for us to obey its precepts. The 
fall of our first parents, with all the woe that has resulted, he 
charges upon the Creator, leading men to look upon God as 
the author of sin, and suffering, and death. Jesus was to un¬ 
veil this deception. As one of us He was to give an example of 
obedience. For this He took upon Himself our nature, and 
passed through our experiences. ‘In all things it behooved Him 
to be made like unto His brethren.’ If we had to bear anything 
which Jesus did not endure, then upon this point Satan would 
represent the power of God as insufficient for us. Therefore 
Jesus was ‘in all points tempted like as we are.’ He endured 
every trial to which we are subject. And He exercised in His 
own behalf no power that is not freely offered to us. As man. 
He met temptation, and overcame in the strength given Him 
from God. . . . 

“By His humanity, Christ touched humanity; by His di¬ 
vinity, He lays hold upon the throne of God. As the Son of 
man. He gave us an example of obedience; as the Son of God, 
He gives us power to obey.”— D. A., pp, 23, 2U. 

3. “By coming to dwell with us, Jesus was to reveal God 
both to men and to angels. He was the Word of God,— God’s 
thought made audible. . . . But not alone for His earthborn 
children was this revelation given. Our little world is the lesson 
book of the universe. ... In the light from Calvary it will be 
seen, that the law of self-renouncing love is the law of life for 
earth and heaven; that the love which ‘seeketh not her own’ 
has its source in the heart of God; and that in the meek and 


332 



The Word wa^s made flesh, and dwelt among* us. 










333 


lowly One is manifested the character of Him who dwelleth in 
the light which no man can approach unto.”— D. A., pp. 19, 20. 

‘‘Because God is a God of justice and terrible majesty, Satan 
caused them to look upon Him as severe and unforgiving. Thus 
he drew men to join him in rebellion against God, and the night 
of woe settled down upon the world. 

“The earth was dark through misapprehension of God. That 
the gloomy shadows might be lightened, that the world might 
be brought back to God, Satan’s deceptive power was to be 
broken. This could not be done by force. The exercise of force 
is contrary to the principles of God’s government; He desires 
only the service of love; and love can not be commanded; it can 
not be won by force or authority. Only by love is love awakened. 
To know God is to love Him; His character must be manifested 
in contrast to the character of Satan. This work only one Being 
in all the univeise could do. Only He who knew the height and 
depth of the love of God, could make it known. Upon the world’s 
dark night the Sun of Righteousness must rise ‘with healing in 
His wings.’ ”— D. A., p. 22. 

4. “He witnessed the impressive rites of the paschal service. 
Day by day He saw their meaning more clearly. Every act 
seemed to be bound up with His own life. New impulses were 
awakening within Him. Silent and absorbed. He seemed to be 
studying out a great problem. The mystery of His mission was 
opening to the Saviour. ... He hid in His own heart the mys¬ 
tery of His mission, waiting submissively for the appointed time 
for Him to enter upon His work. For eighteen years after He 
had recognized that He was the Son of God, He acknowledged 
the tie that bound Him to the home at Nazareth, and performed 
the duties of a son, a brother, a friend, and a citizen.”— D. A., 
pp. 78, 82. 

5. “Notwithstanding that the sins of a guilty world were 
laid upon Christ, notwithstanding the humiliation of taking upon 
Himself our fallen nature, the voice from heaven declared Him 
to be the Son of the Eternal. . . . 


334 


^^And the word that was spoken to Jesus at the Jordan, This 
is My beloved Son, in whom I am well pleased,’ embraces hu¬ 
manity. God spoke to Jesus as our representative. With all 
our sins and weaknesses, we are not cast aside as worthless. 
‘He hath made us accepted in the Beloved.’ . . . The light which 
fell from the open portals upon the head of our Saviour, will 
fall upon us as we pray for help to resist temptation. The voice 
which spoke to Jesus says to every believing soul. This is My 
beloved child, in whom I am well pleased.’ ”— D. A., pp. 112, 113. 

6. “With Christ, as with the holy pair in Eden, appetite was 
the ground of the first great temptation. Just where the ruin 
began, the work of our redemption must begin. As by the 
indulgence of appetite Adam fell, so by the denial of appetite 
Christ must overcome. ... Of all the lessons to be learned from 
our Lord’s first great temptation, none is more important than 
that bearing upon the control of the appetites and passions. . . . 

“The tempter thought to take advantage of Christ’s humanity, 
and urge Him to presumption. . . . Jesus refused to go outside 
the path of obedience. While manifesting perfect trust in His 
Father, He would not place Himself, unbidden, in a position that 
would necessitate the interposition of His Father to save Him 
from death. ... 

“When the tempter offered to Christ the kingdom and glory 
of the world, he was proposing that Christ should yield up the 
real kingship of the world, and hold dominion subject to Satan. 
. . . But He would not be bought; He had come to establish 
a kingdom of righteousness, and He would not abandon His 
purpose. . . . 

7. “The angels of heaven had watched the conflict, beholding 
their loved Commander as He passed through inexpressible suf¬ 
fering to make a way of escape for us. He had endured the 
test, greater than we shall ever be called to endure. The angels 
now ministered to the Son of God, as He lay like one dying. He 
was strengthened with food, comforted with the message of His 
Father’s love, and the assurance that all heaven triumphed in His 


335 


victory. Warming to life again, His great heart goes out in 
sympathy for man, and He goes forth to complete the work He 
has begun; to rest not until the foe is vanquished, and our fallen 
race redeeme'd. 

“Never can the cost of our redemption be realized until the 
redeemed shall stand with the Redeemer before the throne of 
God. Then as the glories of the eternal home burst upon our 
enraptured senses, we shall remember that Jesus left all this 
for us, that He not only became an exile from the heavenly courts, 
but for us took the risk of failure and eternal loss.”— D. A., 
pp. 117-131. 


CIL THE DEATH OF CHRIST 


1. Gethsemane 

Matt. 26: 36-44. In Gethsemane Jesus made His final decision 
to die for man. 


2. Jesus Took the Sinner's Place 


Isaiah 53. 

2 Cor. 5: 21. 
Heb. 2: 9. 

3. Calvary 

Matt. 27: 46. 
John 19: 30. 


Jesus was treated as sinners deserve to be 
treated. 

He was made to be sin for us. 

He tasted death for every man. 

The Father’s presence was concealed. 

When Jesus died, man’s salvation was sure. 


4. The Covenant Ratified 

Heb. 7: 22; The death of Christ ratified, or made sure, 
9: 16, 17. God’s covenant with man. 


5. Christ Exalted 


Heb. 1:3; 
Acts 5: 31. 


Christ sits at the right hand of God exalted. 



336 


6. Trophies of His Triumph 

Matt. 27: 50-53; Christ took with Him to heaven a multitude 

Eph. 4:8. of ransomed saints. 

7. Our High Priest 

Heb. 4: 14. Christ is our great high priest. 

Heb. 9: 12, He puts away sin by offering His own blood. 

22-26. 

Readings 
2 Cor. 5: 19 
Rom. 3: 26 
Ps. 85: 10 

Notes 

1. ‘‘Christ was now standing in a different attitude from 
that in which He had ever stood before. ... As the substitute 
and surety for sinful man, Christ was suffering under divine 
justice. He saw what justice meant. . . . Satan told Him that 
if He became the surety for a sinful world, the separation [from 
His Father] would be eternal. He would be identified with 
Satan’s kingdom, and would never more be one with God. . . . 

“The humanity of the Son of God trembled in that trying 
hour. . . . The awful moment had come,— that moment which 
was to decide the destiny of the world. The fate of humanity 
trembled in the balance. Christ might even now refuse to drink 
the cup apportioned to guilty man. It was not yet too late. He 
might wipe the bloody sweat from His brow, and leave man 
to perish in his iniquity. . . . 

“But now the history of the human race comes up before 
the world’s Redeemer. He sees that the transgressors of the 
law, if left to themselves, must perish. He sees the helplessness 
of man. He sees the power of sin. The woes and lamentations 
of a doomed world rise before Him. He beholds its impending 
fate, and His decision is made. He will save man at any cost 
to Himself.”— D. A., pp. 686-693. 


Isa. 26: 19 
John 10: 17,18; 
2: 19 


Hebrews 7; 8; 9 
D. A., Chaps. LXXIV, 
LXXIX 


337 


2. “Christ was treated as we deserve, that we might be treated 
as He deserves. He was condemned for our sins, in which He 
had no share, that we might be justified by His righteousness, 
in which we had no share. He suffered the death which was 
ours, that we might receive the life which was His. ‘With His 
stripes we are healed.' ”— D. A., p. 25. 

3. “Satan with his fierce temptations wrung the heart of 
Jesus. The Saviour could not see through the portals of the 
tomb. Hope did not present to Him His coming forth from the 
grave a conqueror, or tell Him of the Father's acceptance of 
the sacrifice. . . . Christ felt the anguish which the sinner will 
feel when mercy shall no longer plead for the guilty race. It was 
the sense of sin, bringing the Father's wrath upon Him as man's 
substitute, that made the cup He drank so bitter, and broke 
the heart of the Son of God. . . . 

“God and His holy angels were beside the cross. The Father 
was with His Son. Yet His presence was not revealed. Had 
His glory flashed forth from the cloud, every human beholder 
would have been destroyed. And in that dreadful hour Christ 
was not to be comforted with the Father's presence. He trod 
the wine press alone, and of the people there was none with 
Him."— D. A., p. 753. 

4. “Christ did not yield up His life till He had accomplished 
the work which He came to do, and with His parting breath He 
exclaimed, ‘It is finished.' The battle had been won. . . . All 
heaven triumphed in the Saviour's victory. Satan was defeated, 
and knew that his kingdom was lost. . . . 

“Not until the death of Christ was the character of Satan 
clearly revealed to the angels or to the unfallen worlds. . . . 
Satan saw that his disguise was torn away. His administration 
was laid open before the unfallen angels and before the heav¬ 
enly universe. He had revealed himself as a murderer. By 
shedding the blood of the Son of God, he had uprooted himself 
from the sympathies of the heavenly beings. Henceforth his 
work was restricted. Whatever attitude he might assume, he 
22 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 


338 











339 


could no longer await the angels as they came from the heavenly 
courts, and before them accuse Christ’s brethren of being clothed 
with the garments of blackness and the defilement of sin. The 
last link of sympathy between Satan and the heavenly world 
was broken. 

“Yet Satan was not then destroyed. The angels did not even 
then understand all that was involved in the great controversy. 
The principles at stake were to be more fully revealed. And for 
the sake of man, Satan’s existence must be continued. Man as 
well as angels must see the contrast between the Prince of Light 
and the prince of darkness. Pie must choose whom he will 
serve. . . . 

“Through Jesus, God’s mercy was manifested to men; but 
mercy does not set aside justice. The law reveals the attributes 
of God’s character, and not a jot or tittle of it could be changed 
to meet man in his fallen condition. God did not change His 
law, but Pie sacrificed Himself, in Christ, for man’s redemp¬ 
tion,—‘God was in Christ, reconciling the world unto Himself.’ 

“The law requires righteousness,— a righteous life, a perfect 
character; and this, man has not to give. He can not meet the 
claims of God’s holy law. But Christ, coming to the earth as 
man, lived a holy life, and developed a perfect character. These 
He offers as a free gift to all who will receive them. His life 
stands for the life of men. . . . 

“By His life and His death, Christ proved that God’s justice 
did not destroy His mercy, but that sin could be forgiven, and 
that the law is righteous and can be perfectly obeyed. . . . 

“Satan declared that mercy destroyed justice, that the death 
of Christ abrogated the Father’s law. Had it been possible for 
the law to be changed or abrogated, then Christ need not have 
died.”—!). A., vp. 758-762. 

5. “When Jesus was laid in the grave, Satan triumphed. He 
dared to hope that the Saviour would not take up His life again. 
He claimed the Lord’s body, and set his guard about the tomb, 
seeking to hold Christ a prisoner. . . . When he saw Christ 


340 


come forth in triumph, he knew that his kingdom would have an 
end, and that he must finally die. . . . 

“When the voice of the mighty angel was heard at Christ’s 
tomb, saying, ‘Thy Father calls Thee,’ the Saviour came forth 
from the grave by the life that was in Himself. Now was proved 
the truth of His words, T lay down My life, that I might take 
it again.’ . . . 

“Over the rent sepulcher of Joseph, Christ had proclaimed in 
triumph, T am the resurrection and the life.’ These words 
could be spoken only by the Deity. All created beings live by the 
will and power of God. They are dependent recipients of the life 
of God. From the highest seraph to the humblest animate being, 
all are replenished from the Source of life. Only He who is one 
with God could say, I have power to lay down My life, and I 
have power to take it again. In His divinity, Christ possessed 
the power to break the bonds of death. ... 

6. “As Christ arose. He brought from the grave a multitude 
of captives. . . . Those who came forth from the grave at 
Christ’s resurrection, were raised to everlasting life. They as¬ 
cended with Him as trophies of His victory over death and the 
grave.”— D. A., pp. 782-786. 

7. “Before the foundations of the earth were laid, the Father 
and the Son had united in a covenant to redeem man if he 
should be overcome by Satan. They had clasped Their hands 
in a solemn pledge that Christ should become the surety for the 
human race. This pledge Christ has fulfilled. When upon the 
cross He cried, Tt is finished,’ He addressed the Father. The 
compact had been fully carried out.”— D. A., p. 83Jf. 

“By His life and His death, Christ has achieved even more 
than recovery from, the ruin wrought through sin. It was 
Satan’s purpose to bring about an eternal separation between 
God and man; but in Christ we become more closely united to 
God than if we had never fallen. In taking our nature, the 
Saviour has bound Himself to humanity by a tie that is never to 


341 


be broken. Through the eternal ages He is linked with us. 
‘God so loved the world, that He gave His only-begotten Son.' 
He gave Him not only to bear our sins, and to die as our sac¬ 
rifice; He gave Him to the fallen race. To assure us of His 
immutable counsel of peace, God gave His only-begotten Son to 
become one of the human family, forever to retain His human 
nature. This js the pledge that God will fulfill His word. ‘Unto 
us a Child is born; unto us a Son is given; and the government 
shall be upon His shoulder.' God has adopted human nature in 
the person of His Son, and has carried the same into the highest 
heaven. It is the ‘Son of man’ who shares the throne of the 
universe. It is the ‘Son of man’ whose name shall be called, 
‘Wonderful, Counselor, the mighty God, the everlasting Father, 
the Prince of Peace.’ The I AM is the Daysman between God 
and humanity, laying His hand upon both. He who is ‘holy, 
harmless, undefiled, separate from sinners,’ is not ashamed to 
call us brethren. In Christ the family of earth and the family of 
heaven are bound together. Christ glorified is our brother. 
Heaven is enshrined in humanity, and humanity is infolded in 
the bosom of Infinite Love.”— D. A., pp. 25, 26. 


CIIL THE CHURCH 


1. The Body of Christ 

Col. 1: 24. The church is the body of Christ. 

Matt. 16: 13-19. The church is built upon Christ. 

2. The Head Is Christ 

Eph. 5: 23, 24. Christ is the head of the church. 

•Eph. 5: 25-27. Christ loves the church, and desires it to 

be pure. 



342 


3. Organization 

1 Cor. 12: 12, 13, 27. Each true believer is a member of the 

body of Christ. 

1 Cor. 12: 14-26; The relation of members of the church 
Matt. 23: 8. to one another is the same as parts 

of the body. 


4. Officers 


Eph. 4:8,11. Christ gave apostles, pastors, and teachers 
as gifts to the church. 

Acts 20: 28. Overseers under Christ are to care for the 
church. 


5. Elders 


Titus 1: 5. 
Titus 1:6-9; 

1 Tim. 3:1-7; 

1 Peter 5: 1-3. 
1 Peter 5:5; 

1 Tim. 5: 17-19 


There should be elders in every church. 

The character and work of an elder, or 
bishop. 

Worthy elders should be treated with special 
honor and respect. 


6. Deacons 

1 Tim. 3: 8-13; 
Acts 6: 2, 3. 


The character and work of a deacon. 


7. The Work of the Church 


Matt. 28: 18-20; The church is to teach the gospel to all 
Acts 1: 8. nations. 


Readings 

1 Corinthians 12 
1 Tim. 5: 1 
Eph. 1: 22, 23; 2: 
19-22; 4: 15, 16 


Gal. 6: 10 
Acts 7: 26 
1 Cor. 3: 10-13; 
11: 3 


Test., Vol. IV, pp. 16-20 
A. A., Chaps. I-III, IX, 
LI, LVIII 


343 


Notes 

1. “ ‘Upon this rock/ said Jesus, ‘I will build My church/ 
In the presence of God, and all the heavenly intelligences, in 
the presence of the unseen army of hell, Christ founded His 
church upon the living Rock. That Rock is Himself,— His own 
body, for us broken and bruised. Against the church built upon 
this foundation the gates of hell shall not prevail. . . . 

“Peter had expressed the truth which is the foundation of 
the church’s faith, and Jesus now honored him as the representa¬ 
tive of the whole body of believers. He said, T will give unto 
thee the keys of the kingdom of heaven.’ . . . ‘The keys of 
the kingdom of heaven’ are the words of Christ. All the words 
of Holy Scripture are His and are here included. These words 
have power to open and to shut heaven. They declare the con¬ 
ditions upon which men are received or rejected. Thus the work 
of those who preach God’s word is a savor of life unto life or 
of death unto death. Theirs is a mission weighted with 
eternal results. . . . 

2. “ ‘The head of every man is Christ.’ God, who put all 
things under the Saviour’s feet, ‘gave Him to be the head over 
all things to the church, which is His body, the fullness of 
Him that filleth all in all.’ The church is built upon Christ as its 
foundation; it is to obey Christ as its head. It is not to depend 
upon man, or be controlled by man. Many claim that a position 
of trust in the church gives them authority to dictate what other 
men shall believe and what they shall do. This claim God does 
not sanction. The Saviour declares, ‘All ye are brethren.’ All 
are exposed to temptation, and are liable to err. Upon no 
finite being can we depend for guidance. The Rock of faith is 
the living presence of Christ in the church.”— D. A., pp. 4-lS, JflA. 

“The elect of God are dear to His heart. ... To Him 
the dearest object on earth is His church.”— C. 0. L., pp. 165, 166. 

3. “By a comparison of the church with the human body, the 
apostle aptly illustrated the close and harmonious relationship 


344 


1 


that should exist among all members of the church of Christ/’— 
A. A., p. 317, 

“As all the different members of the human system unite 
to form the entire body, and each performs its office in obedi¬ 
ence to the intelligence that governs the whole, so the members 
of the church of Christ should be united in one symmetrical body, 
subject to the sanctified intelligence of the whole. 

“The advancement of the church is retarded by the wrong 
course of its members. Uniting with the church, although an 
important and necessary act, does not make one a Christian nor 
insure salvation. We can not secure a title to heaven by having 
our names enrolled upon the church book while our hearts are 
alienated from Christ. We should be His faithful representatives 
on earth, working in unison with Him. ‘Beloved, now are we the 
sons of God.’ We should keep in mind this holy relationship, and 
do nothing to bring dishonor upon our Father’s cause. . . . 

“Every believer should be whole-hearted in his attachment 
to the church. . . . Those who really feel a deep interest in 
the advancement of the cause, will not hesitate to invest money 
in the enterprise whenever and wherever it is needed. They 
should also feel it a solemn duty to illustrate in their characters 
the teachings of Christ, being at peace one with another, and 
moving in perfect harmony as an undivided whole. They should 
defer their individual judgment to the judgment of the body of 
the church.”— Test., Vol. 4, pp. 16-18. 

4. “It was at the ordination of the twelve that the first step 
was taken in the organization of the church that after Christ’s 
departure was to carry on His work on the earth. . . . Their 
office was the most important to which human beings had ever 
been called, second only to that of Christ Himself. They were 
to be workers together with God for the saving of men. As in 
the Old Testament the twelve patriarchs stood as representatives 
of Israel, so the twelve apostles stand as representatives of the 
gospel church. . . . 


345 


^‘In these first disciples was presented marked diversity. They 
were to be the world’s teachers, and they represented widely 
varied types of character. In order successfully to carry for¬ 
ward the work to which they had been called, these men, differing 
in natural characteristics and in habits of life, needed to come 
into unity of feeling, thought, and action. This unity it was 
Christ’s object to secure. To this end He sought to bring them 
into unity with Himself.”—A. A., p2^. 18-20. 

“Since His ascension Christ has carried forward His work 
on earth by chosen ambassadors, through whom He speaks to 
the children of men, and ministers to their needs. The great 
Head of the church superintends His work through the instru¬ 
mentality of men ordained by God to act as His representa¬ 
tives. ... 

“Christ’s ministers are the spiritual guardians of the people 
intrusted to their care. Their work has been likened to that of 
watchmen. . . . 

“To every minister the Lord declares: ‘0 son of man, I 
have set thee a watchman unto the house of Israel; therefore 
thou shalt hear the word at My mouth, and warn them from 
Me. When I say unto the wicked, 0 wicked man, thou shalt surely 
die; if thou dost not speak to warn the wicked from his way, 
that wicked man shall die in his iniquity; but his blood will I 
require at thine hand. Nevertheless, if thou warn the wicked 
of his w^ay to turn from it, . . . thou hast delivered thy soul.’ ” 
— A. A., pp. 360, 361. 

7. “The church is God’s appointed agency for the salvation 
of men. It was organized for service, and its mission is to carry 
the gospel to the world. . . . 

“The church is God’s fortress. His city of refuge, which He 
holds in a revolted world. Any betrayal of the church is treach¬ 
ery to Him who has bought mankind with the blood of His only- 
begotten Son. From the beginning, faithful souls have consti¬ 
tuted the church on earth. In every age the Lord has had His 


346 


watchmen, who have borne a faithful testimony to the genera¬ 
tion in which they lived. . . . 

“During ages of spiritual darkness, the church of God has 
been as a city set on a hill. From age to age, through suc¬ 
cessive generations, the pure doctrines of heaven have been un¬ 
folding within its borders. Enfeebled and defective as it may 
appear, the church is the one object upon which God bestows in 
a special sense His supreme regard. It is the theater of His 
grace, in which He delights to reveal His power to transform 
hearts.”— A. A., pp. 9-12. 

“Standing but a step from His heavenly throne, Christ gave 
the commission to His disciples. ... He made full provision 
for the prosecution of the work, and took upon Himself the re¬ 
sponsibility for its success. So long as they obeyed His word, 
and worked in connection with Him, they could not fail. Go to 
all nations. He bade them. Go to the farthest part of the hab¬ 
itable globe, but know that My presence will be there. Labor 
in faith and confidence, for the time will never come when I 
will forsake you. 

“The Saviour’s commission to the disciples included all the be¬ 
lievers. It includes all believers in Christ to the end of time. 
It is a fatal mistake to suppose that the work of saving souls 
depends alone on the ordained minister. All to whom the heav¬ 
enly inspiration has come are put in trust with the gospel. All 
who receive the life of Christ are ordained to work for the sal¬ 
vation of their fellow men. For this work the church was estab¬ 
lished, and all who take upon themselves its sacred vows are 
thereby pledged to be coworkers with Christ.”— D. A., pp. 
818-822. 


347 


CIV. THE ORDINANCE OF BAPTISM 


1. Jesus’ Example 

Matt. 3:13-17. Jesus was baptized, an example to us. 

2. Jesus’ Command 

Matt. 28: 19. All who believe are to be baptized. 

3. A Memorial 


Rom. 6: 3-6. Baptism is a memorial of Christ’s death, burial, 
and resurrection. 

Repentance and faith in Christ are neces¬ 
sary before baptism. 

The one baptized should be dead to sin. 

There is but one kind of baptism. 

Baptism takes place in the water. 

Rom. 6: 4. The one baptized should live a new life,— a 
life free from sin. 

Col. 3: 1-3. He should ‘‘seek those things which are above.” 
7. Resurrection Power 


4. Preparation 
Acts 2 : 38; 

8: 12, 37; 

22: 16. 

Rom. 6:2, 6, 7. 

5. Mode 
Eph. 4:5. 

Acts 8: 36-39. 

6. A Neiv Life 


Eph. 1: 18-20; The power that raised Jesus from the dead 
2 Cor. 13: 4. is given to the one baptized to live a 

new life. 


Readings 
Mark 16: 15, 16 
Col. 2: 12 
John 3: 23 


Romans 6 
Phil. 3: 10, 11 
Matt. 3: 11 


Mark 1: 1-8 

Test., Vol. Ill, pp. 362-367 
D. A., Chap. XI 


Notes 

1. “Why should He who needed no repentance submit to a 
rite that was a confession of guilt to be washed away? . . . 


348 


“Jesus did not receive baptism as a confession of guilt on 
His own account. He identified Himself with sinners, taking 
the steps that we are to take, and doing the work' that we must 
do. His life of suffering and patient endurance after His bap¬ 
tism was also an example to us.” 



Repent, and be baptized every one of you.” 


2. “As Jesus asked for baptism, John drew back, exclaiming, 
‘I have need to be baptized of Thee, and comest Thou to me?’ 
With firm yet gentle authority, Jesus answered, ‘Suffer it to be 
so now; for thus it becometh us to fulfill all righteousness.’ And 
John, yielding, led the Saviour down into the Jordan, and buried 
Him beneath the water.”— D, A., p. 111. 








349 


3. A memorial is something which keeps a person or event 
in our remembrance. Baptism is a very appropriate, a fitting 
memorial of the death, burial, and resurrection of Christ. 

4. We should be horrified if we knew that one of our friends 
had been buried alive. This has sometimes occurred when per¬ 
sons have seemed to be dead; their friends really supposed that 
life was extinct — and buried them. But this is not so dreadful 
as to baptize one who is not truly converted,— dead to sin. After 
Paul had fasted and prayed and confessed his sins to God, Ananias 
said to him, “Why tarriest thou? arise, and be baptized,” for he 
had given up forever his past sinful life. When we have turned 
away from our sins, confessed them, and believe in Jesus, the 
“old man,” our sinful nature, is dead. Then we should be buried 
in the watery grave. 

“It is the grace of Christ that gives life to the soul. Apart 
from Christ, baptism, like any other service, is a worthless 
form. ‘He that believeth not the Son shall not see life.’ ”— 
D. A., p. 181. 

5. The Bible presents but one baptism. When we bury any¬ 
thing, we cover it up out of sight in the ground. Likewise the 
one baptized must be buried beneath the water, hidden from 
view, or baptism can not be a memorial of Christ’s burial. “We 
are buried with Him by baptism into death.” 

6. “Those who have put on Christ by baptism, by this act 
showing their separation from the world, and that they have 
covenanted to walk in newness of life, should not set up idols in 
their hearts. Those who have once rejoiced in the evidence of 
sins forgiven, who have tasted a Saviour’s love, and who then 
persist in uniting with the foes of Christ, rejecting the perfect 
righteousness that Jesus offers them, and choosing the ways that 
He has condemned, will be more severely judged than the heathen 
who have never had the light, and have never known God or 
His law. Those who refuse to follow the light which God has 
given them, choosing the amusements, vanities, and follies of 
the world, and refusing to conform their conduct to the just 


350 


and holy requirements of God’s law, are guilty of the most 
aggravating sins in the sight of God. Their guilt and their 
wages will be proportionate to the light and privileges which 
they have had. 

“We see the world absorbed in their own amusements. The 
first and highest thoughts of the larger portion, especially of 
women, are of display. Love of dress and pleasure is wrecking 
the happiness of thousands. And some of those who profess to 
love and keep the commandments of God ape this class as near 
as they possibly can and retain the Christian name. . . . Self- 
denial in dress is a part of our Christian duty. To dress plainly, 
and abstain from display of jewelry and ornaments of every kind 
is in keeping with our faith. . . . 

“The young may endeavor to excel in seeking for the orna¬ 
ment of a meek and quiet spirit, a jewel of inestimable value 
that may be worn with heavenly grace. This adorning will pos¬ 
sess attractions for many in this world, and will be esteemed of 
great price by the heavenly angels, and above all by our heav¬ 
enly Father, and will fit the wearers to be welcome guests in 
the heavenly courts.”— Test., Vol. 3, pp. 365-367. 

7. “Do you ask, ‘How am I to abide in Christ?’—In the same 
way as you received Him at first. ‘As ye have therefore received 
Christ Jesus the Lord, so walk ye in Him.’ ‘The just shall live 
by faith.’ ... By faith you became Christ’s, and by faith you 
are to grow up in Him,— by giving and taking. You are to 
give all,— your heart, your will, your service,— give yourself 
to Him to obey all His requirements; and you must take all,— 
Christ, the fullness of all blessing, to abide in your heart, to be 
your strength, your righteousness, your everlasting helper,— to 
give you power to obey.”— S. C. 

Surely we need not be discouraged, for the power given to 
enable us to obey is the power that raised Jesus from the dead,— 
resurrection power. 


351 


CV. THE ORDINANCES OF THE LORD’S HOUSE 

1. Preparation 

1 Cor. 11:27-29. We should examine our hearts carefully; 


2. Institution 

be sure we are right with God and man. 
The Ordinance of Humility 


John 13:1-11. The ordinance of humility was instituted by 


3. Purpose 

Jesus at the last Passover. 


Matt. 20: 25-28. Jesus is our example in humility and un¬ 
selfish service. 

John 13: 12-17. Jesus washed the feet of His disciples to 


4. Command 

teach them this lesson of humility and 
service. 


John 13: 14, 15, 17. Jesus commanded His disciples to do as 
He had done. 

The Ordinance of the Lord’s Supper 

5. Institution 

Matt. 26: 26-29; The ordinance of the Lord’s supper was 
1 Cor. 11:23-25. instituted by Jesus at the last Passover. 


6. Purpose 

1 Cor. 11: 26; 

By observing this ordinance, the believer 


Luke 22: 19,20. shows his faith in the sacrifice of 
Christ. 

7. Command 

1 Cor. 11:25. This ordinance is to be observed in remem¬ 
brance of the sufferings of Christ. 

8. The Last Hymn 

Matt. 26: 30. “And when they had sung an hymn, they went 
out into the Mount of Olives.” 


352 


Readings 

Matt. 26: 17-30 Luke 22: 7-20 John 6: 53-57 . 

1 Cor. 11: 16-34 Gal. 6: 13; 6: 14 D. A., Chaps. LXXI, LXXIl 

Notes 

1. ‘The holy Watcher from heaven is present at this season 
to make it one of soul searching, of conviction of sin, and of 
the blessed assurance of sins forgiven. Christ in the fullness 
of His grace is there to change the current of the thoughts that 
have been running in selfish channels. The Holy Spirit quickens 
the sensibilities of those who follow the example of their Lord. 
As the Saviour’s humiliation for us is remembered, thought links 
with thought; a chain of memories is called up, memories of God’s 
great goodness and of the favor and tenderness of earthly friends. 
Blessings forgotten, mercies abused, kindnesses slighted, are called 
to mind. Roots of bitterness that have crowded out the precious 
plant of love are made manifest. Defects of character, neglect 
of duties, ingratitude to God, coldness toward our brethren, are 
called to remembrance. Sin is seen in the light in which God 
views it. Our thoughts are not thoughts of self-complacency, but 
of severe self-censure and humiliation. The mind is energized 
to break down every barrier that has caused alienation. Evil 
thinking and evil speaking are put away. Sins are confessed, 
they are forgiven. The subduing grace of Christ comes into the 
soul, and the love of Christ draws hearts together in a blessed 
unity.” 

2. “Now, having washed the disciples’ feet. He said, ‘I have 
given you an example, that ye should do as I have done to you.’ 
. . , ‘Verily, verily, I say unto you. The servant is not greater 
than his lord; neither he that is sent greater than he that sent 
him. If ye know these things, happy are ye if ye do them.’ 
There is in man a disposition to esteem himself more highly 
than his brother, to work for self, to seek the highest place; and 
often this results in evil surmisings and bitterness of spirit. The 


353 



ordinance preceding the Lord’s supper, is to clear away these 
misunderstandings, to bring man out of his selfishness, down from 
his stilts of self-exaltation, to the humility of heart that will 
lead him to serve his brother.” 

3. “The whole life of Christ had been a life of unselfish 
service. ^Not to be ministered unto, but to minister,’ had been 


*‘l have g-iven you an example, that ye should do as I have done to you.” 

the lesson of His every act. But not yet had the disciples learned 
the lesson. At this last Passover supper, Jesus repeated His 
teaching by an illustration that impressed it forever on their 
minds and hearts. . . . 

“This ordinance is Christ’s appointed preparation for the 
sacramental service. While pride, variance, and strife for su¬ 
premacy are cherished, the heart can not enter into fellowship 
23 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 





354 


with Christ. We are not prepared to receive the communion of 
His body and His blood. Therefore it was that Jesus appointed 
the memorial of His humiliation to be first observed. 

“To those who receive the spirit of this service, it can never 
become a mere ceremonial. Its constant lesson will be, ‘By love 
serve one another.’ . . . 

4. “Jesus, the served of all, came to be the servant of all. 
And because He ministered to all. He will again be served and 
honored by all. And those who would partake of His divine at¬ 
tributes, and share with Him the joy of seeing souls redeemed, 
must follow His example of unselfish ministry. 

“All this was comprehended in the words of Jesus, ‘I have 
given you an example, that ye should do as I have done to you.’ 
This was the intent of the service He established. And He says, 
‘If ye know these things,’ if you know the purpose of His lessons, 
‘happy are ye if ye do them.’ ... 

5. “Christ was standing at the point of transition between 
two economies and their two great festivals. He, the spotless 
Lamb of God, was about to present Himself as a sin offering, 
and He would thus bring to an end the system of types and cere¬ 
monies that for four thousand years had pointed to His death. 
As He ate the Passover with His disciples. He instituted in its 
place the service that was to be the memorial of His great sac¬ 
rifice. The national festival of the Jews was to pass away for¬ 
ever. The service which Christ established was to be observed 
by His followers in all lands and through all ages. 

6. “The Passover was ordained as a commemoration of the 
deliverance of Israel from Egyptian bondage. God had directed 
that, year by year, as the children should ask the meaning of 
this ordinance, the history should be repeated. Thus the wonder¬ 
ful deliverance was to be kept fresh in the minds of all. The 
ordinance of the Lord’s supper was given to commemorate the 
great deliverance wrought out as the result of the death of Christ. 
Till He shall come the second time in power and glory, this 


355 


ordinance is to be celebrated. It is the means by which His 
great work for us is to be kept fresh in our minds. . . . 

“When believers assemble to celebrate the ordinances, there 
are present messengers unseen by human eyes. . . . Heavenly 
angels also are present. These unseen visitants are present on 
every such occasion. . . . 

“None should exclude themselves from the communion because 
some who are unworthy may be present. . , . Hearts and hands 
that are unworthy may even administer the ordinance, yet Christ 
is there to minister to His children. All who come with their 
faith fixed upon Him will be greatly blessed. . . . 

7. “In partaking with His disciples of the bread and wine, 
Christ pledged Himself to them as their Redeemer. He com¬ 
mitted to them the new covenant, by which all who receive Him 
become children of God, and joint heirs with Christ. By this 
covenant every blessing that heaven could bestow for this life, 
and the life to come, was theirs. This covenant deed was to be 
ratified with the blood of Christ. And the administration of 
the sacrament was to keep before the disciples the infinite sac¬ 
rifice made for each of them individually as a part of the great 
whole of fallen humanity. . . . 

“The communion service points to Christ’s second coming. 
It was designed to keep this hope vivid in the minds of the 
disciples. ... 

“These are the things we are never to forget. . . . 

“The ordinances that point to our Lord’s humiliation and 
suffering are regarded too much as a form. They were instituted 
for a purpose. Our senses need to be quickened to lay hold of 
the mystery of godliness. It is the privilege of all to com¬ 
prehend, far more than we do, the expiatory sufferings of 
Christ. . . . 

“To the death of Christ we owe even this earthly life. The 
bread we eat is the purchase of His broken body. The water 
we drink is bought by His spilled blood. Never one, saint or 
sinner, eats his daily food, but he is nourished by the body and 


356 


the blood of Christ. The cross of Calvary is stamped on every 
loaf. It is reflected in every water spring. All this Christ has 
taught in appointing the emblems of His great sacriflce. The 
light shining from that communion service in the upper cham¬ 
ber makes sacred the provisions for our daily life. The family 
board becomes as the table of the Lord, and every meal a sac¬ 
rament.”— D. A., pp. 6Jf2-660. 


CVI. THE GREAT APOSTASY 


1. Apostasy 

. Acts 20: 28-30. 

2 Thess. 2: 1-3. 

2. The Papacy 

2 Thess. 2: 3, 4. 

2 Thess. 2: 5-7. 


Paul said that men would exalt themselves 
in the church. 

This apostasy he called a “falling away.” 


This “falling away” from the truth of the 
gospel revealed the “man of sin.” 

This “mystery of iniquity” was working in 
PauFs day. 


3. Character and Work of the Papacy 


2 Thess. 2: 4. 
Dan. 7: 25. 
Dan. 7:25; 
Rev. 13: 1, 5. 


The papacy exalts itself above God. 

It thought “to change times and laws.” 

It continued three and one half prophetic 
years, or forty-two months, or one thou¬ 
sand two hundred sixty literal years. 


Dan. 7: 25; 

Matt. 24: 21, 22; It persecuted the people of God. 

Rev. 12: 13,15. 

Rev. 12: 14-16. The true church fled “into the wilderness” 
to escape persecution. 



357 


Readings 

Revelation 12 Matt. 24: 4-22 Daniel 7 

G. C., Chaps. II, III 

Notes 

1. Matt. 24: 9, 10. “The history of the early church testi¬ 
fied to the fulfillment of the Saviour’s words. The powers of 
earth and hell arrayed themselves against Christ in the person 
of His followers. Paganism foresaw that should the gospel tri¬ 
umph, her temples and altars would be swept away; therefore 
she summoned her forces to destroy Christianity. The fires of 
persecution were kindled. . . . 

“In vain were Satan’s efforts to destroy the church of Christ 
by violence. . . . God’s workmen were slain, but His work went 
steadily forward. The gospel continued to spread, and the num¬ 
ber of its adherents to increase. . . . 

“Satan therefore laid his plans to war more successfully 
against the government of God, by planting his banner in the 
Christian church. . . . Persecution ceased, and in its stead were 
substituted the dangerous allurements of temporal prosperity 
and worldly honor. Idolaters were led to receive a part of the 
Christian faith, while they rejected other essential truths. They 
professed to accept Jesus as the Son of God, and to believe in 
His death and resurrection, but they had no conviction of sin, 
and felt no need of repentance or of a change of heart. With 
some concessions on their part, they proposed that Christians 
should make concessions, that all might unite on the platform 
of belief in Christ. 

“Now the church was in fearful peril. Prison, torture, fire, 
and sword were blessings in comparison with this. Some of the 
Christians stood firm, declaring that they could make no com¬ 
promise. . . . Under a cloak of pretended Christianity, Satan 
was insinuating himself into the church, to corrupt their faith, 
and turn their minds from the Word of truth. 


358 


“Most of the Christians at last consented to lower their stand¬ 
ard, and a union was formed between Christianity and paganism. 
Although the worshipers of idols professed to be converted, and 
united with the church, they still clung to their idolatry, only 
changing the objects of their worship to images of Jesus, and 
even of Mary and the saints. The foul leaven of idolatry, thus 
brought into the church, continued its baleful work. Unsound 
doctrines, superstitious rites, and idolatrous ceremonies were in¬ 
corporated into her faith and worship. As the followers of Christ 
united with idolaters, the Christian religion became corrupted, 
and the church lost her purity and power. There were some, 
however, who were not misled by these delusions. They still 
maintained their fidelity to the Author of truth, and worshiped 
God alone.”— G. C., pp. 39-Jf3. 

2. “The apostle Paul . . . foretold the great apostasy which 
would result in the establishment of the papal power. . . . Even 
at that early date he saw, creeping into the church, errors that 
would prepare the way for the development of the papacy. . . . 

“This compromise between paganism and Christianity resulted 
in the development of the ‘man of sin’ foretold in prophecy as 
opposing and exalting himself above God. That gigantic system 
of false religion is a masterpiece of Satan’s power,— a monu¬ 
ment of his efforts to seat himself upon the throne to rule the 
earth according to his will. . . . 

3. “To secure worldly gains and honors, the church was led 
to seek the favor and support of the great men of earth, and 
having thus rejected Christ, she was induced to yield allegiance 
to the representative of Satan,— the bishop of Rome. 

“It is one of the leading doctrines of Romanism that the 
pope is the visible head of the universal church of Christ, in¬ 
vested with supreme authority over bishops and pastors in all 
parts of the world. More than this, the pope has been given 
the very titles of Deity. He has been styled ‘Lord God the Pope,’ 
and has been declared infallible. He demands the homage of 
all men. 



359 


'‘The doctrine of papal supremacy is directly opposed to the 
teachings of the Scriptures. The pope can have no power over 
Christ’s church except by usurpation. . . . 

“In order for Satan to maintain his sway over men, and 
establish the authority of the papal usurper, he must keep them 
in ignorance of the Scriptures. The Bible would exalt God, and 
place finite men in their true position; therefore its sacred truths 
must be concealed and suppressed. This logic was adopted by 
the Roman Church. For hundreds of years the circulation of 
the Bible was prohibited. The people were forbidden to read it 
or to have it in their houses, and unprincipled priests and 
prelates interpreted its teachings to sustain their pretensions. 
Thus the pope came to be almost universally acknowledged as the 
vicegerent of God on earth, endowed with authority over church 
and state. 

4. “The detector of error having been removed, Satan worked 
according to his will. Prophecy had declared that the papacy 
was to ‘think to change times and laws.’ This work it was not 
slow to attempt. To afford converts from heathenism a sub¬ 
stitute for the worship of idols, and thus to promote their nominal 
acceptance of Christianity, the adoration of images and relics 
was gradually introduced into the Christian worship. The decree 
of a general council finally established this system of idolatry. 
To complete the sacrilegious work, Rome presumed to expunge 
from the law of God the second commandment, forbidding image 
worship, and to divide the tenth commandment, in order to 
preserve the number. 

“The spirit of concession to paganism opened the way for a 
still further disregard of Heaven’s authority. Satan, working 
through unconsecrated leaders of the church, tampered with the 
fourth commandment also, and essayed to set aside the ancient 
Sabbath, the day which God had blessed and sanctified, and in 
its stead to exalt the festival observed by the heathen as ‘the 
venerable day of the sun.’ This change was not at first attempted 
openly. In the first centuries the true Sabbath had been kept 


THE LAW OF GOD 

As Changed by the Papacy 

“He shall think himself able to change times and laws.’’ Dan. 7: 25, Douay Bible 

I 

1 am the Lord thy God. Thou shalt not have strange 
gods before Me. 

II 

Thou shalt not take the name of the Lord thy God 

in vain. 

III 

Remember that thou keep holy the Sabbath day. 

IV 

Honor thy father and thy mother. 

V 

Thou shalt not kill. 

VI 

Thou shalt not commit adultery. 

VII 

Thou shalt not steal. 

VIM 

Thou shalt not bear false witness against thy 
neighbor. 

IX 

Thou shalt not covet thy neighbor’s wife. 

X 

Thou shalt not covet thy neighbor’s goods. 




361 


by all Christians. . . . That the attention of the people might 
be called to the Sunday, it was made a festival in honor of the 
resurrection of Christ, ... 

‘Tn the early part of the fourth century, the emperor Con¬ 
stantine issued a decree making Sunday a public festival through¬ 
out the Roman Empire. The day of the sun was reverenced by 
his pagan subjects, and was honored by Christians; it was the 
emperor’s policy to unite the conflicting interests of heathenism 
and Christianity. . . . 

“Vast councils were held, from time to time, in which the 
dignitaries of the church were convened from all the world. In 
nearly every council the Sabbath which God had instituted was 
pressed down a little lower, while the Sunday was correspondingly 
exalted. Thus the pagan festival came Anally to be honored as 
a divine institution, while the Bible Sabbath was pronounced a 
relic of Judaism, and its observers were declared to be ac¬ 
cursed. . . . 

5. “In the sixth century the papacy had become firmly estab¬ 
lished. . . . Paganism had given place to the papacy. . . . 
And now began the twelve hundred sixty years of papal oppression 
foretold in the prophecies of Daniel and the Revelation. Christians 
were forced to choose either to yield their integrity and accept the 
papal ceremonies and worship, or to wear away their lives in 
dungeons, or suffer death by the rack, the fagot, or the heads¬ 
man’s ax. . . . 

6. “Persecution opened upon the faithful with greater fury 
than ever before, and the world became a vast battle held. For 
hundreds of years the church of Christ found refuge in seclu¬ 
sion and obscurity. Thus says the prophet: ‘The woman fled 
into the wilderness, where she hath a place prepared of God, 
that they should feed her there a thousand two hundred and 
threescore days.’ 

“The accession of the Roman Church to power marked the 
beginning of the Dark Ages. As her power increased, the dark¬ 
ness deepened. Faith was transferred from Christ, the true 


362 


foundation, to the pope of Rome. Instead of trusting in the Son 
of God for forgiveness of sins and for eternal salvation, the 
people looked to the pope, and to the priests and prelates to whom 
he delegated authority. They were taught that the pope was their 
earthly mediator, and that none could approach God except 
through him, and, further, that he stood in the place of God 
to them, and was therefore to be implicitly obeyed. A deviation 
from his requirements was sufficient cause for the severest pun¬ 
ishment to be visited upon the bodies and souls of the of¬ 
fenders. . . . 

“They were taught not only to look to the pope as their 
mediator, but to trust to works of their own to atone for sin. 
Long pilgrimages, acts of penance, the worship of relics, the 
erection of churches, shrines, and altars, the payment of large 
sums to the church,— these and many similar acts were enjoined 
to appease the wrath of God or to secure His favor; as if God 
were like men, to be angered at trifles, or pacified by gifts or 
acts of penance! . . . 

“The advancing centuries witnessed a constant increase of 
error in the doctrines put forth from Rome. . . . Prominent 
among these was the belief in man’s natural immortality and 
his consciousness in death. . . . Then the way was prepared 
for the introduction of still another invention of paganism, which 
Rome named purgatory, and employed to terrify the credulous 
and superstitious multitudes. . . . Still another fabrication was 
needed to enable Rome to profit by the fears and the vices of 
her adherents. This was supplied by the doctrine of indulgences. 
. . . The scriptural ordinance of the Lord’s supper had been sup¬ 
planted by ^the idolatrous sacrifice of the mass. Papal priests 
pretended, by their senseless mummery, to convert the simple 
bread and wine into the actual ‘body and blood of Christ.’ . . . 

“In the thirteenth century was established that most terrible 
of all the engines of the papacy,— the Inquisition. . . . ‘Babylon 
the great’ was ‘drunken with the blood of the saints.’ The 


363 


mangled forms of millions of martyrs cried to God for vengeance 
upon that apostate power. . . . 

“The noon of the papacy was the midnight of the world.”— 
G. C., V2). J^9-60. 


evil. THE REFORMATION 


1. The True Church 


Rev. 12: 14-16. The true church fled “into the wilderness” to 
escape persecution. 

2. The Word of God 

Rev. 11: 3, 4. The Bible was obscured and prohibited during 
the papal supremacy. 

Rev. 11: 12. The Bible has since been exalted. 

3. The Martyrs ' 


Rev. 6: 9, 10. 
Rev. 6: 11. 


The blood of the martyrs cried to God for 
vengeance. 

The good name of the martyrs was restored. 


4. Time of Persecution Shortened 

Matt. 24: 21, 22. The days of persecution were shortened for 
the sake of God’s people. 

5. A Deadly Wound 

Rev. 13: 3. The temporal power of the papacy was taken 
away. 

Rev. 13: 10. For a time the pope was in captivity. 


Readings 

Zech. 4:3-6 * G. C., Chaps. IV, VI, VII, XV 


Notes 

1. “Amid the gloom that settled upon the earth during the 
long period of papal supremacy, the light of truth could not 



364 


be wholly extinguished. In every age there were witnesses for 
God,— men who cherished faith in Christ as the only mediator 
between God and man, who held the Bible as the only rule of 
life, and who hallowed the true Sabbath. How much the world 
owes to these men, posterity will never know. They were branded 
as heretics, their motives impugned, their characters maligned, 
their writings suppressed, misrepresented, or mutilated. Yet 
they stood firm, and from age to age maintained their faith in 
its purity, as a sacred heritage for the generations to come. 

"‘The history of God’s people during the ages of darkness 
that followed upon Rome’s supremacy, is written in heaven, but 
they have little place in human records. Few traces of their 
existence can be found, except in the accusations of their per¬ 
secutors. It was the policy of Rome to obliterate every trace 
of dissent from her doctrines or decrees. Everything heretical, 
whether persons or writings, she sought to destroy. . . . 

“But of those who resisted the encroachments of the papal 
power, the Waldenses stood foremost. . . . The Waldenses were 
among the first of the peoples of Europe to obtain a trans¬ 
lation of the Holy Scriptures. Hundreds of years before the 
Reformation, they possessed the Bible in manuscript in their 
native tongue. They had the truth unadulterated, and this 
rendered them the special objects of hatred and persecution. . . . 

“Behind the lofty bulwarks of the mountains,— in all ages 
the refuge of the persecuted and oppressed,— the Waldenses 
found a hiding place. Here the light of truth was kept burning 
amid the darkness of the Middle Ages. Here, for a thousand 
years, witnesses for the truth maintained the ancient faith.” 
— G. G., vv- 61-66. 

“The persecutions visited for many centuries upon this God¬ 
fearing people were endured by them with a patience and con¬ 
stancy that honored their Redeemer. Notwithstanding the cru¬ 
sades against them, and the inhuman butchery to which they were 
subjected, they continued to send out their missionaries to scatter 
the precious truth. They were hunted to the death; yet their 


365 



blood watered the seed sown, and it failed not of yielding fruit. 
Thus the Waldenses witnessed for God, centuries before the birth 
of Luther. Scattered 
over many lands, they 
planted the seeds of the 
Reformation that began 
in the time of Wycliffe, 
grew broad and deep in 
the days of Luther, and 
is to be carried forward 
to the close of time by 
those who also are will¬ 
ing to suffer all things 
for ‘the word of God, and 
for the testimony of 
Jesus Christ.’ ”— G. C., 
p, 78. 

2. So bitter had been 
the war waged upon the 
Bible, that at times there 
were very few copies in 
existence; “but God had 
not suffered His word to 
be wholly destroyed. Its 
truths were not to be 
forever hidden. He could 
as easily unchain the 
words of life as He could 

open prison doors and reading from the 

unbolt iron gates to set chained Bible 

His servants free. 

“In the different countries of Europe, men were moved by the 
Spirit of God to search for the truth as for hid treasures. Provi¬ 
dentially guided to the Holy Scriptures, they studied the sacred 
pages with intense interest. They were willing to accept the 




366 


light, at any cost to themselves. Though they did not see all 
things clearly, they were enabled to perceive many long buried 
truths. As Heaven-sent messengers they went forth rending 
asunder the chains of error and superstition, and calling upon 
those who had been so long enslaved, to arise and assert their 
liberty. 

“Except among the Waldenses, the word of God had for ages 
been locked up in languages known only to the learned; but the 
time had come for the Scriptures to be translated, and given to 
the people of different lands in their native tongue. The world 
had passed its midnight. The hours of darkness were wearing 
away, and in many lands appeared tokens of the coming dawn. 

“In the fourteenth century arose in England the ‘morning 
star of the Reformation.’ John Wycliffe was the herald of re¬ 
form, not for England alone, but for all Christendom. The great 
protest against Rome which it was permitted him to utter was 
never to be silenced. That protest opened the struggle which was 
to result in the emancipation of individuals, of churches, and of 
nations.”— G. C., pp. 79, 80. 

“He lived to place in the hands of his countrymen the most 
powerful of all weapons against Rome; to give them the Bible, 
the Heaven-appointed agent to liberate, enlighten, and evangelize 
the people. . . . At last the work was completed,— the first 
English translation of the Bible ever made [1382].”— G. C., p. 88. 

“Foremost among those who were called to lead the church 
from the darkness of popery into the light of a purer faith, 
stood Martin Luther. Zealous, ardent, and devoted, knowing no 
fear but the fear of God, and acknowledging no foundation for 
religious faith but the Holy Scriptures, Luther was the man 
for his time; through him, God accomplished a great work for 
the reformation of the church and the enlightenment of the 
world.”—G. G., p. 120. 

“From the secret place of prayer came the power that shook 
the world in the Great Reformation. There, with holy calmness, 
the servants of the Lord set their feet upon the rock of His prom- 


367 


ises. . . . God did listen to the cries of His servants. He gave 
to princes and ministers grace and courage to maintain the 
truth against the rulers of the darkness of this world. . . . The 
Protestant Reformers had built on Christ, and the gates of hell 
could not prevail against them.”—G. C., p. 210, 

'‘The Reformation did not, as many suppose, end with Luther. 
It is to be continued to the close of this world’s history. Luther 
had a great work to do in reflecting to others the light which God 
had permitted to shine upon him; yet he did not receive all the 
light which was to be given to the world. From that time to this, 
new light has been continually shining upon the Scriptures, and 
new truths have been constantly unfolding.”—G. G., p. 1U8. 

“The two witnesses represent the Scriptures of the Old and 
the New Testament. Both are important testimonies to the origin 
and perpetuity of the law of God. Both are witnesses also to 
the plan of salvation. . . . During the greater part of this 
period, God’s witnesses remained in a state of obscurity. The 
papal power sought to hide from the people the Word of truth, 
and set before them false witnesses to contradict its testimony. 
When the Bible was proscribed by religious and secular authority; 
when its testimony was perverted, and every effort made that 
men and demons could invent to turn the minds of the people 
from it; when those who dared proclaim its sacred truths were 
hunted, betrayed, tortured, buried in dungeon cells, martyred for 
their faith, or compelled to flee to mountain fastnesses, and to 
dens and caves of the earth,— then the faithful witnesses prophe¬ 
sied in sackcloth. Yet they continued their testimony through¬ 
out the entire period of twelve hundred sixty years. In the dark¬ 
est times there were faithful men who loved God’s word, and 
were jealous for His honor. To these loyal servants were given 
wisdom, power, and authority to declare His truth during the 
whole of this time.”— G. G., pp. 267, 268. 

Since the period of papal supremacy, the Bible has been 
greatly exalted. “In 1804 the British and Foreign Bible Society 
was organized. This was followed by similar organizations, with 


368 


numerous branches, upon the continent of Europe. In 1816, the 
American Bible Society was founded. When the British Society 
was formed, the Bible had been printed and circulated in fifty 
tongues. It has since been translated into more than four hun¬ 
dred languages and dialects.''— G. C., p. 287. 

Since 1804 more than 341,000,000 copies of the Scriptures 
have been issued. 

3. The martyrs are represented as crying to God for venge¬ 
ance. This is in the same manner as the blood of Abel cried to 
God for vengeance. '‘They had gone down to the grave in the 
most ignominious manner. Their lives had been misrepresented, 
their reputations tarnished, their names defamed, their motives 
maligned, and their graves covered with shame and reproach. . . . 

“But the Reformation began its work. It began to be seen 
that the church was the corrupt and disreputable party, and those 
against whom it vented its rage were the good, the pure, and the 
true. The work went on among the most enlightened nations, the 
reputation of the church going down, and that of the martyrs 
coming up, until the corruptions of the papal abominations were 
fully exposed, and that huge system of iniquity stood forth before 
the world in all its naked deformity, while the martyrs were 
vindicated from all the aspersions under which that antichristian 
church had sought to bury them. . . . Then their praises were 
sung, their virtues admired, their fortitude applauded, their 
names honored, and their memories cherished. White robes 
were thus given unto every one of them."— D. R. 

4. “The persecution of the church did not continue through¬ 
out the entire period of the twelve hundred sixty years. God 
in mercy to His people cut short the time of their fiery trial. 
. . . Through the influence of the Reformation, the persecution 
was brought to an end prior to 1798." 

5. “The twelve hundred sixty years of papal supremacy be¬ 
gan in A. D. 538, and would therefore terminate in 1798. At 
that time a French army entered Rome, and made the pope a 
prisoner, and he died in exile. Though a new pope was soon 


369 


afterward elected, the papal hierarchy has never since been 
able to wield the power which it before possessed.”— G. C., pp. 
266, 267. (See Note 1, Lesson CXV.) 

The overthrow of the papacy in 1798 constitutes the “deadly" 
wound” prophesied in Rev. 13: 3. 


CVIII. THE FIRST ANGEL’S MESSAGE 


1. The Everlasting Gospel 


Rev. 14: 6. The everlasting gospel was preached. 

Rev. 14: 7. The special truth preached was the Judgment. 
2. A Book Closed 


Dan. 12 : 4, 9. 

3. A Book Open 
Rev. 10: 1,2. 
Rev. 10:8-10. 

Rev. 10: 11. 


The book of Daniel was closed till the time 
of the end. 

The book of Daniel was then opened. 

The message was sweet, but a bitter disap¬ 
pointment followed. 

Those who believe the message, must teach 
its truths again. 


Readings 

Matt. 25: 1-13 Jer. 15: 16-18 Heb. 10: 35-39 

G. C., Chaps. XVI-XX 


Notes 

1. “The wide circulation of the Bible in the early part of the 
nineteenth century, and the great light thus shed upon the world, 
was not followed by a corresponding advance in knowledge of 
revealed truth, or in experimental religion. Satan could not, as 
in former ages, keep God’s word from the people; it had been 

24 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 



370 


placed within the reach of all; but in order still to accomplish 
his object, he led many to value it but lightly. Men neglected 
to search the Scriptures, and thus they continued to accept false 
interpretations, and to cherish doctrines which had no foun¬ 
dation in the Bible.”— G. C., p, 298. 

“To prepare a people to stand in the day of God, a great work 
of reform was to be accomplished. God saw that many of His 
professed people were not building for eternity, and in His mercy 
He was about to send a message of warning to arouse them from 
their stupor, and lead them to make ready for the coming of 
the Lord. 

“This warning is brought to view in Revelation 14. Here is 
a threefold message represented as proclaimed by heavenly beings, 
and immediately followed by the coming of the Son of man To 
reap the harvest of the earth.’ The first of these warnings an¬ 
nounces the approaching Judgment. ... 

“This message is declared to be a part of the ‘everlasting 
gospel.’ The work of preaching the gospel has not been com¬ 
mitted to angels, but has been intrusted to men. Holy angels 
have been employed in directing this work, they have in charge 
the great movements for the salvation of men; but the actual 
proclamation of the gospel is performed by the servants of Christ 
upon the earth. 

“Faithful men, who were obedient to the promptings of God’s 
Spirit and the teachings of His Word, were to proclaim this 
warning to the world. They were those who had taken heed to 
the ‘sure word of prophecy.’”—G. C., pp. 311, 312. 

William Miller “was the man specially chosen of God to lead 
out in the proclamation of Christ’s second coming.” As the result 
of his earnest study of the Bible, especially of the prophecies, 
he “was led to the conclusion that the gospel dispensation was 
near its close.” 

“The prophecy which seemed most clearly to reveal the time 
of the second advent was that of Dan. 8: 14; ‘Unto two thou¬ 
sand and three hundred days; then shall the sanctuary be 


371 


cleansed/ Following his rule of making Scripture its own in¬ 
terpreter, Miller learned that a day in symbolic prophecy repre¬ 
sents a year; he saw that the period of twenty-three hundred 
prophetic days, or literal years, would extend far beyond the 
close of the Jewish dispensation, hence it could not refer to 
the sanctuary of that dispensation. Miller accepted the generally 
received view, that in the Christian age the earth is the sanc¬ 
tuary, and he therefore understood that the cleansing of the 
sanctuary foretold in Dan. 8: 14 represented the purification of 
the earth by fire at the second coming of Christ. If, then, the 
correct starting point could be found for the twenty-three hun¬ 
dred days, he concluded that the time of the second advent could 
be readily ascertained.”— G. C., pp. 32J^, 325. 

From a careful study of Dan. 9: 24-27, which is an inter¬ 
pretation and explanation of Dan. 8: 14, he learned that the 
seventy weeks (four hundred ninety years) and the twenty- 
three hundred years began at the same time, or in 457 B. C., 
the time when the decree to rebuild Jerusalem was completed. 
Consequently the twenty-three hundred years terminated in 1844 
A. D. (See Lesson XVII, “Bible Lessons,” Book Three.) 

“When he [William Miller] began to promulgate his views, 
they met with general favor, and were followed by great religious 
awakenings in different parts of the land. Soon a multitude of 
colaborers gathered around his standard, among whom may be 
mentioned such men as F. G. Brown, Charles Fitch, Josiah Litch, 
J. V. Himes, and others, who were then eminent for piety, and 
men of influence in the religious world. The period marked by 
the years 1840-1844 was one of intense activity and great progress 
in this work. A message was proclaimed to the world which bore 
every characteristic of a fulfillment of the proclamation of Rev. 
14: 6, 7. The preaching was emphatically such as might be 
called the everlasting (age-lasting) gospel. . . . 

“The persons who were engaged in this movement supposed 
it to be a fulfillment of prophecy, and claimed that they were 
giving the message of Rev. 14: 6, 7. . . . 


372 


‘‘But the general movement respecting the second advent of 
Christ, and the proclamation that ‘the hour of His judgment is 
come,’ was not confined to this hemisphere. It was world-wide. 
It fulfilled in this respect the proclamation of the angel ‘to every 
nation, and kindred, and tongue, and people.’ ”— D. R. 

2. When Daniel finished his prophecy, he was told to close 
the book and seal it till the time of the end. The time of the 
end began in 1798. Dan. 11: 35. 

3. Revelation 10 shows us an angel with a book,—“a little 
book open,” evidently the book that had been sealed,— the book 
of Daniel. 

“There are not a few now living who have in their own ex¬ 
perience met a striking fulfillment of these verses, in the joy 
with which they received the message of Christ’s second com¬ 
ing, the honeylike sweetness of the precious truths then brought 
out, and the sadness and pain that followed, when at the ap¬ 
pointed time in 1844 the Lord did not come, but a great disap¬ 
pointment did. A mistake had been made which apparently 
involved the integrity of the little book they had been eating. 
What had been so like honey to their taste, suddenly became like 
wormwood and gall. But those who had patience to endure, so 
to speak, the digesting process, soon learned that the mistake was 
only in the event, not in the time, and that what the angel had 
given them was not unto death, but to their nourishment and 
support. ... 

“John, standing as the representative of the church, here 
receives from the angel another commission. Another message 
is to go forth after the time when the first and second messages, 
as leading proclamations, ceased. In other words, we have here 
a prophecy of the third angel’s message, now, as we believe, in 
process of fulfillment. Neither will this work be done in a 
corner; for it is to go before ‘many peoples, and nations, and 
tongues, and kings.’ ”— D, R. 


373 





Urtri SCfmfa 3»-m 


IfXtktgAi&^idkU 


Dam^tB Chapin 
lytmt-a^ifys : 
ha^^Colel ; 

^» fW ^•dv^ I 
jA»/< ^ 


2 Ch^t* 5J /V 


1843 

2300 


AUa/h 


MEDIA 


! MEDi/v . 

Yliiii OCRSIA « -— ‘' 

.'V/*^-'.^.rf«’,*!%»-.v.y<.ynfc'.'.‘’ i/^¥frs* 

4r/sa.S‘' ' *^«'V--.-.x. tf sir t'OrfKjaiWirf 
6"*-,-j. J;;*r *:-, hw.V.'.'rilt -•"■«.■ 


BiFTOl 


GRF.CIA 


Arntmd^ 


VISIONS OFDANIEL& JOHN 


a/'^wt. Afieaif 

♦ftJB'f. Jrj w9i ^it>m 

GRECI/V 


/1 l^atr t< AnHocToitjwp^ffnp^ COttrit .-J-jccgeiuz; 

thf ^ tfr‘' aa 

pr/.nce >vaal»nt • 

' £~\ 7mf hf'Mw^r'hai/fmrisna^t^Bain^.'' 

.*'s;.«vV^r» lTt'.V 'V ’y^ehtpi :ap f^/tr:fsrs l iB B 

t-y^nav •v^/?w.Vj>A*7K»S'aw*//W/^ ^ 

}r: hmar. jnar 9cpg>^ Tf 

I V'/.<w.'y.-f»yf ^rtdZimHorns^ 

*mps(s. M 


^y<Jr^^yvrpf<ass^yj/0rfa'tia 

?»? c*cw««r jWVvtA*? 


^Waaa 

W^IM /w 

^.<1' 

sc r.^Mrm 

HL 


ROME 




‘/•rj/.w 


rJt^tti'ir. r-rx! >->nr 

3 I s^tyKi-tjKHfSkin^^^c' 

•'V w. 


Caw -7 ,> i 


1260 


F* r'Se? j 'itnt: 

''amrufiair^Tht^h^ aavtv-- > -fiV 

**>Mi ff <4** /v -’ ip tir '#**» 

•^t./>r -itf ifjtmfn 0^ * 

'•y frpmi >^-r** £:ir ^ .A .V '.V* 

'Tpr^.'^ytixiHtilitx, W 

caiak.‘S4ff'ffs A 

ma 0mtt <*lPyj'4*r''JV >■,♦*» -<- A 

0"3f*<s ^-min I -.■'. y- 


F>Al-»A|. ROME 

»*r«» «b; 'Ai/ 


1449 


.■9'*^3*»^'/?tMm>^ i*»- ;jC2f' 

TC* '/op^ Jma ■icmmrtyytf^ 509 ai 
.» fanjam^i/itmdmkfSaKr^fa^ ^TmmA 
tf9$ f it myif ^ rtaTTad. -n itBU M /»-'■»# ^ 

ITS ithfrt)tf>^fa^1ar4Jfr> A/j fetdrti^ W 

w^aJ.-iV-y/Wtt 7 "e/K 9 S/^* 0 ffma»tun A 

^“1798&5-5I 


3^-*<?/"ifctrAfW J^A»!^^♦- 
/sfav0» aai •»**</» 

Ap s/rt/ra fv d 
^ ‘t/! f»ot>ttoac»M 
0M ■»n(^ 

jx»ftdw9aFr ‘dS^rf9U9 /'W *j •avr^Mt^u 

aat^rs/ /i**' 

■ •/ 9 />ar*T 


, PAPAL WOME 

Ht -fraa : Sthp.'d.and^'^- 

■^•^0 I0it^ 4V9>Jtci 

*>*• Aary.'r/ vo** y«o.f 

^#.Ttf >V T^ fr>p e#n|^ 
*f-?3jeeP<* '5 f4i90sas 
ofFrAap > /,t»^mf90r;/fMhfr.ifr>’"’- md 
‘•f’0 /> Sow y.w# rarffg e^SMfFaf.‘wiat»^ 

and'fraa iaih*Afrri0f7/Fit/:.‘^A>’9t^/ c r 
.myrfi^^Jhm gnf i**^jr/'^WwrA*»&*ni>'w .9^' 
Of 9^ 0 "Ktftgd^ saotapM /raAr*f m/f^atfiM 


/*"r 0^*14 Am&i a^A^a/z/fira 
fkr'fam^fAaz^rass *pm a 

9^ Atdfi/nac/a /»q/**r to 

tCa tz^j izftfa/ oM*fS corr>t f9 pooj h^r^offmz- 
And ihp dmam is c^rUin end the 
rtvl#rpr«totton \hareo^ is sure 


MAW O' 


'ifc^y <»** ^ ^ Oat fy Oort /S3f 


Go D s Ever lasting Kingdom 


“Write the vision, and make it plain upon tables, that he may run that 
readeth it.” (Facsimile of 1 843 chart.) 




























374 


CIX. THE SECOND ANGEL’S MESSAGE ' 

1. Babylon Fallen . ' .% 

Rev. 14: 8. Babylon is fallen, a spiritual fall. 

2. She Refused Help 

Jer. 51: 9. God would have healed Babylon, but she would 
not be healed. 

3. Cause of Her Fall 

Rev. 14:8. She has committed fornication,— an unlawful 
connection with the world. 

4. ''Come Out” 

Rev. 18: 1-4. God’s people are called to come out of her. 

5. Fate of Those Who Remain in Babylon 

2 Thess. 2: 9-12. Those who love not the truth will believe 
a lie. 

Readings 

Hosea 2: 19 2 Cor. 11:2 2 Tim. 3: 1-5 

Jer. 3: 14, 20 Rev. 17: 4-6 G. C., Chaps. XXI, XXII 

Notes 

1. ‘Tn preaching the doctrine of the second advent, William 
Miller and his associates had labored with the sole purpose of 
arousing men to a preparation for the Judgment. . . . 

“As his work tended to build up the churches, it was for a 
time regarded with favor. But as ministers and religious leaders 
decided against the advent doctrine, and desired to suppress all 
agitation of the subject, they not only opposed it from the pulpit, 
but denied their members the privilege of attending preaching 
upon the second advent, or even of speaking of their hope in 
the social meetings of the church. 

“Thus the believers found themselves in a position of great 
trial and perplexity. They loved their churches, and were loath 


875 


to separate from them; but as they saw the testimony of God’s 
word suppressed, and their right to investigate the prophecies 
denied, they felt that loyalty to God forbade them to submit. 
. . . Hence they felt themselves justified in separating from their 
former connection. In the summer of 1844 about fifty thou¬ 
sand withdrew from the churches. 

'‘About this time a marked change was apparent in most of 
the churches throughout the United States. There had been 
for many years a gradual but steadily increasing conformity to 
worldly practices and customs, and a corresponding decline in 
real spiritual life; but in that year there were evidences of a 
sudden and marked declension in nearly all the churches of the 
land. While none seemed able to suggest the cause, the fact itself 
was widely noted and commented upon, by both the press and 
the pulpit. . . . 

“The first angel’s message of Revelation 14, announcing the 
hour of God’s Judgment, and calling upon men to fear and wor¬ 
ship Him, was designed to separate the professed people of God 
from the corrupting influences of the world, and to arouse them 
to see their true condition of worldliness and backsliding. In this 
message God had sent to the church a warning, which, had it 
been accepted, would have corrected the evils that were shutting 
them away from Him. Had they received the message from 
heaven, humbling their hearts before the Lord, and seeking in 
sincerity a preparation to stand in His presence, the Spirit and 
power of God would have been manifested among them. The 
church would again have reached that blessed state of unity, 
faith, and love, which existed in apostolic days.”— G. C., pp. 
375-379. 

“The term ‘Babylon is derived from ‘Babel,’ and signifies 
confusion. It is employed in Scripture to designate the various 
forms of false or apostate religion. In Revelation 17, Babylon is 
represented as a woman,— a figure which is used in the Bible 
as the symbol of a church, a virtuous woman representing a 
pure chureh. a vile woman an apostate church 


376 


‘‘In the Bible the sacred and enduring character of the re¬ 
lation that exists between Christ and His church is represented 
by the union of marriage. ... 

“The unfaithfulness of the church to Christ in permitting her 
confidence and affection to be turned from Him, and allowing 
the love of worldly things to occupy the soul, is likened to the 
violation of the marriage vow.”—G. C., p. 381. 

“Babylon signifies the universal worldly church.”— D. R. 

4. “Babylon is said to be ‘the mother of harlots.' By her 
daughters must be symbolized churches that cling to her doc¬ 
trines and traditions and follow her example* of sacrificing the 
truth and the approval of God, in order to form an unlawful 
alliance with the world. . . . Since this message follows the 
warning of the Judgment, it must be given in the last days; 
therefore it can not refer to the Roman Church alone, for that 
church has been in a fallen condition for many centuries. Fur¬ 
thermore, in the eighteenth chapter of the Revelation, the people 
of God are called upon to come out of Babylon. . . . And in what 
religious bodies are the greater part of the followers of Christ 
now to be found? — Without doubt, in the various churches pro¬ 
fessing the Protestant faith. At the time of their rise, these 
churches took a noble stand for God and the truth, and His 
blessing was with them. Even the unbelieving world was con¬ 
strained to acknowledge the beneficent results that followed an 
acceptance of the principles of the gospel. . . . 

“What was the origin of the great apostasy? How did the 
church first depart from the simplicity of the gospel ? — By con¬ 
forming to the practices of paganism, to facilitate the acceptance 
of Christianity by the heathen. . . . Has not the same process 
been repeated in nearly every church calling itself Protestant? 
As its founders, those who possess the true spirit of reform, 
pass away, their descendants come forward and ‘new-model the 
cause.' While blindly clinging to the creed of their fathers and 
refusing to accept any truth in advance of what they saw, the 
children of the reformers depart widely from their example of 


377 


humility, self-denial, and renunciation of the world. . . . The 
great sin charged against Babylon is that she ‘made all nations 
drink of the wine of the wrath of her fornication.’ This cup 
of intoxication which she presents to the world, represents the 
false doctrines that she has accepted as the result of her unlawful 
connection with the great ones of the earth. Friendship with 
the world corrupts her faith, and in her turn she exerts a cor¬ 
rupting influence upon the world by teaching doctrines which are 
opposed to the plainest statements of Holy Writ. . . . 

“When faithful teachers expound the word of God, there arise 
men of learning, ministers professing to understand the Scrip¬ 
tures, who denounce sound doctrine as heresy, and thus turn 
away inquirers after truth. Were it not that the world is hope¬ 
lessly intoxicated with the wine of Babylon, multitudes would be 
convicted and converted by the plain, cutting truths of the word 
of God. But religious faith appears so confused and discordant, 
that the people know not what to believe as truth. The sin of 
the world’s impenitence lies at the door of the church. . . . 

“ ‘She made all nations drink.’ . . . She has not yet made 
all nations do this. . . . The Bible declares that before the 
coming of the Lord, Satan will work ‘with all power and signs 
and lying wonders, and with all deceivableness of unrighteous¬ 
ness;’ and they that ‘received not the love of the truth, that they 
might be saved,’ will be left to receive ‘strong delusion, that 
they should believe a lie.’ Not until this condition shall be 
reached, and the union of the church with the world shall be 
fully accomplished throughout Christendom, will the fall of Baby¬ 
lon be complete. The change is a progressive one, and the per¬ 
fect fulfillment of Rev. 14: 8 is yet future. 

“Notwithstanding the spiritual darkness, and alienation from 
God, that exist in the churches which constitute Babylon, the 
great body of Christ’s true followers are still to be found in their 
communion. There are many of these who have never seen the 
special truths for this time. Not a few are dissatisfied with 
their present condition, and are longing for clearer light. They 


378 


look in vain for the image of Christ in the churches with which 
they are connected. As these bodies depart farther and farther 
from the truth, and ally themselves more closely With the world, 
the difference between the two classes will widen, and it will 
finally result in separation.”— G. C., pp. 382-390. 


THE CHURCH AND THE WORLD 

The Church and the World walked far apart 
On the changing shores of time. 

The World was singing a giddy song. 

And the Church a hymn sublime. 

‘‘Come, give me your hand,” cried the merry World, 
“And walk with me this way;” 

But the good Church hid her snowy hand. 

And solemnly answered, “Nay, 

I will not give you my hand at all. 

And I will not walk with you; 

Your way is the way of eternal death. 

And your words are all untrue.” 

“Nay, walk with me but a little space,” 

Said the World, with a kindly air; 

“The road I walk is a pleasant road. 

And the sun shines always there. 

Your path is thorny and rough and rude 
While mine is broad and plain; 

My road is paved with flowers and dews. 

And yours with tears and pain. 

My path, you see, is a broad, fair one. 

And my gate is high and wide; 

There is room enough for you and for me 
To travel side by side.” 

Half shyly the Church, approached the World, 

And gave him her hand of snow; 



379 


And the World grasped it and walked along, 

Saying, in accents low: 

“Your dress is too simple to please my taste. 

I will give you pearls to wear. 

Rich velvets and silks for your graceful form. 

And diamonds to deck your hair.’' 

The Church looked down at her plain white robes, 
And then at the dazzling World, 

And blushed as she saw his handsome lip 
With a smile contemptuous curled. 

“I will change my dress for a costlier one,” 

Said the Church, with a smile of grace. 

Then the pure white garments drifted away, 

And the World gave in their place 
Beautiful satins and shining silks. 

And roses and gems and pearls; 

And over her forehead her bright hair fell. 

Crisped in a thousand curls. 

“Your house is too plain,” said the proud old World. 

“I’ll build you one like mine. 

With kitchen for feasting and parlor for play. 

And furniture never so fine.” 

So he built her a costly and beautiful house — 
Splendid it was to behold. 

Her sons and her daughters met frequently there, 
Shining in purple and gold. 

And fair and festival, frolics untold. 

Were held in the place of prayer. 

And maidens bewitching as sirens of old. 

With worldly graces rare. 

Invented the very cunningest tricks. 

Untrammeled by gospel or laws. 

To beguile and amuse and win from the World 
Some help for “the righteous cause.” 

The angel of mercy flew over the Church, 

And whispered, “I know thy sin.” 

Then the Church looked back with a sigh, and longed 
To gather her children in; 

But some were off at the midnight ball. 

And some were off at the play, 


380 


And some were drinking in gay saloons. 

So she quietly went her way. 

Then the sly World gallantly said to her, • 

"‘Your children mean no harm, 

Merely indulging in innocent sports;” 

So she leaned on his proffered arm. 

And smiled and chatted and gathered flowers. 

As she walked along with the World, 

While millions and millions of precious souls 
To the horrible pit were hurled! 

“Your preachers are all too old and plain,” 

Said the gay World with a sneer; 

“They frighten my children with dreadful tales 
Which I like them not to hear. 

They talk of Judgment, a coming Lord, 

And the horrors of endless night; 

They warn of a place that should not be 
Mentioned to ears polite. 

I will send you some of a better stamp. 

Modern and brilliant and fast. 

Who will tell them that people may live as they list. 
And go to heaven at last. 

The Father is merciful, great, and good. 

Loving, and tender, and kind; 

Do you think He would take one child to heaven. 

And leave another behind? 

Go train your teachers up to the times; 

Adopt the stylish way. 

We all want entertainment fine. 

And only that will pay.” 

So she called for pleasing and gay divines. 

Gifted, and great, and learned. 

And the plain old men that preached the cross 
Were out of her pulpits turned. 

Then Mammon came in and supported the Church, 
Renting a prominent pew; 

And preaching and singing and floral display 
Proclaimed a period new. 

“You give too much to the poor,” said the World, 
“Far more than you ought to do. 


381 


Though the poor need shelter, food, and clothes, 
Why need it trouble you? 

And afar to the heathen in foreign lands 
Your thoughts need never to roam. 

The Father of Mercies will care for them. 

‘Charity begins at home.' 

Go take your money and buy rich robes. 

And horses, and carriages fine. 

And pearls and jewels and dainty food. 

And the rarest and costliest wine. 

My children — they dote on all such things; 

And if you their love would win. 

You must do as they do, and walk in the ways 
That they are walking in." 

Then the Church her purse string tightly held. 

And gracefully lowered her head. 

And simpered: “Fve given too much away. 

I will do so, sir, as you have said." 

So the poor were turned from her doors in scorn. 
And she heard not the orphan's cry; 

And she drew her beautiful robes aside 
As the widows went weeping by. 

Her mission treasurers beggarly plead. 

And Jesus' commands were in vain. 

While half the millions for whom He died 
Had never heard His name. 

And they of the Church and they of the World 
Walked closely hand and heart; 

And none but the Master, who knoweth all. 

Could tell the two apart. 

Then the Church sat down at her ease, and said: 

“I am rich, and in goods increased. 

I have need of nothing, and naught to do 
But to laugh and dance and feast." 

And the sly World heard her, and laughed within, 
And mockingly said aside, 

“The Church has fallen, the beautiful Church, 

And her shame is her boast and pride." 

Thus her witnessing power, alas! was lost. 

And the perilous times came in — 



382 


The times of the end, so oft foretold, 

Of form and pleasure and sin. 

Then the angel drew near the mercy seat. 

And whispered in sighs her name; 

And angels their anthems of rapture hushed. 

And covered their heads with shame. 

And a voice came down from the hush of heaven, 
From Him that sat on the throne: 

'T know thy works, and how thou hast said, 

T am rich,’ and hast not known 

That thou art poor, and naked, and blind. 

And wretched art thou indeed; 

Thou hast turned from the truth to error’s way, 

And knowest not thy need. 

Thou hast ceased to watch for that blessed hope. 

And hast fallen from zeal and grace; 

So now, alas! I must cast thee out. 

And blot thy name from its place.” 

— Matilda C. Edwards. 


CX. THE THIRD ANGEL’S MESSAGE 

1. The Beast and His Image 

Rev. 14: 9. A warning is given against the worship of the 
beast and his image. 

2. The Wrath of God 

Rev. 14: 10,11. The wrath of God will be poured on those 
who worship the beast and his image or 
receive the mark of his name. 

3. The Beast 

Rev. 13: 1-10. The beast represents the papacy. 



383 


4. The Beast That Makes an Imo.ge 


Rev. 13: 11, 12. 
Rev. 13: 14, 15. 
Rev. 13: 16, 17. 
Rev. 13: 13, 14. 


The power represented by “another beast’' 
causes all to worship the papacy. 

This power causes an image to be made to 
the beast. 

This power causes all to receive a mark in 
the forehead or in the hand. 

This power works miracles to deceive the 
people. 


Readings 

Revelation 15; 16; 19: 19, 20 G. C., Chap. XXV 


Notes 

1. The first angel, in his message, called upon all “them 
that dwell on the earth” to worship God, the Creator. The third 
angel’s message is a warning against the worship of the beast 
and his image. 

2. This is an awful warning, the most fearful in all the Bible; 
for the wrath of God that is to be poured on those who engage in 
the worship of another than God will be “without mixture,”— 
that is, without mercy. 

3. We have already learned that the beast represents the 
papacy, the power that continued forty and two months, or 
twelve hundred sixty years, from 538 to 1798, when its temporal 
power was taken away. We read, however, that “his deadly 
wound was healed.” This part of the prophecy is not yet ful¬ 
filled; but it will be, for God’s word can not fail. We must ex¬ 
pect that the papacy will again have power over the nations of 
the world. 

4. “And I beheld another beast coming up out of the earth.” 
This beast represents the United States of America. We believe 
this to be the case, for the following reasons:— 

(a) The great kingdoms that Daniel saw came up out of the 
sea when the “four winds of heaven strove upon the great sea.” 


384 


The sea represents “peoples, and multitudes, and nations, and 
tongues.” Rev. 17: 15. Winds are a symbol of strife. The four 
great universal kingdoms came into power by war,— conquest and 
revolutions among the nations of the world. But the beast with 
lamblike horns came up “out of the earth.” Its manner of coming 
up was the opposite of that of old-world powers. This is true 
of the United States. A few people at a time came to America, 
usually to escape from persecution. Gradually the country became 
populated, and quietly grew into a nation. As one has said. “Like 
a silent seed we grew into empire.” 

(h) This power is represented as “coming up” about the 
time the papacy was going into captivity, or in 1798. It was 
about this time that the United States was recognized as one 
of the nations of the world. 

(c) It “had two horns like a lamb.” There were no crowns 
upon these horns, as upon the horns of beasts representing mon¬ 
archies. Thus is symbolized a republican form of government. 
It says to the people that they should make an image. This shows 
that it is a government in which the people make the laws. 
“Horns like a lamb” indicate youth and gentleness, and fitly repre¬ 
sent the United States in its early history. The constitution of 
this country guarantees civil and religious liberty to all. Re¬ 
publicanism and Protestantism are “the foundation principles of 
the nation. These principles are the secret of its power and 
prosperity.” 

“The beast with lamblike horns ‘spake as a dragon.’ . . . 
The lamblike horns and dragon voice of the symbol point to a 
striking contradiction between the professions and the practice 
of the nation thus represented. . . . The prediction that it 

will speak ‘as a dragon’ and exercise ‘all the power of the first 
beast,’ plainly foretells a development of the spirit of intol¬ 
erance and persecution that was manifested by the nations repre¬ 
sented by the dragon [paganism] and the leopardlike beast 
[papacy]. And the statement that the beast with two horns 
‘causeth the earth and them which dwell therein to worship the 


401 


venture to enter the forbidden path are gradually and uncon¬ 
sciously led on until they become demoralized, corrupted, and 
maddened. ... If the moral sensibilities of Christians were 
aroused upon the subject of temperance in all things, and they 
realized that the final destiny of every one depends upon the 
habits he forms, they could, by their example, help those who 
are weak in self-control, to resist the cravings of appetite. . . . 

“Tobacco is a slow, insidious poison. Its effects are more 
difficult to cleanse from the system than are those of liquor. 
It binds the victim in even stronger bands of slavery than does 
the intoxicating cup. . . . Tea, coffee, and tobacco, as well as 
alcoholic drinks, are different degrees in the scale of artificial 
stimulants.”— C. T., pp. 30-3^. 

“Intemperance is on the increase, in spite of the efforts made 
to control it. We can not be too earnest in seeking to hinder its 
progress, to raise the fallen, and shield the weak from tempta¬ 
tion. With our feeble human hands we can do but little, but we 
have an unfailing Helper. We must not forget that the arm of 
Christ can reach to the very depths of human woe and degrada¬ 
tion. He can give us help to conquer even this terrible demon 
of intemperance.”— C. T., p. 21. 

“Temperance in all things of this life is to be taught and 
practiced. Temperance in eating, drinking, sleeping, and dress¬ 
ing is one of the grand principles of the religious life.”— Test., 
Vol. 6, p. 375. 


CXIV. THE SECOND COMING OF CHRIST 

1. Pi'ophecies 

Acts 3: 18-21. All prophets prophesied of the second as well 
as of the first advent of Christ. 


26 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 



402 


2. Examples 

Jude 14, 15. Enoch prophesied the second coming of 

Christ. 

Job 19: 25-27. Job expected to see his Redeemer at His 
coming. 

Rev. 14: 14-16. John in vision saw Christ come to reap the 
harvest of the earth. 

3. Christ's Promise 


John 14: 1-3. 

4. Manner 

Acts 1: 9-11; 
Matt. 16: 27. 
Matt. 24: 26, 27. 
Rev. 1: 7. 


Christ promised that He would come again. 


Christ will come as He went to heaven, in 
bodily form, attended by the angels. 

He will not come secretly, but openly. 

When He comes, every eye shall see Him. 


5. Purpose 


John 14: 1-3; 
Matt. 24: 30, 31; 
1 Thess. 4: 15-17. 


Christ will come to take His people to in¬ 
herit the place prepared for them. 


6. Preparation 

Luke 21: 34-36; Those who expect Him should watch and 
12: 35-38. pray. 

Titus 2: 11-13. They should live soberly, righteously, and 
godly. 


7. Those Who Look for Him 


Heb. 9: 28. 

1 Thess. 5: 4, 6; 
Matt. 24: 33. 

Isa. 25: 8, 9. 

Amos 4: 12. 


To those who look for Him, He will ap¬ 
pear without sin. 

His people will know when His coming 
is near. 

His people will say, “We have waited for 
Him.’’ 

We should prepare to meet God. 


403 


Readings 

2 Peter 3: 9-14 2 Tim. 4: 8 Rev. 11: 15 

Ps. 50: 1-5 Hab. 3: 3-13 G. C., Chap. XVII 

Isa. 35:3, 4 Ps. 96:11,13 

Notes 

1. “One of the most solemn and yet most glorious truths re¬ 
vealed in the Bible is that of Christ’s second coming, to complete 
the great work of redemption. To God’s pilgrim people, so long 
left to sojourn ‘in the region and shadow of death,’ a precious, 
joy-inspiring hope is given in the promise of His appearing, who 
is ‘the resurrection and the life,’ to ‘bring home again His 
banished.’ 

“The doctrine of the second advent is the very keynote of 
the sacred Scriptures. From the day when the first pair turned 
their sorrowing steps from Eden, the children of faith have waited 
the coming of the Promised One to break the destroyer’s power 
and bring them again to the lost Paradise. 

2. “Holy men of old looked forward to the advent of the 
Messiah in glory, as the consummation of their hope. Enoch, 
only the seventh in descent from them that dwelt in Eden, he who 
for three centuries on earth walked with his God, v/as per¬ 
mitted to behold from afar the coming of the Deliverer. ‘Behold,’ 
he declared, ‘the Lord cometh with ten thousands of His saints, 
to execute judgment upon all.’ The patriarch Job in the night of 
his affliction exclaimed with unshaken trust: ‘I know that my 
Redeemer liveth, and that He shall stand at the latter day upon 
the earth: ... in my flesh shall I see God: whom I shall see 
for myself, and mine eyes shall behold, and not another.’ . . . 

3. “The coming of the Lord has been in all ages the hope 
of His true followers. The Saviour’s parting promise upon 
Olivet, that He would come again, lighted up the future for His 
disciples, filling their hearts with joy and hope that sorrow 
could not quench nor trials dim. Amid suffering and perse- 


404 


cution, 'the appearing of the great God and our Saviour Jesus 
Christ’ was the ‘blessed hope.’ ... 

“On rocky Patmos the beloved disciple hears the promise, 
‘Surely I come quickly,’ and his longing response voices the prayer 
of the church in all her pilgrimage, ‘Even so, come. Lord Jesus.’ 

4. “From the dungeon, the stake, the scaffold, where saints 
and martyrs witnessed for the truth, comes down the centuries 
the utterance of their faith and hope. Being ‘assured of His 
personal resurrection, and consequently of their own at His 
coming, for this cause,’ says one of these Christians, ‘they despised 
death, and were found to be above it.’ They were willing to go 
down to the grave, that they might ‘rise free.’ They looked for 
the ‘Lord to come from heaven in the clouds with the glory of 
His Father,’ ‘bringing to the just the times of the kingdom.’ The 
Waldenses cherished the same faith. Wycliffe looked forward to 
the Redeemer’s appearing as the hope of the church. . . . 

“ ‘The thoughts of the coming of the Lord,’ said Baxter, ‘are 
most sweet and joyful to me.’ ‘It is the work of faith and the 
character of His saints to love His appearing and to look for 
that blessed hope.’ ‘If death be the last enemy to be destroyed 
at the resurrection, we may learn how earnestly believers should 
long and pray for the second coming of Christ, when this full 
and final conquest shall be made.’ ‘This is the day that all be¬ 
lievers should long, and hope, and wait for, as being the accom¬ 
plishment of all the work of their redemption, and all the desires 
and endeavors of their souls.’ ‘Hasten, 0 Lord, this blessed day!’ 
Such was the hope of the apostolic church, of the ‘church in the 
wilderness,’ and of the Reformers.”— G. G., pp. 299-SOU. 

Christ’s second coming will be personal and visible to all. 
“The Saviour has warned His people against deception on this 
point, and has clearly foretold the manner of His second coming. 
. . . This coming there is no possibility of counterfeiting. It 
will be universally known — witnessed by the whole world.”— 
G. G., p, 625. 

5. Jesus is coming again to take His people home to Himself. 


405 


He wants them to be with Him. It was for this purpose that 
He suffered and died. He is preparing mansions for those who 
love Him. Heaven is eager for the day to come when the saints 
“shall inherit” them and “dwell therein forever.” Then the long 
separation that sin has made will be past, all the dark records 
destroyed, and the children safe in their Father’s house. 

6. The Scriptures teach that only the waiting, watching ones 
will be prepared to meet Jesus when He comes. Peter says, 
“Be diligent that ye may be found of Him in peace, without spot, 
and blameless.” 

7. When Jesus came the first time, it was as the Sin-bearer; 
but when He appears the second time. He will bring salvation to 
His people. 

“There are in the world to-day many who close their eyes to 
the evidences that Christ has given to warn men of His coming. 
They seek to quiet all apprehension, while at the same time the 
signs of the end are rapidly fulfilling, and the world is hasten¬ 
ing to the time when the Son of man shall be revealed in the 
clouds of heaven. 

“Paul teaches that it is sinful to be indifferent to the signs 
which are to precede the second coming of Christ. Those guilty 
of this neglect, he calls children of the night and of darkness. 
He encourages the vigilant and watchful with these words: ‘But 
ye, brethren, are not in darkness, that that day should overtake 
you as a thief. Ye are all the children of light, and the children 
of the day: we are not of the night, nor of darkness. Therefore 
let us not sleep, as do others; but let us watch and be sober.’” 
— A. A., p. 260. 


406 


CXV. THE SIGNS OF CHRIST’S COMING 

1. Signs in the Heavens 

Matt. 24: 29-31. Christ said that the sun and moon should 
be darkened, and the stars should fall, 
before He came. 

Matt. 24: 32-34. By these signs we know that He is near, 
‘'even at the door.” 

Mark 13: 24-26. The signs should occur during the days of 
papal supremacy, after the persecution 
ceased. 


2. Signs in the Earth 


(a) Luke 21: 25-28; 
Heb. 1: 10-12. 

(b) Joel 3: 9-14. 

(c) Isa. 2: 3, 4; 

1 Thess. 5: 3. 

(cl) James 5: 1-6. 

(e) Matt. 24:37-39. 

(f) 2 Tim. 3: 1-5, 13. 

(g) Dan. 12:4. 

(h) Matt. 24: 14. 


Distress of nations, fear, and dis¬ 
turbance of the elements. 

Great preparations for war. 

At the same time the people say. Peace 
and safety. 

Great riches acquired by dishonest 
means. 

Moral condition of the world. 

Spiritual condition of the church. 

Increase of knowledge. 

When the gospel is preached in all the 
world, “then shall the end come.” 


3. Patience of the Saints 

James 5: 7,8. The people of God must cultivate patience 
at this time. 

Rev. 14: 12. Patience and obedience to the law of God are 
their distinguishing traits. 


407 


Readings 
Isa. 13:9,10 • 

Amos 8: 9; 4: 12 
Joel 1:2-20; 2: 1,10, 
23, 30,31; 3: 16 
Matt. 24: 45-51 


Mark 13: 24-27 
Luke 21: 25-36 
Isa. 51: 6 
Hosea 6: 3 
Zech. 10: 1 


Rev. 3: 10; 6: 12,13 
Heb. 10: 35-39 
“Heralds of the Morning” 
“His Glorious Appearing” 
G. C., pp. 304-316, 603-612 


Notes 

1. Matt. 24: 29-31. The days here mentioned are the twelve 
hundred sixty prophetic days, or years, of tribulation of God’s 
people, covering the Dark Ages, and foretold in Dan. 7:25; 
11:33-35; and Rev. 12:6, 13-16. These days began in A. D. 
538, when the bishop of Rome was made, by decree of Justinian 
and by the overthrow of opposing Arian powers, “Head over 
All the Holy Churches” and “True and Effective Corrector of 
Heretics.” They continued to 1798, when Pius VI was taken 
prisoner by General Berthier, and the power of the papacy over 
the governments of Europe was broken. The tribulation, the 
active persecution, did not continue the whole period. The Lord 
shortened the tribulation for “the elect’s sake.” Two important 
things occurred to break the power of this persecution: (1) 
the increasing influence of the Reformation over Europe, enlight¬ 
ening rulers in regard to true Christianity; and (2) the opening 
of the New World to the oppressed of all nations. The rulers 
of Europe saw their best and most conscientious subjects leaving 
them for America, and saw that toleration was necessary if they 
retained them. The first ruler of influence to move in this 
respect was Maria Theresa, empress of Austria, who in 1776 
abolished torture in the hereditary states, followed by the decree 
of toleration by her son, the Emperor Joseph II, June 22, 1781. 
In 1776 the United Colonies of America were declared to be free 
and independent states; and thus was opened a refuge for the 
oppressed of all nations. “The earth helped the woman.” Rev. 
12: 16. The darkening of the sun was to occur “m those days, 
after that tribulation” (Mark 13:24), “immediately after the 


408 


tribulation” (Matt. 24:29). As the tribulation ceased about 
1776, and the days ended in 1798, we are shut up, to the brief 
period of twenty-two years for the first of these signs to occur. 
Therefore, however many darkenings of the sun may have oc¬ 
curred in the past, or may occur in the future, this prophecy is 
not affected thereby. The prophecy points to a darkening of the 
sun that must have taken place between 1776 and 1798, nearer 
to the former date than the latter. 

In fulfillment of our Lord’s prediction. May 19, 1780, oc¬ 
curred a most remarkable darkening of the sun, extending over 
the eastern portion of North America, and noted by many 
scholars and writers. It is referred to in Webster’s Unabridged 
Dictionary, which, after giving the date of the event, says, ‘The 
true cause of this remarkable phenomenon is unknown.” Cattle 
returned home, fowls went to roost, and men and women wailed 
and wept, believing the day of Judgment had come. 

The following night, although the moon was at the full, the 
darkness was so great that, in the words of one writer, “a sheet 
of white paper held within a few inches of the eye, was equally 
invisible with the blackest velvet.” At times, when the moon did 
appear, it was red as blood. See Rev. 6: 12. 

The last of this series was that of the falling of the stars, 
or meteors, more graphically described in Rev. 6: 13. This was 
fulfilled in the great meteoric shower of November 13, 1833, 
which was visible to the eye on the greater part of the earth’s 
surface. The following diagram will assist to an understanding 
of the prophecy:— 

Beginning Shortening of End of 

of Days Tribulation Days 

A.p. 538 1.260 DAYS OR YEARS OP 1798 

PERSECUTION 


1780 1833 

Darkening of Falling of 

Sun and Moon Stars 

These are specific signs to the last generation of men living 
upon the earth before Christ comes. They do not reveal the 



409 


day and hour of His coming, but they testify with threefold 
assurance that “when ye see all these things, know ye that He is 
nigh, even at the doors. Verily I say unto you. This generation 
[to which these things come as signs] shall not pass away, till 
all these things be accomplished. Heaven and earth shall pass 
away, but My words shall not pass away.” Matt. 24: 33-35, 
R. V. Christ’s coming is at the door. 

2. (a) Luke 21:25,26. “The signs here predicted consist 
of violent commotions upon earth which cause anxiety, per¬ 
plexity, and distress among nations and in the hearts of men. 
We may refer the expression, ‘the sea and the waves roaring,’ 
to unusual disturbances of the natural elements, and we have 
the most abundant evidences of its fulfillment in the storms and 
convulsions of nature that are occurring by sea and land, filling 
the heart with dread at the sight of every dark cloud that arises. 
The tidal waves, and volcanic upheavals at sea, have, in the last 
two or three decades, been marked with extraordinary violence. 
On land, cyclones and earthquakes have carried on a fearful 
work of destruction. . . . 

“But the expression referred to is probably susceptible of 
another application, in which it will be found to be as forcible 
and pertinent to the present state of affairs as in the one just 
noticed. This would be to give the term ‘sea and waves’ its 
symbolic meaning. ... In this sense the expression in question 
would indicate commotion and violent disturbance in the social 
and political world. . . . 

(6) “The times we live in are different from any that have 
ever preceded us. For some years there have been universal 
and active preparations for war, and almost universal peace. To 
secure the greatest efficiency of armed forces for defensive and 
offensive purposes, has been the prime consideration of gov¬ 
ernment, especially so as far as the old-world nations are 
concerned .”—''His Glorious Appearing ” pp. 65-68. 

(c) While the nations of the world are preparing for war, 
the people say there will be no more war, but peace and safety 


410 


for all. This false cry is so general and so marked that it is a 
sign of the end. 

{d) There never was so much money in the world as at the 
present time, but it is owned,by a very few men, who have gained 
most of it by dishonest means. The rich are growing richer all 
the time, while the poor are becoming poorer. This makes the 
poor very angry with the rich. Their hatred continually in¬ 
creases. This animosity is called the strife between labor and 
capital. The poor vow to take vengeance on the rich. The 
prophecy of James indicates that the rich will yet suffer for 
their oppression and fraud. A terrible time is coming when 
labor and capital will war with each other. 

(e) “The sins that called for vengeance upon the antedi¬ 
luvian world, exist to-day. The fear of God is banished from 
the hearts of men, and His law is treated with indifference and 
contempt. The intense worldliness of that generation is equaled 
by that of the generation now living. . . . Men are living for 
the pleasures of sense; for this world and this life alone. Ex¬ 
travagance pervades all circles of society. Integrity is sacrificed 
for luxury and display. They that make haste to be rich per¬ 
vert justice, and oppress the poor; and ‘slaves and souls of men^ 
are still bought and sold. Fraud and bribery and theft stalk 
unrebuked in high places and in low. The issues of the press 
teem with records of murder,— crimes so cold-blooded and 
causeless that it seems as tho every instinct of humanity were 
blotted out. And these atrocities have become of so common oc¬ 
currence that they hardly elicit a comment or awaken surprise. 
The spirit of anarchy is permeating all nations, and the out¬ 
breaks that from time to time excite the horror of the world are 
but indications of the pent-up fires of passion and lawlessness 
that, having once escaped control, will fill the earth with woe 
and desolation. . . . 

(/) “Before the Lawgiver shall come to punish the disobe¬ 
dient, transgressors are warned to repent, and return to their 
allegiance; but with the majority these warnings will be in vain. 


411 


Says the apostle Peter, ‘There shall come in the last days scoff¬ 
ers, walking after their own lusts, and saying. Where is the 
promise of His coming?’ . . . Jesus asked the significant ques¬ 
tion, ‘When the Son of man cometh, shall He find faith on the 
earth?’ . . . Paul warns us that we may look for wickedness 
to increase as the end draws near: ‘The Spirit speaketh ex¬ 
pressly, that in the latter times some shall depart from the 
faith, giving heed to seducing spirits, and doctrines of devils.’ 
The apostle says that ‘in the last days perilous times shall come.’ 
And he gives a startling list of sins that will be found among 
those who have a form of godliness.”— P. P., pp. 101-103. 

“There is cause for alarm in the condition of the religious 
world to-day. God’s mercy has been trifled with. The multitude 
make void the law of Jehovah, ‘teaching for doctrines the com¬ 
mandments of men.’ Infidelity prevails in many of the churches 
in our land; not infidelity in its broadest sense,— an open denial 
of the Bible,— but an infidelity that is robed in the garb of 
Christianity, while it is undermining faith in the Bible as a 
revelation from God. Fervent devotion and vital piety have 
given place to hollow formalism. . . . The state of corruption 
and apostasy that in the last days would exist in the religious 
world, was presented to the prophet John, in the vision of 
Babylon, ‘that great city, which reigneth over the kings of the 
earth.’ Before its destruction the call is to be given from 
heaven, ‘Come out of her. My people, that ye be not partakers 
of her sins, and that ye receive not of her plagues.’ As in the 
days of Noah and Lot, there must be a marked separation from 
sin and sinners.”— P. P., pp. 166, 167. 

(g) Dan. 12:4. “Bible students are quite generally agreed 
that the running to and fro spoken of in this text refers to a 
great awakening in the study of the Bible, particularly its 
prophetic portions, when the time of the end is reached. . . . 
There are some, however, who have thought that this ‘running 
to and fro’ spoken of by the prophet has an application and 
a more literal fulfillment in the great facilities for travel and 


412 


communication that have been developed within the last half 
century. ... 

{h) “God has a precious message for 'all the worldJ It is 
not a part merely that is to be reached; but all are to hear the 
welcome tidings that Jesus is coming again. How impressive, 
how abundant, how perfect are the preparations to give to all 
the good news of our Master's return! The whole world, by 
means of the railway, the steamship, the printing press, and the 
telegraph, are brought into communication as one great assembly, 
and are now hearing the message from God's own word that 
the Saviour is about to come."— H. M. 

3. “The great work of the gospel is not to close with less 
manifestation of the power of God than marked its opening. 
The prophecies which were fulfilled in the outpouring of the 
former rain at the opening of the gospel, are again to be ful¬ 
filled in the latter rain at its close."— G. C., p. 611, 


CXVL THE SEVEN LAST PLAGUES 


1. The Final Warning 

Rev. 18: 1-7. The final warning calls all of God's people out 


of Babylon. 


2. The Time of Trouble 



The time of trouble begins when probation 
' closes. 


22 : 11 . 


3. The Plagues 

Rev. 16: 1, 2. The first plague is a sore. 

Rev. 16:3. The second plague, the sea becomes as blood 
of a dead man. 

Rev. 16:4-7. The third plague, the rivers and fountains 
become as blood. 



413 


Rev. 16: 8, 9. 

Rev. 16: 10, 11. 
Rev. 16: 12-16. 

Rev. 16: 17-21. 
4. Duration 


The fourth plague, the sun is given power 
to scorch with heat. 

The fifth plague, darkness. 

The sixth plague, the water of Euphrates 
dried up. 

The seventh plague, a great hail. 


Rev. 18: 8. The plagues come in one prophetic day, or one 
literal year. 


Readings 

Amos 8: 3, 11, 12 Hab. 3: 17, 18 Jer. 30: 6, 7 

Isa. 33: 16; 41: 17 Joel 1: 10-12, 17-20 Psalms 91; 121: 5-7; 46 
G. C., Chaps. XXXVIII, XXXIX 


Notes 

1. Rev. 18: 1-7. “A terrible condition of the religious world 
is here described. With every rejection of truth, the minds of 
the people will become darker, their hearts more stubborn, until 
they are intrenched in an infidel hardihood. In defiance of 
the warnings which God has given, they will continue to trample 
upon one of the precepts of the decalogue, until they are led 
to persecute those who hold it sacred. . . . But God still has a 
people in Babylon; and before the visitation of His judgments, 
these faithful ones must be called out, that they ‘partake not of 
her sins, and receive not of her plagues.' . . . 

“Fearful is the issue to which the world is to be brought. 
The powers of earth uniting to war against the commandments 
of God, will decree that all, ‘both small and great, rich and poor, 
free and bond,' shall conform to the customs of the church by the 
observance of the false sabbath. All who refuse compliance will 
be visited with civil penalties, and it will finally be declared that 
they are deserving of death. ... As the defenders of truth 
refuse to honor the Sunday-sabbath, some of them will be thrust 
into prison, some will be exiled, some will be treated as slaves. 


414 



To human wisdom, all this now 
seems impossible; but as the 
restraining Spirit of God shall 
be withdrawn from men, and 
they shall be under the control of Satan, who 
hates the divine precepts, there will be strange 
developments. The heart can be very cruel 
when God’s fear and love are removed. 

'^As the storm approaches, a large class 
who have professed faith in the third angel’s 
message, but have not been sanctified through 
obedience to the truth, abandon their position, 
and join the ranks of the opposition. . . . 
They become the most bitter enemies of their 
former brethren.”— G. C., pp. 603-608. 

2. “When the third angel’s message closes, 
mercy no longer pleads for the guilty inhab¬ 
itants of the earth. The people of God have 
accomplished their work. . . . An angel 

returning from the earth an¬ 
nounces that his work is done; the 
final testhas 
been brought 
upon the world, , v 
and all who have 
proved them¬ 
selves loyal to the 
divine precepts 
have received 
‘the seal of the 
living God.’ Then 
Jesus ceases His 
intercession in 
the sanctuary 
above. . . . 


seven angels having the seven 


415 


'‘When He leaves the sanctuary, darkness covers the inhab¬ 
itants of the earth. . . . Satan will then plunge the inhabitants 
of the earth into one great final trouble. . . . 

“In the time of trouble, if the people of God had unconfessed 
sins to appear before them while tortured with fear and anguish, 
they would be overwhelmed; despair would cut off their faith, and 
they could not have confidence to plead with God for deliverance. 
But while they have a deep sense of their unworthiness, they have 
no concealed wrongs to reveal. Their sins have gone beforehand 
to judgment, and have been blotted out; and they can not bring 
them to remembrance.''— G. C., pp, 613-620. 

3. “When Christ ceases His intercession in the sanctuary, the 
unmingled wrath threatened against those who worship the beast 
and his image and receive his mark will be poured out. The 
plagues upon Egypt when God was about to deliver Israel, were 
similar in character to those more terrible and extensive judg¬ 
ments which are to fall upon the world just before the final 
deliverance of God's people. . . . 

“Terrible as these inflictions are, God's justice stands fully 
vindicated. ... By condemning the people of God to death, 
they have as truly incurred the guilt of their blood, as if it had 
been shed by their hands. . . . 

“These plagues are not universal, or the inhabitants of the 
earth would be wholly cut off. Yet they will be the most awful 
scourges that have ever been known to mortals. . . . 

“The people of God will not be free from suffering; but 
while persecuted and distressed, while they endure privation, 
and suffer for want of food, they will not be left to perish. That 
God who cared for Elijah, will not pass by one of His self- 
sacrificing children. He who numbers the hairs of their head, 
will care for them; and in time of famine they shall be satisfied. 
While the wicked are dying from hunger and pestilence, angels 
will shield the righteous, and supply their wants. . . . 

“Like Jacob, all are wrestling with God. Their countenances 
express their internal struggle. . . . 


416 



“He gathered them together into a place called 
in the Hebrew tongue Armageddon.” 




417 


^'Could men see with heavenly vision, they would behold com¬ 
panies of angels that excel in strength, stationed about those 
who have kept the word of Christ’s patience. With sympa¬ 
thizing tenderness, angels have witnessed their distress, and have 
heard their prayers. They are waiting the word of their Com¬ 
mander to snatch them from their peril. But they must wait yet 
a little longer. The people of God must drink of the cup, and 
be baptized with the baptism. The very delay so painful to them, 
is the best answer to their petitions. As they endeavor to wait 
trustingly for the Lord to work, they are led to exercise faith, 
hope, and patience, which have been too little exercised during 
their religious experience. Yet for the elect’s sake, the time of 
trouble will be shortened. . . . The end will come more quickly 
than men expect. . . . 

“The heavenly sentinels, faithful to their trust, continue their 
watch. Though a general decree has fixed the time when com¬ 
mandment-keepers may be put to death, their enemies will in 
some cases anticipate the decree, and, before the time specified, 
will endeavor to take their lives. But none can pass the mighty 
guardians stationed about every faithful soul. Some are assailed 
in their flight from the cities and villages, but the swords raised 
against them break and fall as powerless as a straw. Others 
are defended by angels in the form of men ^of war.”— G. C., 
pp. 627-631, 


CXVII. THE FIRST RESURRECTION 

1. The Great Earthquake 

Rev. 16: 17, 18; The voice of God says, “It is done.” There 
Joel 3: 16; will be a great earthquake. The heavens 

Rev. 6: 12, 14. will depart as a scroll. 

27 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 



2. The Partial Resurrection 



Matt. 26 : W 


There will be a partial resurrection of both 
righteous and wicked. 


3. The Laiv of God 

Ps. 50: 1-6. The law will be revealed in the heavens. 

4. The Sign 

Matt. 24: 30. The sign of the Son of man will be seen. 

5. The Wicked 

Rev. 6: 15-17. The wicked will call for the rocks and moun¬ 


tains to hide them. 


2 Thess. 2:8; The wicked will be slain by the glory of the 


Isa. 13: 9. 


Lord. 


6. The Resurrection of Righteous 

1 Thess. 4: 16; The righteous dead will be called from their 


Isa. 26: 19. 


graves. 


Rev. 20: 5, 6. This will be the first resurrection 

7. The Translation of Righteous 

1 Thess. 4: 17. The living righteous will be translated. 

8. Immortality 

1 Cor. 15: 51-55. All the righteous will be made immortal. 

2 Tim. 4:8. A crown of glory will be given to each. 

9. The Work of the Angels 

Matt. 24: 31. The angels will gather the saints. 

Readings ' 


Isa. 2: 10-21; 13: 6-9; 24; Jer. 25: 30-33 Job 38: 22, 23 

30: 29, 30; 66: 15, 16 Heb. 12: 25-27 Hab. 3: 3, 4 

G. C., Chap. XL 


Notes 

1. “The people of God — some in prison cells, some hidden 
in solitary retreats in the forests and the mountains — still plead 


419 


for divine protection. . . . With shouts of triumph, jeering, and 
imprecation, throngs of evil men are about to rush upon their 
prey, when, lo, a dense blackness, deeper than the darkness of 
the night, falls upon the earth. Then a rainbow, shining with 
the glory from the throne of God, spans the heavens, and seems 
to encircle each praying company. . . . 

“It is at midnight that God manifests His power for the de¬ 
liverance of His people. The sun appears, shining in its strength. 
Signs and wonders follow in quick succession. ... In the midst 
of the angry heavens is one clear space of indescribable glory, 
whence comes the voice of God like the sound of many waters, 
saying, Tt is done.' That voice shakes the heavens and the earth. 
There is a mighty earthquake, ‘such as was not since men were 
upon the earth, so mighty an earthquake, and so great.' The 
firmament appears to open and shut. The glory from the throne 
of God seems flashing through. . . . The whole earth heaves and 
swells like the waves of the sea. . . . Great hailstones, every 
one ‘about the weight of a talent,' are doing their work of 
destruction. The proudest cities of the earth are laid low. . . . 
Prison walls are rent asunder, and God's people, who have been 
held in bondage for their faith, are set free. 

2. “Graves are opened, and ‘many of them that sleep in the 
dust of the earth . . . awake, some to everlasting life, and some 
to shame and everlasting contempt.' All who have died in the 
faith of the third angel's message come forth from the tomb 
glorified, to hear God's covenant of peace with those who have 
kept His law. ‘They also which pierced Him,' those that mocked 
and derided Christ's dying agonies, and the most violent op- 
posers of His truth and His people, are raised to behold Him in 
His glory, and to see the honor placed upon the loyal and 
obedient. . . . 

3. “Then there appears against the sky a hand holding two 
tables of stone folded together. Says the prophet, ‘The heavens 
shall declare His righteousness: for God is Judge Himself.' 
That holy law, God's righteousness, that amid thunder and flame 


420 






There was a great earthquake, such as was not since men were upon tlie earth. 









421 


was proclaimed from Sinai as the guide of life, is now re¬ 
vealed to men as the rule of judgment. The hand opens the 
tables, and there are seen the precepts of the decalogue, traced 
as with a pen of fire. The words are so plain that all can 
read them. . . . 

“The voice of God is heard from heaven, declaring the day 
and hour of Jesus’ coming, and delivering the everlasting cove¬ 
nant to His people. . . . 

4. “Soon there appears in the east a small black cloud, about 
half the size of a man’s hand. It is the cloud which surrounds 
the Saviour, and which seems in the distance to be shrouded in 
darkness. The people of God know this to be the sign of the 
Son of man. In solemn silence they gaze upon it as it draws 
nearer the earth, becoming lighter and more glorious, until it 
is a great white cloud, its base a glory like consuming fire, and 
above it the rainbow of the covenant. Jesus rides forth as a 
mighty conqueror. ... And The armies which were in heaven 
follow Him.’ With anthems of celestial melody the holy angels, 
a vast, unnumbered throng, attend Him on His way. The 
firmament seems filled with radiant forms,—Ten thousand times 
ten thousand, and thousands of thousands.’ No human pen can 
portray the scene; no mortal mind is adequate to conceive its 
splendor. ... As the living cloud comes still nearer, every 
eye beholds the Prince of Life. . . . 

5. “Before His presence, ‘all faces are turned into paleness;’ 
upon the rejecters of God’s mercy falls the terror of eternal 
despair. . . The wicked pray to be buried beneath the rocks 
of the mountains, rather than meet the face of Him whom they 
have despised and rejected. . . . 

6. “Amid the reeling of the earth, the flash of lightning, and 
the roar of thunder, the voice of the Son of God calls forth the 
sleeping saints. He looks upon the graves of the righteous, then 
raising His hands to heaven He cries, ‘Awake, awake, awake, 
ye that sleep in the dust, and arise!’ Throughout the length and 
breadth of the earth, the dead shall hear that voice; and they 


422 


that hear shall live. And the whole earth shall ring with the 
tread of the exceeding great army of every nation, kindred, 
tongue, and people. From the prison house of death they come, 
clothed with immortal glory, crying, ‘0 death, where is thy 
sting? 0 grave, where is thy victory?’ And the living righteous 
and the risen saints unite their voices in a long, glad shout of 
victory. 

‘‘All come forth from their graves the same in stature as 
when they entered the tomb. Adam, who stands among the 
risen throng, is of lofty height and majestic form, in stature 
but little below the Son of God. He presents a marked contrast 
to the people of later generations; in this one respect is shown 
the great degeneracy of the race. But all arise with the fresh¬ 
ness and vigor of eternal youth. . . . All blemishes and de¬ 
formities are left in the grave. Restored to the tree of life 
in the long lost Eden, the redeemed will ‘grow up’ to the full 
stature of the race in its primeval glory. . . . 

7. “The living righteous are changed ‘in a moment, in the 
twinkling of an eye.’ At the voice of God they were glorified; 
now they are made immortal, and with the risen saints are 
caught up to meet their Lord in the air. Angels ‘gather to¬ 
gether the elect from the four winds, from one end of heaven 
to the other.’ Little children are borne by holy angels to their 
mothers’ arms. Friends long separated by death are united, 
nevermore to part, and with songs of gladness ascend together 
to the city of God. . . . 

8. “Before entering the city of God, the Saviour bestows 
upon His followers the emblems of victory, and invests them 
with the insignia of their royal state. .* . . Upon the heads of 
the overcomers, Jesus with His own right hand places the 
crown of glory. For each there is a crown, bearing his own 
‘new name,’ and the inscription, ‘Holiness to the Lord.’ In 
every hand are placed the victor’s palm and the shining harp. 
Then, as the commanding angels strike the note, every hand 
sweeps the harp strings with skillful touch, awakening sweet 


42B 


music in rich, melodious strains. Rapture unutterable thrills 
every heart, and each voice is raised in grateful praise: ‘Unto 
Him that loved us, and washed us from our sins in His own blood, 
and hath made us kings and priests unto God and His Father; 
to Him be glory and dominion forever and ever.’ ”— G. C., pp. 
635-6Jf6. 


CXVIII. THE MILLENNIUM 

1. The Wicked Dead 

Rev. 20:5; All the wicked are dead during the thousand 
Isa. 24: 22. years. 

2. The Desolation of the Earth 

Isa. 26:21; 24: 1,3; The earth becomes a desolate, unin- 
Jer. 25: 33; 4: 23-27. habited place. 

3. Satan Bound 

Rev. 20: 1-3; Satan and his angels will be compelled to 
Isa. 14: 15-20. remain on the desolate earth for one thou¬ 
sand years. 

4. The Judgment of the Wicked 

Rev. 20: 4, 6; The saints reign as priests with Christ 

1 Cor. 4:5; 6:2,3; for one thousand years. Judgment 
Jude 6. is given them. They will judge men 

and angels. 

Readings 

Isa. 14: 1-23 Lev. 16: 21 G. C., Chap. XLI 

Dan. 7: 22 Zech. 14: 12, 13 

Notes 

1. “At the coming of Christ the wicked are blotted from 
the face of the whole earth,— consumed with the spirit of His 
mouth, and destroyed by the brightness of His glory. Christ 



424 


takes His people to the city of God, and the earth is emptied 
of its inhabitants. ... 

2. “The whole earth appears like a desolate wilderness. The 
ruins of cities and villages destroyed by the earthquake, uprooted 
trees, ragged rocks thrown out by the sea or torn out of the 
earth itself, are scattered over its surface, while vast caverns 
mark the spot where the mountains have been rent from their 
foundations. 

3. “No\v the event takes place, foreshadowed in the last solemn 
service of the day of atonement. When the ministration in the 
holy of holies had been completed, and the sins of Israel had 
been removed from the sanctuary by virtue of the blood of 
the sin offering, then the scapegoat was presented alive before 
the Lord; and in presence of the congregation the high priest 
confessed over him ‘all the iniquities of the children of Israel, 
and all their transgressions in all their sins, putting them upon 
the head of the goat.’ In like manner, when the work of atone¬ 
ment in the heavenly sanctuary has been completed, then in the 
presence of God and heavenly angels, and the host of the re¬ 
deemed, the sins of God’s people will be placed upon Satan; he 
will be declared guilty of all the evil which he has caused them 
to commit. And as the scapegoat was sent away into a land 
not inhabited, so Satan will be banished to the desolate earth, 
an uninhabited and dreary wilderness. . .. 

“Here is to be the home of Satan with his evil angels for 
a thousand years. Limited to the earth, he will not have access 
to other worlds, to tempt and annoy those who have never fallen. 
It is in this sense that he is bound: there are none remaining, 
upon whom he can exercise his power. He is wholly cut off 
from the work of deception and ruin which for so many cen¬ 
turies has been his sole delight. . . . 

“For a thousand years, Satan will wander to and fro in the 
desolate earth, to behold the results of his rebellion against the 
law of God. During this time his sufferings are intense. Since 
his fall, his life of unceasing activity has banished reflection; but 


426 



“I saw -an angel. . . . And he laid hold on the 
dragon, that old serpent, which is the devil, and 
Satan, and bound him a thousand years.” 





426 


he is now deprived of his power, and left to contemplate the 
part which he has acted since first he rebelled against the gov¬ 
ernment of heaven, and to look forward with trembling and terror 
to the dreadful future, when he must suffer for all the evil that 
he has done, and be punished for the sins that he has caused 
to be committed. . . . 

4. '‘During the thousand years between the first and the 
second resurrection, the judgment of the wicked takes place. 
. . . In union with Christ they judge the wicked, comparing their 
acts with the statute book, the Bible, and deciding every case 
according to the deeds done in the body. Then the portion 
which the wicked must suffer is meted out, according to their 
works; and it is recorded against their names in the book of 
death. Satan also and evil angels are judged by Christ and 
His people.”— G. C., pp. 657-661. 


CXIX. THE SECOND RESURRECTION 


1. Resurrection of the Wicked 

Zech. 14: 4, 5. Christ descends upon the Mount of Olives. 

Rev. 21:2. The New Jerusalem comes down to this earth. 
Isa. 24: 22. The wicked are raised. 

Rev. 20: 7. Satan is loosed. 


2. Satan's Last Deception 

Rev. 20: 8, 9. Satan causes the wicked to think that they can 
take the city of God. 

3. Exaltation of CJunst 


Rev. 20: 11-13. 
Isa. 45: 23; 
Rom. 14: 10,11. 
Phil. 2: 9-11; 
Rev. 15: 4. 


All stand before the throne of God. 

Every knee bows to Christ. 

Every tongue confesses the justice of God. 



427 


4. Destrnction of the Wicked 

Rev. 20: 9, 10, 14, 15. Fire from heaven destroys all the 

wicked. 

Mai. 4: 1, 3. The wicked become ashes upon the 

earth. 

5. Righteous Preserved 

Rev. 20:6; The second death has no power over the 

Isa. 33: 14,15. righteous. 

Readings 
Prov. 11: 31 
Eze. 28: 18, 19 
Isa. 9:5; 34: 8 

Notes 

1. “At the close of the thousand years, Christ again returns 
to the earth. He is accompanied by the host of the redeemed, 
and attended by a retinue of angels. As He descends in terrific 
majesty. He bids the wicked dead arise to receive their doom. 
They come forth, a mighty host, numberless as the sands of 
the sea. What a contrast to those who were raised at the first 
resurrection! The righteous were clothed with immortal youth 
and beauty. The wicked bear the traces of disease and 
death. . . . 

“As the wicked went into their graves, so they come forth, 
with the same enmity to Christ, and the same spirit of re¬ 
bellion. . . . 

“Christ descends upon the Mount of Olives, whence, after 
His resurrection. He ascended, and where angels repeated the 
promise of His return. ... As the New Jerusalem, in its daz¬ 
zling splendor, comes down out of heaven, it rests upon the place 
purified and made ready to receive it, and Christ, with His people 
and the angels, enters the holy city. 

2, “Now Satan prepares for a last mighty struggle for the 
supremacy. While deprived of his power, and cut off from his 


2 Peter 3: 7-12 
Ps. 11: 6; 84: 11 


Nahum 1: 9 
G. C., Chap. XLII 


428 


work of deception, the prince of evil was miserable and de¬ 
jected; but as the wicked dead are raised, and he sees the vast 
multitudes upon his side, his hopes revive, and he determines not 
to yield the great controversy. . . . Satan consults with his 
angels, and then with these kings and conquerors and mighty 
men. They look upon the strength and numbers on their side, 
and declare that the army within the city is small in comparison 
with theirs, and that it can be overcome. They lay their plans 
to take possession of the riches and glory of the New Jerusalem. 
All immediately begin to prepare for battle. Skillful artisans 
construct implements of war. Military leaders, famed for their 
success, marshal the throngs of warlike men into companies and 
divisions. 

'‘At last, the order to advance is given, and the countless 
host moves on. . . . By command of Jesus, the gates of the New 
Jerusalem are closed, and the armies of Satan surround the city, 
and make ready for the onset. 

3. “Now Christ again appears to the view of His enemies. 
Far above the city, upon a foundation of burnished gold, is a 
throne, high and lifted up. Upon this throne sits the Son of 
God, and around Him are the subjects of His kingdom. The 
power and majesty of Christ no language can describe, no pen 
portray. The glory of the eternal Father is enshrouding His 
Son. The brightness of His presence fills the city of God, and 
flows out beyond the gates, flooding the whole earth with its 
radiance. 

“Nearest the throne are those who were once zealous in the 
cause of Satan, but who, plucked as brands from the burning, 
have followed their Saviour with deep, intense devotion. Next 
are those who perfected Christian characters in the midst of 
falsehood and infidelity, those who honored the law of God when 
the Christian world declared it void, and the millions, of all 
ages, who were martyred for their faith. And beyond is the 
'great multitude, which no man could number, of all nations, and 
kindreds, and people, and tongues, . . . before the throne, and 


429 


before the Lamb, clothed with white robes, and palms in their 
hands.’ ... 

“In the presence of the assembled inhabitants of earth and 
heaven the final coronation of the Son of God takes place. And 
now, invested with supreme majesty and power, the King of 
kings pronounces sentence upon the rebels against His gov¬ 
ernment, and executes justice upon those who have transgressed 
His law and oppressed His people. . . . 

“As soon as the books of record are opened, and the eye of 
Jesus looks upon the wicked, they are conscious of every sin 
which they have ever committed. . . . 

“Above the throne is revealed the cross; and like a panoramic 
view appear the scenes of Adam’s temptation and fall, and the 
successive steps in the great plan of redemption. . . . 

“As if entranced, the wicked have looked upon the coronation 
of the Son of God. They see in His hands the tables of the 
divine law, the statutes which they have despised and trans¬ 
gressed. They witness the outburst of wonder, rapture, and 
adoration from the saved; and as the wave of melody sweeps 
over the multitudes without the city, all with one voice exclaim, 
‘Great and marvelous are Thy works. Lord God Almighty; just 
and true are Thy ways. Thou King of saints;’ and falling pros¬ 
trate, they worship the Prince of Life. . . . 

“Satan sees that his voluntary rebellion has unfitted him for 
heaven. He has trained his powers to war against God; the 
purity, peace, and harmony of heaven would be to him supreme 
torture. His accusations against the mercy and justice of God 
are now silenced. The reproach which he has endeavored to 
cast upon Jehovah rests wholly upon himself. And now Satan 
bows down, and confesses the justice of his sentence. . . . 

“Every question of truth and error in the long-standing con¬ 
troversy has now been made plain. . . . Satan’s own works have 
condemned him. God’s wisdom. His justice, and His goodness 
stand fully vindicated. . . . 

“Before the universe has been clearly presented the great 


430 


sacrifice made by the Father and the Son in man’s behalf. The 
hour has come when Christ occupies His rightful position, and 
is glorified above principalities and powers and every name that 
is named. It was for the joy that was set before Him,— that 
He might bring many sons unto glory,— that He endured the 
cross and despised the shame. And inconceivably great as was 
the sorrow and the shame, yet greater is the joy and the glory. 
He looks upon the redeemed, renewed in His own image, every 
heart bearing the perfect impress of the divine, every face re¬ 
flecting the likeness of their King. He beholds in them the 
result of the travail of His soul, and He is satisf.ed. . . . 

4. “Fire comes down from God out of heaven. ... In 

the cleansing flames the wicked are at last destroyed, root and 

branch,— Satan the root, his followers the branches. The full 

penalty of the law has been visited; the demands of justice 

have been met; and heaven and earth, beholding, declare the 
righteousness of Jehovah. . . . 

5. “While the earth was wrapped in the fire of destruction, 
the righteous abode safely in the holy city. Upon those that 
had part in the first resurrection, the second death has no power. 
While God is to the wicked a consuming fire. He is to His people 
both a sun and a shield.”— G. G., pp. 662-673. 


CXX. THE NEW EARTH 

1. The Saints' Inheritance 

Matt. 5: 5. The meek shall inherit the earth. 

Ps. 37: 29. The righteous shall dwell therein forever. 

2. The Promise of God 

2 Peter 3: 13. God has promised to create the earth anew. 
Isa. 65: 17-19. We should rejoice in this creation. 



431 


3. The Earth Made New 

The glory of the saints’ reward can not be 
comprehended. 

The beauty and wonders of the new earth. 
All animals will be gentle in the new earth. 
No one will be sick or sad there. 

The saints will have quiet resting places. 

Nothing shall make them afraid. 

4. Occupations of the Saints 

Isa. 65: 21-23. The saints will build and plant. 

Isa. 65: 24. God will speak to them, they to Fi n. 

Isa. 54: 13. He will teach them the knowledge of God. 

5. The New Jerusalem 

Revelation 21. The New Jerusalem will be God’s dwelling 
place on the new earth. 

Rev. 22: 1, 2; The river of life and the tree of life are in 
2 : 7. the New Jerusalem. 

6. The Worship of God 

Isa. 66: 22, 23. All come to New Jerusalem to worship God on 
Sabbath, and each new moon. 

Readings 

Isa. 24: 14; 30: 26; Micah 4: 8 Rev. 7: 13-17 

45:18; 52:6; Eph. 1: 14 Ps. 87:7 

60: 18-22; 62: 3 Hab. 3: 4 G. C., Chap. XLII 

Heb. 11: 14-16 

Notes 

1. ‘The fire that consumes the wicked purifies the earth. 
Every trace of the curse is swept away. . . . One reminder 


1 Cor. 2: 9. 

Isaiah 35; 51:3; 

55:12,13. 

Isa. 11: 6-9- 
65: 25. 

Isa. 33: 24; 

65: 19. 

Isa. 32: 18; 
Micah 4: 4. 

Eze. 34: 25; 

Isa. 60: 18. 


432 


alone remains: our Redeemer will ever bear the marks of His 
crucifixion. Upon His wounded head, upon His side. His hands 
and feet, are the only traces of the cruel work that sin has 
wrought. Says the prophet, beholding Christ in His glory, ‘He 
had bright beams coming out of His side: and there was the 
hiding of His power.’ That pierced side whence flowed the crim¬ 
son stream that reconciled man to God,— there is the Saviour’s 
glory, there ‘the hiding of His power.’ . . . 

2. “ ‘0 tower of the flock, the stronghold of the daughter of 
Zion, unto thee shall it come, even the first dominion.’ The time 
has come, to which holy men have looked with longing since the 
flaming sword barred the first. pair from Eden,— the time for 
‘the redemption of the purchased possession.’ The earth orig¬ 
inally given to man as his kingdom, betrayed by him into the 
hands of Satan, and so long held by the mighty foe, has been 
brought back by the great plan of redemption. All that was 
lost by sin has been restored. . . . 

3. “Christ assured His disciples that He went to prepare man¬ 
sions for them in the Father’s house. Those who accept the 
teachings of God’s word will not be wholly ignorant concerning 
the heavenly abode. . . . Human language is inadequate to 
describe the reward of the righteous. It will be known only to 
those who behold it. No finite mind can comprehend the glory 
of the Paradise of God. 

“In the Bible the inheritance of the saved is called a country. 
There the heavenly Shepherd leads His flock to fountains of 
living waters. The tree of life yields its fruit every month, and 
the leaves of the tree are for the service, of the nations. There 
are ever flowing streams, clear as crystal, and beside them 
waving trees cast their shadows upon the paths prepared for 
the ransomed of the Lord. There the wide spreading plains swell 
into hills of beauty, and the mountains of God rear their lofty 
summits. On those peaceful plains, beside those living streams, 
God’s people, so long pilgrims and wanderers, shall find a 
home. . . . 


433 



“I John saw the holy city, New Jerusalem, coming 
down from God out of heaven.” 


28 — Bible Lessons, Book 4 





434 


“Pain can not exist in the atmosphere of heaven. There will 
be no more tears, no funeral trains, no badges of mourning.’’— 
G, C., pp. 674^-676, 

“There shall be nothing to ‘hurt nor destroy in all My holy 
mountain, saith the Lord.’ There man will be restored to his 
lost kingship, and the lower order of beings will again recognize 
his sway; the fierce will become gentle, and the timid trustful.” 
— Ed., p. 30^. 

“There the redeemed shall ‘know, even as also they are 
known.’ The loves and sympathies which God Himself has planted 
in the soul, shall there find truest and sweetest exercise. The 
pure communion with holy beings, the harmonious social life 
with the blessed angels and with the faithful ones of all ages, 
who have washed their robes and made them white in the blood 
of the Lamb, the sacred ties that bind together ‘the whole family 
in heaven and earth,’—these help to constitute the happiness of 
the redeemed.”— G. C., p. 677. 

“Every redeemed one will understand the ministry of angels 
in his own life. The angel who was his guardian from his ear¬ 
liest moment; the angel who watched his steps, and covered his 
head in the day of peril; the angel who was with him in the valley 
of the shadow of death, who marked his resting place, who was 
the first to greet him in the resurrection morning,— what will 
it be to hold converse with him, and to learn the history of 
divine interposition in the individual life, of heavenly coopera¬ 
tion in every work for humanity. 

“All the perplexities of life’s experience will then be made 
plain. Where to us have appeared only confusion and disap¬ 
pointment, broken purposes and thwarted plans, will be seen a 
grand, overruling, victorious purpose, a divine harmony.”— Ed., 
p. 305. 

4. “There, immortal minds will contemplate with never failing 
delight the wonders of creative power, the mysteries of re¬ 
deeming love. There will be no cruel, deceiving foe to tempt to 
forgetfulness of God. Every faculty will be developed, every 


435 


Capacity increased. The acquirement of knowledge will not weary 
the mind or exhaust the energies. There the grandest enter¬ 
prises may be carried forward, the loftiest aspirations reached, 
the highest ambitions realized; and still there will arise new 
heights to surmount, new wonders to admire, new truths to com¬ 
prehend, fresh objects to call forth the powers of mind and soul 
and body. 

“All the treasures of the universe will be open to the study 
of God’s redeemed. Unfettered by mortality, they wing their 
tireless flight to worlds afar,— worlds that thrilled with sorrow 
at the spectacle of human woe, and rang with songs of gladness 
at the tidings of a ransomed soul. With unutterable delight the 
children of earth enter into the joy and the wisdom of unfallen 
beings. They share the treasures of knowledge and understanding 
gained through ages upon ages in contemplation of God’s handi¬ 
work. With undimmed vision they gaze upon the glory of crea¬ 
tion,— suns and stars and systems, all in their appointed order 
circling the throne of Deity. Upon all things, from the least to 
the greatest, the Creator’s name is written, and in all are the 
riches of His power displayed. 

“And the years of eternity, as they roll, will bring richer 
and still more glorious revelations of God and of Christ. As 
knowledge is progressive, so will love, reverence, and happiness 
increase. The more men learn of God, the greater will be their 
admiration of His character. . . . 

“The great controversy is ended. Sin and sinners are no 
more. The entire universe is clean. One pulse of harmony and 
gladness beats through the vast creation. From Him who created 
all, flow life and light and gladness, throughout the realms of 
illimitable space. From the minutest atom to the greatest world, 
all things, animate and inanimate, in their unshadowed beauty 
and perfect joy, declare that God is love.’’— G. C., pp, 677, 678. 


436 


REVIEW 

1. Who is Immanuel? What does the name mean? What does 

“Jesus^’ mean? 

2. Why did Jesus come to the earth as a man to live among men? 

3. How and why was Jesus tempted? Give texts. 

4. Explain 2 Cor. 5:2; and Heb. 9: 22. 

5. Give the text that tells that the church is the body of Christ. 

6. Who is the head of the church? What is the relation of the 

members one to another? 

7. Name the chief officers of a church, their qualifications and 

duties. 

8. Name the ordinances of the church. Which admits one to 

membership in the church? 

9. Of what is baptism a memorial? Why are we to observe the 

Lord’s supper? Which ordinance teaches a lesson of 
service ? 

10. What caused the great apostasy? How many years was the 

papal power supreme? Give dates. 

11. Where was the true church during this time? What was her 

experience? Why were the days of persecution shortened? 

12. Who were God’s two witnesses during this time ? What does 

“clothed in sackcloth” mean? “And they ascended up to 
heaven in a cloud”? 

13. Repeat the message of each of the three angels. Give texts. 

14. When did the “time of the end” begin? What book was 

closed till the time of the end? 

15. Who gave the first angel’s message? What caused the bitter 

disappointment ? 

16. What is the cause of the fall of Babylon? 

17. What call is given to God’s people who are in Babylon? 

18. What power is represented by the beast? What power 

makes an image to the beast? 

19. Give three reasons for interpreting the two-horned beast of 

Revelation 13 to be the United States. 


437 


20. What is an image of the beast? What is its mark? How 

many receive it? 

21. Upon whom is the wrath of God to be poured out? 

22. By what pattern did Moses make the earthly sanctuary? 

23. What was the purpose of the daily service in the earthly 

sanctuary? Of the yearly service? 

24. When did Christ begin His work as priest in the heavenly 

sanctuary ? 

25. When will the heavenly sanctuary be cleansed? From what 

will it be cleansed? Give texts. 

26. Draw a diagram of the twenty-three hundred days, with 

notes of explanation. 

27. Quote a text describing the Judgment scene. 

28. Name the books of record. What is kept in each? 

29. What is the standard by which men are judged? Quote text. 

30. Quote a text showing with whom the Judgment begins. 

31. When will Christ fulfill the promise in Matt. 10: 32? 

32. When are sins forgiven? When are they blotted out? Quote 

texts. 

33. What sentence will Christ pronounce when the Investigative 

Judgment is finished? 

34. Name the signs of the second advent that are given in the 

heavens, and show how they have been fulfilled. 

35. Name the signs in the earth. Give texts for each. 

36. Name in order the seven last plagues. 

37. Describe in Scripture language the second coming of Christ. 

38. What does ‘‘millennium’' mean? What events mark the be¬ 

ginning and close of the millennium? 

39. Where will the saints be during the millennium? What will 

they be doing? 

40. Describe the appearance and condition of the earth during 

the millennium. 

41. Interpret these expressions: “bound him a thousand years,” 

and “Satan shall be loosed out of his prison.” 


438 


42. Arrange a Bible reading upon the subject of the new earth, 

using at least ten texts. 

43. Prove that the Sabbath will be kept in the new earth. 

44. “Affliction shall not rise up the second time.'' Explain 

Nahum 1: 9. 

Where are the texts containing these words ? — 

45. “Unto two thousand and three hundred days; then shall the 

sanctuary be cleansed." 

46. “Many of them that sleep in the dust of the earth shall awake, 

some to everlasting life, and some to shame and everlasting 
contempt." 

47. “This is the first resurrection." 

48. “We also should walk in newness of life." 

49. “That day shall not come, except there come a falling away 

first." 

50. “Here is the patience of the saints: here are they that keep 

the commandments of God, and the faith of Jesus." 




g Bible and Nature Series of Textbooks ■ 

B for Home and Church School ■ 



Samp/e of sithouette scissors cutting made from Outiine 
Patterns. Fuii sixe pattern card 5x7 inches. 

In harmony with the actions of the Educational Depart¬ 
ment, the Pacific Press Publishing Association has published 
beautiful Bible stories, easy reading lessons, and simple sing¬ 
ing lessons, for the first three grades, or school years, as 
follows: 

Helps and Textbooks Grades One to Three 


1. ^Memory Verse Outline Patterns. — To assist the par¬ 
ent and the teacher in impressing the “Oral Bible Lessons 



439 


or Talks” outlined by the Educational Department for use 
in these grades (“School Manual,” pages 172-194), a series 
of Outline Patterns has been prepared to illustrate the more 
important memory verses in the series. These pattern out¬ 
lines have been drawn by Delpha Sheffer Miller, a normal 
teacher of wide and successful experience. From them the 
child can trace or cut on white or colored paper such pic¬ 
tures as will indelibly impress the memory verse on its mind. 

There are 32 patterns for each of the first three grades — 
96 in all. The patterns for each grade are wrapped sepa¬ 
rately. Price 25 cents each, or 75 cents for the three. 

2. Keaders. —“True Education Readers” 1, 2, and 3 put 
the child in possession of a complete key to English reading, 
and also familiarize him with the 
most important Bible truths. Three 
times over they tell of God’s plan for 
the earth in the beginning, the suc¬ 
cessive steps in the work of creation, 
something about each of these steps, 
a sketch of certain selected Bible child 
biographies, including the life of the 
perfect Child, Jesus, His work, His 
sacrifice, the plan of salvation fin¬ 


ished, and the new earth. 

Book 1 contains 204 pages.60c 

Book 2 contains 256 pages.60c 

Book 3 contains 304 pages.75c 


3. Sight-Singing.— Music is an important factor in the 
child’s school life; and “Standard Graded Course of Sight- 
Singing,” by Prof. Gerard Gerritsen, formerly of Walla 















Walla College, and later of Berrien Springs, Michigan, pre¬ 
sents methods which recommend themselves to educators gen¬ 
erally. The children are taught to connect the value of 
various tones with some manual sign, as “doh,^’ the firm 
strong tone, “by the closed hand;^’ “soh,’^ the bright tone. 



DOH 


SOH 

The Bright Tone. 


The Firm Strong Tone. 


“by the open hand,” etc. This adds materially to the in¬ 
terest children take in their music work. 

Ruled examination blanks are inserted at the close of 
each section, for the convenience of students and teachers. 
As these blanks are perforated, they may be easily removed 
for correction. Note Books Nos. 1 and 2, combined in one 
paper-covered volume, price 35 cents; No. 3, paper covers, 
25 cents. The manual or handbook for teachers covers the 
entire series. Contains 202 pages. Price in cloth covers, $1.00. 

Textbooks for Grades Four to Seven 

1. Readers. —“True Education Readers” 4,. 5, 6, and,7 
continue the reader work of grades one to three. A special 
feature of these readers is that they provide in a natural 
way all the work in English needed for the first six grades 
This study of closely related subjects — such as reading, 
language, spelling, etc.— in their natural setting, tends to 


lilllllllllllllillilllliluillllllllllllilllllllilllllllllli 


441 




reduce the confusion in the mind of the pupil, and insures 
more efficient work. Prices are as follows: 


Book 4, 348 pages .$1.00 

Book 5, 353 pages.90 

Book 6, 442 pages . 1.00 

Book 7, 392 pages . 1.00 


m 2. Bible Lesson Textbooks. —“Bible Lessons,” Books 1, 
I 2, 3, and 4, develop and adapt to the growing comprehension 
H of the child the oral Bible studies of the preceding three years. 

Carefully and reverently has Mrs. Alma 
E. McKibbin, a teacher of long experi¬ 
ence and marked ability, worked out, 
question by question, and lesson by les¬ 
son, the books comprising this series. 
During the years these lessons were de¬ 
veloping, carbon and neostyled copies 
were passed around and successfully used 
by hundreds of teachers in classroom 
work. Later, temporary editions were printed. They proved 
so satisfactory that the author was encouraged to revise and 
rewrite the entire series for permanent use. 

Book 1, Creation to death of Joshua.$0.90 

Book 2, Judges to Esther and the Restoration .90 
Book 3, the time between the Old and the New 
Testament, including sketch of John the . 
Baptist, and the life and crucifixion of 

Christ . 1.20 

Book 4, Acts of the Apostles and Bible Doc¬ 
trines . 1.20 



Bllllillllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllt .. 


















3. Elementary Science, or Bible Nature Series/^— 
A natural development of geography, physiology, and the 
other elementary sciences, with the Bible and nature as a 
basis of study. 

It presents in three graded texts ele¬ 
mentary studies in nature, including in¬ 
troductory lessons in geography, and les¬ 
sons in elementary physiology. Following 
the lessons in nature work, the student is 
prepared for an introduction to the ele¬ 
mentary sciences as separate studies. Hav¬ 
ing been introduced in the “Bible Nature 
Series to the subject of geography, and having mastered 
all of that subject usually included in a primary geography, 
he should now be able to complete an advanced geography in 
the seventh year. Likewise, a text in physiology is now 
needed, and may be completed in the eighth year. 

Book 1, 322 pages, 223 engravings, 6 colored maps $1.20 

Book 2, 432 pages, fully illustrated. 1.35 

Book 3, in preparation. 

“Bible Nature Note Books. —To accompany the 
“Bible Nature Series,” Note Books have been prepared for 
the pupil’s use. They contain 112 pages each, and are bound 
in heavy paper covers. Price 40 cen,ts each. A series of help¬ 
ful outline maps is furnished free with each book. 



All above prices 10 per cent higher in Canada 

Address 

Pacific Press Publishing Association 

Mountain View, California 

Portland, Oregon Calgary, Alberta, Canada Kansas City, Mo. 







I ■«' 






7 ^ • .V & ^ 

'^. 1' % ,4 


'■ J^- 


**s 





« *• 


\' \r *"< 

.“?. * - j* 

v: .; ' - *: ’ 

SV.-,*.,.*---Vi 


? ‘ 


« # 


■7 


•( 




• ' R',— 


.v^V-i- 

’_' •' 

"■V 




' 4^ * * ■•< 

v".> VV 


V. 



p’* ■. •f' >“ 

-■-s- ; 




r>r. 

-*«•. 


lip 


11 



«-> 


'K 

*'4 ^•' /* ^ 


f 'i 

ar. 


Ia _ • - ** 



*•* • »*■• 


.s3- 

••fc 4’ ' ’■ 



$ 


1 ^ 


^ - 

• 4 






i#.-r5 



• 4 - 





^R' 

1 -,. . #i- M 

'^4 > • ■ L V V 

T» * « - • • 

.*•*'*•« * . • . . . • t >"4 • 


'■ j- ■■. -,.' :;^j.‘!j 3 '., ■ -liwiK 

■«».; :■? ■■*'.. ''■'j 




. 


•1 


>• ■* 


1 ^ 


/• 

>•1 

I’V 


t. 






•v 




V' iV 


- >1 IL >. - 


■ * ' ‘ '9- • * 

■ -J ^ - * ■ 








g • til' . ya 

;.• > ,.r . J-i'* ? ^ .... 

t" . ■’■ -%* 'ji^' . ,. . •'■' 

4» . - I *' . 





a- 


.1' 




./•' Vl' 'A >/ ■ r ' 

^ * ■• . »* V’ 




.X- 


: ^ 



• ji “* 


rv' 




* *1 




7 . V . * • 4 ■ . m 

* */ >**. « •» *^ 


‘fA' ■ 


"4 




- • 





. paTiJl ■-. 





* *f 


m V:V ^ ' ' 

^ J ' > I- ,% •^yiii 








<’' **' /*••■>.T.^-*' -- - *.-* 






I'j.. 


v- ^ ■ 



-i 


'B V 


■ , 1 ’ ■/ v:“' 

> ■ V -' >■■ '■ t;’- 



V * 

' 4 k*.* V; *• 




. hi 


^ J4 * ■ t'4 fc 1 . ,.V - * 

• ' r * ^' V » ■’’-'* i’ ' j * V ' ■'*'* 

*- ** -y ^ 

*< 







!:•' 'v>v. 


K 





/. . 






I * 


•I 


>-■ 


: ‘.V-v' 
. >* 

V ^•>. I' V. 


r€ 



















€ 


I 


x.r-- 



P ’•'’ *V - '* '- i . ■ ! •-. * — 



< ‘A 




^ V 




• .•■'•A 


,*cr‘£* *»r*^ r^v * 




• il 


i - / 


-w. *- 










P v ';>vx^^ 5 f »:*/ • . ;j 


•'.*> -*1 JCTCJaf'' -' * .• - '-’jt. ■\'^ 

^' '' .-r:;', ^ •; • 

:■ • *^ ^ *. * •■•' ^ T^v ■*. r- -v V - • - - . ^ ® 





■<*. - 1 • 







. •> 


' < 




M. 




A*4p. 







U -,^ Cv. * • • 

‘ ■ • ■■* ■ '- ■ /. ■w’- 




® *4'*v ,. I"* 

*.r .•-• ■: ir 

T7* _ ^V ^ 


T* 1 '-*' 



wfe?' 





..-V'■»'j'i ■.■*^ '-3^' 




•'* #SSi#!ii" ^:. 


. • V *,_••■*• 





>•:" r . 

. . . r . ’ 



* I X 



t 


dec 18 1912 







A’ 









